Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Report (27)
i 6 s .2 l te--5'v /g2 7�-,/y I mml ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY ISW 130TH AVENUE AND BULL MOUNTAIN ROAD TIGARD, OREGON 97224 I VOLUME2of2 DIVISIONS 15 - 16 I APPENDICES TIGARD - TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J IADMINISTRATION 6960 SW SANDBURG STREET ITIGARD, OREGON 97223-8039 1 't �,. I 2 EEA ARCHITECTS, PC ";f '`A 1230 S.W. FIRST AVNUE, SUITE 300 �C,,.'GREGORY N. WEILER � a PORTLAND, OREGON 97204 0 I (503) 223-6963 • POR ND,O EGON 1 1905 �.` ,' I 1*0 V-V ROBINSON CONSTRUCTION CO. I 21360 NW AMBERWOOD DRIVE HILLSBORO, OR 97124 I (503) 645-5357 I i 0 1 I MPROJECT NO.: 0208.00 DATE: SEPTEMBER 2004 orrIcE COPY I I I ICERTIFICATIONS PROJECT: IFacility Capital Improvement (Bond) Program -2003 ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY Construction Management I General Contractor Set PROJECT ADDRESS: CIVIL ENGINEER: i SW 130th Avenue and Bull Mountain Road Westlake Consultants, Inc. Tigard, Oregon 97224 Pacific Corporate Center I 15115 S.W. Sequoia Parkway, OWNER: Suite 150 Tigard, OR 97224 I Tigard-Tualatin School District No. 23J Phone: 503-684-0652 Fax: 503-624-0157 6960 SW Sandburg St. Project Engineer: Pat Tortora I Tigard, Oregon 97223 e-mail: Capital Projects Director: Stephen ptortora@westlakeconsultants.com Poage Phone: 503-431-4003 LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT Fax : 503-431-4047 e-mail: spoage@ttsd.k12.or.us Beighley&Associates, Inc. 12840 NW Cornell Road OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE: Portland, Oregon 97229 Phone: 503-643-4796 Cornerstone Construction Fax: 503-643-4798 11 Management, Inc. Principal: Hal Beighley 5410 SW Macadam Avenue, Project Manager: Anne Miller Suite 250 e-mail: anne@bai-la.org I Portland, Oregon 97201 Phone: 503-295-0108 Fax: 503-295-1896 STRUCTURAL ENGINEER: Project Manager: Craig Markus Walker I Diloreto I Younie, Inc. 1 e-mail: craigm@comerstonemgi.com 6443 SW Beaverton-Hillsdale Hwy Suite 210 ARCHITECT: Portland, Oregon 97221 I EEA Architects P.C. Phone: 503-203-8111 503-203-8122 1230 SW First Avenue, Suite 300 Project Engineer: Doug Paola I Portland, Oregon 97204 e-mail: doug@wdyi.com Phone: 503-223-6963 Fax: 503-294-0827 Principal: Richard Eslick Project Architect: Sean Scott e-mail: sscott@eeaarchitects.com I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 00005-1 iii 111 0208.00 CERTIFICATIONS I MECHANICAL ENGINEER ACOUSTICAL ENGINEER Daly-Standlee Acoustical R&W Engineering, Inc. 4800 SW Griffith Drive, Suite 216 9400 SW Beaverton Hillsdale Hwy Portland, Oregon 97006 Suite 250 Project Engineer. Kerrie - Beaverton, Oregon 97005 Standlee Phone: 503-292-6000 Phone: 503-646-4420 Fax: 503-292-1422 Fax: 503-646-3345 Principal: Ed Carlisle Project Engineer. Mark Jones It e-mail: mjones@rweng.com GENERAL CONTRACTOR: Robinson Construction Co. PLUMBING ENGINEER 21360 NW Amberwood Drive Hillsboro, Oregon 97124 R&W Engineering, Inc. Project Manager: Ricardo Becerril 9400 SW Beaverton Hillsdale Hwy Phone: 503-643-8531 Suite 250 Fax: 503-643-5357 Beaverton, Oregon 97005 e-mail: ricardob@robcon.com Phone: 503-292-6000 Fax: 503-292-1422 111 Principal: Ed Carlisle Project Engineer. Gary Ryberg e-mail: gryberg@rweng.com ELECTRICAL ENGINEER R&W Engineering, Inc. 9400 SW Beaverton Hillsdale Hwy Suite 250 Beaverton, Oregon 97005 Phone: 503-292-6000 Fax: 503-292-1422 Principal: Ed Carlisle Project Engineer: Doug Shaw e-mail: mjones@dshaw.com KITCHEN Romano Gatland Associates, Inc. 2305 SE 80th Avenue Portland, Oregon 97216 Project Manager: Ray Soucie Phone: 503-236-8586 Fax: 503-223-4130 e-mail: soucie@romanogatland.com 111 I TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 00005-2 SEPTEMBER 2004 CERTIFICATIONS 0208.00 I I I INDEX I BIDDING REQUIREMENTS—PROVIDED SEPARATELY 1 VOLUME 1 DIVISIONS 0-14 III Division 0 INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION (BID PACKAGE 1 &2) Project Manual Cover,Volume 1 of 2 Section 00005 Certifications I Section 00010 Index Section 00100 Invitation to Bid Section 00200 Instructions to Bidders 111 Section 00300 Bid Form &Affidavit Section 00400 Information Available to Bidders Section 00700 General Conditions Section 00800 Supplementary Conditions I Section 00830 Wage Rates Division 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS(BID PACKAGE 1 &2) I Section 01000 General Requirements Section 01025 Unit Prices Section 01050 Project Layout Section 01060 Regulatory Requirements 1 Section 01075 Definitions Section 01090 Reference Standards Section 01313 Certificate of Compliance Section 01314 Certification of No Hazardous Materials I Section 01340 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples Section 01400 Testing Laboratory Services Coordination Section 01600 Materials and Equipment III Section 01640 Approval for Substitution and Product Option Section 01650 Cleaning Section 01660 Selective Demolition Section 01700 Contract Closeout IDivision 2 SITEWORK(BID PACKAGE 1) Section 02150 Erosion Control I Section 02230 Site Clearing Section 02232 Rock Excavation Section 02310 Grading I Section 02322 Excavation Section 02323 Backfilling and Compacting Section 02510 Water Distribution Section 02530 Sanitary Sewerage Distribution 1 Section 02621 Section 02630 Foundation Drainage Storm Drainage Section 02741 Asphalt Paving Section 02750 Cement Concrete Paving Section 02764 Paving Joint Sealants Section 02780 Unit Pavers Section 02791 Wood Fiber Playground Cover I Section 02811 Section 02821 Underground Irrigation Chain-Link Fences and Gates SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 00010-1 1 0208.00 INDEX I Section 02870 Site Furnishings Section 02912 Soil Preparation—Turf Areas Section 02940 Trees, Plants and Groundcover Section 02950 Turf Seeded 111 Section 02970 Landscape Maintenance Division 3 CONCRETE(BID PACKAGE 1) 1 Section 03300 Concrete Division 4 MASONRY(BID PACKAGE 1) Section 04210 Brick Section 04220 Concrete Masonry Units Division 5 METALS(BID PACKAGE 1 EXCEPT 05400) Section 05120 Structural Steel Section 05210 Steel JoistsII Section 05310 Steel Decking Section 05400 Metal Studs (Bid Package 2) Section 05500 Metal Fabrications i Section 05510 Metal Stairs - 1111 Division 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS(BID PACKAGE 2) Section 06100 Rough Carpentry Section 06200 Finish Carpentry and Millwork Section 06400 Casework Division 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION (BID PACKAGE 2) Section 07170 Bentonite Waterproofing Section 07211 Rigid Insulation I Section 07213 Batt Insulation Section 07220 Roof Insulation Assembly Section 07225 Nail Base Roof Insulation Section 07311 Asphalt Shingles Section 07411 Metal Roof Panels Section 07412 Metal Panel Siding Section 07413 Metal Soffit Panels Section 07450 Cementitous Fiber Siding Section 07512 Built-up Roofing Section 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing, Gutter, and Trim Section 07720 Roof Accessories Section 07840 Firestopping Section 07920 Joint Sealants Division 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS (BID PACKAGE 2) i Section 08110 Steel Doors and Frames Section 08211 Flush Wood Doors Section 08311 Access Doors and Frames Section 08330 Self-Opening Security Grille Section 08331 Overhead Coiling Doors Section 08411 Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts Section 08520 Aluminum Windows Section 08630 Skylights Section 08710 Door Hardware Section 08800 Glazing SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 00010-2 0208.00 INDEX I iDivision 9 FINISHES(BID PACKAGE 2) I Section 09220 Stucco Section 09260 Gypsum Board Assemblies Section 09310 Ceramic Tile Section 09511 Acoustical Panel Tile I Section 09520 Section 09645 Acoustical Treatment Wood Athletic Flooring Section 09651 Resilient Flooring I Section 09680 Carpet Section 09770 Special Wall Surfaces(FRP) Section 09900 Painting I Division 10 SPECIALTIES (BID PACKAGE 2) Section 10100 Markerboards and Tackboards Section 10170 Toilet Compartments 111 Section 10350 Flagpoles Section 10440 Signage Section 10520 Fire Protection Specialties Section 10651 Operable Panel Partitions ISection 10810 Toilet and Bath Accessories . Division 11 EQUIPMENT(BID PACKAGE 2) 11 Section 11132 Audio Visual Equipment Section 11400 Food Service Equipment Section 11480 Gymnasium Equipment aDivision 12 FURNISHINGS(BID PACKAGE 2) Section 12484 Entrance Mat 1' Division 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION—Not Used I, Division 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS(BID PACKAGE 2) Section 14240 Hydraulic Elevators Section 14420 Wheelchair Lift IVOLUME 2 DIVISIONS 15—16 APPENDICES IDivision 0 INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION Project Manual Cover,Volume 2 of 2 Section 00005 Certifications I Section 00010 Index Division 15 MECHANICAL(BID PACKAGE 2) V Section 15010 General Provisions Section 15050 Basic Methods and Materials Section 15060 Pipe and Pipe Fittings I Section 15100 Valves Section 15140 Supports and Anchors Section 15240 Mechanical Equipment, Sound, Seismic and Vibration Isolation Section 15260 Mechanical Insulation ISection 15300 Fire Protection SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 00010-3 1 0208.00 INDEX 1 Section 15400 Plumbing Section 15510 Hydronic Systems Section 15770 HVAC Section 15850 Fans Section 15890 Air Distribution Section 15900 Direct Digital Control System Division 16 ELECTRICAL(BID PACKAGE 2) Section 16010 Basic Electrical Requirements Section 16109 Equipment Connections Section 16110 Raceways Section 16114 Cable Trays Section 16120 Wires and Cables Section 16130 Boxes Section 16140 Wiring Devices Section 16170 Circuit and Motor Disconnects Section 16190 Supporting Devices Section 16195 Identification Section 16420 Electrical Service Section 16450 Grounding Section 16470 Switchboards and Distribution Panelboards Section 16475 Overcurrent Protective Devices Section 16485 Contactors and Control Devices Section 16515 Interior Lighting Section 16525 Exterior Lighting Section 16620 Diesel Standby Power Generator System Section 16630 Battery Power Systems Section 16675 Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS) Section 16721 Fire Alarm Systems Section 16730 Wireless Clock System Section 16740 Telephone/Data Raceway System Section 16750 Intercommunications, Master Clock, Paging System Section 16906 Occupancy Sensors Appendices Appendix 1 —City of Tigard Process for Recording Inspections Appendix 2—Geotech Report Appendix 3—Seismic Hazard Report Drawings A1.0 COVER SHEET A1.1 CODE INFORMATION C1.0 COVER SHEET C1.1 SITE SURVEY C1.2 SITE DEMOLITION PLAN C1.3 EROSION CONTROL NOTES& DETAILS C2.0 GRADING/EROSION CONTROL PLAN—OVERALL C2.1 GRADING PLAN—NORTH C2:2 GRADING PLAN—SOUTH SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 00010-4 0208.00 INDEX I 2. - C 3 SITE UTILITIES OVERALL C2.4 SITE UTILITIES-NORTH C2.5 SITE UTILITIES-SOUTH C2.6 BULL MOUNTAIN ROAD STREET&STORM PLAN & PROFILE C2.7 BULL MOUNTAIN ROAD STREET&STORM PLAN &PROFILE C2.8 BULL MOUNTAIN ROAD STREET&STORM PLAN &PROFILE C5.1 SEWER DETAILS C5.2 SEWER DETAILS C5.3 SEWER AND WATER DETAILS C5.4 STREET DETAILS L1.1 SLEEVING PLAN-OVERALL L2.1 IRRIGATION PLAN-NORTH L2.2 IRRIGATION PLAN-SOUTH L2.3 PLANTING PLAN-NORTH L2.4 PLANTING PLAN-SOUTH L5.1 DETAILS A2.0 SITE PLAN-OVERALL A2.1 ENLARGED PLANS AND SITE DETAILS A2.2 SITE DETAILS A3.1S FINISH SCHEDULE DOOR SCHEDULE LOWER LEVEL A3.1W LOWER FLOOR PLAN-WEST A3.1 E LOWER FLOOR PLAN-EAST A3.2S FINISH SCHEDULE DOOR SCHEDULE MAIN LEVEL A3.2W MAIN FLOOR PLAN-WEST A3.2E MAIN FLOOR PLAN-EAST A3.3W ROOF PLAN-WEST A3.3E ROOF PLAN-EAST A3.4 ENLARGED RESTROOM PLANS A3.5 ENLARGED STAIR AND ELEVATOR PLANS A3.6 FLOOR FINISH PLANS-VCT ALTERNATE A3.7 FLOOR FINISH PLANS-CARPET ALTERNATE A3.8 FLOOR FINISH PLANS-LINOLEUM ALTERNATE A3.9 FLOOR FINISH PLANS-RUBBER ALTERNATE A3.10 STORAGE-ALTERNATE A3.11 COURT INFILL-ALTERNATE A4.0 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS-OVERALL SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 00010-5 0208.00 INDEX I A4.1 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS A4.2 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS A4.3 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS A4.4 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS-STUCCO/METAL ROOF ALTERNATES A4.5 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS-STUCCO/METAL ROOF ALTERNATES 1 A4.6 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS-STUCCO/METAL ROOF ALTERNATES A4.7 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS-METAL PANEL SIDING I METAL ROOF ALTERNATES A4.8 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS-METAL PANEL SIDING/METAL ROOF ALTERNATES A4.9 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS-METAL PANEL SIDING/METAL ROOF ALTERNATES A5.1 BUILDING SECTIONS A5.2 BUILDING SECTIONS A5.3 BUILDING SECTIONS A5.4 WALL SECTIONS A5.5 WALL SECTIONS A6.1 EXTERIOR DETAILS-WALL A6.2 EXTERIOR DETAILS-WALL A6.3 EXTERIOR DETAILS-ROOF A6.4 EXTERIOR DETAILS-ROOF A6.5 EXTERIOR DETAILS-ROOF, AND STUCCO ALTERNATES A6.6 EXTERIOR DETAILS-METAL ROOF ALTERNATE A6.7 EXTERIOR DETAILS-METAL PANEL SIDING ALTERNATE A7.1 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A7.2 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A7.3 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A7.4 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A7.5 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A7.6 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A7.7 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A7.8 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS 1 A7.9 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A7.10 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A7.11 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A7.12 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A7.13 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A7.14 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A8.1 DOOR AND FRAME TYPES I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 00010-6 0208.00 INDEX A8.2 WINDOW TYPES A8.3 EXTERIOR DOOR AND WINDOW DETAILS A8.4 EXTERIOR DOOR AND WINDOW DETAILS A8.5 INTERIOR DOOR AND WINDOW DETAILS A8.6 INTERIOR DOOR AND WINDOW DETAILS A8.7 INTERIOR DETAILS 111 A8.8 INTERIOR DETAILS A8.9 INTERIOR DETAILS A8.10 CASEWORK DETAILS A8.11 MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS A9.1W LOWER CEILING PLAN-WEST A9.1E LOWER CEILING PLAN-EAST A9.2W MAIN CEILING PLAN-WEST A9.2E MAIN CEILING PLAN-EAST S1.0 NOTES,ABBREVIATIONS, LEGENDS 53.1W LOWER FOUNDATION PLAN-WEST S3.1E LOWER FOUNDATION PLAN-EAST S3.2W MAIN FOUNDATION AND FRAMING PLAN -WEST S3.2E MAIN FOUNDATION AND FRAMING PLAN -EAST S3.3W ROOF FRAMING PLAN -WEST S3.3E ROOF FRAMING PLAN -EAST S3.4 STORAGE-ALTERNATE S3.5 COURT INFILL-ALTERNATE S4.1 INTERIOR MASONRY WALL ELEVATIONS S6.1 FOUNDATION DETAILS S6.2 FLOOR FRAMING DETAILS S6.3 FLOOR FRAMING DETAILS S6.4 ROOF FRAMING DETAILS S6.5 ROOF FRAMING DETAILS S6.6 ROOF FRAMING DETAILS S6.7 MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS S6.8 MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS S6.9 MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS S7.1 BRACE FRAME DETAILS M1.0 COVER SHEET M1.1 SCHEDULES SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 00010-7 INDEX 0208.00 1 M3.1 W LOWER FLOOR PLAN-WEST M3.1E LOWER FLOOR PLAN-EAST M3.2W MAIN FLOOR PLAN-WEST M3.2E MAIN FLOOR PLAN-EAST M3.3W ROOF PLAN-WEST M3.3E ROOF PLAN-EAST M3.4 ALTERNATE SCHEDULES 111 M3.5 STORAGE-ALTERNATE M3.6 COURT INFILL/STORAGE-ALTERNATE M4.1W LOWER HYDRONIC PLAN-WEST M4.1 E LOWER HYDRONIC PLAN-EAST M4.2W MAIN HYDRONIC PLAN-WEST M4.2E MAIN HYDRONIC PLAN-EAST M5.1 PIPING DIAGRAMS M5.2 DETAILS P1.0 COVER SHEET $/ P3.1W LOWER PLAN-WEST P3.1 E LOWER PLAN-EAST I P3.2W MAIN PLAN-WEST P3.2E MAIN PLAN-EAST P3.3 STORAGE-ALTERNATE P3.4 COURT INFILL-ALTERNATE P4.1W LOWER WASTE AND VENT PLAN-WEST P4.1 E LOWER WASTE AND VENT PLAN-EAST P4.2W MAIN WASTE AND VENT PLAN-WEST P4.2E MAIN WASTE AND VENT PLAN-EAST P5.1 DETAILS E1.0 COVER SHEET E2.0 SITE PLAN I E3.1W LOWER POWER AND SIGNAL PLAN-WEST E3.1 E LOWER POWER AND SIGNAL PLAN-EAST E3.2W MAIN POWER AND SIGNAL PLAN-WEST E3.2E MAIN POWER AND SIGNAL PLAN-EAST E3.3 ROOF PLAN/KITCHEN PLAN ELECTRICAL E3.4 STORAGE-ALTERNATE E3.5 COURT INFILL-ALTERNATE SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 00010-8 0208.00 INDEX I 1 E4.1W LOWER LIGHTING PLAN-WEST E4.1 E LOWER LIGHTING PLAN-EAST I E4.2W MAIN LIGHTING PLAN-WEST E4.2E MAIN LIGHTING PLAN-EAST E5.1 ELECTRICAL DETAILS E5.2 ELECTRICAL DETAILS IE5.3 ELECTRICAL DETAILS E5.4 ELECTRICAL DETAILS I E6.1 ONE-LINE DIAGRAMS E6.2 PANEL SCHEDULES E6.3 PANEL SCHEDULES I K3.1 EQUIPMENT PLAN IK3.2 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE K3.3 ELECTRICAL ROUGH-INS I K3.4 PLUMBING ROUGH-INS K4.1 COOKING HOOD DETAILS K4.2 ANSUL SYSTEM DETAILS IK4.3 DISHWASHER HOOD DETAILS K4.4 S/S EQUIPMENT ELEVATIONS 1 K4.5 WALK-IN DETAILS END OF INDEX II I I I V I SEPTEMBER 2004 USD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 00010-9 I0208.00 INDEX I SECTION 15010 GENERAL PROVISIONS 111 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other conditions and Division 1-General requirements Sections apply for the work specified in this Section. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK: The work covered by this Specification shall include furnishing all labor, materials,equipment and services to construct and install the complete mechanical system as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. Verify all conditions on the job site and lay out work accordingly. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. The General Provisions apply to this Division, including but not limited to: 1. Drawings and Specifications. 2. Contract Modifications, addendums and change orders. B. Division 1, General Requirements, applies to this Division, including but not limited to: 1. Summary of Work, Section 01100. 2. Coordination, Section 01310. In addition, it shall be the responsibility of each trade performing work specified under Division 15 to coordinate with all others for proper and adequate installation clearance. 3. Cutting and Patching, Section 01730. The cost of cutting and patching required work of Division 15 and not shown in other Divisions of Work shall be included in the cost of Division 15. 4. Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, Section 01330. See 15010 for additional requirements. 111' 5. Temporary Facilities and Controls, Section 01500. 6. Material and Equipment, Section 01600. See 15010 for additional requirements. 7. Substitutions and Product Options, Section Div. 1.See 15010 for additional requirements. 8. Contract Closeout, Section 01770. a. Project Record Documents. Keep up to date marked up Drawings on site. See 15010 for additional requirements. b. Operations and Maintenance Data. See 15010 for additional requirements. c. Start-up. See 15010 for additional requirements. C. Related work provided in Divisions 2 through 14: 1. Pipe chases and formed concrete work except as specified hereunder. SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15010-1 0208.0 GENERAL PROVISIONS I 2. Framed openings in masonry, concrete, wood and other architectural and structural elements. 3. Wood grounds and nailing strips in masonry and concrete. I 4. Installation only of access panels in ceilings, walls, etc. Provide access panels as part of mechanical work. 5. Painting except as specified hereunder. 6. Curbs and roof flashings for openings through roofs, except for roof drain and vent pipe ill flashing. D. Related Work provided in Division 16: 1 1. Motor disconnect switches and installation except as specified herein. 2. Motor starters and installation except as herein specified. 3. Power wiring except as specified herein. E. Related provided by Owner under separate contract: 1. Testing,adjusting,balancing and commissioning will be provided under a separate contract. Contractor shall coordinate requirements of these services and provide support and needed. ir 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. All work, installations, materials and equipment shall comply with the provision of the following codes,standards and regulations, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: a. State of Oregon International Mechanical Code. (IMC) I b. State of Oregon Plumbing Specialty Code. (UPC) c. State of Oregon Structural Specialty Code. (UBC) d. National Electrical Code. (NEC) National Fire Protection Agency. (NFPA) I e. .9 Y f. All City, County, State and Federal applicable laws and regulations. I g. Regulations and standards set forth by ASME,ASHRAE,SMACNA,AGA and ARI. 2. Should there be any direct conflict between Codes and the Drawings and Specifications,the Codes, rules and regulations shall govern. 3. Where two or more codes or regulations apply, the more stringent of the two shall be exercised. I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15010-2 0208.0 GENERAL PROVISIONS I o 4. Should the Documents indicate a condition,which will conflict with the Codes,the Contractor shall inform the Owner's Representative and refrain from installing that portion until resolved. Any work installed in violation of the Codes will be removed and correctly installed as part of the Contract work. 5. If the Drawings and Specifications indicate a higher quality than code, the Drawings and Specifications shall govern. 6. Electrical products shall bear the U.L. label. B. The entire mechanical system shall operate correctly at full capacity without objectionable noise, vibration or decrease of efficiency. C. Materials and Equipments: 1. Equipment furnished shall meet all requirements of the Drawings and Specifications and be suitable for the installation. Equipment not meeting all requirements will not be acceptable. 2. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are furnished,use products of the I same manufacturer. 3. Furnish all materials and equipment, new and of size,type and quality herein specified. D. Workmanship: 1. Follow manufacturers' instructions. If they are in conflict with the Drawings and Specifications, obtain clarification from the Architect prior to beginning the work. E. Cutting and Patching: 1. Provide for cutting,patching and repairing for the installation of the work specified,including masonry work, concrete work, carpentry work and painting. Work shall be performed by skilled craftsmen of the respective trade. 1.05 DRAWINGS A. The Drawings and Specifications are complementary and what is called for by one shall be as if called for by both. All items shown on the Drawings are not necessarily included in the Specifications. All directives and instructions to furnish, provide, install, complete and test described in the design documents shall be interpreted as directives unless clearly specified otherwise. B. Bring obscure or questionable items to the attention of the Owner's Representative prior to bid date. Necessary directions and explanations will be given by the Owner's Representative in Addendum Form. C. Should the Documents indicate a condition which will conflict with the Governing Codes and Regulations, the Contractor shall refrain from installing that portion of the work until receiving verification from the Owner's Representative. Should rearrangement or rerouting of duct or piping be necessary,provide for approval the simplest layout possible for that particular potion of the work. Any work installed in violation of the Governing Codes will be removed and correctly installed by the Contractor as part of the Contract work. I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15010-3 1 0208.0 GENERAL PROVISIONS I D. Drawings are diagrammatic. They do not show every offset, bend, tee, or elbow which may be required to install work in the space provided. Do not scale drawings for roughing-in measurements, nor use as shop drawings. Make field measurements and prepare shop drawings as required. Coordinate work with shop drawings of other trades. Provide any bends. Offsets and elbows where required by local conditions from measurements taken at the Building (subject to approval) and without additional cost to the Project. The right is reserved to make any reasonable changes in outlet location prior to rough-in. E. It is the intent of these specifications that the field wiring of all systems provided and modified under this contract shall be complete and operable. Refer to all drawings and specifications,especially the electrical drawings, to determine voltage, phase, circuit ampacity and number of connections indicated. Bring to the attention of the Engineer all conflicts,incompatibilities and discrepancies prior to bid. F. Where equipment is shown, dimensions have been taken from typical equipment of the class indicated. Carefully check the Drawings to see that the equipment under consideration for installation will fit the space provide and that all connections may be made thereto without impairment of are and height requirements and of Code required clearances. Contractor is responsible for all conges required by equipment dimensions different than those shown. G. Where equipment manufacturer and model number are listed it is the most recent and/or desired to describe function and quality of equipment to be supplied and installed. Since manufacturers may change model numbers without notification, should the model specified be unavailable,furnish and install the model number that is equal to or better than the one listed. H. The location of all utilities, wires, conduits, pipes, duct, or other service facilities are shown in a general way only on the Drawings and are taken from existing public records. Ascertain whether any additional facilities other than those shown on the plans may be present and determine the exact location and elevations of all utilities prior to commencing installation. I. Prior to bid, contact the local utility companies to verify requirements. Provide all material and labor by utilities. J. The Contractor, before submitting a Bid on the work, must visit the site to become familiar with all visible existing conditions. As a result of having visited the premises, the Contractor shall be responsible for the installation of the work as it relates to such visible existing conditions. The submission of the bid will be considered an acknowledgement of the part of the Bidder of visitation to the site. K. The Contractor is responsible to apply for and obtain all necessary permits, fees and inspections required by any public authority having jurisdiction. Refer to General Conditions for additional information. 1.06 SUBSTITUTION AND PRODUCT OPTIONS A. See Division 1. B. The use of manufacturer's names, models and numbers in the Drawings and Specifications is intended to establish style, quality, appearance and usefulness. The model numbers listed are the last available to the designer, if no longer current, substitute equipment equal to or better than that represented by the model number listed. Items noted"or equivalent"will require prior acceptance. I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15010-4 0208.0 GENERAL PROVISIONS I C. Submit for the Owner's Representative's review, manufacturer's detailed specifications and data sheets for all proposed substitutions. Submittals shall consist of a single sheet,or specific data need for consideration of approval. All pertinent data listed in the Specifications and on the Drawings shall be furnished, including all special features. See that all submittals are in proper order, and that all equipment will fit the space provided. D. All requests for approval of substitutions for materials other than those specified must be submitted in accordance with Instruction to Bidder. 1 E. Substitution products from approved manufacturers do not need prior approval. Ensure substitutions meet all requirements of the Specifications. F. All changes required due to product substitutions are the responsibility of the Contractor. 1.07 PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS A. Obtain drawings from Architect. B. Keep Drawings clean, undamaged and up to date. C. Record and accurately indicate the following: 1. Depths,sizes and locations of all buried and concealed piping. 2. Locations of all clean-outs. 3. Changes, additions and revisions due to contract modifications. 4. Locations of tracer wire terminal points. D. Drawings to be available for Architect review. E. Submit as a part of Project Closeout Documents 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions:Prior to bidding,verify and become familiar with all existing conditions by visiting the site and include all factors which may affect the execution of this work. Include all related costs in the initial bid proposal. B. Coordinate exact requirements governed by actual job conditions. Check all information and report all discrepancies before fabrication work. Report changes in the time to avoid unnecessary work. Make changes as directed by Owner's Representative. 1.09 CONTRACT MODIFICATIONS A. In addition to the requirements of the General provisions, all supplemental cost proposals for this Division of work shall be accompanied by a complete itemized breakdown of labor and materials for each item. No exceptions will be made. Contract's estimating sheets for supplemental cost proposals shall be made available upon request. Labor must be separated and allocated to each item of work. Changes or additions subject to additional compensation made without written authorization based on agreed price shall be at Contractor's own risk and expense. I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15010-5 0208.0 GENERAL PROVISIONS I 1.10 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver to project site with manufacturer's labels intact and legible. B. Handling: Avoid damage. C. Storage: Store material inside,protected from weather,dirt and construction dust. Where necessary I to store outside, elevate well above grade and enclose with durable,waterproof wrapping. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Provide a written guaranty covering the work of this Division for a period of one calendar year form the data of acceptance of the entire project as required by the General Provisions. B. Provide manufacturer's written warranties for material and equipment furnished under this Division insuring parts and labor for a period of one year from the date of acceptance of the entire project. C. Correct warranty items promptly upon notification. I 1.12 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Prior to final inspection,provide 4 copies of manufacturer's maintenance manuals for each piece of 111 equipment or items requiring service. Manual shall include manufacturer's operation and maintenance instruction manuals and parts list for each piece of equipment or item requiring servicing. Include in the manual manufacturer's service data, wiring diagrams and parts lists for all major items of equipment,valve charts,balancing data,final control diagrams showing final set points and any additional equipment added by contract modification. Comply with provisions of Section 01700 where applicable. I B. Submit bound in 8-1/2 x 11 inch text pages, three ring binders with durable plastic covers. C. Prepare binder covers with printed title"OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS",title of project, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required. D. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced lamented plastic table. 1.13 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: The Contract Drawings indicate the general layout of the piping, ductwork and various items of equipment. Prepare and submit for review Shop Drawings of all installation not detailed on the Contract Drawings and all changes to the Contract Drawings. 1 B. Product Data: 1. Submit for review manufacturer's detailed shop drawings,specifications and stat sheets for all equipment to be furnished,as well as any wiring diagram showing field installed wiring and devices. Arrangement of mechanical equipment has been based on items of specific manufacturer intended as somewhat typical of several makes,which may be approved. 2. Indicate construction, capacities,p s, accessories, etc. Manufacturer's abbreviations or codes are not acceptable. 3. List the name of the motor manufacturer for each piece of equipment. SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15010-6 0208.0 GENERAL PROVISIONS I IC. Submission Requirements: 1 1. Shop Drawings and Product Data: a. Submit all equipment and product data for Work of Division 15 together in a group in a 3-ring loose-leaf binder, with each item field under a tab, and labeled with its respective speciation section number,article and paragraph,and mark if applicable. I b. Include a complete index in the original submittal. Indicate both original items I submitted and note stragglers that will be submitted at a later date to avoid delay in submitting. c. Additional product data submitted after return of the original binder shall include a I tab similar to the originally submitted. Upon receipt of the return submittal, insert them in the previously submitted binder. I d. Refer to Division 1 for number of shop drawing copies to be submitted. 2. Sample: Submit samples required by each Section of Division 15 at the same time that shop drawings and product data are submitted. 1 D. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to: 1. See that all submittals are in proper order. 2. Insure that all equipment will fit in the space provided. 1 3. Assure that all deviation from Drawings and Specification are specifically noted and called to the attention of the Engineer/Architect/Contracting Officer in the submittals. Failure to comply will void approval automatically. I 4. Deviation,discrepancies,and conflicts between the submittals and the contract documents discovered prior to or after the review process shall not relieve the Contractor of this responsibility to comply with the contract documents. i1.14 START-UP A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. B. Notify Owner's Representative seven days prior to start-up of each item. C. Verify that each piece of equipment of system has been checked prior to start-up for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, or other conditions, which may cause damage. I D. Verify that tests,meter readings and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. I E. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are completed and tested. F. Execute start-up under supervision of responsible manufacturer's representative or Contractor's personnel in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. I I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15010-7 I0208.0 GENERAL PROVISIONS 1 1.15 FEES, PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS: A. The Contractor is responsible to apply for and obtain all necessary permits, fees and inspections required by any public authority having jurisdiction. Refer to General Conditions for additional information. PART 2 -PRODUCTS I 2.01 MATERIAL A. All materials and products used for construction shall be new,of the best grade,and latest products I as listed in printed catalog data. All articles of a kind shall be the standard product of a single manufacturer.Trade names and manufacturers names denote a character and quality of equipment desired and shall no be construed as limiting competition. B. Asbestos: Do not use products made of or containing asbestos. 2.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE I A. Refer to Section 01640 Material and Equipment for information regarding available alternatives to materials and equipment specified herein. Product listings are for informational purposes only and establish a general standard of quality. B. Provide products which are compatible with other portions of the work and provide products with the proper and correct power and fuel burner characteristics and similar adaptations for the project. 2.03 INSPECTION A. All work and materials are subject to field observation at any and all times by the Owner's 11 Representative. B. The Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative a minimum of two days prior to testing any I piping system which must be witnessed and accepted before it is covered up or enclosed. C. If an observer finds any material or work not conforming to these Specifications, within three days after being notified, remove the materials from the premises and replace with approved materials. If the material has been installed, the entire expense of removing and replacing shall be borne of the Contractor. III PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION I A. Keep pipe,ductwork and conduit openings closed by means of plugs or caps to prevent the entrance of foreign matter. Protect piping,conduit,ductwork,fixtures,equipment and apparatus against dirty water, chemical or mechanical damage both before and after installation. Restore damaged or contaminated fixtures, equipment or apparatus to original conditions or replace at no cost to the Owner. B. Protect bright finished shafts, bearing housings, and similar items until in service. No rust will be a permitted. C. Cover or otherwise suitably protect equipment and materials stored on the job site. I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15010-8 0208.0 GENERAL PROVISIONS I 111 3.02 CLEANING A. General: Clean mechanical and plumbing equipment,fixtures,piping and ductwork of stampings and markings (except those required by codes), iron cuttings, and other refuse. I B. Painted Surfaces: Clean scratched or marred painted surfaces of rust or other foreign mater and paint with matching color industrial enamel, except as otherwise noted. C. Before operating any equipment or systems, make thorough check to determine that systems have I been flushed and cleaned as required and equipment has been properly installed, lubricated and serviced. Check factory instructions to see that installations have been made accordingly and that recommended lubricants have been used. I D. Use particular care in lubricating bearings to avoid damage by over-lubrication and blowing out seals. Check equipment for damage that may have occurred during shipment, after delivery or during installation. Repair damaged equipment as approved or replace with new equipment. I3.03 LAYOUT AND COORDINATION A. Site Examination: Before starting work, carefully examine site and all contract Drawings so as to I become thoroughly familiar with conditions governing work on this project. Verify all indicated elevations, building measurements, roughing-in dimensions and equipment locations before proceeding with any of the work. I B. The existence of any wires, conduits, pipes, ducts or other service facilities are shown in a general way only. It will be the duty of the Contractor to visit the site and make exact determination of the existence of any such facilities prior to submitting a bid. It is understood that the Contractor will be Iresponsible for making the exact determination of the location and condition of these facilities. C. The location of all utilities indicated on the plans is taken from existing public records. The exact I location and elevation of all public utilities must be determined by the Contractor It shall be the duty of the Contractor to ascertain whether any additional facilities other than those shown may be present. D. Sleeves, Insets,Cast-in-Place Work: provide sleeves,inserts,anchoring devices,cast-in-place work, ietc. which must be set in concrete sequenced at the proper time for the project schedule. E. Coordination: I 1. Where the work must be sequenced and positioned with precision in order to fit into the available space, prepare accurate scale shop drawings showing the actual physical dimensions required for the installation and submit prior to purchase-fabrication-installation of Iany of the elements involved in the coordination. 2. Cooperate with other trades in furnishing material and information for sleeves, bucks, I chases, mountings, backing,foundations and wiring required for installation of mechanical items. 3. Coordinate all work with other trades and determine in advance where interfacing of the I mechanical work and other work are required to be connected together. Provide all materials and equipment to make those connections. Submit shop drawings showing required connections where special conditions exist. 1 F. Discrepancies: Report immediately any error,conflict or discrepancy in Plans,Specifications and/or existing conditions. Do not proceed with any questionable items of work until clarification of same has been made. Should rearrangement or re-routing of ducts or piping be necessary,provide for approval the simplest layout possible for that particular portion of the work. 1 SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15010-9 I0208.0 GENERAL PROVISIONS I I 3.04 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS A. Comply with Section 01500 requirements. B. Permanent mechanical systems' equipment utilized for temporary heating, ventilating and cooling shall be started with all controls and safeties installed and operational. Start-up shall be done by a factory approved mechanic only. C. Owner's warranties shall not be abridged by Contractor's use of the permanent systems'equipment prior to final acceptance. Warranty period shall begin at final completion. 3.05 MECHANICAL WORK CLOSEOUT A. General: Refer to the Division 1 sections for general closeout requirements. Calibrate all equipment requiring same. B. Record Drawings: Submit record set of drawings required in Section 01330, Submittals and as previously specified in this Section. C. Closeout Equipment/Systems Operations: Sequence operations properly so that work of project will not be damaged or endangered. Coordinate with seasonal requirements. Operate each item of equipment and each system in a test run of appropriate duration with the Architect present,and with the Owner's operating personnel present,to demonstrate sustained,satisfactory performance. Adjust and correct operations as required for proper performance. Clean and lubricate each system, and replace dirty filters, excessively worn parts and similar expendable items of the work. D. Operation and Instruction: Provide twenty-four(24)hours of on-site training to Owner's personnel on all mechanical systems and equipment. Training shall include maintenance, lubrication, troubleshooting and repair. Contractor shall provide necessary written manuals and training aides explaining operational diagrams, emergency and alarm provisions, sequencing requirements, seasonal provisions,security,safety and similar features of the installed system. Four(4)copies of111 written manuals shall be left with Owner at end of training. END OF SECTION I I I I I 1 SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15010-10 0208.0 GENERAL PROVISIONS I E TI S C ON 15050 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS I PART 1 -GENERAL I1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Items common to more than one section of Division 15 and general construction procedures and products. Work described in this Section applies to all Sections of Division 15. 1.02 STORAGE AND HANDLING IA. Deliver materials to the project site with manufacturer's labels intact and legible. Handle materials with care to avoid damage. Store materials inside protected from weather,dirt and construction dust. Where necessary to store outside,elevate well above grade and enclose Iwith durable,waterproof wrapping. Label equipment as soon as it arrives at job site. 1.03 SUBMITTALS IA. Submit product data under provisions of Section 15010 and Division 1. B. Provide submittals for: 1 1. Motors. 2. Starters. 3. Alarm Panels. 4. Pipe sleeves 5. Escutcheons. II6. Piping and Equipment Identification. 7. Valve Schedule. IPART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE iA. Refer to Section 01600 Material and Equipment for information regarding available 9 9 alternatives to materials and equipment specified herein. Product listings are for Iinformational purposes only and establish a general standard of quality. B. Provide products which are compatible with other portions of the work and provide products with the proper and correct power and fuel burner characteristics and similar adaptations for 11 the project. 2.02 MATERIALS IIA. All materials and products used for construction shall be new, of the best grade, and the latest products as listed in printed catalog data. IB. All articles of a kind shall be the standard product of a single manufacturer. SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15050-1 0208.0 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS I 1 C. Provide products which are compatible with other portions of the work and products which have the proper electrical power and fuel-burning characteristics for this project. D. Trade names and manufacturers names denote the character and quality of equipment desired and shall not be construed as limiting competition. 2.03 ELECTRIC MOTORS A. Enclosure Type: Open drip-proof for normal concealed indoor use,guarded where exposed to employees or occupants. Type II for outdoor use,except weather-protected Type I where II adequately housed. B. Bearings: Ball or roller bearings, and design for thrust where applicable; permanent or pressure lubricated anti-friction. Sleeve-type bearings permitted only where indicated for light-duty fractional horsepower motors. C. Construction: General purpose, continuous duty; NEMA design "B", except "C" for high I starting torque applications. D. Frames: For single phase motor sizes NEMA No.48,except 56 for heavy-duty applications. NEMA"T"frames for 1 horsepower and larger polyphase motors. E. Phases and Current: 1/3 horsepower and smaller capacitor-start single-phase; '/z horsepower and larger, squirrel-cage induction polyphase. Coordinate with actual current characteristics; specified in Division 16 and do not use 230/460 voltage motors on 208 voltage power or vise versa. F. Service Factor: 1.35 for single-phase; 1.15 for polyphase. 111 G. Overload Protection: Built-in thermal with internal sensing device for stopping motor,and for signaling where indicated on single phase motors. H. Speed: Not faster than synchronous speeds of 1800 RPM except where otherwise indicated. I. Temperature Rating: Class B insulation, except where otherwise indicated or required for I service indicated. J. Starting Capability: As required for service indicated, but not less than 5 starts per hour. I K. Efficiency: The manufacturer's highest efficiency motors tested under procedures recommended by NEMA(IEEE Standard 112,Test Method B). Minimum 84%efficiency at 3 HP increasing to 90%above 15 HP. Submit manufacturer's data if motor nameplate does not indicate minimum efficiency. L. Manufacturers: Century, General Electric, Lincoln, Louis Allis, Baldor, Wagner, 111 Westinghouse or accepted substitute. Where selection of motor manufacturer is within Contractor's control (independent of mechanical equipment selection), provide motors produced by a single manufacturer. 2.04 STARTERS AND SWITCHES A. General: Provide each motor with starter or switch as approved and recommended by manufacturer of motor or equipment of which motor is a part. I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15050-2 0208.0 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS I 1 B. Magnetic Starters: Provide for 1/2 horsepower and larger motors,and for smaller motors on 9P 9 automatic control or with interlock switch. Include pilot lights, reset, trip-free relay on each I phase, Hand-Off-Auto switch in cover, and devices for coordination with control system (including transformer for control circuit,verify holding coil voltage requirements with control system design). Provide automatic ambient temperature compensation for starter heaters. I C. Manual Switches: Provide on motors 1/3 horsepower and smaller except where automatic control or interlock is indicated. Include pilot light. Provide overload protection where not protected by panel board circuit breaker or fused disconnect switch. ID. Starter Characteristics: Type I general purpose enclosure with padlock ears and mounting supports. Starter type and size as recommended by motor manufacturer. II E. Manufacturers: General Electric, ITE,Allen Bradley,Cutler-Hammer,Square D or accepted substitute. I2.05 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Equipment Wiring: Interconnecting wiring within or on a piece of mechanical equipment shall be provided with the equipment unless required otherwise. Provide all necessary field wiring I and devices from the point of connection indicated on the electrical drawings to each equipment item. 1 B. Control Wiring: All control wiring for mechanical equipment shall be provided under Section 15900, Controls and Instrumentation. g C. Codes: All electrical equipment and products shall bear the U.L. and/or C.S.A. label as required by governing codes and ordinances. Refer to paragraph 1.3,Quality Assurance for definition of testing agency certification requirements. 1 2.06 DRIVES A. General: "V" section belt drives, multiple as required, sized on 1.5 times installed motor 11 horsepower. Provide variable pitch motor sheaves on all one or two belt drives and standard slide rails or approved means of adjustment for each motor with belt drive. Use standard section belts and no sheave smaller than cataloged industry standard;provide countersunk center on shaft ends to receive speed counter tip. IB. Manufacturers: Dayton, Gates, Browning, or accepted substitute. 2.07 MACHINERY GUARDS IA. Furnish guards for protection on all rotating and moving parts of equipment. Provide guards for all metal fan drives and motor pulleys, regardless of being enclosed in a metal cabinet. IB. Design guards so as not to restrict air flow at fan inlets resulting in reduced capacity. C. Provide 2-1/2 inches diameter access opening holes in guards for easy use of tachometers at I pulley centers. Guards shall be easily removable for pulley adjustment or removal and changing of belts. D. All guards shall meet OSHA requirements including back plates. I I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15050-3 I0208.0 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS I 2.08 ACCESS PANELS A. Access panels shall have same fire rating as surface where mounted. B. Provide flush key cylinder locks on all access panels less than 8 feet above the floor in public spaces. Turn keys over to Owner at project completion. Screwdriver latches on all others. C. Steel,24"x 24"or as required. Complete with steel frame, hinged locating door,and prime coat finish. Type to match building construction. D. Manufacturers: INRYCO/MILCOR Style DW, K or M panels as required by construction. Bilco, Potter-Roemer or accepted substitute. 2.09 PIPE SLEEVES A. Interior Wall Sleeves: 12 gage galvanized steel,flush with wall on both sides. B. Interior Floor Sleeves: 12 gage galvanized steel and extend 2-inches above finished floor. C. Exterior Wall Sleeves: Cast iron, flush with wall on both sides. D. On Grade Floor Sleeves: Same as exterior wall sleeves. 2.10 ESCUTCHEONS A. Brass material,chrome plated finish. Size sufficient to cover all pipe openings through wall, floor or ceiling. Set screw or spring to secure to pipe. 2.11 UNIONS A. Steel pipe union shall be 150-pound malleable iron,brass to iron seat,ground joint,black or galvanized to match pipe. B. Copper pipe union shall be 200 psig working pressure. Bronze body. Solder ends. C. Insulating unions shall be 250 psig working pressure. Pipe ends and material to match piping. Electric current below 1%of galvanic current. Gasket material as recommended by manufacturer. Epco or approved. 2.12 ROOF FLASHING A. Use flashing products specifically designed for and compatible with metal roofing system used. 2.13 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL A. Provide steel as required for adequate support of all mechanical equipment, angle or channel, I or H sections as required by application. Provide suitable base plates for stands and anchors for hanging equipment. Drill support holes only in flanges of structural center of length as possible. Apply on coat of black rust inhibitive enamel primer to shop fabricated items before delivery to job; other painting as specified herein. Provide shop drawings of supports especially constructed for this project. Burning of holes is not permitted. I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15050-4 0208.0 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS I I2.14 PAINTING I A. Apply one coat of black rustoleum primer to shop fabricated items before delivery to job. Other painting as specified herein. P2.15 IDENTIFICATION MARKERS A. Pipe Markers: II. Adhesive pipe markers of width, letter size and background color conforming to ANSI A13.1. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Brady B350 with banding tape.Seaton,Zeston,Porter or Iaccepted substitute. B. Nameplates: 1 1. Engraved nameplates, 1/16 inches thick, laminated 3-ply plastic, center ply white, outer ply black, letters formed by exposing center ply. 1 2. Size: 3 inches by 5 inches nameplates with 1/4-inch high letters. 3. Manufacturers: Lamicoid. Seaton, Brady,Zeston or accepted substitute. 1 C. Valve Tags: 1. 1-1/2 inches diameter, 18-gauge polished brass tags with 3/16-inch chain hole and 1 1/4 inch high stamped, black-filled service designation. 2. Manufacturers: Seaton Style 250-BL, Brady,Zeston or accepted substitute. ID. Lettering and Graphics: 1. Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in mechanical 1 identification work with designations shown or scheduled.Provide numbers,lettering and wording as indicated for identification of mechanical systems and equipment. 2. Multiple Systems: Where multiple systems of same name are shown provide I identification which indicates individual equipment number as well as service (examples: Chiller(CH)No. 1, Chiller(CH) No. 2, Air Conditioning Unit No. 1 (AC) No. 1,Air Conditioning Unit(AC) No.2.) i2.16 VALVE SCHEDULES A. Schedules: Valve schedule for each piping system,typewritten and reproduced on 8-1/2 by 11-inch paper. Indicate valve number, piping system, location of valve(room or space)and normal setting (open, closed, etc.). Mark valves which are intended for emergency shutoff and similar uses by special notation. In addition to mounted copies,furnish 4 extra copies for Imaintenance manuals. 2.17 CONCRETE FOR MECHANICAL WORK IA. Provide strength classes per Uniform Building Code Chapter 19. I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15050-5 I0208.0 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS I PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 ACCESS PANELS A. Furnish and install access panels required for mechanical work. Access panels shall have same fire ratings as surface where mounted. Furnish panels of adequate size for valves and equipment requiring service and installed above ceilings,behind walls or in furring,complete with correct frame for type of building construction involved. Exact size,number and location of access panels are not necessarily shown. Use no panel smaller than 12 inches by 12 inches for simple manual access or smaller than 16 inches by 20 inches where personnel must pass through. Paint with color and finish to match surrounding architectural features, where exposed. 3.02 PIPE SLEEVES I A. Sleeves: Large enough in diameter to provide'A-inch clearance around pipes or insulation. Caulk with watertight rated, UL listed foam-in-place barrier. B. Layout: Lay out work in advance of pouring of slabs or construction of wall,and furnish and set inserts and sleeves necessary to complete the work. C. Coordination: Cutting or patching required as a result of lack of coordination of this operation shall be at no change in contract amount. 3.03 FLOOR,WALL AND CEILING ESCUTCHEONS A. Install on piping passing through finished walls,floors,ceilings,partitions and plaster furrings. Escutcheons shall completely cover opening around pipe. I B. Secure wall and ceiling escutcheons to pipe or structure. C. Escutcheons shall not penetrate insulation vapor barriers. I D. Escutcheons not required in mechanical rooms or unfinished spaces. 3.04 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT WIRING I A. Provide all mechanical equipment motors, automatic temperature, limit, float and similar control devices required, with wiring complete from power source indicated on Electrical Drawings. B. Provide properly rated motor overload and under voltage protection and all manual or automatic motor operating devices for all mechanical equipment. C. Equipment and systems shown on the Drawings and/or specified, are based upon requirements of specific manufacturers which are intended as somewhat typical of several makes which may be approved. Provide all field wiring and/or devices necessary for a complete and operable system including controls for the actual selected equipment/system. D. Provide all starters for mechanical motors. Review Electrical Specifications and Drawings to determine which mechanical motor starters will be provided under the Electrical Specification Sections and provide all others. I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15050-6 0208.0 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS I 3.05 PAINTING I A. General: Coordinate painting of mechanical equipment and items with products and methods specified under Section 09900, Painting. B. Painting Materials: material shall comply with Section 09900, Painting. C. Uninsulated Piping: Paint black or galvanized uninsulated piping located buried in ground,in concrete or masonry one (1) coat acid-resisting black paint. Paint black or galvanized I uninsulated piping in moist equipment rooms,crawl spaces without vapor barriers or exposed to weather one (1)coat black asphaltum varnish. D. Iron Work: Paint hangers, rods, anchors, guides, threads of galvanized pipe, bases, supports, uncoated sheet metal and other iron work without factory finish, exposed to weather, located in moist concealed spaces and moist equipment rooms one coat acid- resisting black paint. Apply one(1)coat Dixon's Aluminum Graphite No.209 paint over the 1 (1)coat primer as recommended by paint manufacturer to all hot metal surfaces. E. Sheet Metal: Apply one coat of zinc chromate to mechanical sheet metal exposed to weather,except no painting required on aluminum or stainless steel. Apply one coat of flat 1 black paint to the inside of unlined ducts behind all grilles and registers. F. Insulated Piping and Other Insulated Surfaces: Paint insulated piping in half-round,split tile, 1 or other inaccessible locations, one(1)coat asphalt emulsion. 3.06 MECHANICAL SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION I A. Piping System: Indicate each pipe system by its generic name (abbreviated) as shown; except vent and drainage piping. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for marker locations,letter sizes, and colors. Include arrows to show direction of flow and "Electric Traced"signs to identify I heat cable wrapped piping. B. Valve Identification: Tag all valves with brass disc and chain. Prepare valve charts indicating valve number, size, location, function and normal position. Use no duplicate numbers in i Plumbing and Heating systems. Mount glazed frames containing one set of valve charts in the building as directed. C. Each new piece of equipment shall bear a permanently attached identification plate, listing the manufacturer's name, capacities, sizes and characteristics. In addition to the manufacturer's identification plate,provide nameplates of black phenolic resin laminate and identify new equipment by name and number 1/2"high letters. tD. Mount valve schedule(s)as directed by Architect or Owner. I E. Provide labeling on all access panels and ceiling t-bar indicating serviceable equipment located behind panel or above ceiling. 3.07 ACCESSIBILITY IIIA. Locate valves,thermometers,cleanout fittings and other indicating equipment or specialties requiring frequent reading, adjustments, inspection, repairs and removal or replacement conveniently and accessibly with reference to the finished building. IB. Thermometers and Gages: Install thermometers and gages so as to be easily read from the floors, platforms and walkways. I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15050-7 I0208.0 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS I 3.08 INSTALLATION A. Locating and Positioning Equipment: Comply with all Codes, Regulations and observe good common practice in locating and installing mechanical equipment and material so that completed installation presents the least possible hazard. Maintain adequate clearances for repair, service and operation to all equipment and comply with Code requirements. Set all equipment level or as recommended by manufacturer. 1 B. Arrangement: Arrange ductwork and piping parallel with primary lines of the building construction, and with a minimum of 7' overhead clearance in all areas where possible. Conceal all piping and ductwork. Locate operating and control equipment properly to provide easy access. Give right-of-way to piping which must slope for drainage. Set all equipment level as recommended by manufacturer. Under no conditions shall beams,girders,footings or columns be cut for mechanical items. Casting of pipes into concrete is prohibited unless so shown on Drawings. C. Anchorage: Anchor and/or brace all mechanical equipment, piping and ductwork to resist displacement due to seismic action, include snubbers on equipment mounted on spring isolators. D. Drip Pans: Provide drip pans under all domestic hot water heaters and all above ceiling in- line pumps and cooling coils. Locate pan immediately below piping and equipment, and extend a minimum of 6 inches on each side and lengthwise 18 inches beyond equipment being protected. Fabricate pans 2 inches deep,or reinforced sheet metal(20 gauge copper, or 16 gauge steel with 2 ounces zinc finish hot dipped after fabrication)with rolled edges and soldered or welded seams. Provide 3/4 inch copper drainage piping,properly discharged to over floor drain or as shown on the Drawings. Comply with Mechanical Code Sections 310 and 1105 for overflow protection and pipe sizing. E. Adjusting: Adjust and calibrate all automatic mechanical equipment, mixing valves, flush valves,float devices, etc. Adjust flow rates at each piece of equipment or fixture. F. Building Vapor Barrier: Wherever the building insulation vapor barrier is penetrated by mechanical piping, hangers, conduits, ductwork, etc., provide clear self-adhesive tape recommended by the insulation manufacturer around the penetrations. 3.09 SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT A. Adjust and calibrate all automatic mechanical equipment, mixing valves, flush valves,float devices, etc. Adjust flow rates at each piece of equipment or fixture. Open and close all shutoff and control valves several times to insure tight glands. 3.10 CUTTING AND PATCHING I A. General: Comply with the requirements of Division 1 for the cutting and patching of other work to accommodate the installation of mechanical work. Do all necessary cutting and111 patching of existing yard surfaces required for completion of the mechanical work. Patch to match finish and color of adjacent surfaces. END OF SECTION 1 I I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15050-8 0208.0 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS I ISECTION 15060 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS I PART 1 -GENERAL I1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all pipe,piping fittings and all related components required for complete piping system.Refer IIto each specification section for each system (plumbing, hydronic, etc.)for pipe application. 1.02 REFERENCES iA. ANSI/ASME Sec. 9-Welding and Brazing Qualifications. I B. ANSI/ASTM B32-Solder Metal. C. ANSI/AWS D1.1 -Structural Welding Code. ID. ASME-Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. E. ASTM A53- Pipe,Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless. I F. ASTM A120-Pipe,Steel,Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated (Galvanized),Welded and Seamless, for Ordinary Uses. IG. ASTM F477- Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets)for Joining Plastic Pipe. H. AWS A5.8-Brazing Filler Metal. 1 I. AWWA C601 -Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Waste Water. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE IA. Conform to ANSI/ASME B31.9 for pressurized system as well as all applicable codes. B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Code and applicable state labor regulations. 0 C. Welders Certification: In accordance with ANSI/ASME Sec 9. and ANSI/AWS D1.1. i 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 15010 and Division 1. IB. Include data on pipe materials, pipe fittings and accessories. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING 1 A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 15010. B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 15010 and provide factory applied end caps Reach length of pipe and tubes to prevent damage to pipe-ends and eliminate dirt and moisture from inside of pipes and tubes. I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15060-1 I0208.0 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS I I PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 SANITARY SEWER AND VENT PIPING,WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING I A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74,hubless,service weight. Fittings: Cast iron. Joints: Neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies. Husky SD4000 or accepted substitute. Cast iron111 only for all waste risers in building. B. ABS drainage piping underground:ABS/PVC DWV drainage pipe and fittings with solvent cemented joints. Exception: All waste piping from fixtures connected to grease interceptor, or trap,waste and vent piping and garbage disposal waste piping not allowed for ABS use. Allowed for underground and non-critical noise areas only. C. ABS drainage piping above grade:ABS/PVC DWV drainage pipe and fittings with solvent cemented 111 joints. Exception:All waste piping from fixtures connected to grease interceptor, or trap,waste and vent piping and garbage disposal waste piping not allowed for ABS use. All waste and vent piping 111 within fire rated walls, building assemblies and return air plenums not allowed for ABS use. Allowed for underground and non-critical noise areas only. 2.02 WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING I A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type K, hard drawn. Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.22, wrought copper. Joints: ANSI/ASTM B16.22, brazed. 2.03 WATER PIPING,ABOVE GRADE A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn. Fittings: ANSI/ASTM B16.22, cast brass, or ANSI/ASME B16.29, wrought copper. Joints (less than 3-inch): ANSI/ASTM 16.22 solder, Grade 95TA.Joints (greater than 3-inch): brazed. B. CROSS-LINKED POLYETHYLENE TUBING AND FITTINGS I 1. Tubing a. Cross-linked polyethylene(PEX)tubing to comply with ASTM F876 and F877. 1 b. Tubing shall have a standard grade hydrostatic design stress of not less than 630 PSI for water at 73.4°F,400 PSI for water at 180°F and 315 PSI for water at 200°F determined in accordance with Plastic Pipe Institute Technical Report. c. The tubing shall be cross-linked using the"Engel Method. I 2. Fittings: a. Fittings for tubing shall be insert type with reinforcement rings. I b. Reinforcement rings shall be manufactured to produce a pressure tight seal. c. Fitting insert shall be of such dimension in that the tubing must be expanded in order 1 to facilitate insertion of the fitting into the tube. d. Expansion of the tubing and ring shall be accomplished by a tool designed expressly for that purpose. e. Fittings shall comply with ASTM F877. SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15060-2 0208.0 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS I I C. Manifolds: Provide premanufactured manifolds of the same manufacturer as the piping. D. Manufacturers: Wirsbo or accepted substitute. 111 2.04 STORM WATER PIPING,WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74, hubless,service weight. Fittings: Cast iron. Joints: Neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies. Husky SD4000 or accepted substitute. B. ABS drainage piping underground:ABS/PVC DWV drainage pipe and fittings with solvent cemented Ijoints. C. ABS drainage piping above grade:ABS/PVC DWV drainage pipe and fittings with solvent cemented joints.All waste and vent piping within fire rated walls,building assemblies and return air plenums not allowed for ABS use. 2.05 NATURAL GAS PIPING ABOVE GRADE A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 or A120,Schedule 40 black. Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.3,malleable iron,or ASTM A234,forged steel welding type. Joints: Screwed for pipe two inches and under;ANSI/AWS D1.1,welded, for pipe over two inches. 1 2.06 HEATING WATER,ABOVE GROUND A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 or A120,Schedule 40,black. Fittings: ANSI/ASTM B16.3,malleable iron or ASTM A234, forged steel welding type fittings. Joints: Screwed for pipe 2 inches and under, or ANSI/AWS D1.1,welded for pipe over 2 inches. B. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn. Fittings: ANSI/ASTM B16.22 cast brass or ANSI/ASME B16.29 solder wrought copper. Joints: ASTM B32, Grade 95TA or ANSI/AWS A5.8, BCuP silver braze. Brazed for pipe 2 inches and over, soldered for pipe under 2 inch. C. At contractor's option with no additional cost to owner:for sizes larger than 3 inch,cut grooved black steel pipe with Victaulic style 77 couplings with grade"E"gaskets and appropriate fittings. Type"L" copper Victaulic approved as optional material. 2.07 EQUIPMENT AND COOLING COIL DRAINS AND OVERFLOWS A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn. Fittings: ANSI/ASTM B16.22, cast brass, or ANSI/ASME B16.29 solder wrought copper. Joints: ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA or ANSI/AWS A5.8, BCuP silver braze. B. PVC: Schedule 40 PVC with cemented joints. 2.08 PRIMING LINES A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L annealed. Fittings: ANSI/ASTM B16.22, wrought copper. Joints: ANSI/ASTM B16.22, solder, Grade 95TA. 2.09 FIRE SPRINKLER A. Pipe: Systems 10 inches or smaller,operating below 400 psi,schedule 40,standard black steel pipe ASTM A-120 or A-53. SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15060-3 0208.0 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS I I B. Threaded Fittings: For aboveground installations only. 1. Banded class 120 cast iron fittings,ANSI B16.4 to 125 psi. I 2. Banded class 150 malleable iron fittings, ANSI B16.3 to 150 psi. C. Welded Fittings: For all underground installations,beveled ends,seamless fittings of the same type and class of piping above. D. Flanged Fittings: For aboveground installations only. 1. Class 125 cast iron fittings,ANSI B16.2 including bolting to 125 psi. 2. Class 150 steel welding neck flanges, ANSI B16.9 to 150 psi. 3. Class 250 cast iron fittings,ANSI B16.1 including bolting to 250 psi. 4. Facing and Gasketing: Selected for service pressures and temperatures. Full-faced for cast iron and raised face for steel flanges. E. Grooved Fittings: For aboveground liquid installations only,of grooved or shouldered end designed to accept grooved mechanical couplings without field preparation. Match gaskets for service and temperature indicated. 1. Malleable Iron: ASTM A-47. 2. Ductile Iron: ASTM A-536. I 3. Fabricated Steel: ASTM A-53,3/4 inch to 1-1/2 inches Type F;2-20 inches Type E or S, Grade B. 4. Steel: ASTM A-234, (A-106, Gr. B)(11-24 inches 45 degree and 90 degree elbows). 5. Manufacturers: Victaulic, Gustin-Bacon or accepted substitute. I 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING MATERIAL A. Welding Materials: Provide welding materials as determined by the installer to comply with installation requirements. Comply with Section 2-C,ASME Boiler Code for welding materials. B. Soldering and Brazing Materials: Provide soldering materials as determined by the installer to comply I/ with installation requirements. 1. Tin-Antimony Solder: ASTM B32, Grade 95TA. I 2. Lead-Free Solder: ASTM B32, Grade HB. Harris"Bridgit"approved. 3. Silver Solder: ASTM B32, Grade 96.5TS. 1 C. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: ANSI 816.21; full-faced for cast-iron flanges; raised-face for steel flanges. Pressure and temperature rating required for the service indicated. I II SEPTEMBER 2004 USD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15060-4 0208.0 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS I D. Sleeve Seal: Rubber-link pipe wall and casing closure. Thunderline Link-Seal. For fire rated wall, , floor or ceiling penetrations, 3-M"CP-25"caulk, "No. 303"putty and/or"PSS 7904"sealing system. E. Tracer Wire: 14 gauge, single strand, copper wire with blue insulation for water, green for sanitary and storm sewers, and orange for gas. 3M"DBY"direct bury splice kit required at all splices. 2.11 FLANGES, UNIONS,AND COUPLINGS A. Pipe Size 2 Inches and Under: 150 psig malleable iron unions for threaded ferrous piping; bronze unions for copper pipe,soldered joints. B. Pipe Size Over 2 Inches: 150 psig forged steel slip-on flanges for ferrous piping; bronze flanges for copper piping; neoprene gaskets for gas service; 1/16 inch thick performed neoprene bonded to asbestos. C. Grooved and Shouldered Pipe End Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, designed to permit some angular deflection, contraction, and expansion; "C" shape composition sealing gasket; steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized couplings for galvanized pipe. D. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end,copper solder end,water impervious isolation barrier. Victaulic"Clear Flow", Epco or accepted substitute. 2.12 PIPE SLEEVES A. Minimum 20 gauge galvanized steel in concrete, 18 gauge in all other construction. Provide Y2-inch clearance around pipe or insulation. Provide UL approved fire-rated assemblies/caulking. 3M or accepted substitute. 2.13 ESCUTCHEONS A. Brass material,chrome plated finish.Size to cover all pipe openings through wall,floor or ceiling.Set screw or spring to secure pipe. Coordinate all opening sizes. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs or bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Provide ndn-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. B. Route piping in orderly manner, maintain gradient and conceal all piping unless otherwise indicated. C. Install piping to conserve building space, not to interfere with use of space or access panels and parallel with walls. D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15060-5 0208.0 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS I without stressingi E. Install piping to allow for expansion and contractione, joints, or connected pipe, equipment. Provide loops, swing joints, pinchers, runouts and spring pieces to prevent damage to piping or equipment. I F. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. G. Slope water piping and arrange to drain at low points and provide drain valve. I H. Establish elevations of buried water piping outside the building to ensure not less than 3 feet of cover. I. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. J. Prepare pipe,fittings,supports, and accessories not prefinished, ready for finish painting. Refer to Section 15050. K. Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to 1/4 inch per foot minimum. Maintain gradients. ■; L. Pitch vent piping at 1/4 inch per 10 feet minimum. M. Establish elevations of all heating and cooling piping to ensure minimum of 1 inch pitch for every 40 feet to low point drip or drains. N. Unions and Flanges: At all equipment to permit dismantling and elsewhere as consistent with good 111 installation practice. O. Tracer Wire: Provide tracer wire as close to underground non-metallic water, sanitary and storm sewers and gas pipe in the trench as possible. Tracer wire shall be accessible at grade via all services,valve and meter boxes, curb cocks,cleanouts at the building, manholes(inside the cover near the top), etc. Locate all points on the record as-installed drawings. Splice into utility tracer system where available. Comply with code requirements. P. Cross-Linked Polyethylene Tubing and Fittings: 1. Tubing Under Concrete Slab: Install tubing in excavated ditch below Concrete slab. Backfill tubing with sand. When making 90-degree bends exiting the slab, use metallic 90-degree elbows (one size larger than nominal tubing.) 2. Tubing Through Wall Or Overhead: Tubing slack of 1.8 to 3/16-inch per lineal foot shall be allowed to accommodate thermal expansion. Do not pull tubing tight during installation. Do not rigidly anchor tubing.Protect tubing passing through hollow masonry walls or metal studs with sleeves or grommets(Semco Trisolators or accepted substitute).Protect tubing from nail or screw damage with steel plate protectors. 3. Tubing Supports: Use plastic pipe supports or supports designed for use with plastic tubing. Provide vertical support at every floor with a guide placed between floors. 4. Joints and Connections: Make fittings and connections in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. Make transition joints with manufacturer approved fittings only. 111 5. Fire Rated Wall, Floor or Ceiling Penetrations:Firestopping shall conform to both Flame and Temperature ratings as required by local building codes and ASTM E814. Use firestop material compatible with tubing. I 6. Inspection and Testing:After completion of any section of the installation,test and inspect so there are no visible signs of leakage, cracks, gouges or excess debris. SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15060-6 0208.0 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS I I Q. Corrosion Control Underground Steel Piping Corrosion Protection: Factory wrap all uninsulated underground steel piping systems with protective coating composed of a coal-tar saturated wrapping tape over a 20 mil thick coal-tar epoxy coating. Wrap joints with a minimum of 1/2 width of wrap. Extend wrap not less than 4-inches above grade. 1 R. Pipe Sleeves:Lay out work in advance of pouring concrete and furnish and set sleeves necessary to complete work. 1. Floor Sleeves: Provide sleeves on pipes passing through concrete construction. Extend sleeve 2-inches above finished floor.Caulk all pipes passing through floor with nonshrinking grout or approved caulking compound. Provide Link-Seal sleeve sealing system for slab on grade. Caulk/seal all piping passing through fire rated building assemblies with UL rated assemblies. Provide fire-rated assemblies per local code requirements. 2. Wall Sleeves: Provide sleeves on pipes passing through concrete or masonry construction. Provide sleeve flush with finished face of wall. Caulk all pipes passing through walls with nonshrinking caulking compound. Caulk/seal all piping passing through fire rated building assemblies with UL rated assemblies. Provide fire-rated assemblies per local code requirements. S. Expansion and Flexibility: Install all work with due regard for expansion and contraction to prevent damage to piping, ductwork, equipment, building and its contents. Provide piping offsets, loops, approved type expansion joints,anchors or other means to control piping movement and to minimize pipe forces. T. Escutcheons: Install on all exposed pipes passing through wall or floors and on fixture stops and waste connections to wall. 3.03 EXCAVATION A. General: Do not excavate for mechanical work until the work is ready to proceed without delay, to minimize the total time lapse from excavation to completion of backfilling. Comply with all applicable ay B. Width:Federal Excavateandstate forspipingfetregulations.with 6 inches to 9 inches clearance on both sides of pipe,except where otherwise shown or required for proper installation of pipe joints, fittings, valves and other work. Excavate for other mechanical work to provide minimum practical but adequate working clearances. C. Depth for Direct Support: For work to be supported directly on undisturbed soil, do not excavate beyond indicated depths, and hand-excavate the bottom cut to accurate elevations. Support the following work on undisturbed soil at the bottom of the excavations: 1. Piping of 5 inches and less pipe/tube size. 2. Cast-in-place concrete. D. Depth for Subbase Support: For large piping (6 inches pipe size and larger), tanks and where indicated for other mechanical work, excavate for installation of subbase material in the depth indicated, or, if not otherwise indicated, 6 inches below bottom of work to be supported. E. Depth for Unsatisfactory Soil Conditions: Where unsatisfactory soil condition at the bottom of excavation exists, excavate additional depth as directed to reach satisfactory soil-bearing condition. Backfill with subbase material, compacted as directed,to indicated excavation depth. I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15060-7 0208.0 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS U i F. Excavated Materials: Store excavated material(temporarily)near the excavation,in a manner which will not interfere with or damage the excavation or other work. Do not store under trees (within the drip line). Retain excavated material which complies with the requirements for backfill material. Dispose of excavated material which is either in excess of quantity needed for backfilling or does not comply with requirements for backfill material. 3.04 BASE PREPARATION 1 A. Subbase Installation: Where indicated, install subbase material to receive mechanical work, and compact by tamping to form a firm base for the work. For 4 inches and larger piping, horizontal cylindrical tanks and similar work,shape and subbase to fit the shape of the bottom 90 degrees of the cylinder,for uniform continuous support. Provide finely-graded subbase material for wrapped,coated and plastic pipe and tank. Shape subbases and bottoms of excavation with recesses to receive pipe bells,flanges connections,valves and similar enlargements in the piping systems and set bottom of trench at proper pitch and correct elevations with subbase material. 3.05 BACKFILLING A. Do not backfill until installed mechanical work has been tested and accepted wherever testing is indicated. Install drainage fill where indicated,and tamp to a uniform firm density. Backfill with finely- graded subbase material to 6 inches above wrapped, coated and plastic piping and tanks, and to center line of other tanks (where recommended by tank manufacturer, use "pea gravel" backfill). Condition backfill material by either drying or adding water uniformly, to whatever extent may be necessary to facilitate compaction to the required densities. Do not backfill with frozen materials. I 3.06 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM A. Prior to starting work,verify system is complete,flushed and clean. I B. Comply with all applicable code requirements including procedure outlined by Health Department. 3.07 CLEANING I A. General: Clean all dirt and construction dust and debris from all mechanical piping systems and leave in a new condition. Touch up paint where necessary. B. Sanitary and Storm Drainage System: 1. Remove construction debris from cleanouts,drains,strainers,baskets,traps,etc.,and leave same accessible and operable. Place plugs in the end of uncompleted piping at the end of the day or whenever work tops. 2. Before final acceptance of completed sewer system,flush and clean the entire system with water. Trap and remove solid material obtained from flushing and cleaning from the new system. Do not allow debris to enter the sewer system. C. Gas Piping: Blow clear of debris with nitrogen or oil free air. Clean all low point strainers and pockets. D. Heating Water Systems: I 1. Use one pound of trisodium phosphate per 50 gallons in the system,or one pound of sodium carbonate for each 30 gallons in the system or one pound of sodium hydroxide(lye)for each 50 gallons in the system. I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15060-8 0208.0 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS I 2. Fill, vent and circulate the system with this solution at design operating temperature. After circulating for four hours, drain and fill with fresh water including glycol. 1 3. Test for pH and add sufficient amount of the cleaning chemical to obtain a pH between 7 and 8. 4. Clean all strainers and remove start-up strainers(from suction diffusers)after the system has operated for one week. 3.08 TEST A. General I1. Minimum duration of two hours or longer, as directed for all tests. Furnish report of test observation signed by qualified inspector. Make all tests before applying insulation, backfilling,or otherwise concealing piping or connecting fixtures or equipment. Where part of the system must be tested to avoid concealment before the entire system is complete,test that portion separately, same as for entire system. B. Sewer: Furnish all facilities and personnel for conducting the test. Test in accord with the requirements of State Plumbing Inspector and local authorities. C. Plumbing Waste and Vent Piping: Hydrostatic test by filling to highest point,but not less than 10 foot water column on major horizontal portion. D. Water Piping: Hydrostatic pressure of 100 psig without loss for four hours. E. Natural Gas Piping: One half hour minimum air at 60 psig for 2 psig gas,and 15 minutes at 10 psig for 7 inch water gauge natural gas or as approved and certified by serving utility. F. Heating Piping: 75 psig hydrostatic for 30 psig systems without loss for four hours. END OF SECTION I I I I I I SEPTEMBER 2004 USD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15060-9 0208.0 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS I SECTION 15100 VALVES I PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The requirements of this Section apply to the valving for the systems specified elsewhere in Division 1 15. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide valves from a single manufacturer where possible with manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. B. Valve size shall be the same as connecting pipe size unless otherwise noted. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Division 1 and Section 15010. B. Include data on valves and accessories. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 BALL,CHECK,STOP CHECK,NON SLAM CHECK,BUTTERFLY,GATE,GLOBE,LUBRICATED PLUG VALVE TYPES A. Manufacturers: Crane, ITT, Grinnell, Hammond, Jenkins, Kennedy, Mueler, Lunkenheimer, Milwauke,Nibco,Powell,Stockham,Walworth or accepted substitute. Grooved end valves Victaulic, Gustin-Bacon or accepted substitute. Grinnell numbers are given except as noted. B. Domestic Water and Chilled Water Systems: 1. Valves 2 inches and smaller. a. Ball, Fig. 3500. 125 psi, bronze body, full port. b. Check, Fig. 3300. Class 125, bronze body, horizontal swing. c. Gate, Fig. 3050. 150 psi, bronze body, non-rising stem. 2. Valves 2 inches and larger: a. Butterfly(<200 deg. F), Fig. 8000. 150 psi, cast iron body. b. Check, Fig. 6300 A. Class 125, cast iron body, horizontal swing. c. Gate, Fig. 6020 A. Class 125, cast iron body, non-rising stem. d. Globe, Fig. 6200 A. Class 125, cast iron body, renewable seat, bronze mounted. 1 SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15100-1 0208.0 VALVES f 1 C. Heating Water System: 1. Valves 2 inches and smaller: 1111 a. Ball (<200 deg. F), Fig. 3500(for hot water only). 125 psi, bronze body,full port. b. Check, Fig. 3300. Class 125, bronze body, horizontal swing. c. Gate, Fig. 3050. 150 psi, bronze body, non-rising stem. I d. Globe, Fig. 3240. 150 psi, bronze body. 2. Valves 2-1/2 inches and larger: I a. Butterfly(<200 deg. F), Fig. 8000 (for hot water only). 150 psi, cast iron body. b. Check, Fig. 6300 A. Class 125, cast iron body, horizontal swing. I' c. Gate, Fig. 6020 A. Class 125, cast iron body, non-rising stem. d. Globe, Fig. 6200 A. Class 125, cast iron body, renewable seat, bronze mounted. I D. Natural Gas: 1. 5 psig or less, 2 inches and smaller ball valves,Watts 6000UL.Threaded,250 psi, 2 piece, bronze.. 2. 5 psig or less,2-1/2 inches and larger, 125 psi,all bronze or cast iron body/bronze trim.AGA approved. -- 2.02 WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES I A. Up to 2 inches : Bronze body, stainless steel and thermoplastic internal parts,threaded ends. B. Over 2 inches: Cast iron body, bronze fitted,elastomer diaphragm and seat disc,flanged ends. I C. Provide each pressure reducing valve with strainer on inlet or internal strainer. D. Manufacturers: Cash-Acme,Fisher,Foster,Leslie,McAlear,Spence,Watts or accepted substitute. 2.03 RELIEF VALVES A. Bronze body, teflon seat, steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, capacities ASME certified and labeled. B. Manufacturers: Cash-Acme, Fisher, Foster, Spence,Watts or accepted substitute. 111 2.04 REDUCED PRESSURE BACKFLOW PREVENTER A. Reduced pressure backflow preventer complete with shutoff valves, two separate check valves, differential relief valve and test cocks. USC Foundation for Cross Connection Control,State Health officials and serving utilities approved. Bronze bodies on units 2 inches and smaller, and cast iron bodies with bronze trim on units 2-1/2 inches and larger. B. Manufacturers: Febco, Conbraco, Wilkins, Watts or accepted substitute. SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15100-2 0208.0 VALVES I I 2.05 DOUBLE CHECK BACKFLOW PREVENTER IA. Provide a double check valve assembly complete with isolation valves,check module assembly,test cocks,and strainer. USC Foundation for Cross Connection Control,State Health officials and serving I utilities approved. Bronze bodies on units 2 inches and smaller,and cast iron bodies with bronze trim on units 2-1/2 inches and larger. B. Manufacturers: Febco, Conbraco, Wilkins, Watts or accepted substitute. 1 2.06 PRIMING VALVES I A. Locate in closets, under counters or in walls behind Milcor or access panels as specified in Section 15050. Use copper specified in Section 15060, Pipe and Pipe Fittings,for all underground priming lines. IB. Manufacturers: PPP, Wade,Zurn, Smith or accepted substitute. 2.07 DISHWASHER AND COOKING EQUIPMENT WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE IA. All brass,single seat type for dead end service,with a renewable stainless steel seat and valve.Code approved for potable water usage. Provide shut-off valves, pressure relief valve unions, drain and bypass. Designed for service on hot water to reduce pressure per manufacturer's specification. IB. Manufacturers: Leslie, Watts, Fisher, Spencer, Cash-Acme, McAlear, or accepted substitute. 2.08 GAS PRESSURE REGULATORS I A. Size and capacity as required for connected load. Style and model as approved by gas supplier. IB. Manufacturers: Maxitrol, Rockwell, Fisher, Reliance, or accepted substitute. 2.09 WATER BALANCING VALVE I A. Balancing fitting with differential pressure taps,flow setting indicating pointer, brass or bronze body and trim with orifice flow restriction. 300 psi rated. I B. Manufacturers: B&G"Circuit Setter",Taco,Armstrong,Thrush,Wheatley, Flow Design or accepted substitute. At contractor's option,balancing valves 3 inches and larger may be butterfly style,Jenkins No.222 EL or accepted substitute as specified in Section 15050. I2.10 VALVE OPERATORS A. Butterfly Valve Operators: Locking lever for shut-off service; "Memory Stop"for lever handle and I slotted index plate for infinite number of settings for throttling service; gear operator with babbitt sprocket rim for chain operated valves and gear operators on all 6 inches or larger valves. B. Butterfly Valve Style: Lug type with cap screws for all valves utilized for equipment isolation for Iservicing. I I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15100-3 I 0208.0 VALVES I I 2.11 GAS EARTHQUAKE VALVE A. Gas valve providing automatic shutoff in case of earthquake. UL listed, AGA certified and FM approved. The sensing means of the valve or system to actuate shutoff within 5 seconds when subjected to a horizontal, sinusoidal oscillation having a peak acceleration of 0.3G (2.94m/s2)for a period of 0.4 seconds.The sensing means of valve or system not to actuate the shutoff means when subjected for 5 seconds to horizontal, sinusoidal oscillations having 1. A peak acceleration of 0.4G (3.94 m/s2)with a period of 0.1 second, I 2. A peak acceleration of 0.08G (0.078 m/s2)with a period of 0.4 second, and 3. A peak acceleration of 0.08G (0.078 m/s2)with a period of 1.0 second. 1 B. Valve requires manual reset.Provide all required spare parts to allow resetting after being activated. Valve to be same size as line size installed. SafeTQuake STQ or accepted substitute. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION I A. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. B. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. Coordinate size and location of access I door with Section 15050. C. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. I D. Provide one plug cock wrench for every five plug cocks sized 2 inches and smaller. Provide each plug cock sized 2-1/2 inches and larger with a wrench with set screw. I E. Mechanical Actuators: Install mechanical actuators with chain operators where indicated, where valves 4 inches and larger are mounted more than 7 feet above the floor, and where manual operation is difficult because of valve size, pressure differential or other operating conditions. Drop111 chains to 6 feet, 6 inches above the floor. F. Lubricant-Seal: Select and install plug valves with lubricant-seal except where frequent usage is indicated or can be reasonably expected to occur. G. Fluid Control: Install gate, ball, globe, plug, and butterfly valves to comply with ANSI B31. Install check valves where indicated and where flow reversal is obviously not desirable and can be reasonably expected to occur,including piping at the discharge of pumps. Install silent check valves where necessary to eliminate water hammer occurring from reversal of flow. H. Application: Valve type and style as shown on the Drawings. Where style is not indicated, use the following: 1. Domestic Water: Ball valves for 2 inches and smaller and butterfly for 2 inches and over. I I I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15100-4 0208.0 VALVES I I 2. Heating Water: Use gate valves in mechanical and/or boiler rooms and globe valves for throttling service. For temperatures up to 200 deg. F, ball and butterfly valves may be used with lever operators with infinite number of settings up to 4 inch sizes and gear operator with setting indictor on larger sizes. 3. Use non-rising stem gate valves. END OF SECTION I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 SEPTEMBER 2004 0208.0 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15100-5 VALVES I I SECTION 15140 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide pipe and equipment hanger, support, anchors and all related items for complete systems. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Supports for sprinkler piping and standpipes: In conformance with NFPA 13 and 14. B. Provide pre-manufactured horizontal piping and ductwork hangers, clamps, hanger rod, shields, supports, etc. C. Seismic Requirements: Provide seismic restraints in accord with the following Seismic Hazard Levels (SHL)as recommended in the"Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems,"latest edition, SMACNA. See 15240. 1. SHL "A": All seismic zone "3" (UBC Chapter 16) and all occupancy categories "I" and "II" (UBC Chapter 16)in seismic zone"2B". 2. SHL"B": All occupancy categories"III"and"IV"in seismic zone"2B".. ' 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Division 1 and Section 15050. B. Submit construction details,and performance characteristics for each type and size of anchor,hanger and support. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Listed Types: The Manufacturers Standardization Society(MSS) Piping Types listed with Grinnell figure numbers in parentheses where applicable (or other manufacturer's as noted). ITT Grinnell, Elcen, Michigan, Super Strut, Kindorf, Unistrut or accepted substitute. B. Horizontal Piping Hangers and Supports: 1. Adjustable Clevis Hanger: MSS Type 1 (Fig.260). 1 2. Adjustable Band Hanger: MSS Type 7 (Fig. 97),fabricated from steel. 3. Adjustable Swivel-Band Hanger: MSS Type 10 (Fig.70). 4. Clamp: MSS Type 4(Fig.212, 216). 5. Double-Bolt Clamp: MSS Type 3 (Fig. 295A, 295H), including pipe spacers. 6. Pipe Anchors: (Carpenter&Peterson Fig. 145CI)Steel weld type to pipe for sizes up to 20 inches in diameter. SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15140-1 0208.0 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS I 2.02 SADDLES AND SHIELDS A. Listed Types: The Manufacturers Standardization Society(MSS) Piping Types listed with Grinnell figure numbers in parentheses where applicable(or other manufacturer's as noted). 1 B. Protection Saddles: MSS Type 39 (Fig. 160). C. Protection Shields: MSS Type 40 (Fig. 167). D. Preinsulated Pipe Supports: Pipe Shields Inc.or accepted substitute. 1. Pipe supported on rods-Model A1000,through A4000 and A9000. 1 2. Pipe supported on flat surfaces-Model A1000,A2000,A5000 through A7000. 3. Pipe supported on pipe rolls-Model A3000 through A6000 and A8000. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS HANGER MATERIALS A. Metal Framing: Provide products complying with NEMA STD ML 1. B. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A-36. C. Cement Grout: Portland Cement (ASTM C-150, Type I or Type III) and clean uniformly graded, natural sand (ASTM C-404, Size No. 2). Mix at a ratio of 1.0 part cement to 3.0 parts sand, by volume with only the minimum amount of water required for placement and hydration. ' D. Heavy Duty Steel Trapezes: Fabricate from steel shapes selected for the loads required;weld steel in accordance with AWS Standards. E. Pipe Guides: Provide factory-fabricated guides, of cast semi-steel or heavy fabricated steel, consisting of a bolted two-section outer cylinder and base with a two-section guiding spider bolted tight to the pipe. Size guide and spiders to clear pipe and insulation (if any), and cylinder. Provide guides of the length recommended by the manufacturer to allow indicated travel. F. Standard Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 307, Grade A. G. Concrete Anchors: Rawl Lok/Bolt, Hilti "HSL," ITT Phillips, Red Head Wedge Anchors, Ramset Trubolt or Dynabolt or accepted substitute. H. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard rust inhibitive primer. 2.04 ROOF EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. General: Coordinate the location and type of each roof equipment support with the roofing system supplier. Systems to maintain roof warranty. Minimum 18 gauge galvanized steel with fully mitered and welded corners,internal bulkhead reinforcing,integral base plates,pressure-treated wood nailer and 18 gauge galvanized steel counterflashing.Compensate for roof slope so top of support is level. Construct curb to meet or exceed all seismic forces. B. Manufacturers:Thycurb, Custom Curb,Vibrex or accepted substitute. I 1 SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15140-3 0208.0 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 1 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS I A. General: Proceed with the installation of hangers, supports and anchors only after the required building structural work has been completed in areas where the work is to be installed. Correct I inadequacies including(but not limited to)the proper placement of inserts,anchors and other building structural attachments. 1. Install hangers,supports,clamps,and attachments to support piping and equipment properly from the building structure. Use no wire or perforated metal to support piping, and no supports from other piping or equipment. For exposed continuous pipe runs,install hangers and supports of the same type and style as installed for adjacent similar piping. 2. Prevent electrolysis in the support of copper tubing by the use of hangers and supports which are copper plated, or by other recognized industry methods. 3. Support fire sprinkler piping independently of other piping and in accordance with NFPA I Pamphlet 13. 4. Arrange supports to prevent eccentric loading of joists and joist girders. Locate supports at panel points only. 5. Install hangers and supports to provide the indicated pipe slopes,and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed by ANSI B31 are not exceeded. Comply with the following installation requirements: a. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping outside the insulated piping support. Do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ANSI B31. b. Insulated Pipe Supports: Insulated pipe supports shall be supplied and installed on all insulated pipe and tubing. c. Load Rating: All insulated pipe supports shall be load rated by the manufacturer based upon testing and analysis in conformance with ASME 831.1, MSS SP-58, MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. d. Support Type: Manufacturer's recommendations, hanger style and load shall determine support type. 111 e. Insulated Piping Supports: Where insulated piping with continuous vapor barrier or where exposed to view in finished areas is specified, install hard maple wood insulation shields (Elcen Fig. 216) or steel pipe covering protection shields (MSS type 39)at each hanger. B. Provisions for Movement: 1 1. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems and to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors,and to facilitate the action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units. 2. Install hangers and supports so that equipment and piping live and dead loading and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. C. Pipe Hangers and Supports: I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15140-4 0208.0 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS I I1. Vertical Spacing: Support at base,everyfloor height not exceeding 10 feet and required by Code and just below roof line. I2. Screwed or Welded Steel or Copper Piping: Maximum hanger spacing shall be as follows: I Steel Copper 1-1/4 inches and smaller 6 foot span 5 foot span 1-1/2 inch pipe 9 foot span 6 foot span 2 inch pipe 10 foot span 10 foot span I 2-1/2 inch 11 foot span 10 foot span 4 inches and larger 12 foot span 10 foot span 3. Cast Iron Soil Pipe: I a. Hubless and Compression Joint: At every other joint except when developed length exceeds 4 feet, then at each joint. Ib. Additional Support: Provide at each horizontal branch and/or at concentrated loads to maintain alignment and prevent sagging. I 4. Install additional hangers or supports at concentrated loads such as pumps,valves, etc. to maintain alignment and prevent sagging. I 5. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. 6. Place a hanger within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. 1 7. Support Rod: Hanger support rods sized as follows: I Pipe Size Rod Diameter 3/8 inch Max. Load 2 inches and smaller 610 lb. 2-1/2 to 3 inches 1/2 inch 1130 lb. I 4 inches 5/8 inch 1810 lb. 6 inches 3/4 inch 2710 lb. 8 through 12 inches 7/8 inch 3770 lb. 1 D. Adjust hangers and supports to bring piping to proper levels and elevations. E. Provide all necessary structural attachments such as anchors, beam clamps, hanger flanges and I brackets in accordance with MSS SP-69. Attachments to beams wherever possible. Supports suspended from other piping, equipment, metal decking, etc., are not acceptable. F. Horizontal banks of piping may be supported on common steel channel member spaced not more I than the shortest allowable span required on the individual pipe. Maintain piping at its relative lateral position using clamps or clips. Allow lines subject to thermal expansion to roil axially or slide. Size channel struts for piping weights. I I 1 ISEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15140-5 0208.0 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS I 3.02 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORS A. Install anchors at the proper locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ANSI B31, where recommended in SMACNA "Seismic Restraint Manual" or exceeding manufacturer's recommended loading,and to prevent the transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment. B. Welding: Provide anchor by welding steel shapes, plates and bars to the piping and/or equipment and to the structure. Comply with ANSI B31 and AWS standards and SMACNA"Seismic Restraint Manual." C. Bolting: Provide standard plate washers under heads and nuts of bolts bearing on wood. Soap 1 threads of lag bolts prior to installing. D. Structural Blocking: Locate as indicated and as required to support mechanical piping and equipment. E. Where expansion compensators are indicated,install anchors in accordance with the expansion unit manufacturer's written instructions, to limit movement of piping and forces to the maximums recommended by the manufacturer of each unit. F. Anchor Spacing: Install anchors at the ends of principal pipe runs,at intermediate points in pipe runs between expansion loops and bends. Make provisions for presetting of anchors as required to accommodate both expansion and contraction of piping. G. Painting: Refer to Section 15050. 1 3.03 ROOF EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS, EQUIPMENT CURBS AND PIPE CURB ASSEMBLIES A. Provide prefabricated units for all roof penetrations for mechanical equipment. Set supports on the , structural deck. Do not set supports on insulation or roofing. Provide level supports by prefabricated slope built into curb. B. Equipment supports: Provide for roof mounted equipment which does not require a structural roof deck penetration. C. Equipment Curbs:Provide for equipment which requires a structural roof deck penetration other than piping or conduit. D. Pipe Curb Assemblies: Provide for piping and electrical conduit which penetrates the roof deck to service equipment above the roof. END OF SECTION 1 i I i I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15140-6 0208.0 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 1 SECTION 15240 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT,SOUND,SEISMIC AND VIBRATION ISOLATION PART 1 -GENERAL 111I I I I I ID.I I1.'I1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide seismic, sound and vibration isolation with all related components for mechanical equipment specified elsewhere. 1.02 REFERENCES,CODES AND STANDARDS A. ASHRAE-Guide to Average Noise Criteria Curves. B. Seismic Requirements: Seismic restraint manual, latest edition, SMACNA. C. UBC. State and local codes. E. NFPA. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain ASHRAE criteria for average noise criteria curves for all equipment at full load condition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division 1 and Section 15010. B. Provide submittals for products as follows: Descriptive Data:Catalog cuts or data sheets on vibration isolators and specific restraints detailing compliance with the specification. Detailed schedules of flexible and rigidly mounted equipment, showing vibration isolators and seismic restraints by referencing numbered descriptive drawings. 2. Shop Drawings:Submit fabrication details for equipment bases including dimensions, structural member sizes and support point locations. Provide all details of suspension and support for ceiling hung equipment. Where walls, floors, slabs or supplementary steel work are used for seismic restraint locations, details of acceptable attachment methods for ducts, conduit and pipe to be included. Restraint manufacturers'submittals must include spacing, static loads and seismic loads at all attachment and support points. Provide specific details of seismic restraints and anchors; include number,size and locations for each piece of equipment. 3. Seismic Certification and Analysis: Seismic restraint calculations to be provided for all connections of equipment to the structure. Calculations must be stamped by a registered professional engineer licensed in Oregon.Analysis to indicate calculated dead loads, static seismic loads and capacity of materials utilized for connections to equipment structure.Analysis to detail anchoring methods, bolt diameter, embedment and/or welded length.All seismic restraint devices shall be designed to accept,without failure, the seismic force level per code requirements. SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15240-1 0208.0 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT, SOUND,SEISMIC AND VIBRATION ISOLATION I I 1.05 CERTIFICATES A. Submit manufacturer's certificate that isolators are properly installed and properly adjusted to meet or exceed specified requirements. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 1 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Equipment:Amber/Booth, Mason,Vibrex or accepted substitute. 2. Ductwork and piping:Amber/Booth, Mason,Vibrex, I.S.A.T. or accepted substitute. 3. Sound control: IAC, Koppers, Rink Sound Control or accepted substitute. 1 4. Mason numbers used as basis of design. 2.02 NEOPRENE PAD (NP) 1 A. 5/16"" thick neoprene pad consisting of square waffle modules minimum size 2-inch x 2-inch. Load distribution to be sized as required. Mason"W". I 2.03 SPRING ISOLATORS WITH NEOPRENE(SIN) A. Free standing and laterally stable without any housing and complete with a molded neoprene cup or 1/4" neoprene acoustical friction pad between the baseplate and the support. All mountings shall have leveling bolts that must be rigidly bolted to the equipment. Spring diameters to be no less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. Springs to have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50%of the rated deflection. Mason"SLF". 2.04 SPRING ISOLATORS WITH NEOPRENE, LIMITED TRAVEL(SINLT) A. Restrained spring mountings to have an SLF mounting as described in B above, within a rigid housing that includes vertical limit stops to prevent spring extension when weight is removed.The housing to serve as blocking during erection. Steel spacer to be removed after adjustment. Limit stops to be out of contact during normal operation. Provide an internal isolation pad. Mason "SLR". 2.05 SPRING HANGERS AND NEOPRENE (SHN) 1 A. Hangers to consist of rigid steel frames containing minimum 1-1/4" thick neoprene elements at the top and a steel spring. Seated in a steel washer reinforced neoprene cup on the bottom. The neoprene element and the cup to have neoprene bushings projecting through the steel box. Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes to be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30 degree arc from side to side before contacting the rod bushing. Mason"30N". 2.06 SEISMIC SWAY BRACE(SSB) A. Seismic Cable Restraints to consist of galvanized steel aircraft cables sized to resist seismic loads with a minimum safety factor of two and arranged to provide all-directional restraint. Cable end connections to be steel assemblies that swivel to final installation angle and utilize clamping bolts to provide proper cable engagement. Cable assemblies Mason"SCB","SSB","SCBH"and "SCBV". I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15240-2 0208.0 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT, SOUND,SEISMIC AND VIBRATION ISOLATION lIi•••mm.m•..•mmmmmmmmmmm=mm _____! B. Seismic solid braces to consist of steel angles or channels to resist seismic loads with a minimum safety factor of 2 and arranged to provide all directional restraint. Seismic solid brace end connectors to be steel assemblies that swivel to the final installation angle and utilize two through bolts to provide proper attachment. Mason"SSB". ' C. Steel angles, sized to prevent buckling, to be clamped to pipe or equipment rods utilizing a minimum of three ductile iron clamps at each restraint location when required.Welding of support rods is not acceptable. Mason "SRC". D. Pipe clevis cross bolt braces are required in all restraint locations. Preformed channels deep enough to be held in place by bolts passing over the cross bolt. Mason "CCB". 2.07 SNUBBERS(SN) A. All-directional seismic snubbers to consist of interlocking steel members retrained by a one-piece molded neoprene bushing of bridge bearing neoprene. Bushing to be replaceable and a minimum of 1/4 inch thick. Rated loadings shall be exceed 100 psi. Snubber end caps to be removable to allow inspection of internal clearances. Mason "Z-1225". 2.08 ROOFTOP SPRING CURB(RSC) A. Curb mounted rooftop HVAC equipment to be mounted on spring isolation curbs. The lower member to consist of a sheet metal Z section containing adjustable and removable steel springs that support the upper floating section. The upper frame to provide continuous support for the equipment and be captive so as to resiliently resist wind and seismic forces. All directional ' neoprene snubber bushings to be a minimum of 1/4"thick. Steel springs to be laterally stable and rest on neoprene acoustical pads. Hardware to be plated and the springs provided with a rust resistant finish. The curbs waterproofing shall consist of a continuous galvanized flexible counter flashing nailed over the lower curbs waterproofing and joined at the corners by EPDM bellows. All spring locations to have access ports with removable waterproof covers. Lower curbs shall have provision for 2" of insulation. The roof curbs to be built to seismically contain the rooftop unit. The unit to be solidly fastened to the top floating rail, and the lower Z section anchored to the roof structure. Mason"RSC". 2.09 FLEXIBLE EXPANSION JOINTS(FEJ) ' A. Flexible spherical expansion joints to employ peroxide cured EPDM in the covers, liners and tire cord frictioning. Solid steel rings shall be used within the raised face rubber ends to prevent pullout. Sizes 2" and larger to have two spheres reinforced with a ring between spheres to maintain shape and complete with split ductile iron and steel flanges with hooked or similar interlocks. Sizes 3/4" to 1-1/2" may have threaded bolted flange assemblies, one sphere and cable retention. 14" and smaller connectors to be rated at 250 psi up to 190 degrees F. with a uniform drop in allowable pressure to 190 psi at 250 degrees F. 16" and larger connectors are ' rated 180 psi at 190 degrees F. and 135 psi at 250 degrees F. Safety factors to burst and flange pullout to be a minimum of 3/1. All joints must have permanent markings verifying a 5 minute factory test at twice the rated pressure. B. Expansion joints to be installed in piping gaps equal to the length of the expansion joints under pressure. C. Submittals shall include test reports showing minimum reductions of 20 dB in vibration accelerations and 10 dB in sound pressure levels at typical blade passage frequencies on this or a similar product by the same manufacturer. Mason "SAFEFLEX", "SFDEJ", "SFEJ", "SFDCR" or "SFU"and"CR"control rods. SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15240-3 0208.0 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT, SOUND,SEISMIC AND VIBRATION ISOLATION 2.10 FLEXIBLE STEEL HOSE(FSH) 111 A. Flexible stainless steel hose shall have stainless steel braid and carbon steel fittings. Sizes 3" and I larger to be flanged. Smaller sizes to have threaded couplings. Minimum lengths to be 7 inches for 1/2" piping up to 16 inches for 8"piping. Mason"BBS". Flanged Male Nipples I 3x14 10x26 1/2x9 1-1/2x 13 4x15 12x28 3/4x10 2 x 14 5x19 14x30 1x11 2-1/2x18 6x20 16x32 1-1/4x12 111 8 x 22 2.11 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTION (FDC) I A. Neoprene loaded vinyl material or neoprene loaded canvas with vapor barrier. Flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke spread rating of 50 or less, per ASTM E84. Not affected by temperatures as low as minus 10°F or as high as 200°F. B. Flexible Connections:Ventglass manufactured by Ventfabrics, Amatex or accepted substitute. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL I A. All vibration isolators, sound isolators and seismic restraint systems must be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturers written instructions and all certified submittal data. I B. Installation of vibration isolators and seismic restraints must not cause any change of position of equipment, piping or duct work, resulting in stresses or misalignment. C. Coordinate work with other trades to avoid rigid contact with the building. I D. Overstressing of the building structure must not occur because of overhead support of equipment. Contractor to submit loads to the structural engineer or record for review. I E. Drill-in concrete anchors for ceiling and wall installation to be full diameter and the standard product of the manufacturer. I F. Vibration isolation manufacturer to furnish integral structural steel bases as required. G. Where piping passes through walls, floors or ceilings the vibration isolation manufacturer to provide split wall seals. H. Locate isolation hangers as near to the overhead support structure as possible. I I I I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15240-4 0208.0 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT, SOUND,SEISMIC AND VIBRATION ISOLATION I 3.02 VIBRATION ISOLATION PIPING A. Horizontal Pipe Isolation: The first three pipe hangers in the main lines near the mechanical equipment to be SHN type. SHN hangers to be used in all transverse braced isolated locations. Brace hanger rods with clamps. Horizontal runs to be isolated by SHN type hangers. Floor supported piping to rest on SINLT isolators. If piping is connected to equipment located in basements and hangs from ceilings under occupied spaces the first three hangers to have 0.75" deflection for pipe sizes up to and including 3", 1-1/2" deflection for pipe sizes up to and including 6", and 2-1/2"deflection thereafter. Hangers shall be located as close to the overhead structure as practical. Where piping connects to mechanical equipment install "FEJ" expansion joints or stainless hoses. A. Riser Isolation: Risers to be suspended from SHN hangers or supported by SIN mountings, anchored with pipe guides. Steel springs to be a minimum of 0.75" except in those expansion locations where additional deflection is required to limit load changes to plus or minus 25% anticipated expansion and construction at each support point, initial and final loads on the building structure, spring defection changes and seismic loads. 3.03 SEISMIC RESTRAINT OF PIPING A. Seismically restrain all piping listed as .1,2. or 3. below. Use SSB cables. 1. Fuel oil piping, gas piping, medical gas piping, and compressed air piping that is 1" or larger. 2. Piping located in boiler rooms, mechanical equipment rooms, and refrigeration equipment rooms that is 1-1/4"and larger. 3. All other piping 2-1/2"and larger. B. Transverse piping restraints to be at 40' maximum spacing for all pipe sizes, except where lesser spacing is required to limit anchorage loads. C. Longitudinal restraints to be at 80' maximum spacing for all pipe sizes, except where lesser spacing is required to limit anchorage loads. ' D. Where thermal expansion is a consideration, guides and anchors may be used as transverse and longitudinal restraints provided they have a capacity equal to or greater than the restraint loads in addition to the loads induced by expansion or contraction. E. For all gas piping transverse restraints must be a 20' maximum and longitudinal restraints at 40' maximum spacing. F. Transverse restraint for one pipe section may also act as a longitudinal restraint for a pipe section of the same size connected perpendicular to it if the restraint is installed within 24"of the elbow. G. Hold down clamps must be used to attach pipe to all trapeze members before applying restraints. ' H. Branch lines may not be used to restrain main lines. I I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15240-5 0208.0 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT, SOUND,SEISMIC AND VIBRATION ISOLATION I 3.04 VIBRATION ISOLATION OF DUCTWORK A. All discharge runs for a distance of 50' from the connected equipment to be isolated from the building structure by means of SHN hangers or SIN floor isolators. Spring deflection to be a minimum of 0.75". A. All duct runs having air velocity of 1000 fpm or more to be isolated from the building structure by I SHN hangers or SIN floor supports.Spring deflection to be a minimum of 0.75". B. Flexible Duct Connections: Squarely align sheet metal ducts with the fan prior to installation of the flexible connection. Install connections so the fan is able to move 1-inch in any direction without causing metal-to metal contact or stretching taught the flexible connection. Install the connections so that the clear space is minimum 4-inches and the connection has a minimum of 1-1/2-inch of slack material. Install flexible connections per SMACNA. I 3.05 SEISMIC RESTRAINT OF DUCTWORK A. Seismically restrain all duct work with SSB restraints as listed below: 1 1. Restrain rectangular ducts with cross sectional area of 6 sq.ft. or larger. 2. Restrain round ducts with diameters of 28"or larger. 3. Restrain flat oval ducts the same as rectangular ducts of the same nominal size. 4. Ductwork suspended by hangers 12 inches or less from the structure is excluded from isolation. 1 B. Transverse restraints to occur at 30' intervals or at both ends of the duct run if less than the specified interval.Transverse restraints to be installed at each duct turn and at each end of a duct run. C. Longitudinal restraints to occur at 60' intervals with at least one restraint per duct run.Transverse restraints for one duct section may also act as a longitudinal restraint for a duct section connected perpendicular to it if the restraints are installed within 4' of the intersection of the ducts and if the restraints are sized for the larger duct. Duct joints to conform to SMACNA duct construction standards. D. The ductwork must be reinforced at the restraint locations. Reinforcement to consist of an 111 additional angle on top of the ductwork that is attached to the support hanger rods. Ductwork is to be attached to both upper and lower trapeze. E. Walls, including gypsum board non bearing partitions, which have ducts running through them may replace a typical transverse brace. Provide channel framing around ducts and solid blocking between the duct and frame. I 3.06 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT A. All mechanical equipment to be vibration isolated and seismically restrained as per the schedule. I B. Equipment Schedule 1. Equipment: Type: Base Mounted Pumps SIN, SN Boilers NP Rooftop Air Handler Fans SINLT I SEPTEMBER 2004 USD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15240-6 0208.0 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT, SOUND,SEISMIC AND VIBRATION ISOLATION Expansion Tanks NP 1 Rooftop Air Handler Casings RSC Piping, ducts,flues SHN 2. Motors: <10 HP 3/4 inch deflection >15 HP 1-1/2 inch deflection >50 HP 2 inch deflection END OF SECTION I I I 1 . 1 I I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15240-7 0208.0 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT, SOUND,SEISMIC AND VIBRATION ISOLATION I SECTION 15260 I MECHANICAL INSULATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide piping, ductwork and equipment insulation including jacketing, adhesive and all related accessories for complete insulated system. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator: Company specializing in piping insulation application with three years minimum experience. I IC.'1B Insulation,Jacket and all Related Materials: Flame spread rating of 25 and smoke developed rating of 50. Codes: Comply with all applicable codes. D. Installation: Install in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data and installation instructions under provisions of Division 1 and Section 15010. 111111 B. Include product description, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations. 1.04 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver product to site under provisions of Section 15010. B. Store and protect product under provisions of Section 15010. C. Store insulation in original shipping container with labeling in place. Do not install damaged insulation. I1.05 FIRE HAZARD CLASSIFICATION A. Maximum fire hazard classification of the composite insulation to be not more than a flame spread of 25,fuel contributed of 50 and smoke developed of 50 as tested by ASTM E84,NFPA 255 and UL 723 method. B. Test pipe insulation in accordance with the requirements of UL "Pipe and Equipment Coverings R5583 400 8.15.",ASTM C1136 and ASTM C547. C. Test duct insulation in accordance with ASTM E84 and ASTM C1071 and bear the UL label. I I II 1.06 LINING MATERIALS A. Materials to be mold, humidity, and erosion resistant surface to meet the requirements of UL 181. ISEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15260-1 0208.0 MECHANICAL INSULATION PART 2 -PRODUCTS I 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Insulating Manufacturers: Johns Manville, Knauf, Armstrong, Owens-Corning, Pabco, IMCOA, Certain Teed or accepted substitute. B. Adhesive Manufacturers: Benjamin Foster, 3M, Borden, Kingco or Armstrong. 2.02 PIPING INSULATION,JACKETING AND ACCESSORIES I A. Fiberglass Pipe Insulation: 1. Pipe system to minus 10 to 55 deg.F: Flexible,preformed,pre-slit,self-sealing elastomeric, thermal conductivity of 0.27 Btu/hr.sq.ft./in.at 75 deg.F and vapor transmission rating of 0.2 perms/inch. Apply in thickness necessary to prevent condensation on the surface. 2. Piping Systems 55 to 600 deg. F: Glass fiber preformed pipe insulation with a minimum K- value of 0.23 at 75 deg. F, a minimum density of 3.5 pounds per cubic foot. 3. Pipe System Up to 1200 deg. F: High temperature molded calcium silicate insulation with factory applied aluminum metal jacket. Furnish with aluminum snap straps. B. Elastomeric Foam: ASTM C534;flexible,cellular elastomeric.Thermal Conductivity value: .027 at 75°F. Maximum Flame Spread: 25. Maximum Smoke Developed: 50 (3/4-inch thick and below). Connection: Waterproof vapor retarder adhesve as needed. UV Protection: UV outdoor protective coating as needed. C. Calcium Silicate: Hydrous calcium silicate, tested in accordance with ASTM C533 Type I with minimum of 1200 PSI at 5 percent compression. Factory applied jacket, Class II. Maximum 1200°F temperature limit. D. Plastic Pipe Insulation:Flexible unicellular polyolefin foam insulation complying to ASTM C534,ASTM E84 (25/50), UL 723 (25/50). Thermal conductivity of 0.24 (BTU/in)/(hr/sq.ft./deg. F)at 75°F. Preslit longitudinal seam. Imoca. E. Fiberglass Insulation:Flexible Fiber Glass Blanket:ASTM C612;flexible.Thermal Conductivity Value: 0.24 at 75°F. Maximum Service Temperature:450°F. F. Handicapped Lavatory Insulation Kit: ASTM: P-traps, hot water and cold water insulating guards. Molded closed cell vinyl with nylon fasteners, paintable. Thermal conductivity: K=1.17 (BTU/in)/(hr/sq.ft./deg. F)at 75°F mean temperature. Provide accessories as required for complete installation.Color white.Truebro Inc.Model 102.McGuire,ProWrap,Brocar Trap Wrap or accepted substitute. I I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15260-2 0208.0 MECHANICAL INSULATION G. Jackets: 1 1. Interior Applications: a. Vapor Barrier Jackets: Kraft reinforced foil or vinyl vapor barrier with self-sealing Iadhesive joints or pressure sensitive seal. b. PVC Jackets: One piece, premolded type. " 1 2 Exterior Applications: a. Aluminum Jackets: ASTM B209; 0.016 inch thick; smooth finish. ' b. Stainless Steel Jackets: Type 316 stainless steel; 0.010 inch thick; smooth finish. H. Accessories: 1. Insulation Bands: 3/4 inch wide; 16 gauge stainless steel. ' 2. Metal Jacket Bands: 0.25 thick stainless steel. 3. Insulating Cement: ANSI/ASTM C195; hydraulic setting mineral wool. 4. Finishing Cement: ASTM C449. 5. Fibrous Glass Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd (305 g/sq m)weight. 2.03 DUCT INSULATION AND JACKETS A. Duct Wrap: 2 inch flexible glass fiber;ANSI/ASTM C612;commercial grade; 'k'value of 0.27 at 75 ' degrees F. B. Duct liner: ASTM 1071; flexible blanket. `K' Value: ASTM C518, 0.25 at 75°F. Noise Reduction Coefficient:0.65 or higher based on"Type A mounting."Maximum Velocity on Mat or Coated Air Side: 5,000 FPM.Adhesive: UL listed waterproof type.Fasteners:Duct liner galvanized steel pins,welded or mechanically fastened. Mold, humidity, and erosion resistant surfaces: UL 181. C. Jacketing and Fasteners: 1. Indoor Jacket: Foil-Skrim-Kraft. ' 2. Outdoor Jacket: Coated glass fiber sheet, 30 lb/sq yd. 3. Lagging Adhesive: Fire resistive to ASTM E84, NFPA 255, and UL 723. ' 4. Impale Anchors: Galvanized steel, 12 gauge, self-adhesive pad. 5. Joint Tape: Glass fiber cloth, open mesh. ' 6. Tie Wire: Annealed steel, 16 gauge (1.5 mm). SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15260-3 0208.0 MECHANICAL INSULATION I 2.04 EQUIPMENT INSULATION A. Equipment Temperatures Below 70 deg. F: Flexible,closed cell,elastomeric sheet insulation of 5.5 I#/cubit feet density and 0.27 thermal conductivity at 75 deg. F. B. Equipment Temperatures from 70 deg.F to 450 deg.F: Glass fiber 3 pound density insulation with a 0.23 thermal conductivity at 75 deg. F. Foil jacket or finished as recommended by manufacturer. I 2.05 PIPE FITTING INSULATION COVERS A. PVC preformed molded insulation covers.Zeston or accepted substitute. 2.06 DUCT INSULATION ACCESSORIES I A. Staples,bands,wires,tape,anchors,and accessories as recommended by insulation manufacturer. 2.07 DUCT INSULATION COMPOUNDS I A. Cements, adhesives, coatings, sealers, finishes and accessories as recommended by insulation manufacturer. I 2.08 OUTDOOR DUCTING A. Aluminum Jacket:0.016-inch thick sheet,smooth/embossed finish,with longitudinal slip joints and 2- inch laps. B. Nonwater vapor retarder,nonburning weatherproof coating for use over insulation where"breathing" is required. C. UV resistant polyvinyl chloride covering with joints secured and sealed. 2.09 CANVAS JACKET I A. UL listed fabric, 6 ozisq.yd., cotton with fire retardant adhesive. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Install materials after piping,ductwork and equipment has been tested and approved. 3.02 PIPING INSULATION INSTALLATION I A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Continue insulation with vapor barrier through penetrations. I C. In exposed piping, locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. I D. Provide an insert,not less than 6 inches long,of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation, between support shield and piping,but under the finish jacket,on piping 2 inches diameter or larger, to prevent insulation from sagging at support points. Inserts shall be cork or other heavy density insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range. Factory fabricated inserts may be used. E. Neatly finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15260-4 0208.0 MECHANICAL INSULATION I I I F. Jackets: I1. Indoor Applications: Insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature shall p have standard jackets,with vapor barrier,factory-applied or field applied. Insulate fittings,joints, I and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass cloth and adhesive. 2. Exterior Applications: Provide vapor barrier jackets. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams I located on bottom side of horizontal piping. Insulate fittings,joints,and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe,and finish with glass mesh reinforced vapor barrier cement. I3. Buried Piping: Do not insulate underground piping unless otherwise noted. IG. Piping Insulation Schedule: PIPING PIPE SIZE INSULATION IDomestic Cold All %Z"fiberglass Domestic Hot/Tempered Iand Recirculating 2"and Smaller 1-1/2"fiberglass 2-1/2"and Larger 1-1/2"fiberglass IHeating Water Supply and Return 2"and Smaller 1-1/2"fiberglass 2-1/2"to 4" 1-1/2"fiberglass I4"and Larger 1-1/2"fiberglass Refrigerant Suction/Hot Gas All Sizes 1"elastomeric foam IPiping Exposed to Freezing All Sizes 1-1/2"fiberglass Horizontal IRoof Drain All Sizes 1"fiberglass Roof Drain Body All Sizes i"fiberglass equipment Insulation IH. Handicapped Lavatory: Insulation as specified. II. Pipe Fittings: 1. Insulate and finish all fittings including valve bodies,bonnets,unions,flanges and expansion joints with precut fiberglass insulation and preformed PVC covers sealed to adjacent Iinsulation jacket for continuous vapor barrier covering over all fittings. J. Protective Covering: Install continuous protective PVC on all piping and fittings. IK. Piping Insulation Lap Seams and Butt Joints: Install insulation jacket in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation. Where jacket joint and lap seams have not adhered, remove affected section of insulation and reinstall. I I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 0208.0 15260-5 MECHANICAL INSULATION 3.03DUCTWORK INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. I B. Installation: I 1. Butt insulation joints firmly together and install jackets and tapes securely. 2. Apply duct insulation continuously through sleeves and openings. Apply vapor barrier materials to form a vapor seal over the insulation. III 3. Cover breaks in the jacket material with patches of the same material as the vapor barrier. Extend the patches 2-inches beyond the break in all directions and secure with adhesive. I 4. Seal insulation terminations and pin punctures with a reinforced vapor barrier coating. 5. Continue insulation at fire dampers up to and including those portions of the fire damper I frame which are visible at the outside of the rated barrier. 6. Do not conceal duct access doors with insulation. I 7. Duct Liners: Install mat finish surface on air stream side. Secure insulation on sheet metal duct with a continuous 100 percent coat of adhesive. For widths over 20-inch, additionally secure the liner with mechanical fastenersl5-inch on center. Cut liner and coat ends with I adhesive. Butt joint tightly.Top and bottom sections of insulation overlap sides. Keep duct liner clean and free from dust.If insulation is installed without horizontal,longitudinal and end joints butted together, installation will be rejected. I 8. Duct Wrap:Cover supply air ducts except ducts internally lined or where fiberglass ductboard is utilized.Wrap tightly with all circumferential joints butted and longitudinal joints overlapped minimum of 2-inch.Adhere insulation with 4-inch strips of insulating bending adhesive at 8- I inch on center. On ducts over 24-inch wide, additionally secure insulation with suitable mechanical fasteners at 18-inch on center.Circumferential and longitudinal joints stapled with flare staples 6-inch on center and covered with 3-inch wide foil reinforced tape. C. Continue insulation with vapor barrier through penetrations. D. Internally Lined Ductwork: Where internally lined ductwork is indicated, no exterior insulation is required. Lap the ends of the exterior insulation a minimum of 6 inches past the interior insulation unless otherwise shown. Seal the end of vapor barrier jacket to the duct with mastic where the vapor barrier is required. I 3.04 DUCTWORK SURFACES TO BE INSULATED Insulation I Ductwork Duct Size Thickness Supply and return ductwork (except where all 1"Duct wrap duct is lined) Supply and return ductwork (exposed to all 2"Duct wrap weather and in unheated areas) Outside air ducts all 2"Duct liner HVAC plenums all 2" Duct liner Il SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15260-6 I0208.0 MECHANICAL INSULATION I I 3.05 INSULATED PIPE EXPOSED TO WEATHER IA. Cover insulation with aluminum jacket.Seal water tight jacket per manufacturer's recommendation. Provide heat tracing on piping subject to freezing. I3.06 PLASTIC PIPE INSULATION A. Slip insulation on pie prior to connection. Butt joints sealed with manufacturer's adhesive. Insulate I fitting with miter-cut pieces.Cover all insulation exposed to the weather and under grade with 2 coats of finish as recommended by manufacturer. I3.07 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC TUBING A. Slip insulation over piping or if piping is already installed,it should be slit and snapped over the piping. All joints and butt ends must be adhered with adhesive. ll3.08 CALCIUM SILICATE PIPE INSULATION I A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Seal canvas jacket tight to insulation at lap joints. Continuous insulation over pipe, fittings and all supports or hangers. No exposed pipe permitted. I3.09 FIBERGLASS FLEXIBLE BOARD A. Fiberglass insulating flexible boards with thermal conductivity of 0.230 (BTU/in)/(hr/sq.ft./deg. F)at I75°F mean temperature. Minimum density or 3.00 lbs. psf. Field applied canvas jacket. 3.10 INSULATION SHIELDS I A. Provide full size diameter hangers and shields (18 gauge minimum) for all cold piping. Hot water piping hangers may penetrate insulation to contact piping directly. IEND OF SECTION I I I 1 I I ISEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15260-7 0208.0 MECHANICAL INSULATION I I SECTION 15300 I FIRE PROTECTION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Design and provide all labor and material for complete and operating automatic sprinkler I system. B. Coordinate with civil drawings and specifications for work beyond 5 feet of the building. IC. Coordinate with work of all other trades. Ceiling space in all areas,especially in the first floor ceiling, is minimal and proper coordination between fire sprinkler pipe, duct and plumbing pipe is critical. Contractor will be required to relocate any pipe not properly coordinated U and/or causing obstruction for other work. See Execution section below for desired pipe routing, note that using this routing does not relieve the contractor of responsibility for coordination with all other work. ID. Section 15010 General Provisions and 15050 Basic Materials and Methods as well as any other pertinent sections issued in the Structural/Shell/Mechanical package apply to this specification. I1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION I A. System to provide coverage for entire building including attic space, ceiling space, ceiling return plenums, overhangs, covered areas and as required by governing agency. Also provide fire sprinkler coverage at underside of metal roof deck in the Gymnasium sufficient to meet requirements for trade-off to eliminate need for 1-hour roof construction at Gymnasium. I Designer will be required to coordinate this design and required flows and sprinkler head types with all local AHJ and Architect. I B. Provide system to NFPA 13 occupancy requirements. Final occupancy hazard designation in accord with the governing agency requirement. C. Revisions to the Contractor's design required by the governing agency shall be at the IContractor's expense. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE IA. Design and installation to conform to NFPA 13. B. Equipment and Components: Bear UL and/or FM label as per governing agency. IC. Specialist Firm: Established fire protection company regularly engaged and specializing in design and installation of fire sprinkler systems. ID. Test of all equipment, components and controllers shall be in accordance with NFPA. E. Governing Agency: All work in accordance with and accepted by the following hereafter referred to Governing Agencies: I 1. All reviewing authorities including State Fire Marshal, local Fire Marshal, owner's insurance underwriters, owner's representative and any other reviewing agency Iwhose approval is required to obtain occupancy. SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15300-1 0208.0 FIRE PROTECTION I I I F. Design Requirements: I 1. Comply with the latest issue of NFPA Pamphlet 13, NFPA 25, UFC and UBC Standard 9-3. 2. Design, lay out and install a hydraulically calculated dry or freeze proof wet and dry I combination pipe system utilizing code approved automatic devices designed particularly for use in this type of system. I 3. Fire Sprinkler Coverage: As required by the Governing Agency and including fire protection of all areas including but not limited to: all occupied spaces, attic space, ceiling space,ceiling return plenums, overhangs, covered areas. And coverage at underside of metal roof deck in the Gymnasium sufficient to meet requirements for trade-off to eliminate need for 1-hour roof construction. Designer will be required to coordinate this design and required flows and sprinkler head types with all local AHJ and Architect. I G. Field Wiring: Comply with requirements of Section 15010 in Structural/Shell/Mechanical package. I H. Work of Other Trades: Comply with requirements of Section 15010 in Structural/Shell/Mechanical package. 1 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Hydraulic Calculations, Product Data, Shop Drawings, and Low Water Pressure Cut-in I Controller: Bear stamp of approval of authority having jurisdiction,Fire Marshal and Owner's fire insurance underwriter. 1.05 SUBMITTALS I A. Certified Drawings: 1. Prepare fire protection system working drawing showing locations and types of head I or outlets, alarm valves and devices, pipe sizes and cutting lengths, test tees and valves,drain valves, and other related items. 2. Provide 3 sets of drawings showing sprinkler head locations and layout coordinated I with architectural ceiling details to the Architect. 3. Provide 6 sets of drawings to the Architect to be provided to Insurance Underwriter I for approval. 4. Provide 7 sets of drawings to designated representatives of the Fire Marshal for I approval. 5. Provide 6 sets of approved Drawings to Architect for final review. Drawings to have proof of approval by authority having jurisdiction. I I I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15300-2 0208.0 FIRE PROTECTION I I I B. Submittals: 1 1 I I I I ill I I I I1.06I1.2.3.4. Sprinkler Heads: Product Data and sample of each type of head. Alarm flow switches. Fire department connection. Double check valve assembly. 5. Miscellaneous Equipment. 6. Indicate hydraulic calculations, detailed pipe layout, hangers and supports, components and accessories. C. Test Reports: Submit certificates of completion of tests and inspections. 1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit documents under provisions of Section 15010 in Structural/Shell/Mechanical package. 1.07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 15010 in Structural/Shell/Mechanical package. B. Include written maintenance data on components of system, servicing requirements and Record Drawings. DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. De A. liver and store all equipment and components in shipping containers with labeling in place under provisions of Section 15010 in Structural/Shell/Mechanical package. B. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. C. Maintain caps in place until installation. 1.09 EXTRA STOCK I 1 Provide extra sprinkler heads under provisions of NFPA 13. B. Provide suitable wrenches for each head type. C. Provide metal storage cabinet with extra heads and wrenches in location approved by the Architect. Also, provide a list of heads stored within and brief description of where installed. SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 0208.0 15300-3 FIRE PROTECTION I PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING MATERIALS I A. Underground Water Piping: Ductile cast iron water pipe; ANSI A-21.51; with mechanical joints,ANSI A-21.10 and ANSI A21.11;and with concrete thrust blocks. B. Aboveground Water Piping: Use standard weight black steel pipe and cast iron screwed or mechanical joint fittings especially adapted for sprinkler work and suitable for 175 pounds working pressure. Use reducing fittings where changes in pipe size occur. Bushings are prohibited. All sprinkler specialty material Grinnell,Star,Viking,Automatic Sprinkler Corp.of America acceptable substitute,with UL and FM approval for the specific use in system. C. At Contractor's option,where approved by the governing agency,thin-wall steel pipe ASTM A53-76, and mechanical joint fittings specifically approved for sprinkler work, suitable for minimum 175 pounds working pressure may be substituted for the black steel pipe specified above. I 2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT: A. Miscellaneous Sprinkler Specialties: Complete system including all items required by the I Governing Agency including but not limited to: 1. Electric pressure alarm flow switch and alarm bell. 2. Double check assembly. 3. OS&Y valve monitoring switches. 1 4. Fire department hose connections. Free standing Brass finish. 5. Wiring from the alarm switches to the point of connection in the Fire Alarm Control 111 Panel. Coordinate with the Electrical Work specified in Division 16. If no alarm system is specified in Division 16, provide all necessary equipment and wiring for a local alarm system. I 6. Provide communication equipment with local fire department when required by Governing Agency. B. Water Service Connection Backflow Preventer: Coordinate with Civil drawings for location, type and specifications. 1. Connect to primary water service with code approved double check valve assembly made up of two brass,internally spring loaded check valves,OS&Y shut-off valves and test cocks. 2. Utility Vault:Precast concrete underground sized to enclose the backflow prevention device and the fire department connection check valve, with clearance to allow maintenance. Provide a drain sump in the vault bottom, suitable for insertion of a sump pump. Provide sump pump or gravity drain and drain piping to approved discharge locations required by local code officials. Provide all costs for electrical connections and wiring as required for a complete and operable system. All penetrations to be watertight. Provide extensions as required for proper depth, access manway access with cover and ladder. Coordinate with Civil Drawings. 1 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15300-4 SEPTEMBER 2004 FIRE PROTECTION 0208.0 I I C. Sprinkler Heads: Approved heads with temperature ratings required for service indicated. I1. Unfinished Areas:Glass bulb, upright, pendent or sidewall spray type,plain bronze. 2. Finished Areas: Glass bulb, chrome plated semi-recessed and sidewall heads in Ifinished ceilings and where piping is exposed use chrome plated upright heads. 3. Dry Pipe Systems: Glass bulb, especially designed and approved for dry pipe systems except where piping is routed through heated areas,standard heads may I be utilized as approved by the Governing Agency. D. Escutcheons: Provide polished chrome escutcheons on pipe extending through finished Iwalls and ceilings. E. Valve Monitoring Switches: Provide approved monitoring switches where shown on the I Drawings or required by Governing Agency. Provide through the wall post indicator valves. F. Valves: Iron bodyOS&Y pattern, bronze mounted double disc, parallel seat. IG. Guards: Standard manufacture. Grinnell, Marlboro or acceptable substitute. H. Fire Department Connection: Yard mounted cast brass construction with clappers on each inlet and threads match the fire district equipment. Number of inlets and sizes as indicated i on the Drawings and approved by the fire district. Standard,Allenco,Seco,Potter-Roemer or accepted substitute. PART 3-EXECUTION I 3.01 PREPARATION IA. Coordinate work of this Section with other affected work. 3.02 EXAMINATION IA. Examine walls for suitable conditions where cabinets, risers, drain valves, etc. are to be installed. IB. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.03 INSTALLATION IA. Install buried shut-off valves in valve box. Provide post indicator. B. Provide double check valve assembly at sprinkler system water source connection. IC. Connection: 1. Locate fire department connection with sufficient clearance from walls,obstructions, ill or adjacent Siamese connectors to allow full swing of fire department wrench handle. 2. Install automatic drip valves at the check valve on the fire department connection to Ithe mains. 3. Install mechanical sleeve seal at pipe penetration in outside walls. ID. Locate outside alarm on building wall see Architectural drawings and local authority. SEPTEMBER 2004 USD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY I 0208.0 15300-5 FIRE PROTECTION I I E. Pail pto mmtuion towoAsa mm piafio aceust be ipe aboveruns class inirooms ize andobsrasctcloseo tother corridorrk. wall andministruucturepe above mins ason possiblerstflor allowing space for duct and plumbing piping. Second floor route piping in attic area. Pipe not located as described above and/or in conflict with duct or plumbing piping will be relocated at no cost to the owner. F. Place piping in concealed spaces unless otherwise noted. G. Apply strippable tape or paper cover to ensure concealed sprinkler head cover plates do not 111 receive field paint finish. H. Hangers and Supports: Comply with the requirements of NFPA 13 and NFPA 14. Hanger and support spacing and locations for piping joined with grooved mechanical couplings shall be in accordance with the grooved mechanical coupling manufacturer's written instruction for rigid systems. Provide protection from damage where subject to earthquake in accordance with NFPA 13. I I. Make connections between underground and aboveground piping using an approved transition piece strapped or fastened to prevent separation. J. Install mechanical sleeve seal at pipe penetrations in basement and foundation walls. Refer to 15050 in Structural/Shell/Mechanical package"Basic Piping Materials and Methods". K. Install test connections sized and located in accordance with NFPA 13 complete with shutoff i valve. Test connections may also serve as drain pipes. L. Install pressure gauge on the riser or feed main at or near each test connection. Provide gauge with a connection not less than 1/4 inch and having a soft metal seated globe valve arranged for draining pipe between gauge and valve. Install gauges to permit removal and where they will not be subject to freezing. M. Locate sprinkler heads in repeating, modular pattern,centered and accurately coordinated with ceiling grid as indicated. Conceal all piping unless indicated otherwise. Coordinate design with lighting and exposed HVAC duct layout in areas without ceilings. N. Locate and install the required fire sprinkler alarm, flow, and test and drain valves where required by the Governing Agency and approved by the Architect. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Flush,test and inspect sprinkler piping systems in accordance with NFPA 13. I B. Replace piping system components which do not pass the test procedures specified and retest repaired portion of the system. C. Perform other tests as directed by Governing Agency. 3.05 CLEANING I A. Flush entire piping system of foreign matter. I 1 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15300-6 SEPTEMBER 2004 FIRE PROTECTION 0208.0 I 3.07 SYSTEM TESTS A. Test entire system per code and per requirements of local authority. Provide, arrange and pay for all testing required in order to obtain temporary and final acceptance.Witness tests by local authority and Architect. Notify local authority and Architect one week prior to test. 3.08 PAINT A. Paint all exposed piping and hangers in accordance with Section 15050 in Structural/Shell/Mechanical package to color as directed by architect. Do not paint heads. 3.09 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION A. Obtain and deliver to Owner a certificate, in duplicate, stating that system as installed has been inspected and accepted by authorities and/or agencies having jurisdiction,and that all regulations affecting work have been satisfied. Submit and acceptable certificate to the Owner before final payment is requested. B. Certificate: Minimum NFPA Form 85 information. END OF SECTION 15300 I I I I. I I I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15300-7 0208.0 FIRE PROTECTION I 111 SECTION 15400 PLUMBING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The requirement of this section applies to the plumbing system. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes: Section 15010. B. Fixtures: By same manufacturer for each product specified throughout. Color shall be white unless indicated otherwise. C. Trim: By same manufacturer for each product specified throughout. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Division 1 and Section 15010. B. Include fixtures, sizes, utility sizes, trim, and finishes. C. Submit for: 1. All fixtures. 2. Drains. 3. Water Heaters. 4. Grease interceptors. 5. Disposers. 6. Pumps. 7. Hose bibbs. 1.04 PLUMBING FIXTURES A. General: Provide factory fabricated fixtures of type, style and material indicated on the plumbing fixture connection schedule. For each type fixture,provide manufacturer's standard trim,carrier,seats and valves as scheduled or as recommended by manufacturer as required for complete installation. 1. Fixtures:Complete with fittings,supports,fastening devices,faucets,valves,traps,stops and additional devices required. 2. Exposed IPS Piping and Tubing: Brass, chrome plated. 3. Escutcheons: Brass, chrome plated. 4. Fixtures Locations:As shown on Architectural Drawings. SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 0208.0 15400 7 PLUMBING 1 5. Stops: Stops installed on each supply pipe at each fixture accessibly located with wall 11 escutcheons. 6. Showers, Public lavatories, Interior Faucets: Provide with flow control device per code. 1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 1 A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 15010. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 INTERIOR PLUMBING MATERIALS A. Cleanouts: 1. Manufacturer: J.R. Smith, Jonespec,Zurn,Wade, or accepted substitute. 2. Types: a. Tile Floor Cleanouts: Smith 4053-U with square heavy-duty nickel bronze top,taper 111 thread, bronze plug, and vandalproof screws. b. Carpeted Floor Cleanout: Smith 4023-U-X with round heavy-duty nickel bronze top, taper thread, bronze plug, carpet clamping device and vandalproof screws. c. Concrete Floor Cleanout: Smith 4023-U with round heavy-duty nickel bronze top, stainless steel shallow cover and vandalproof screws. d. Wall Cleanouts: Smith 4472-U, bronze ferrule with raised head bronze plug, stainless steel shallow cover and vandalproof screws. e. Outside Area Walks and Drives: Smith 4253-U-G with galvanized cast iron body,top secured with vandalproof screws,taper thread and bronze plug. Install in 18"x 18"x 6"deep concrete pad flush with grade. B. Flashing: Minimum 4#sheet lead;to extend horizontally 10"from edge of vent penetrations or rain drain body and vertically 12"minimum up from roof turned over and down into hub of vent or finished with bronze cap providing counterflashing for screwed pipe. C. Shock Arrester: Precharged bellows or sealed piston type manufactured to meet PDI WH-201 and ASSE 1010 Standards. Size in accordance with PDI procedures. Jonespec,J.R.Smith,PPP,Wade, Zurn, or accepted substitute. D. Traps:Provide traps on all fixtures except fixtures with integral traps.Exposed traps chromium plated cast brass or 17 gauge chrome plated brass tubing.American Standard,Kohler,Chicago,Brasskraft, Eastman, Speedway, McGuire or approved substitute. E. Supplies and Stops: First quality,chrome plated with brass stems. Stops: loose key type.American Standard, Kohler, Chicago, Brasskraft, Eastman, Speedway, McGuire or approved substitute. F. Thermometers:3-inch diameter bi-metal dial thermometer with stainless steel case,white dial,black i numbers with 4-inch stainless steel stem and brass separable socket. Provide back or bottom connections as required. 0°F to 200°F range. Weiss, Palmer, Ashcroft, Trerice, Marshaltown, Weksler or approved substitute. 1 SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15400-2 0208.0 PLUMBING I 111 G. Pressure Gauges: Single arm guide gauge with 0 to 160 range, 20 PSI intervals and 2 PSI incremental graduations.Aluminum dial with 1 percent accuracy and low bottom connections for wall mounting. Weiss, Palmer,Ashcroft, Trerice, Marshaltown, Weksler or approved substitute. H. Fixture Carriers: JR Smith,Zurn, Myfab or approved substitute. II2.02 GAS FIRED WATER HEATER A. AGA and serving utility approved commercial gas fired heater complying with the State Energy Code requirements and of size and capacity shown on Drawings. Glass lined steel tank equipped with 111, sacrificial anode. 1-1/2" minimum of non-organic insulation, cold rolled enameled steel jacket to encase sides,top and combustion chamber. Adjustable automatic thermostat,safety pilot,main and pilot gas cocks, automatic gas pressure regulator,all brass hose bib drain. ASME Code pressure- temperature relief and draft diverter with 4"diameter PVC pipe. B. Manufacturers: State, Ruud, Rheem, Bradford White, A.O. Smith or accepted substitute. i 2.03 PRIMING VALVES I A. Smith 2699, Wade,Zurn, PPP or accepted substitute. Locate in closets, under counters or in walls behind Milcor or access panels as specified in Section 15050. Use copper specified in Section 15060 for all underground priming lines. 2.04 PLUMBING FIXTURES ts A. Water Closet 1. American Standard, Kohler, or Eljer. B. Urinal I1. American Standard, Kohler, or Eljer. iC. Lavatories 1. American Standard, Kohler, or Eljer. iD. Service Sump 1. American Standard, Kohler, Eljer, Fiat or accepted substitute. E. Stainless Steel Sink 1. Elkay, Just,Zeigler-Harris or Brasskraft or accepted substitute. IF. Fiberglass Fixtures 1. Fiber-Fab,Aqua-Glass, Hytec or accepted substitute. I, G. Electric Water Coolers/Fountains 1. Elkay, Halsy-Taylor, Haws, Sunroc, Oasis or accepted substitute. I H. Flush Valves Infrared activated 1 1. Sloan, Zurn or accepted substitute. t SEPTEMBER 2004 0208.0 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15400-3 PLUMBING 1 I. Faucet Fittings (Infrared activated on lavatories) 1. Chicago,T&S Brass or accepted substitute for sinks. Symmons,American Standard,Kohler or accepted substitute for lavatories. J. Water Closet Seats 1. Solid white reinforced plastic, hinge with insert integrally in seat. Church 9500C, Olsonite, Beneke, Bemis or accepted substitute. K. Floor Drains 1. Cast iron body, double drainage flange with weep holes, priming connection, nickel bronze strainer finish,flashing clamp device, adjustable or insert type strainer. Comply with ANSI. Smith, Josam,Zurn or accepted substitute. L. Floor Sinks 1. Coated or enameled cast iron body, double drainage flange with weep holes, priming connection, nickel bronze or heavy C.P.strainer finish,flashing clamp device,adjustable or insert type strainer. Comply with ANSI. Smith, Josam, Zurn or accepted substitute. (No plastic components allowed.) M. Roof Drains/Overflow Roof Drains 1. Cast iron A112 21 2nJ.RnSmith JosameZurn or accepted substlr, cast iron dome and td erdeck clamp.Comply with AN N. Wash Fountains infrared activated 1. Acorn, Bradley or accepted substitute. O. Thermostatic Mixing Valves 1. Lawler,Symmons, Powers, Bradley or accepted substitute. 2.05 HOSE BIBBS A. Cast brass heavy duty hydrant,brass operating parts,renewable seat,hose outlet,vacuum breaker and removable"T"handle. J.R. Smith,Woodford,Zurn, Chicago or accepted substitute. 2.06 GARBAGE DISPOSERS I A. Suitable for commercial or residential kitchen use,complete with switches,controls,solenoid and flow control valves, vacuum breakers and appropriate sink or cone attachments. Motors, switches, solenoid valves and electrical controls compatible. In-Sink-Aerator, Badger or accepted substitute. 2.07 EXPANSION TANK A. Shall be a diaphragm expansion tank with permanently sealed in air cushion Butyl diaphragm. Outer shell shall be steel ASME Rated. Inner liner shall be rigid polypropylene liner. Amtrol,Bell&Gossett or accepted substitute. I TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15400-4 SEPTEMBER 2004 PLUMBING 0208.0 I 2.08 INLINE RE-CIRCULATION PUMP A. Pipe mounted, in-line arrangement, lead free bronze,wet rotor circulator for potable water system. Maximum Operating Point 150 PSI and 230°F. Pump body shall be lead-free bronze,impeller shall be polypropylene shaft shall be ceramic with double-sintered carbon bearings. It shall be controlled 111 by a 7-day programmable time clock. Bell &Gossett, Paco,Taco,Armstong, Gundofos or accepted substitute. 2.09 SUMP PUMP A. Pump shall be of corrosion resistant construction with stainless steel major casting, pump shaft. Fasteners, glass will be removable for switch operation. Heavy duty 3 wire cord with NEMA 5-15 3 prong grounding. B. Manufacturer: Bell &Gossett, Hydromatic, Paco or accepted substitute. 2.10 GREASE INTERCEPTOR A. Prefabricated reinforced concrete grease interceptor structure in accordance withal state and local agency code standards. Submit shop drawings to local inspectors review and approval prior to ordering. M.C. Nottingham, Utility Vault Co., Jensen Precast, or approved. (See Drawings for additional information). PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and rough-in openings before and installation. g g n B. Verify adjacent construction is ready to receive rough-in work of this Section. C. Review rough-in locations of potable water and waste piping systems to verify actual locations prior to installing fixtures. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning. B. Install components level and plumb. 1, C. Install and secure fixtures in place with wall carriers and bolts. Install fixtures as shown on drawings. 1. Support all wall hung water closets and urinals on heavy duty, concealed, chair carriers mounted to floor structure. 2. Support wall hung lavatories mounted on stud partitions on heavy concealed wall brackets bolted to a steel plate anchored firmly to studs with bolts.Plate to extend one stud each way beyond fixture mounting point width. Floor mounted concealed arm carriers approved. D. Cleanouts 1 1. Where required by code,at each change of sewer direction 45 degrees or greater and more than 10° long, at end of each branch or main and spaced not greater than 100' apart, as required by code and/or as shown on Drawings. SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 0208.0 15400-5 PLUMBING 1 E. Install all devices in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. F. Provide waste piping to plumbing fixtures and drains,with approved trap,of sizes indicated;but in no case smaller than required by code. G. Mechanical Equipment Connections:Connect piping system to mechanical equipment as indicated. Comply with equipment manufacturer's instructions. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Provide drain valve on drain connection. H. Water Hammer Arrestors: Install in upright position, in locations and of sizes per PDI WH-201. I. Arrange locations of valves,unions,drains and other components to provide for ease of maintenance, repair or service.Size access panels and locate to provide working spaces for all devices served by access. J. Provide valves and shock arrestors where required by code and where otherwise indicated in Specifications and on Drawings. K. Fixtures: 1. Install plumbing fixtures where shown and at appropriate heights; in accordance with fixture manufacturer's written instructions, roughing-in drawings and industry standards. 2. Set and connect to soil,waste,vent and water piping in neat,uniform manner.Connections to be plumb and set at right angles to floor and wall unless otherwise required. 3. Seal fixtures mounted on floors and walls with sealant compounds as directed by architect. portion of stall. 4. Install handle of tank type toilets at wide p 5. Set mixing valves of lavatories to limit temperature to 110°F. 6. For all infrared operated fixtures(flush valves,lavatory faucets,wash fountains,etc.)it will be the responsibility of the contractor under this specification section to provide furnish and install all required transformers,low voltage wiring,electrical boxes and any and all electrical accessories for a compete and operating system. L. Stops: Screwdriver or loose key stops to be installed in hot and cold supply pipe to each fixture accessibly located. M. Floor Drains and Floor Sinks: 1. Install drains in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. See Drawings for locations. 2. Install floor drains at low points of areas to be drained or as indicated.Grate to be flush with finished floor.Set floor sinks as required by local codes. 3. Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated. 111 4. Prime all drains.Refer to Drawings.Coordinate with local authorities for exact requirements. I TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15400-6 SEPTEMBER 2004 PLUMBING 0208.0 I N. Roof Drains/Overflow Drains: 1. Install drains in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. See Drawings for locations. 2. Provide lead flashing. 3. Coordinate with roofing as necessary. 4. Install drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. 5. Install drains flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated. 6. Set overflow drains atro r p pe elevation relative to main roof drains. O. Hose Bibbs: 1. Install where shown, in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow B. At completion clean plumbing fixtures and equipment. C. Solidly attach water closets to floor with lag screws. Lead flashing is not intended to hold fixture in place. 3.04 INSPECTION A. Upon completion of installation of plumbing fixtures and after units are water pressurized,test fixtures to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements.When possible,correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and proceed with retesting. B. Inspect each installed unit for damage to finish. If feasible,restore and match finish to original at site; otherwise, remove fixture and replace with new unit. Feasibility and match to be judges by Architect. Remove cracked or dented units and replace with new units. 3.05 OWNER-FURNISHED EQUIPMENT A. Rough-in for equipment,receive, install and connect all plumbing fixtures as furnished by others. Furnish and install all stops, traps, strainers, backflow preventers,dvalves and other devices not furnished by others in order to provide a complete operating system. 3.06 GAS-FIRED WATER HEATERS A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. See Drawings for detail. B. Connect to gas line with drip leg, tee, gas cock and union;full size of unit inlet connection. C. Connect hot and cold water piping to units with shutoff valves and unions.Connect recirculating water line to unit with shutoff valve,check valve and union.Pipe relief valve discharge full size to floor drain. D. Route 4"diameter PVC exhaust and intake pipe HP through roof. SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 0208.0 15400-7 PLUMBING I E. Anchor tanks to structure. 3.07 INTERCEPTORS AND GREASE TRAPS 1 A. Install interceptors in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Anchor interceptors securely.Locate so adequate clearance is provided to remove covers or exterior grates. Set recessed units so top of cover is flush with finished floor. 3.08 CIRCULATING PUMPS A. Install per with manufacturer's instructions. 3.09 SUMP PUMPS A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Set pump in sump. Connect discharge piping with check valve and union. END OF SECTION 1 I I I I I V I I TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15400-8 SEPTEMBER 2004 PLUMBING 0208.0 I II SECTION 15510 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The requirements of this section apply to the Heating and Cooling Equipment. 1.02 SUBMITTALS IA. Submit in accord with Division 1 and Section 15010. B. Submit catalog data, construction details, performance characteristics for each type and size of IIequipment. C. Shop Drawings: Prove boiler(s)will fit space allocated. Submit complete shop drawings and/or technical brochures of all work prior to fabrication. Indicate size, design, dimensional and capacity $ characteristics, structural supports required and component parts. Also submit with shop drawings all equipment wiring and control diagrams, installation instructions. D. Test Reports: Submit four(4)certified copies of test on boilers showing percent of carbon dioxide, stack temperature, gas firing rate, and heat output for each boiler. E. Submit operating and maintenance data. F. Provide submittals for the following: 1. Boilers. 1 2. Pumps. I3. Hydronic Specialties. 4. Water treatment. / 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acceptable Manufacturers: standard, nationally recognized manufacturers of products listed by ANSI or ASTM quality standards as specified or approved. B. Labels: Underwriters Laboratories (UL)labeled or certification by a nationally recognized electrical testing laboratory having the facilities for testing, factory inspection and field inspection I as required by the National Electrical Code is required for all fans, controls, all electrically- operated equipment and other electrical items incidental to the work specified, as required by code. iC. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Equipment Rating: Rated in accordance with ARI certified rating procedures and bear the ARI label. D. Codes: Comply with applicable sections of the State Mechanical Code. Comply with National Electrical Code(NEC), State of Oregon modifications to the NEC, and all local ordinances applicable to electrical wiring, contacts, controls, etc., included with or contained within manufactured items. 1 I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 0208.0 15510-1 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS I E. Field Wiring: It is the intent of these specifications that all systems shall be complete and operable. Refer to all drawings and specifications, especially the electrical drawings, to determine voltage, phase, circuit ampacity and number of connections provided. Provide all necessary field 1' wiring and devices from the point of connection indicated on the electrical drawings. Bring to the attention of the Architect in writing, all conflicts, incompatibilities, and/or discrepancies prior to bid or as soon as discovered. Comply with requirements of Section 15010, Field Wiring requirements. F. Installation Contractor: Manufacturer's authorized installation and start-up agency normally engaged and experienced in air conditioning/refrigeration work. 1.04 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Handle piping and equipment carefully to prevent damage. Store in area protected from weather, moisture and possible damage at all times prior to installation. II B. Seal all openings in pipes and/or pipe connecting fittings with caps or plugs, as required to prevent entry of foreign matter. C. Comply with all manufacturers installation instructions. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 SPECIALTIES AND EQUIPMENT A. Expansion Tank: ASME Code construction for 125 psi working pressure with"Airtrol,""Drain-O- Tank"and 200 pound,2-rod gauge glass with bronze fittings. Bell &Gossett, Amtrol Armstrong, Taco,Wheatley or accepted substitute. Install valve at tank entrance. B. Air Vents: 1. Manual Air Vents: Install at all system high points whether shown or not;fabricate of 2" diameter or larger pipe at least 12"long. Manually operated. 2. Automatic Air Vents:float type with pressure rating qual or grater than system pressure. le 3. Manufacturers: Bell &Gossett, Armstrong, Hoffman or approved substitute. C. Triple Duty Valve: Combination spring loaded vertical check, calibrated balancing and shut off valve with balance point memory in angle or straight pattern as required or as shown on the Drawings. B&G,Taco,Armstrong,Thrush,Wheatley or accepted substitute. tangential type air separator,with collection tube and blow off 1 D. Air Separators: ASME centrifugal yp P connection. Bell &Gossett,Thrush, Taco,Armstrong, Dunham-Bush,Wheatley or accepted substitute. E. Thermometers: 1. Non-mercury type, adjustable stem, separable sockets,0-120°F range for chilled water, 30-240°F range for heating water(unless indicted otherwise). Weiss numbers are listed, equivalent Marshalltown, Palmer, Taylor,Trerice,Weksler or accepted substitute. 2. Wide case 9"in equipment rooms and all major equipment items. 3. Narrow case 7" in all other locations. I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15510-2 0208.0 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS I F. Pressure Gauges: Install on discharge of all pumps and where shown on Drawings 4-1/2"dial,0- 100 psig graduation pressure gauges with Ashcroft No. 1106 pulsation dampers and stop cocks. Weiss UGE-1 or equivalent Marshalltown,Ashcroft, Marsh, Trerice, Weksler. G. Compound Gauges: Install on suction side of all pumps and where shown on Drawings,4-1/2" dial, 0"-30"mercury and 0-100 psig pressure graduation compound gauges with Ashcroft No. 1106 pulsation dampers and stop cocks. Weiss UGE-1 or equivalent Marshalltown, Ashcorft, Marsh,Trerice, Weksler. H. Pressure-Temperature Test Plugs: 1. 1/4"or 1/2"NPT fitting of solid brass capable of receiving either an 1/8" OD pressure or temperature probe and rated for zero leakage from vacuum to 1000 psig. Neoprene valve core for temperatures to 200 deg. F. Nordel to 350 deg. F. Provide each test plug with a pressure gauge adapter with 1/16"or 1/8"OD pressure probe. 2. Furnish a test kit containing one 2-1/2"dial pressure test gauge of suitable range, one gauge adapter with 1/16"or 1/8"OD probe and two 5"stem pocket test thermometers- one 0 to 220 deg. F and one 50 to 550 deg. F. Turn the kit over to the Architect. The 111 system balancing firm may use this kit to complete the balancing. 3, Sisco"P/T Plugs,"Peterson "Pete's Plug,"or accepted substitute. I. Circuit Setter and Balancing Valves: Balancing fitting with differential pressure taps, brass or bronze body and trim. B&G "Circuit Setter"or Taco,Armstrong, Wheatley or accepted substitute. J. Strainers: 1. Provide strainers preceding each pressure reducing valve and where indicated on drawings. Full line size. Strainer bodies high-grade cast iron or bronze. Each strainer equipped with easily removable cover and stainless steel screen suitable for service intended with net free area at least four times that of entering pipe. Gasket shall seal against machined seat both in body and cap. Gasket seal between cap and strainer body. Provide valved blowoff for each strainer of same size as plugs with maximum size of 1-1/2 inch. Pipe blowoff full size and terminate over floor drains except at fin tube, reheat coils,fan coil units, convectors, induction units, terminal units, and unit heaters, provide bronze hose adapter for standard 3/4 inch garden hose with cap and chain. Body pressure ratings in accordance with scheduled working pressure for equipment service. 2. Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning: Y type Strainer: Strainers 2 inch and smaller, perforations 1/16 inch; strainers 2-1/2 inch and larger, perforations 1/8 inch;250 psi. 3. Manufacturer: Screwed bronze strainers 2 inch and smaller, flanged cast iron 2-1/2 inch and larger, as manufactured by Armstrong Machine Works, Sarco, Mueller, R.P. &C. Co. or as scheduled herein. 2.02 BASE MOUNTED(END SUCTION) PUMPS A. Overhung impeller type with top or end suction and top discharge connection. Shaft shall treated, carbon steel with shaft sleeves keyed to shaft longitudinallyand supportedbe heat bearings capable of carrying radial and thrust loads in either direction. Impelers ingle suction, closed type,cast in one piece. Pumps directly connected to motor through flexible coupling. Pump and motor shall be mounted on common steel or cast iron base plates. Bell & Gossett, Paco, Taco, Thrush,Armstrong or accepted substitute. I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15510-3 0208.0 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS I 2.03 SUCTION DIFFUSER A. Provide at each pump inlet where indicated, a suction diffuser size as required for pump and piping. Diffuser shall consist of angle type body rated for 175 psi and 250 degrees F temperature and pressure,with inlet vanes, combination diffuser-strainer-orifice cylinder, removable permanent magnet in flow stream,disposable start up strainer, adjustable support foot, pressure gage tapping and strainer blowdown tapping. Strainer cylinder with 3/16"diameter openings,free area equal to five times cross sectional area of pump connection, designed to withstand pressure differential equal to pump shutoff head, and easily removed through end flange equipped with reusable ring seal. Vane length shall be no less than 2-1/2 times pump connection diameter. Bell &Gossett, Armstrong, Paco,Thrush, Mueller,Victaulic, Taco. 2.04 SECTIONAL C.I. BOILER-BURNER PACKAGE A. General: Factory packaged and assembled boiler including burner, refractory burner mounting plate including flame observation ports,jacket, controls and trim for 50 pounds WWP. Hydrostatical pressure tested,ASME Code constructed, standard IBR rated, sectional cast iron boiler designed for pressurized fire box-forced draft venting and burner. Enclose the boiler within 11 a factory insulated and enameled finished metal jacket with access provisions for all boiler cleanout and inspection openings. Insulate sufficiently to maintain exterior surface temperatures below 100 deg. F at 80 deg. F Ambient and boiler at high fire. Operating efficiency not less than 80 percent. B. Boiler Type: Cast-iron boiler for positive pressurized firing with forced draft burner. Cast iron11 sections sealed and held together.All sections will be of hydro-wall design for complete water backing of combustion chamber. Horizontal flue cast into intermediate and back sections.All sections have casted legs for ample air circulation. Provide a refractory insulated steel burner mounting plate for front section. Side cleanout plates have cover side cleanouts. Provide cast iron flue collar with built-in breeching damper. C. Heating Water Boiler Trim: Construct boiler with built-in air elimination and design for balanced water flow through the entire section assembly requiring single field supply and return connections. Provide the following minimum accessories: 1. Operating temperature control. I 2. High temperature limit control. 3. Combination pressure-temperature altitude gauge. 4. ASME certified pressure relief valve. a and auxiliarylow water cut-off. 5. Primary 6. All field wiring required for complete low water cut-off safety system. D. Natural Gas Fired Burners: Forced draft burner consisting of blower, motor and fan. Flame retention design with required gas train including dual automatic gas valves, proven gas pilot and added safety air flow switch arranged for full modulating (25%to 100%of firing rate)low fire start, and where required by size, post-purge. Furnish burner with prewired control panel incorporating an electronic combustion safeguard primary burner control with pre-purge and post-purge(where required by size)programming, an ultraviolet sensitive electronic flame detector and motor starter relay. E. Comply with the State Boiler Codes and with the requirements of UL and AGA for a complete boiler-burner assembly including all required controls. TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15510-4 SEPTEMBER 2004 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS 0208.0 I tI F. Start-Up and Service: The manufacturer's field representative to employ a full time factory trained I service technician who will provide start-up, balancing and Owner operating and maintenance instruction. In addition, the manufacturer's filed representative provides 1-year warranty service from date of start-up for beneficial use. 11 G. Manufacturers: Weil-McLain, Cleaver Brooks or accepted substitute. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 PIPING INSTALLATION IA. Refer to applicable Sections for Piping, Valves, Insulation, Painting, etc. B. Chemical Treatment Ii. Engage water treatment company, subject to review of Architect,to provide preservice cleaning of piping systems, chemicals, and supervised water treatment program for following systems: Ia. Heating water system. 2. Chemical treatment company shall: fiea. Submit written recommendations for water treatment which will fall within intent of specifications, including complete analysis of makeup water to be used, recommendations for treatment materials and dosage levels, and specific operating procedures. b. Provide all necessary testing equipment and reagents. c. Provide all chemical formulations required for startup and 90 days thereafter. d. Supervise cleaning of all piping systems including flushing,testing, special filters, etc. 3. Cleaning of Piping Systems Ia. Provide complete preservice cleaning of new heating water piping, chilled water piping, boiler and all other miscellaneous mechanical systems. Provide all chemicals,equipment and personnel. I b. Cleaning compound to be composed of 90%bywt. trisodium dwm phosphate (dodecahydrate), 9%sodium hydroxide,and 1% nonyl phenol 4ethoxylate (with 9 ii moles ethylene oxide.) c. Determine volume of water in system to be cleaned. Calculate amount of cleaning compound to be used (to be used at 0.5% by wt.of water in system). d. Completely dissolve the cleaning compound prior to injecting into system. II e. For closed systems with closed system circulating pump operating, inject cleaning solution into system. If proper amount of chemical has been used, P- alkalinity test should now read between 1500 and 1700 ppm. Continue to circulate cleaning solution for four(4)hours. I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15510-5 1 0208.0 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS I f. Clean boiler per manufacturer's specific instructions. g. Drain system,clean all strainers and flush with fresh water. Repeat procedure 11 until P-alkalinity test equals zero. h. Cleaned systems shall be filled with fresh water and appropriate closed water . corrosion inhibitors added. 11 i. Charge chilled water system with 30%by weight inhibited propylene glycol. "Dowfrost"by Dow Chemical Company or approved equal. Mix glycol withII distilled water of total hardness per glycol supplier's recommendations. h. Confirm all chemicals specified and used are acceptable to all governing agencies, prior to use of any cleaning or treatment materials. 3.02 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Lubrication: Lubricate all moving and rotating parts in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations prior to start-up. B. Manual Air Vents: Conduct 1/4"copper tubing from high end of air chambers to accessible I locations and terminate with screwdriver cock. C. Automatic Vent Valves: Install on each hydronic terminal at highest point and on each hydronic piping drop in direction of flow for mains, branches and runouts and elsewhere as indicated. Pipe 111 to approved discharge location. D. Air separators: Install in pump suction lines and as indicated. Connect inlet and outlet piping. Run piping to expansion tank with%-inch per foot(2 percent)upward slope towards tank. Install drain valve on units 2-inch and over. E. Expansion Tanks: Install tank in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Charge tank with air I per manufacturer's instructions. Insulate per Section 15250, Insulation. Provide vibration isolation per Section 15240, Mechanical Equipment Sound,Vibration and Seismic Control. F. Shot Feeders: Install on each hydronics system at pump discharge and elsewhere as indicated. Install in upright position with top of funnel not more than 48-inches above floor. Install globe valve in pump discharge line between recirculating lines. Pipe drain to nearest plumbing drain or as indicated. G. Liquid Flow Switches: Install on inlet to water chiller as indicated. Install in horizontal pipe with switch mounted in tee on top of pipe with minimum of 24-inch of straight pipe with no fitting both I, upstream and downstream of switch. Remove segments if paddle to fir in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. H. Water Relief Valves: Install as indicated and on hot water tanks and pressure vessels. Pipe discharge to floor drain. Comply with ASME and Pressure Vessel Code. I. Pressure reducing Valves: Install as indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 111 J. Installation of Temperature Gauges: 1. Install in vertical upright position. 2. Thermometer Wells: Install in piping in vertical upright position. Provide cap. I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15510-6 0208.0 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS I 1 K. Installation of Pressure Gauges: i1. General: Install pressure gauges in piping tee with pressure gauge cock. 2. Locations: Install in the following locations and elsewhere as indicated: IIa. Pump inlet and outlet. Ib. Inlet and discharge of each pressure reducing valve. c. Inlet and outlet of condenser water and chilled water at chillers. d. Inlet and outlet of boilers and heat exchangers. e. Provide Pete's Plug at inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil. gL. Expansion Joints: Provide where required to allow pipe expansion due to thermal stresses. Provide locations per manufacturer's recommendations. Provide a pipe guide on each side of each expansion joint, located per manufacturer's recommendations. Provide guides in addition to 1 all other pipe supports and hangers. M. Pumps: Mount per manufacturer's recommendations in a manner to allow disassembly of pump and motor without disturbing piping.Align flexible connectors. 111 N. Boiler Installation: 1. Install boiler in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation including wiring refractory lining and insulation. 2. Anchor boiler to floor. 3. Full-time,factory trained service technician to provide start-up, balancing operating and maintenance instruction. In addition, provide one (1) and owner warranty service from date of start-up for beneficial use by the owner.earmanufacturer's i 4. Obtain certification of inspection from the State Boiler Inspector at completion and turn the certificate over to the Owner. I END OF SECTION I I I I I I SEPTEMBER 2004 0208.0 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15510-7 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS I 1 IA. SECTION 15770 HVAC PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Provide equipment as specified herein and shown on the Drawings. B. Equipment capacity and size as indicated in the equipment lists on the Drawings. I, 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Air Handling Equipment: Rated in accordance with AMCA certified rating procedures and AMCA I labeled. B. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Equipment Rating: Rated in accordance with ARI certified rating procedures and AMCA labeled. C. Codes: Refer to Section 15010. 1.03 SUBMITTALS IA. Submit product data under provisions of Division 1 and Section 15010. B. Submit product data for manufactured products and assemblies required for this project. C. Indicate electrical service and duct connections on product data. ID. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 15010. E. Provide Submittals for the following: $ 1. Air Conditioning Units. 1.04 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING 1 A. Deliver product to site under provisions of Section 15010. IB. Store and protect product under provisions of Section 15010. C. Store insulation in original shipping container with labeling in place. Do not install damaged insulation. I1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 15050. 1 B. Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listing. I 1 SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15770-1 111 0208.0 HVAC 1 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCTLESS SYSTEM HEAT PUMP f A. Provide indoor,wall mounted evaporator/blower section and matching outdoor condensing unit. B. Fan Coil Section: Shall be factory assembled and wired. Evaporator heat exchanger shall be I , constructed of non ferrous, rifled copper tubing with enhanced aluminum slit fins, mechanically bonded to copper. Single cross-flow blower wheel, statically and dynamically balanced shall be attached to a single direct drive, PSC fan motor with overload protection, permanently lubricated and multi-speed capability. Provide electric strip heater and anti-mold, washable air filter. C. Heat Pump: Air-cooled, capacity to match dual indoor unit. Constructed of G90 galvanized seal with corrosion inhibiting,acrylic, baked enamel finish. With two high efficiency rotary compressor, with overload protection,vibration isolation. Each compressor shall be dedicated to one of the two indoor units. Condenser coil heat exchange shall be non-ferrous rifled copper tubing with mechanically bonded to copper. Each circuit shall include a suction line accumulator, liquid line strainer and dryer, in-line muffler, cap tub refrigerant control, on electronic four-way reversing valve for automatic switching and condenser coil temperature sensor. Fan motor shall be direct drive with internal overload for low ambient operation,with propeller type fan mounted for horizontal discharge. D. Controls and Protection Devices: Shall have Minimum access or programmable temperature control, 12 hour programmable time, night setback with printed circuit board with control circuit fuse and microprocessor. Minimum accessories shall include high pressurestats, crankcase heater, suction line accumulator, pressure relief device, motor compressor thermal and current sensitive overload devices, positive acting timer to prevent short cycling on power failure, anti- recycle timer, head pressure controller for low ambient operations, suspension hardware for horizontal installation,freeze stat. E. Unit shall be ARI certified and UL labeled. I F. Manufacturers: Sanyo, Mitsubishi or accepted substitute. 2.02 PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS A. Manufacturers: Carrier,Trane,Aaon, McQuay or approved substitute. B. Performance: Unit shall be selected within+/-5%of cooling and heating capacity scheduled. Unit shall be provide EER, IPLV,fan BHP efficiencies at or better than scheduled values. C. General: Single piece packaged rooftop combination heating and cooling unit. Unit factory assembled, piped,wired and tested. Factory run tested to include the operation of all fans, compressors, heat exchangers, and control sequences. Factory adhere labels, decals, and/or tags to aid in the service of the unit and indicate caution areas. 1 D. Curb: See section 15240 for spring isolated curb. E. Casing: Zinc coated galvanized steel to be finished with weather-resistant enamel finish. Unit surface shall withstand 1000 hours in a salt spray test in compliance with ASTM B117. Unit to have downflow supply and return with duct connections made fully inside roof curb. The unit base shall have provisions for crane lifting lugs. Unit to include outside air intake louvers. Roof panels shall be sloped to provide positive drainage of rain water I melting snow away from the cabinet. I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15770-2 0208.0 HVAC I I F. Service Access: Access panels shall be hinged, double wall access doors with quick release latches, and provide a water and air tight seal. Hinged access doors for fan sections, filter section and control section. Removable access panels for refrigeration and coils. I G. Electrical: Units shall be UL, CSA or ETL listed and labeled. Provide single point electrical connection with hinged weatherproof control panel, suitable overload protection for each branch circuit and contactors for each motor. Provide fused control power transformer. 1 H. Supply Fan: Belt driven, forward curved supply fan, centrifugal type with fixed pitch sheaves. Provide one set of replacement sheaves if needed by air balancer. Fans to be internally isolated with two inch deflection spring isolation. Provide thermal overload protection on motors. Motors to 1 be high efficiency. I. Economizer: Outside, return and exhaust dampers to be factory installed, ultra low leak damper with leakage rate not to exceed 1.0%of nominal airflow at one inch W.G. static pressure, rated in Iaccordance with AMCA 575. Include polyvinyl gasketing on leading edges. J. 100% Return/Exhaust Fans: Same as supply fan. AK. 50% Fixed Exhaust Fan: Provide 50% non-modulating exhaust air capabilities integral to unit. Utilize barometric dampers at fan outlet to prevent backdraft conditions. Operation of exhaust fan is on/off based on economizer outdoor air damper position. IL. Dx Cooling And Refrigeration System: Semi-hermetic reciprocating compressors or hermetic scroll compressors allowed. Semi-hermetic reciprocating with crankcase heater, discuss suction & 0 discharge valves, and max. 1750 RPM. Hermetic scroll compressor with integral oil separation, no suction &discharge valves and maximum 3600 RPM. All compressors to include internal temperature and current-sensitive motor overloads. Units to include compressor isolation,thermal expansion devices, service pressure ports and liquid line dryers. Direct drive propeller condenser $ fans to include permanently lubricated bearings and three phase motors with built-in thermal overload protection. Aluminum fin DX cooling coil with moisture carryover management system and drain pan. Condenser coils shall be copper tube with aluminum fin, maximum 14 fins per inch 1 for cleanability. Refrigeration system suitable for ambient operation down to 50 degrees F. Provide hot gas bypass on systems with semi-hermetic compressors for low load conditions and frost control. Provide refrigerant circuit suction temperature compressor cycle control for coil frost protection on units with scroll compressors. IM. Provide architectural condenser coil covers constructed of stamped steel, painted to match unit casing. Louvers shall have maximum opening size of%inch tall and 4 inches wide for appearance and to prevent debris from blocking condenser coil. IN. Unit Options: I1. Non-Fused Disconnect Switch. 2. Standard Roof Curb. I3. Gas Heating Section. 4. VAV applications to include variable frequency drives (VFD), one per motor, for airflow/ I duct static pressure modulation. Completely factory installed inside unit. Refer to 15900 for VFD requirements. 5. Corrosion Protection. I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15770-3 0208.0 HVAC 1 Farr 30/30 or I 6. Filters: Filter rack with two inch thick pleated media filters, 35% efficient, F a approved substitute.Two sets of filters required. 7. Microprocessor Control: Factory controls to include devices and wiring necessary for unit operation on a standalone basis for service checkout and operation during construction and startup yet before control installation is complete. Each unit shall be provided with a factory installed and run tested, stand alone, microprocessor control system suitable for CV or VAV control as required. This system shall consist of temperature and pressure sensors, printed circuit boards, and a unit mounted user interface.The microprocessor shall be equipped with on-board diagnostics to indicate that all hardware, software, and allII interconnected wiring and sensors are in proper operating condition. The microprocessor's memory shall be non-volatile EEPROM type, thus requiring no battery backup to maintain all data during a power loss. All controls will be integrated with Section 15900, provide all necessary connection points for full DDC system control, monitoring and operation of unit in compliance with Section 15900. 8. Minimum control devices shall include: a. Refrigeration safety controls including high pressure, low pressure and overcurrent protection with manual reset upon tripout b. Gas heat units shall have continuous flame supervision, shutting off gas if flame fails. High temperature limit controls must shut off gas flow in the event of excessive temperatures resulting from restricted indoor airflow or loss of indoor 1 airflow. c. Provide 100 percent fully integrated and modulating enthalpy economizer control. Shall include outside air enthalpy sensor to enable economizer when free cooling is feasible, supply temperature sensor to limit discharge temperature, adjustable minimum position potentiometer to provide ventilation in occupied mode, outside/return dampers, spring return actuator, and adjustable exhaust fan 0 control. d. VAV units shall include duct static pressure control to modulate VFD. e. VAV units shall include building static pressure control. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that building is ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as illustrated by the manufacturer. B. Verify that proper power supply is available. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable code. 1 B. Lubricate all moving and rotating parts in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation prior to start-up. I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15770-4 HVAC 0208.0 I C. All roof mounted mechanical equipment shall be supported and seismically anchored on leveled, flashed and counterflashed curbs anchored to resist seismic forces and suitable for the roof I construction. Minimum curb height shall be 12 inches above the roof unless otherwise noted. Flashing into the roof is specified in another Section. I D. Make all electrical and duct penetrations for each equipment within the curb unless shown otherwise on the Drawings. Piping and electrical conduit routed above and across the roof shall be supported on flashed and counterflashed curbs with pipe guides anchored to the curbs in "pitch pockets." Submit shop drawings on other arrangements for approval. i E. On makeup air unit evaporative cooling pump discharge pipe to media, install tee and 3/8"manual bleed valve and piping to nearest floor drain. Set bleed rate per manufacturer's instructions. 1 3.03 FILTERS A. New filters shall be installed in units prior to air balancing and project acceptance. 11 END OF SECTION 1 I I 111 1 I 1 $ I I a SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15770-5 0208.0 HVAC I SECTION 15850 FANS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide fans as specified herein and shown on the Drawings. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Division 1 and Section 15010. B. Provide Submittals for all fans scheduled. C. Submit sound power levels for fans. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 CENTRIFUGAL BELT DRIVE ROOF EXHAUST FANS A. Spun aluminum exhaust fans shall be belt drive type. The fan wheel to be centrifugal forward curved or backward inclined, constructed of aluminum and include a wheel cone matched to the inlet cone. Wheels to be statically and dynamically balanced. The fan housing to be constructed of heavy gauge aluminum with a rigid internal support structure and a birdscreen. B. Motors to be heavy duty ball bearing type. Drive frame assembly to be constructed of heavy gauge steel. Motors and drives to be mounted on vibration isolators, out of the airstream. Fresh air for motor cooling to be drawn into the motor compartment through a space between the fan shroud and the motor cover. Motors and drives to be readily accessible for maintenance. C. Precision ground and polished fan shafts to be mounted in permanently sealed, lubricated pillow block ball bearings. Bearings to be for 100,000 hours. Drives to be sized for a minimum of 150% of driven horsepower. Pulleys to be of the cast type, keyed and securely attached to the wheel and motor shafts. D. Motor pulleys to be adjustable. E. A disconnect switch to be factory installed and wired from the fan motor to a junction box installed within the motor compartment.A conduit chase to be provided through the base to the motor compartment. F. All fans to bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for sound and air performance. G. Each fan to bear a permanently affixed manufacturer's nameplate containing the model number and individual serial number. H. Manufacturers: Greenheck, Carnes, Cook, Penn, ILG, Breidert,Acme or accepted substitute. I I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15850-1 0208.0 FANS 1 111 2.02 INLINE CABINET FANS A. Casing to be fabricated of heavy gauge steel, reinforced and braced with steel angle framework for maximum rigidity. Factory assembled, sectionalized casing. 1. Removable panels in fan access to all internal parts. 2. Casings and all accessories given a protective enamel finish. All metal parts of units chemically cleaned, phosphatized and coated with baked enamel finish. Fan cabinet should be lined with 1-inch thick, 1.5 lbs./cu. Ft. density glass fiber lining. I 3. Duct collars at fan housing are an integral part and extension of fan housing. B. AMCA rated, nonoverloading,forward curved, multiblade centrifugal type fan. Statically and dynamically balanced and tested after being installed on properly sized hollow or solid shafts. Permanently lubricated bearings with 200,000 hour minimum life. C. Fans used for kitchen exhaust shall be UL rated for grease exhaust and comply with all requirements for Type I hood connection. D. Manufacturers: Greenheck, Carnes, Cook, Penn, ILG, Breidert, Acme or accepted substitute. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Secure fans to curb with lag bolts on each side. Seal with mastic. Mount on level curb. END OF SECTION I I I I I I I I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15850-2 FANS 0208.0 I SECTION 15890 AIR DISTRIBUTION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide air distribution equipment as specified herein and shown. B. Equipment capacity and size shall be as shown. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Ductwork: Comply with requirements of the State Mechanical Specialty Code(latest edition). B. Field Wiring: Comply with requirements of Section 15010. C. Codes: Refer to Section 15010. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Division 1 and Section 15010. B. Provide submittals for the following: I1. Spiral ductwork. 2. Flexible ductwork. 1 3. Flues. 4. VAV Terminal units. 5. Dampers. 6. Grilles, Registers and Diffusers. 7. Louvers. 8. Roof Vents. 1.04 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver product to site under provisions of Section 15010. B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 15010. C. Store all ductwork, materials on pallets or above grade, protected from weather, dirt, mud and other construction dust. D. Remove all accumulated dust, dirt, etc. from each duct section as it is being installed. I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15890-1 0208.0 AIR DISTRIBUTION I PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCTWORK I A. Galvanized steel sheet metal: Metal gauges,joints and reinforcement in accordance with mechanical Code, ASHRAE and SMACNA tables and recommendations. B. Spiral Seam Duct: Round and flat oval spiral seam duct shall be manufactured of galvanized steel sheet metal with spiral lock seam. Matching fittings shall be manufactured of galvanized steel with spot welded seams. United Sheet Metal, Semco, Rolock, Metco or accepted substitute. 1 C. Grease Exhaust Duct: Duct and plenums shall be constructed of 14 gauge galvanized steel. All welded grease-tight construction. Slope horizontal ducts toward grease hood. Construct exhaust ducts exposed in the kitchen of type 304, 16 gauge stainless steel with smooth welded joints and No.4 finish. Provide cleanouts per Code. D. Vapor Hood Exhaust Duct: Ducts and plenums shall be constructed of rigid aluminum. Seams and joints shall be sealed in a water-tight manner and fastened with non-ferrous fasteners. Slope ductwork to drain toward vapor hood. E. Flexible Ductwork: Insulated low pressure flexible duct,factory fabricated assembly consisting of a zinc coated spring steel helix, seamless inner liner,wrapped with a nominal one inch thick, one pound per cubic foot density fiberglass insulation. The assembly shall be sheathed in a vapor barrier jacket,factory sealed at both ends of each section assuring the vapor resistance of each section as well as the completed installation. The composite assembly, including insulation and vapor barrier, shall meet the Class I requirements of NFPA 90A and be labeled by UL with a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or under. The duct shall have factory sealed double air seal (interior and exterior),to assure an airtight installation. Genflex, Wiremold, Thermaflex or accepted substitute. F. Metal Round and Flat Oval Spiral Sound-Attenuating Ductwork: duct systems with acoustical attenuation properties equal or greater than those for duct type K27-P by United Sheet Metal. Fittings: Factory fabricated with slip joint construction of the same construction as the duct. Provide 45 degree lateral wye takeoffs. Provide duct sealer for sealing field joints for round spiral lock seam duct systems. United Sheet Metal K-27, Semco, Rolock, Metco or accepted substitute. I G. Laundry Clothes Dryer Vent:Aluminum sheet metal, minimum gauge 24.Airtight duct except for openings required for operation or maintenance. Duct to have smooth interior surface and not be assembled with sheet metal screws or other devices that extend into the airstream. Install vent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 2.02 ACOUSTICAL DUCT LINING A. Line ducts with 1 inch thick,Johns Manville"Permacote Linacoustic" R-300, meeting NFPA 90A requirements for maximum flame spread and smoke developed. Gustin Bacon, Owens Corning or accepted substitute. Air side surface protected with acrylic coating, impervious to dust and dirt, will not support microbial growth, rated for 5,000 FPM air velocity. Mechanically attach lining to sheet metal duct with Johns Manville Grip Nails or Gramweld welding pins. Apply fire retardant type adhesive similar to Johns Manville No. 44 adhesive, Benjamin Foster 81-99, Insul-Coustic 22 or 3M equivalent on all leading edges,joints and seams. 2.03 DUCT SEALING with A. Aluminum bonded to aluminized mylar reinforcedfiberglass mesh backing an elastomeric pressure sensitive adhesive specifically formulated for adhesion to galvanized metal. Hardcast "AFG-1402"with"HD-181"degreaser or accepted substitute. SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15890-2 0208.0 AIR DISTRIBUTION 1 I I B. Two-part sealing system with woven fiber, mineral gypsum impregnated tape and non-flammable I adhesive. Hardcast"DT-5300 tape and"RTA-50"adhesive or United "Uni-Cast"system or accepted substitute. IC. Duct Joints for Sheet Metal Ducts: "Ductmate System"by Ductmate Industries, Inc., for making transverse rectangular and round duct joints. Ward Duct Connectors, Inc., MEZ, Lockformer TDC or accepted substitutes. 11 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Manual Volume Dampers: Construct of material two gauges heavier than duct in which installed; $ single plate up to 12 inches wide; multiple over 12 inches wide. Hem both edges 1/2 inch and flange sides 1/2 inch. Provide regulator extension through sheet rock ceiling with concealed adjustable cover. Use Young, DuroDyne or accepted substitue damper accessories. 1 B. Backdraft Dampers: Connected, felt-edged aluminum blades set in 14 gauge or heavier steel frame; brass, nylon or teflon bearings; equip with spring helper with tension adjustment feature or with adjustable counterweight and adjust to open when not more than 0.10 inch wg pressure is J applied. Ruskin CBD-4, Pacific Air Products,Air Balance, Controlair or accepted substitute. C. Splitter Dampers: Same specification as manual volume dampers except blade dimension in direction of air flow to be minimum 12 inches in all cases. Location as shown. Splitter damper operators shall be as shown in SMACNA Low Velocity Duct Manual. D. Opposed Blade Damper: Install opposed blade dampers where shown. Young No. 817 or accepted substitute. I E. Fire Dampers: Constructed and installed in accordance with NFPA, UMC and UL labeled. Provide dynamic fire dampers with 1-1/2 hour fire protective rating; locate fusible links for easy 1 service or replacement; provide access panels of proper fire rating as required. Fusible links to be rated at 160°F. Fire damper assembly to be selected at a maximum pressure drop of 0.05 inches w.g. Provide dampers to maintain free area through damper same as unobstructed run of duct. American Warming, Dowco, Krueger, Ruskin, Phillips-Aire, Tuttle and Bailey, Prefco, IGreenheck, Ultrasafe, Safe Air, National Controlled Air,Air Balance or accepted substitute. F. Combination Smoke-Fire Dampers: Constructed and installed in accordance with NFPA, UMC and UL labeled. Fire damper functions to be as specified previously. Provide with factory mounted 120 volt operating motor where utilized as smoke damper. Smoke damper to be shaft operated. Prefco, Safe Air, National Controlled Air,Air Balance, Ruskin or accepted substitute. 1 G. Access Doors: In sheet metal work, hollow core double construction of same or heavier gauge material as duct in which installed. Use no door smaller than 12 inches by 12 inches for simple manual access or smaller than 18 inches by 24 inches where personnel must pass through 0 infrequently. Use 24 inches by 60 inches minimum for filters and more frequent maintenance. Use Ventlok or approved hinges and latches on all doors; 100 series hinges and latches on low pressure system doors up to 18 inches maximum dimension, 200 series on larger low pressure system doors and 333 series on high pressure systems. Construct doors up to 18 inches I maximum dimension with one inch overlap fit and gasket with 3/4 inch by 1/8 inch sponge rubber; fit larger doors against 1-1/2 inches by 1/8 inch flat stock or angle frame and gasket with 3/4 inch by 1/8 inch sponge rubber or felt. Door swing to be opposite airflow. I. Fan and Air Handling Unit Flexible Connections: Install neoprene impregnated fiberglass connections in ductwork at all rotating equipment. Ventglass, Duro-Dyne or accepted substitute. I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15890-3 0208.0 AIR DISTRIBUTION I 111 2.05 GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS A. Description: Provide grilles, registers and diffusers as shown. B. Finish: 1. Steel: Baked-on white enamel finish, or flat white prime coat,factory applied. Verify the exact finish type with architectural drawings. 2. Aluminum: Clear anodized. C. Manufacturers: Air Devices,Anemostat, Carnes, Krueger,Tuttle&Bailey, Price Co., Metalaire are accepted substitutes where Titus model numbers only are listed. 2.06 SHUT-OFF VARIABLE AIR VOLUME TERMINALS A. General: Pressure independent for adjustable maximum and minimum air flow(cfm)settings, with integral multipoint flow sensing ring velocity sensor. Controls as specified in Section 15900. B. Casing: Minimum 22 gauge galvanized steel, internally lined with dual density glass fiber insulation complying with UL and NFPA 1111 C. Damper: Heavy gauge steel with shaft rotating in Delrin or bronze oilite self-lubricating bearings. The damper shall incorporate a mechanical stop to prevent overstroking, and a synthetic seal to limit close-off leakage. D. Actuator and Controller: Actuator and controller shall be furnished by control contractor and factory installed by the variable air terminal unit manufacturer. Coordinate with control supplier. E. Hot Water Reheat Coils: Coils shall be enclosed in a minimum 20 gauge galvanized steel casing with slip and drive construction and factory installed to the terminal discharge. Coil performance data shall be based on tests run in accordance with ARI Standard 410. F. Manufacturers: Titus, Krueger, Carnes,Tuttle&Bailey, Price, Carrier, ETI, Enviro-Tech,Air Devices, Trane or accepted substitute. I 2.07 LOUVERS A. Frame and sill styles compatible with adjacent substrate, specifically manufactured to fit into construction openings with accurate fit and adequate support for weatherproof installation. Construct of aluminum extrusions,ASTM B221. On inside face of exterior louvers, provide aluminum screen mounted in frames. Blades on 4-inch centers with rain stop design. B. Manufacturers: American Warming and Ventilating, Inc., Pottorff, United Metal Products, Games, Cesco, Industrial Louvers, Inc., Louvers& Dampers, Inc., Ruskin, Greenheck or accepted substitute. 2.08 ROOF VENTS A. Gravity Type: Furnish and install to match roof exhaust fan hoods. I B. Turbine Type: Turbine Roof Ventilator Model RT-30, Breidert or accepted substitute I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15890-4 0208.0 AIR DISTRIBUTION I 1 2.09 CLASS "B"VENT 1 A. Code approved, double wall, Class"B"gas vent complete with drip tee; roof penetration thimbles; storm collar and roof flashing; and weatherproof top. 1B. Manufacturers: Metalbestos,Ampco, Metal-Fab or accepted substitute. 2.10 POSITIVE PRESSURE VENT I A. Code approved, double wall, UL pressure rated with drip tee; roof penetration thimbles; storm collar and roof flashing with weatherproof top. B. Manufacturers: Metalbestos PS,Ampco, Metal-Fab or accepted substitute. IPART 3 -EXECUTION J3.01 LAYOUT AND COORDINATION A. Site Examination: Before starting work, carefully examine site and all contract drawings. Become thoroughly familiar with conditions governing work on this project. B. Utility Locations: The location of all utilities,wires, conduits, pipes, ducts, or other service facilities are shown in a general way only on the drawings. 1 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Provide pilot tube opening where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation materials inside a metal ring. IB. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities. 1 C. Provide manual volume dampers at points on low pressure supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches are taken from larger ducts for air balancing. Use splitter dampers only where shown. Location of all volume dampers are not necessarily shown on the drawings. 4 D. Provide flexible connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and motorized equipment. E. Provide backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where 1 shown. 1 F. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans, automatic dampers, at fire dampers, and elsewhere as indicated. Provide minimum 12 inches x 12 inches size for hand access, 18 inches x 24 inches size for shoulder access and as indicated. Install necessary access openings and covers for cleaning, wiring or servicing motors,fire 1 dampers,filters,fans, both entering and leaving air sides of coils, and to other equipment located within or blocked by ductwork. G. Support: Install ductwork with 1 inch wide 16 gauge cradle hangers not more than 8 feet c/c or as i required by code. Support terminal units independent of adjacent ductwork. Attach to available building construction as per good practices for materials involved. Exposed ductwork shall be supported by closed cradle strap suspended from 3/8 inch threaded rod. I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15890-5 i0208.0 AIR DISTRIBUTION I H. Connection Fittings: Round connections to rectangular ducts manufactured sheet metal"spin-in" fittings. Genflex,Wiremold, Thermaflex, Glassflex, Clevepak, Manville, or accepted substitute. I. Elbows and Fittings: Construct elbows with throat radius equal to duct width in plane or turn or .1 make them square and provide double wall, air foil turning vanes. J. Fittings: Make transitions and take-offs as shown. Provide volume dampers and splitter dampers I as shown and as specified. K. Sleeves: Provide galvanized sheet metal plaster ring around ductwork penetrating exposed finished walls. Sleeve and flash all duct penetrations through exterior walls in an air tight and weatherproof manner. L. Plenums: Construct sheet metal plenums and partitions of not lighter than 18 gauge galvanized steel and reinforce with 1-1/2 inch by 1/2 inch by 1/8 inch angles as required to prevent drumming or breathing. M. Acoustical Duct Lining: Acoustically line all outside air ducts and plenums, all fan unit intake andIt discharge plenums, all ductwork indicated as lined on the Drawings. N. Manual Volume Dampers: Location of all volume dampers are not necessarily shown. Provide a minimum of one volume damper in each supply, return or exhaust branch. 0. Duct Insulation: Insulate all ductwork per Section 15260 as requiring insulation. In addition, all ductwork indicated in Table No. 13H of the Structural Specialty Code and Fire and Life Safety Regulations shall be insulated or lined. P. Flexible Ductwork: Support hanger or saddle material in contact with duct shall be of sufficient width to prevent any restriction of the internal diameter of the duct, and in no case less than 1 inch wide. Maximum sag to be 1/2 inch per foot of spacing between supports. Flexible ducts shall be installed in a fully extended condition free of kinks with no direction change to exceed 90 degrees, using only the minimum length required to make the connection with a maximum length of 24 inches. Sheet metal collars to which the duct is attached shall be a minimum of 2 inches long. Flexible duct shall be inserted into the collar a minimum of 1 inch and inner liner secured with a minimum 1/2 inch wide positive locking steel strap. In ducts larger than 12 inches diameter, steel . strap must be secured by beading. Reshape insulation and vapor barrier over duct and collar and secure using drawband. Attachment of joints is similar using a minimum of 4 inches long collar. Q. Exposed ductwork joints shall be sealed with "Ductmate System". I R. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system. 111 S. Combination Smoke Fire Dampers: Contractor shall install to comply with all manufacturers instructions, local codes and regulations. Contractor shall verify required motor voltage with electrical drawings and electrical sub-contractor prior to submittals and ordering. Contractor shall coordinate required fire alarm contacts and controls and provide necessary accessories for proper operation of dampers. T. Provide a clean set of filters for all units prior to beginning of balancing but after all ductwork I' cleaning is finished. U. Provide galvanized metal trim ring at all wall penetrations of exposed duct. Ring shall be 1-1/2 X 1-1/2 inch angle of same gauge as duct. Paint ring as directed by architect. I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15890-6 0208.0 AIR DISTRIBUTION I 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING I A. Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated dust. To obtain sufficient air, clean half the system at a time. Protect equipment which may be harmed by excessive dirt with temporary filters,or bypass during cleaning. IEND OF SECTION 1 I I I I I 1 I II I I I I 1 SEPTEMBER 2004 USD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15890-7 1 0208.0 AIR DISTRIBUTION I I SECTION 15900 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM PART 1 -GENERAL I1.01 WORK INCLUDED , A. Furnish a complete and fully operating Microsoft Windows based Direct Digital Control system I (DDCS)in accordance with this specification section.All components of system shall conform to most recent open protocol requirements of BACnet by ASHRAE. Any component or part of system that does not comply with BACnet shall have an intermediate communication device or I gateway supplied under this scope of work that makes that component, subsystem, or system compliant with BACnet,for open protocol purpose,with higher level control components or systems that may be added in future. Items of work included are as follows. I 1. Provide all necessary hardware and software to meet the specified functional requirements. 2. Prepare individual hardware layouts, interconnection drawings and control loop 1 configuration data from project design data. 3. Implement the detailed design for all system input/output points, distributed control and I system data bases, graphic displays, logs, and management reports based on control descriptions, logic drawings, configuration data, and bid documents. I 4. Design all equipment cabinets, panels, and the data communication network cables including all associated hardware. 5. Provide and install all cabinets, panels, and data communication network cables including Iall associated hardware. 6. Provide and install all interconnecting cables between supplied cabinets, controllers, and output devices. I 7. Provide and install all interconnecting cables between all operator terminals and peripheral devices (such as printers, etc.)supplied under this section. 11 8. Provide complete specifications for all items supplied by the Vendor from others (such as printers, instruments, etc.). I 9. Provide supervisory specialists and technicians at the job site to assist in all phases of system installation, start-up and commissioning. I10. Provide a comprehensive operator and technician training program as described herein. 11. Provide as-built documentation, software, and all DDC control logic and all associated support documentation on approved media which accurately represents the final system. I1.02 RELATED WORK A. Related work in other sections of the specifications: 1. Section 15050 Basic Materials and Methods 1 2. Section 16010 Basic Electrical Requirements SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15900-1 0208.0 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM I I 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General Requirements 1. Provide a Distributed Processing System complete with Direct Digital Control (DDC)and Direct Analog Control(DAC)software. This system is to control all VAV boxes, heat pumps,fans, coils, dampers, pumps, chillers, boilers and other specified equipment directly,without intervening conventional controls. 2. All DDC Controllers for terminal units, air handlers, Central mechanical equipment, and 1 Windows based operators'terminal(s)shall communicate with each other and share information. 3. The controls contractor shall assume complete responsibility for the entire controls 111 system as a single source and shall certify that he has on staff under his direct employ on a day to day basis,factory trained technical personnel, qualified to engineer, program, debug, and service all portions of the DDC control system, including central system Operators terminal, global controllers, terminal unit controllers, and all other portions of the DDC control system. B. Basic System Features: 1. Zone by zone DDC control of space temperature, usage scheduling, optimum starting, equipment failure reporting, and override timers for off-hours usage.A zone is the area served by one HVAC terminal unit(VAV box, heat pump, unit ventilator,fan coil, etc.) 2. Operator Terminal software shall be a Windows v3.1 and/or Windows NT application program. Software shall be multitasking, capable of executing and displaying multiple instances in individual windows while running concurrently with other Windows programs such as word processors or database programs. Software shall completely support Windows v3.1 Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE)and Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) interfaces. Software shall strictly follow Microsoft Windows API guidelines. Systems using proprietary software or Windows formats other than above are strictly prohibited. Operation of the terminal software shall be simple and intuitive. Provide a complete, on- line, context sensitive help system. Help system shall contain all of the information contained in the system manuals, so that hard copies of the system manual are not required for operation. 3. Complete energy management firmware, including self adjusting optimum start, demand limiting, global control strategies and logging routines for use with total control systems. All energy management firmware shall be resident in field hardware and not dependent on the Operators Terminal for operation. Operators terminal software is to be used for access to field based energy management control firmware only. 4. Priority password security systems to prevent unauthorized use. Each user shall have an individual password. Each user shall be assigned which control functions they have access to. 5. Equipment monitoring and alarm function including information for diagnosing equipment I problems. I I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15900-2 0208.0 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM I 6. The complete system including but not limited to terminal unit controllers, Global controllers and Operator terminals shall Auto-restart,without operator intervention, on resumption of power after a power failure. Database stored in Global Controller memory shall be battery backed up for a minimum of 30 days. Unitary controllers shall utilize EEPROM for all variable data storage. Battery backed up Unitary controllers shall not be I allowed. 7. Modular system design of proven reliability. 1 8. Each field panel capable of independent control. 9. All software and/or firmware interface equipment for connection to remote monitoring station from field hardware or the Operators Terminal. 10. Equipment runtime totalization of fans, heaters, boilers, etc., capable of alarm generation and alarm dial out to remote sites. 11. Room sensors with unoccupied schedule override 12. Field control devices such as terminal unit controllers shall have optically isolated communication lines. Controllers not optically isolated and utilizing a ground referenced communication technique are specifically prohibited. 13. Communication wiring for field control devices shall not be dependent on daisy chaining of communication wiring. Communication wire may be run in star patterns, daisy chained or combination of either, allowing units to be added to a communication line easily in the future. 14. All DDC hardware and software shall be designed and manufactured by U.S. corporations. All hardware shall be U.L. listed with integral labels showing rating. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Responsibility: The supplier of the DDCS shall be responsible for inspection and Quality Assurance(QA)for all materials and workmanship furnished by him. B. Component Testing: Maximum reliability shall be achieved through extensive use of high-quality, pre-tested components. Each and every controller, sensor, and all other DDC components shall be individually tested by the manufacturer prior to shipment. C. Tools,Testing and Calibration Equipment: Provide all tools,testing and calibration equipment necessary to ensure reliability and accuracy of the DDCS. 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The latest edition of the following standards and codes in effect and amended as of date of Supplier's Proposal, and any subsections thereof as applicable,shall govern design and selection of equipment and material supplied: 1 1. ASHRAE: American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers 2. UBC: Uniform Building Code, including local amendments 3. UL 916 Underwriters Laboratories Standard for Energy Management Equipment 4. NEC: National Electrical Code SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15900-3 0208.0 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM I I B. City, county, state, and federal regulations and codes in effect as of date of purchase. C. Except as otherwise indicated,vendor shall secure and pay for all permits, inspections, and I certifications required for his work and arrange for necessary approvals by the governing authorities. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Drawings: 1. Within four weeks after award of contract,the Supplier shall submit review drawings, installation and operation instruction and a recommended spare parts list. 2. Drawings shall be standard sizes (24 inches x 36 inches)or(11 inches x 17 inches). 3. Provide three copies of submittal drawings. B. System documentation by the Vendor shall include the following as a minimum: 1. System configuration diagrams in simplified block format. I 2. Input/Output point and alarm point summary listing. 3. Electrical drawings showing all system internal and external connection points, terminal block layouts and terminal identification. 4. Complete written description of system sequence of operation. I 5. Manufacturer's instructions and drawings for installation, maintenance and operation of all purchased items. 6. Overall system operation and maintenance instructions, including preventive maintenance and troubleshooting instructions. 7. Complete recommended spare parts list. I 1.07 SCHEDULING AND COORDINATION A. The Vendor shall provide a detailed project design and installation schedule with time markings and details for hardware items and software development phases. B. The schedule shall show all the target dates for transmission of project information and I documents and will indicate system installation, debug, and commissioning timing dates. 1.08 WARRANTY 1 A. Warranty shall cover all costs for parts, labor, and associated travel, and expenses for a period of one year from completion of system demonstration. B. Hardware and software personnel supporting this warranty agreement shall provide on-site or off- site service in a timely manner after failure notification to the Vendor. The maximum acceptable response time to provide this service at the site shall be 24 hours. C. This warranty shall apply equally to both hardware and software. I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15900-4 0208.0 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM I IPART 2- PRODUCTS I2.01 SYSTEM MANUFACTURER A. DDC temperature control system shall be furnished by Seimens,Alerton Technologies, Inc., I Siemens/Staefa, Automated Logic,Andover or approved substitute and installed by a local authorized representative, providing sales and service in the local area for no less than the last five years. I B. Alternate: Provide alternate price for design and installation of a Johnson Controls Metasys DDC system. System shall be designed and installed by a local authorized representative, providing sales and service in the local area for no less than the last five years. I2.02 SYSTEM TERMINAL A. Displays: 1 1. Operator Terminal shall display all data associated with project as called out on drawings and/or point list supplied. Terminal software shall accept either PCX or Windows BITMAP I format graphic files for display purposes. Graphic files shall be created utilizing scanned full color photographs of system installation, Autocad drawing files of field installation drawings and wiring diagrams from as-built drawings. System shall be capable of displaying graphic file, text and dynamic point data together on each display. Information I shall be labeled with descriptors and shall be shown with the appropriate engineering units. Terminal shall allow user to change all field resident EMS functions associated with the project such as set points,time schedules, holiday schedules, etc..This shall be done without any reference to point addresses or other numeric/mnemonic indications. 1 2. All displays shall be generated and customized in such a manner by the local DDCS supplier that they fit the project as specified. Canned displays shall not be acceptable. I Displays shall use standard English (or specified language)for labeling and readout. Systems requiring factory programming for graphics or DDC logic are specifically prohibited. All graphics and DDC programming shall be supported locally by the installing contractor without factory dependency or assistance. 1 3. Digital points shall be displayed as On/Off or with customized text. Text shall be justified Left, Right or Center. Also allow digital points to be displayed as individual bitmap I objects on the display screen as an overlay to the system graphic. Each digital point displayed in this manner shall be assigned up to three bitmap files for display when the point is On, Off or in Alarm. For Digital Output points, toggle the points commanded status when the bitmap is selected with the system digitizer(mouse)by the operator(i.e. I selecting a picture of a switch or light with the mouse shall toggle the points status and display a different picture). Also allow digital points to be displayed as an animated graphic. Animated graphic points shall be displayed as a sequence of multiple bitmaps I to simulate motion (i.e.when a pump is in the OFF condition, display a stationary picture of the pump. When the operator selects the picture with the mouse,the points status is toggled and the picture of the pump rotates the vanes in a time based animation). Allow operator to change bitmap file assignment and also create new and original bitmaps on I line. System shall be supplied with a library of standard bitmaps which may be used unaltered or be modified by the operator. Systems that do not allow customization or creation of new bitmap objects by the operator shall not be allowed. I I SEPTEMBER 2004 USD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15900-5 I0208.0 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM I 4. Analog pointsdisplayed shall be dis la ed with operator modifiable units. Analog Input points may also be displayed as individual bitmap objects on the display screen as an overlay to the system graphic. Each analog input point may be assigned to a minimum of five bitmap files each with High/Low limits for automatic selection and display of the bitmaps. As an example, a graphic representation of a thermometer would rise and fall in response to either the room temperature or its deviation from the controlling setpoint. Analog Output points,when selected with the mouse, shall be displayed as a prompted dialog box, adjustable knob or slide bar. Selection for display type shall be individual for each point. 5. Analog points may also be assigned to an area of a system graphic,where the color of the defined area would change based on the analog points value. As an example, an area of a floor plan graphic served by a single control zone would change color respective to the temperature of the zone or its deviation from setpoint. Selection of the graphic area to be done using a"Roller Brush Flood Fill"tool similar to ones used in painting programs. All editing and area assignment shall be created or modified on-line, using simple icon tools. 6. A Customized Menu Label shall be used for display selection. Menu items on a display shall allow penetration to lower level displays or additional menus. Dynamic point information and menu items may be mixed on the same display to allow sub displays to exist for each item. Each display may be protected from viewing unless operator has appropriate security level. A separate display security level may be assigned to each 111 display and system point. 7. All dynamic point information shall be updated on the Operators terminal display CRT once every 1 second. Any changes by the operator shall be acted on by devices in the field within 2 seconds maximum. 8. A Mouse or other form of digitizer shall be used to move pointer arrow to desired item for selection of new display or to allow the operator to make changes to point data. 9. Displays may be modified on site or via remote communications. 1 10. Display resolution shall be limited only by the CRT hardware and Windows v3.1/NT software driver only. Provide as a minimum, display resolution of 800x600 @256 colors (Super VGA). 11. Entire system shall operate without dependency on the Operator's terminal. B. Security System: 1. Provide security system that prevents unauthorized use unless operator is logged on. Access shall be limited to operator terminal's functions unless user is logged on. This includes displays as outlined above. 2. Each Operators Terminal shall provide security for 100 users minimum. Each user shall have an individual password. Password and User name shall each be up to 30 alpha numeric characters, case sensitive. Each User shall be individually assigned which control functions and menu items the user has access to. All passwords, user names and access assignments shall be adjustable on-line, at the operators terminal. 3. System shall maintain a log of all user activities while logged onto the system. Provide for easy viewing of all items in user log, including time and date of login, logoff and all activities in between. I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15900-6 0208.0 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM I C. Display of Scheduling Information: 1. Display of Weekly schedules shall show all information in easy to read 7 day(week) format for each schedule. This includes all on/off times for each day along with all optimum start information. 2. Holiday schedules shall show all dates that are to be holidays. Holidays shall be shown on the terminal in a graphical calendar format showing all scheduled days for a given month. User shall be able to easily scroll through the months for each year for up to 20 years into the future as a minimum. Each day assigned as a holiday shall display as"All Off or show the times scheduled for that day. 3. Event schedules shall be shown in the same graphical calendar format and manner as Holiday schedules. Event schedules allow for scheduling of special events up to 20 years into the future. After event has elapsed, control returns to normal schedule. 4. Operator shall be able to change all information for a given Weekly, Holiday or Event schedule if logged on with the appropriate security access. This includes all information that has to do with optimum start assignments such as sensors to use and heating/cooling factors. D. Alarm Indication 1. System Terminal shall provide audible,visual and printed means of alarm indication. The Alarm Dialog box shall always become the Top Dialog box regardless of the application(s) being run at the time (such as a word processor). Printout of alarms shall be sent to the Iassigned terminal and port. 2. Provide log of alarm messages. Alarm log shall be archived to the hard disk of the system terminal. Each entry shall include point descriptor and address, time and date of alarm occurrence, point value at time of alarm,time and date of point return to normal condition, time and date of alarm acknowledge. 3. Alarm messages shall be in plain English (or specified language)and shall be user definable on site or via remote communication. System shall provide a minimum of 20 user definable messages for each zone controlled. E. Trend Log Information: 1. System shall periodically gather samples of point data stored in the field equipment(see section 2.2.D)and archive the information on the Operator terminals hard disk. Archive files shall be appended with new sample data, allowing samples to be accumulated over several years. Systems that write over archived data shall not be allowed. Samples may be viewed at the operators terminal in a Trend Log. Trend log displays shall be in spreadsheet format. Provide a minimum of 100 Trend Log displays at each terminal. Each trend log display shall be capable of a minimum of 100 trended points,with a minimum of 10,000 samples for each trended point. Provide capability for operator to scroll through all trend log data vertically(time axis)and horizontally(point sample columns). System shall automatically open archive files as needed to display archived data when operator scrolls through the data vertically. Display all trend log information in standard engineering units. I I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15900-7 0208.0 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM I 2. System software shall be capable of graphing the trend log point data. Software shall be capable of creating graphs in the following forms as a minimum: a. Bar charts, Log/Linear graphs, Bubble graphs, b. x-y graphs, Log/Log graphs,Area graphs(2D or 3D), c. Pie charts, Scatter graphs, Polar graphs, d. High-Low-Close graphs I 3. Operator shall be able to change trend log setup information as well. This includes information to be trend logged as well as interval at which information is to be logged. All points in the system may be logged. All operations shall be password protected. I F. Energy Log Information: 1. System shall periodically gather energy log data stored in the field equipment(see section 2.2.H)and archive the information on the Operator terminals hard disk. Archive files shall be appended with the new data, allowing data to be accumulated over several years. Systems that write over archived data shall not be allowed. Log data may be viewed at the operators terminal in a spreadsheet format. Provide a minimum of 100 Energy Log displays at each terminal. Provide capability for operator to scroll through all Energy log data vertically(time axis)and horizontally(point sample columns). System shall 0 automatically open archive files as needed to display archived data when operator scrolls through the data vertically. Display all Energy log information in standard engineering units. 2. System software shall be capable of graphing the Energy log data. Software shall be capable of creating graphs in the following forms as a minimum: a. Bar charts, Log/Linear graphs, Bubble graphs, 1 b. x-y graphs, Log/Log graphs, Area graphs(2D or 3D), c. Pie charts, Scatter graphs, Polar graphs, d. High-Low-Close graphs 3. Operator shall be able to change the Energy log setup information as well. This includes which meters to be logged and meter pulse value. All meters monitored in the system may be logged. All operations shall be password protected. G. Controller Status: 1. Provide means for operator to view communication status of all controllers connected to11 the system. Display shall include controller, status and error count. Status will show if controller is communicating or not. Error count shall show actual count of communication errors between system and controllers in the field. I 2. Provide means for operator to reset error count for all controllers to zero. 3. Provide capability to select alarm indication for each controller. I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15900-8 0208.0 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM I IH. Configuration/Setup: Provide means for operator to display and change system configuration. This shall include but not be limited to system time, day of the week, date of day light savings set I forward setback, printer type and port addresses, modem port and speed, etc. Items shall be modified utilizing easy to understand terminology using simple mouse/cursor key movements. II. Custom Report Generator: 1. Custom report generator shall allow the operator to create multiple custom reports utilizing system point information,text and outputs of other software modules such as I trend logging, controller status, point values, etc.. Operation shall be similar to a word processing program allowing easy manipulation of report text, content, font and initiation parameters. Reports may be manually or automatically printed to system printer. Automatic printing initiation may be by assignment to a schedule (Weekly, Holiday or I Event schedules), point Change Of State (COS), point alarm condition, or point value. 2. Reports shall fully support Windows DDE and OLE allowing information from other software programs(such as spreadsheet programs)to be part of the report. I J. Occupant Override Logging and Billing: Night cycle override of zone temperature control, lighting, etc., shall be automatically logged by field devices (Global Controllers)on a zone by zone basis. I See section 2.2.G for description. Operator Terminal software shall allow zones to be grouped for totalization of all zones within the area over an adjustable time period. System shall include a billing program for creation of charges based on the billing rate and the totaled override usage Ifrom specified begin and end dates. K. Terminal Hardware: I 1. Provide Operator terminal at location instructed by Owner. Operator terminal shall include the following as a minimum: Ia. IBM compatible capable of utilizing AT bus cards b. 80486 DX processor @ 33MHZ clock speed or higher Ic. 32 MB RAM on motherboard d. Minimum of(1)one floppy disk drive Ie. Hard disk drive with a minimum of 16 gig free space f. MS-DOS v6.0 or higher Ig. Microsoft Windows v3.1 or higher, or Windows NT h. VGA or Super VGA monitor and hardware driver Ii. Bus mouse or equal (compatible with Windows) IL. Campus Local Area Network: 1. In addition to the LAN communication between the Operator Terminals and the Global Controllers (hereafter called a LOCAL system), the local system shall also be capable of 1 connecting to other local systems or Operators terminals via a Campus LAN. The Campus LAN shall be any of the ETHERNET type LANs available. Provide all ETHERNET hardware and Windows Network software necessary for a complete and ioperational system. SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15900-9 0208.0 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM I 1 2. Any point in the interconnected system, comprised of all local systems connected together with the Campus LAN, shall be available for any and all functions of any one of the local systems. As an example, an electric meter input to one of the local systems shall be capable of being utilized in any of the other local systems demand limiting program(s). 2.03 GLOBAL CONTROLLER A. General: 111 1. Global controller shall provide battery backed real time clock functions. It shall also provide system communications to programmable and application specific controllers as noted in section 2.3 in the field. Global controller shall interface with Operator terminal(s) for information display. Global controllers shall share information in a Peer-to-Peer manner utilizing a high speed LAN communication network. Global Controller shall be capable of 1 Meg baud LAN communication rates. 2. Global controller shall decide global strategies for system based on information from any points in the system regardless if the point is directly monitored by the controller. Program that implements these strategies shall be completely flexible and user definable. 111 Any system utilizing factory pre-programmed global strategies that cannot be modified by field personnel on site or downloaded via remote communications are not acceptable. Changing global strategies via firmware changes is also unacceptable. Program executed speed shall be once per second as a minimum. 3. Programming shall be object oriented using control program blocks. Provide documentation in flow chart form for all programming as part of the final system As-Built documentation. Include samples of flow chart documentation in submittals. All flow charts shall be generated with CAD system and automatically downloaded to controller. No reentry of data base shall be necessary. 4. Provide means to view inputs and outputs to each program block in real time as program is executing. This function may be done via the Operators Terminal,field computer,or via modem. I 5. Controller shall have a minimum of 1 Mb battery backed Static RAM, expandable to 2 Mb, along with 256 Kb of EPROM. Battery shall retain static RAM memory and clock functions for a minimum of 30 days. Battery shall be a field replaceable lithium type. Battery shall automatically re-charge on resumption of local power. 6. Communication to field devices shall be via four individual two wire communication trunks. Communication baud rate shall be at 1200,4800, or 9600 baud selectable. All field devices shall automatically search and detect the communication rate to match the Global controller. All field devices on the communication trunk shall be optically isolated. Ground referenced communications to field devices is prohibited. Routing of communication trunk may be daisy chained, run in star patterns or any other configuration that makes wiring easiest. 7. Controller shall have at a minimum,four(4)additional communication ports in addition to the LAN port. Two of the ports shall be RS-232, one for communication to portable field computer and one for a modem for remote communications. The other two ports shall be RS-485 for connection to a permanent panel mounted display device (see 2.2.1 for description), and for future connection to other devices. I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15900-10 0208.0 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM I ill B. Remote Communications: 1 1. Provide all functions that will allow remote communications via modem to off-site locations. Include modem along with all cabling necessary for installation. I 2. Provide Windows v3.1 or Windows NT compatible software for off-site computer which allows operator to view and change all information associated with system on color graphic displays if desired. Operator shall be able to change all parameters in this section from off-site location including all programming of global controllers and programmable I ' terminal unit controllers. 3. Global Controller shall have capability to call out alarm conditions automatically if desired. I Alarm message and site description may be sent to off site computer or serial printer. If desired, controller may also send encoded message to digital pager. All Global controllers connected to the local LAN shall be capable of calling out alarm messages through one shared modem connected to one of the Global controllers on the local LAN. I 4. Controller shall have capability to call 10 different phone numbers each as a minimum. Numbers called may be controlled by time schedule or other selectable program parameters. I5. Owner shall provide standard voice grade phone line for remote communication function. 6. Global controller and supplied modem shall be capable of modem-to-modem baud rates a of 9600 baud minimum over standard voice grade phone lines. Lower baud rates shall be selectable for areas where local phone company conditions require lower baud rates. C. Schedules: 1. Schedules shall be arranged in a three tiered hierarchy as follows: Ia. Highest level: Event Schedules b. Middle level: Holiday Schedules Ic. Lowest level: Weekly Schedules 2. Each Global Controller shall have at a minimum: a. 100 Weekly time schedules (7 day) b. 100 Holiday schedules(400 programmable days each) Ic. 20 Event schedules (400 programmable days each)with 8 schedule entries per day. I3. Each schedule may be assigned to any point, controller, or program in the system. 4. Each schedule(Weekly, Holiday and Event)shall be capable of performing an optimum I start. Optimum start calculation shall be based on outside air temperature, zone air temperature deviation from zones daytime heating and cooling setpoints, and individual zone adaptive heating and cooling coefficients that are adjusted each day based on performance parameters of the individual zone. Each schedule may use identical or Iindividual sensors in its calculations. I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15900-11 0208.0 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM I 5. Holiday schedule shall be provided to allow operation of system based on different it schedule on specified holidays. Display of Holiday schedule shall be via a monthly calendar format. Operator shall be able to scroll through months and years. Operator shall be capable of scheduling dates a minimum of 20 years into the future. 6. Event schedules shall be identical to Holiday schedule format and requirements. 7. Operator may define and setup all schedule information from system terminal,via portable computer on site or via remote communications. This includes all times, dates and optimum start parameters. These functions shall be password protected. I D. Logging Capabilities: 1. Each Global Controller shall log as a minimum 256 user selectable points with a minimum111 of 1440 samples per point. Sample time interval shall be from 1 to 1000 seconds. Sample initiation may be by any of the following conditions: a. Selectable begin and end date and time I b. Point COS(Any system point) c. Point Alarm Status(Any system point) d. Schedule ON status (Weekly, Holiday or Event schedules). Any point in the system whether it is real or calculated may be logged. 2. Logs may be viewed both on site or off-site via remote communication. 3. Global controller shall periodically upload trended data to Operator terminal for long term I archiving if desired. E. Alarm Generation: I 1. Alarms may be generated for any condition of the system. This includes things such as analog point high/low alarm limits, digital point COS, communication failure to terminal unit controllers,etc. Controller shall have a minimum of 6 alarm types with 7 categories for each type. 2. Each alarm may be dialed out as noted in paragraph B. above. I 3. Provide alarm log for viewing of alarms. Log may be viewed on site at the system terminal or off-site via remote communications. I F. Demand Limiting: 1. System shall monitor energy demand. Energy demand may be from any type of energy I source such as electrical or gas. Provide a Demand Limiting routine which shall shed assigned points or zones in the system to prevent the demand from exceeding preset limits. Demand limiting routine shall be a priority shed type allowing automatic override of zone or point shed when assigned temperature sensor exceeds operator set limits. Routine shall be able to change between 4 sets of demand limit and restore setpoints based on time of day or operator command. 2. Zone shed method shall be by either preventing operation of heating and cooling, or by shifting the zones heating and cooling setpoints. I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15900-12 0208.0 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM I 3. All parameters of the Demand Limitingroutine shall be modifiable from the Operators I p a p Terminal or via remote communications. G. Occupant Override Logging and Billing: 1. Night cycle override of zone temperature control, lighting, etc., shall be automatically logged on a zone by zone basis. Zones may be grouped into areas for totalization of all zones within the area over an adjustable time period. System shall include a billing program for creation of charges based on the billing rate and the totaled override usage from specified begin and end dates. 2. Provide Global Controller capacity to total override usage for a minimum of 100 areas with up to 256 zones per area and 30 overrides per zone. Global controller shall periodically upload the override information to the System terminal for long term archiving and billing generation. H. Energy Logging: 1. Each global controller shall have ability to provide for a minimum of 10 Energy Logs. When required by specified sequence of operation, each log shall monitor an energy meter and record or calculate the following information for each Day, Month and Year: a. Energy consumption b. Demand peak value and time of peak c. Outside air temperature minimum, maximum and average value d. Heating and Cooling degree day calculation 2. Energy meter input may be from any type of energy source such as electric or gas. Input type shall be dry contact pulse. I. Field Interface/Display Terminal: Provide a field interface and display terminal as located on the project plans. Field Terminal(s)shall connect to the Global controller via a two conductor RS-485 cable in a star or tee tap configuration allowing easy addition of terminals in the future. Field Terminals shall be capable of displaying and commanding any and all points in the system utilizing customizable menus and data displays. Field Terminal data displays shall be independent of Operator Terminal displays. Field Terminal operation shall not be dependent on Operator terminal operation. I J. Memory Modules: Global Controller data storage memory shall be modular, allowing additional memory to be added in the field (two modules minimum). Additional memory may be allocated by the operator to increase the storage capability of any or all routines requiring memory for storage of data. Modules shall be battery backed static RAM in Single In-line Modules (SIMM)or other easily insertable package. I I 1 SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15900-13 0208.0 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM I 2.04 TERMINAL UNIT CONTROLLERS A. General: I 1. Provide programmable and application specific Terminal Unit Controller as needed to comply with sequence of operation, point list and drawings. All Terminal Unit Controller units shall be completely stand-alone with no loss of control if communication with global controller is interrupted. All control parameters, DDC programs and local variables such as setpoint information shall be stored in EEPROM on board each Terminal Unit Controller allowing the operator to change information as desired. Controllers that utilize a battery to backup control parameters, etc., shall not be allowed. 2. All points on drawings, in sequence of operation and on point list shall be connected to and controlled by DDC units. No control shall be done by external devices such as thermostats or analog controls that are not part of the DDC system. 3. Programmable Terminal Unit Controllers shall be used in custom applications such as central plant, built up air handlers,fume hoods or when application specific controllers sequence of operation is not applicable. 4. Communication from Global controller to Terminal Unit Controllers shall be via two wire communication trunk as specified for Global Controllers above. Any type of Terminal Unit Controller shall communicate on the same communication trunk. System shall communicate to one Terminal Unit Controller regardless of whether other Terminal Unit Controllers on the same communication line are powered and connected. Ground referenced communications is prohibited. B. Programmable Terminal Unit Controllers: I 1. Each programmable Terminal Unit Controller shall be completely programmable from the system terminal, via field computer or via remote communications. Program execution rate shall be ten times per second minimum (once every 100 milliseconds). 111 2. This controller shall be programmed to perform custom strategies for system based on information from all points in the field. Program that implements these strategies shall be completely flexible and user definable. Any controllers utilizing factory programmed strategies that cannot be modified by field personnel on site, require factory assistance, or cannot be downloaded via remote communications are not acceptable. Changing strategies via firmware changes is also unacceptable. 3. Programming shall be object oriented using program blocks familiar to control specialists for all program strategies. Provide documentation in flow chart form for all programming. Include samples of flow chart documentation in submittals. All flow charts shall be generated with CAD system and automatically downloaded to controller. No re-entry of data base shall be necessary. As-Built documentation of all software shall be provided to end user in flow chart form at completion of project. 4. Program and program parameters such as set points shall be stored in EEPROM. Battery backed RAM shall not be accepted for this level of controller. I 5. All inputs shall be universal in that they accept analog and digital information. Inputs shall be capable of detecting a 0.1 second momentary closure. Analog inputs shall be capable of accepting thermistor inputs, 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, or 4 to 20 mA inputs. No external hardware shall need to be added for Terminal Unit Controller to accept these different types of inputs. All inputs shall utilize a minimum of 10 bit analog to digital conversion. i SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15900-14 0208.0 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM I I 6. Every digital output shall have local status indication. Outputs shall have minimum control Iresolution of 0.1 seconds On or Off. 7. Each of the analog outputs shall be independently switch selectable to output 0 to 10 VDC I or 0 to 10 mA. Unit shall be programmable to output a sub range of voltage or current to match the device controlled. Analog outputs shall use 8 bit digital to analog conversion. 8. Terminal Unit Controller may be programmed to control what is displayed on zone sensor I display. See section 2.4. Terminal Unit Controller may be programmed to show alpha numeric values on zone sensor display in response to program changes or button presses on the zone sensor. I 9. Each Terminal Unit Controller shall provide 24 VDC at 250 mA as a source of power for current transducer sensors in the field. IC. Application Specific Terminal Unit Controllers: 1. Application Specific Terminal Unit Controllers shall be completely stand-alone controllers for unitary type controls such as VAV terminal boxes, heat pumps,AC units, unit ventilators, etc. All programs shall be resident in controller for complete stand-alone operation. I 2. EEPROM technology shall be used for storage of program parameters such as setpoints, limits, etc., controllers utilizing a battery for backup of program parameters shall not be allowed. I 3. All application specific Terminal Unit Controller units shall have capability to use Digital display zone sensor, or thermistor type zone sensor as listed in section I2.05 TEMPERATURE SENSORS A. General: All temperature sensors to be solid state electronic, factory calibrated to within one-half degree F, totally interchangeable. Wall sensors to be housed in enclosure appropriate for I application. Duct and well sensors to be electronically identical with housing appropriate for application. Provide appropriate wells for installation by others. Provide locking protective clear plastic covers for all sensors located where damage may occur and at minimum in Gym and IMultipurpose Room. B. Zone Temperature Sensor: I1. Sensor shall contain push-button bypass switch, electronic sensor, setpoint bias lever and jack for connection to Digital Display zone sensor for troubleshooting. The operator shall program the time of on after hours override operation from 0.0, no override, to 9.9 hours in 0. hour increments. Push buttons are to remain inactive until zone is in the after hours I mode. 2. Setpoint bias shall be via labeled bias lever. Maximum bias shall be plus or minus 3 Idegrees F. I 1 SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15900-15 i0208.0 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM I 2.06 OTHER CONTROL DEVICES A. Valves: shall be straight or three-way pattern as shown. Provide seat, disc, and body suitable for medium and pressure handled. Modulating valves shall have linear or equal percentage characterized plugs suitable for system operation. Water valves sized for 5 psi drop unless otherwise noted. Two-position valves line size, quick opening. Valves shall operate satisfactorily against system pressures and differentials. Butterfly valves allowed only where shown and shall close bubble tight. All valves shall be sized and constructed for 100%tight shut off. Straight(2- way)double seat valves are not acceptable. Shop drawings shall include valve sizing schedule indicating required flow, required CV, proposed CV, and pressure drop with proposed CV and required flow,for each valve. B. Dampers: shall be factory sizes nearest to duct size being used and shall have factory filler panels so damper assembly matches duct size. Bearings oil impregnated bronze. Provide parallel blades for positive or modulating mixing service and opposed blade for throttling service, or as specified in sequence. Maximum blade dimension 10 inches. Damper blades and damper frames galvanized. Provide blade edging and side seals for tight shutoff. Dampers shall be equal to Johnson D1200, D1300, or Ruskin CD35. Scribe end of damper drive shaft to indicate blade position. C. Damper and valve actuators: Actuators sized to operate and shut valves and dampers properly against system pressures, differentials, velocities, and conditions. Damper actuators shall be sized for 80% of their published load rating including those with pilot positioners. Damper actuators shall be located to distribute operating force equally over full area of damper for uniform positioning of all blades. Quantity and size of actuators for each damper shall be listed on the shop drawings. Where damper operation and fan operation are interlocked, provide control to open damper sufficiently to prevent duct or equipment damage before fan is started. Where drawings indicate normal valve position for fail safe operation, valve actuator shall be spring return. Outside air and relief damper actuators shall also have spring return to closed position. D. Variable frequency drives (VFD's): shall be solid state,with a Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) output waveform in a NEMA 1 enclosure, completely assembled and tested by the manufacturer. The VFD shall employ a full wave rectifier(to prevent input line notching, DC line reactor, capacitors, and insulated gate bipolar transistors(IGBT's)as the output switching device. Drive efficiency shall be 97%or better at full speed and full load. Fundamental power factor shall be 0.98 at all speeds and loads. Drive shall be designed specifically for variable torque applications. Drive manufacturer shall have an existing local sales representative with expertise in HVAC systems and controls, and local service organization. Drive and all necessary controls, as herein specified shall be supplied by the drive manufacturer. Manufacturer shall have been engaged in the production of this type of equipment for a minimum of ten years. 1. Referenced Standards: I a. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers(IEEE), Standard 519-1992, IEEE Guide for Harmonic Content and Control. b. Underwriter's Laboratories, UL 508. c. National Electrical manufacturer's Association (NEMA), ISC 6, Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems. 2. All printed circuit boards shall be completely tested and burned-in before being assembled into the completed VFD. The VFD shall then be subject to a preliminary functional test,minimum eight hour burn-in, and computerized final test. The burn-in shall be at 104°F(40°C), at full rated load, or cycled load. Drive input power shall be continuously cycled for maximum stress and thermal variation. SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15900-16 0208.0 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM I I 3. All VFD's shall have the following standard features: a. All VFD's shall have the same digital display, keypad and customer connections, regardless of horsepower rating. Keypad to be used for local control,for setting all parameters, and for stepping through the displays and menus. b. VFD shall give user the option of either(1)displaying a fault, (2) running at a programmable preset speed, (3)hold the VFD speed based on the last reference received,or(4)cause a warning to be issued, if the input reference (4-20mA or 2- 10V)is lost; AFT shall provide a programmable relay output for customer use to indicate loss of reference condition. c. VFD's shall utilize plain English digital display(code numbers and letters are not acceptable). Digital display shall be a 40-character(2 line x 20 characters/line) LCD display. LCD shall be backlit to provide easy viewing in any light condition. Contrast should be adjustable to optimize viewing at any angle. All set-up parameters, indications,faults, warnings and other information must be displayed in words to allow user to understand what is being displayed without use of a manual or cross-reference table. d. VFD's shall utilize pre-programmed application macros specifically designed to facilitate start-up. Application macros shall provide one command to reprogram all parameters and customer interfaces for a particular application to reduce programming time. e. VFD shall have the ability to automatically restart after an overcurrent, overvoltage, undervoltage, or loss of input signal protective trip. Number of restart attempts, trial time, and time between reset attempts shall be programmable. If time between reset attempts is greater than zero, time remaining until reset occurs shall count down on the display to warn an operator that a restart will occur. f. VFD shall be capable of starting into a rotating load (forward or reverse)and accelerate or decelerate to setpoint without safety tripping or component damage (flying start). g. VFD shall be equipped with an automatic extended power loss ride-through circuit which will utilize inertia of the load to keep drive powered. Minimum power loss ride-through shall be one-cycle, based on full load an no inertia. Removing power from motor is not an acceptable method of increasing power loss ride-through. h. Customer terminal strip shall be isolated from line and ground. Prewired 3-position Hand-Off-Auto switch and speed potentiometer. When in "Hand", the VFD will be started, and the speed will be controlled from the speed potentiometer. When in "Off", the VFD will be stopped. When in "Auto", the VFD will start via an external contact closure, and its speed will be controlled via an external speed reference. j. VFD shall employ three current limit circuits to provide trip free operation: 1) Slow current regulation limit circuit shall be adjustable to 125% (minimum)of VFD's variable torque current rating. This adjustment shall be made via the keypad, and shall be displayed in actual amps, and not as percent of full load. I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15900-17 0208.0 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM I to 170% (minimum)of 1 2) Rapid current regulation limit shall be adjustable VFD's variable torque current rating. 3) Current switch-off limit shall be fixed at 255% (minimum, instantaneous) I of VFD's variable torque current rating. k. Overload rating of VFD shall be 110%of its variable torque current rating for 1 I minute every 10 minutes, and 140%of its variable torque current rating for 2 seconds every 15 seconds. I. VFD shall have input line fuses standard in the drive enclosure. I m. VFD shall have a DC line reactor to reduce harmonics to the power line and to increase the fundamental power factor. n. VFD shall be optimized for a 3 kHz carrier frequency to reduce motor noise and provide high system efficiency. Carrier frequency shall be adjustable by the start- up engineer. o. VFD shall have a manual speed potentiometer in addition to using the keypad as a means of controlling speed manually. I 4. All VFD's shall have the following adjustments: a. Five(5)programmable critical frequency lockout ranges to prevent the VFD from I continuously operating at an unstable speed. b. PI setpoint controller shall be standard in the drive, allowing a pressure or flow signal to be connected to the VFD, using the microprocessor in the VFD for the closed loop control. c. Two (2)programmable analog inputs shall accept a current or voltage signal for speed reference, or for reference and actual (feedback)signals for PI controller. Analog inputs shall include a filter,programmable from 0.01 to 10 seconds to remove any oscillation in the input signal. Minimum and maximum values(gain and offset)shall be adjustable within the range of 0-20 mA and 0-10 volts. Additionally,the reference must be able to be scaled so that maximum reference can represent a frequency less than 60 Hz,without lowering drive maximum frequency below 60 Hz. 111 d. Six(6)programmable digital inputs for maximum flexibility in interfacing with external devices. One digital input is to be utilized as a customer safety connection point for fire,freeze, and smoke interlocks (Enable). Upon remote, 111 customer reset(reclosure of interlock), drive is to resume normal operation. e. Two(2)programmable analog outputs proportional to frequency, motor speed, I output voltage,output current, motor torque, motor power(kW), DC bus voltage, or active reference. f. Three (3)programmable digital relay outputs. The relays shall be rated for I maximum switching current 8 amps at 24 VDC and 0.4 amps at 250 VAC; Maximum voltage 300 VDC and 250 VAC; continuous current rating 2 amps RMS. Outputs must be true from C type contacts; open collector outputs are not acceptable. g. Seven (7) programmable preset speeds. SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15900-18 0208.0 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM 1 I h. Two independently adjustable accel and decel ramps. These ramp times shall be I adjustable from 1 to 1800 seconds. i. VFD shall have ramp or coast to a stop, as selected by the user. 1 5. The following operating information displays shall be standard on the VFD digital display. Display shall be in complete English words (alpha-numeric codes are not acceptable). Ia. Output frequency b. Motor speed (RPM, %or engineering units) Ic. Motor current d. Calculated motor torque Ie. Calculated motor power II f. DC bus voltage g. Output voltage Ih. Heatsink temperature i. Analog input values Ij. Keypad reference values k. Elapsed time meter II. kWh meter 6. VFD shall have the following protection circuits. In the case of a protective trip, drive shall I stop, and announce the fault condition in complete words(alpha-numeric codes are not acceptable). Ia. Overcurrent trip 315% instantaneous (225% RMS)of the VFD's variable torque current rating. b. Overvoltage trip 130% of the VFD's rated voltage I c. Undervoltage trip 65%of the VFD's rated voltage Id. Overtemperature +70°C (ACH 501); +85°C (ACH 502) e. Ground fault either running or at start I f. Adaptable electronic motor overload (12t). The electronic motor overload protection shall protect motor based on speed, load curve, and external fan parameter. Circuits which are not speed dependant are unacceptable. The electronic motor overload protection shall be UL listed for this function. I 7. Speed command input shall e via: Ia. Keypad. SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15900-19 II 0208.0 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM I I b. Two analog inputs, each capable of accepting a 0-20 mA,4-20 mA, 0-10V, 2-10V signal. Input shall be isolated from ground, and programmable via the keypad for different uses. c. Floating point input shall accept a three-wire input from a Dwyer Photohelic(or equivalent type) instrument. 8. Serial Communications: a. VFD shall have an RS-405 port as standard. b. VFD shall be able to communicate with PLC's, DCS's. and DDC's. c. Serial communication capabilities shall include, but not be limited to, run-stop control,speed set adjustment, proportional/integral PI controller adjustments, current limit, and accel/decel time adjustments. Drive shall have the capability of allowing DDC to monitor feedback such as output speed/frequency,current(in amps), %torque, % power, kilowatt hours, relay outputs, and diagnostic fault information. 9. Accessories to be furnished and mounted by drive manufacturer: a. Customer interlock terminal strip-provide a separate terminal strip for connection of freeze, fire, smoke contacts, and external start command. All external interlocks and start/stop contacts shall remain fully functional whether the drive is in Hand,Auto or Bypass. b. All wires to be individually numbered at both ends for ease of troubleshooting. c. Door interlocked thermal magnetic circuit breaker which will disconnect all input power from the drive and all internally mounted options. The disconnect handle 111 shall be thru-the-door type, and be padlockable in the"Off'position. 10. VFD's shall be UL listed or CSA approved. I 11. Submittals shall include the following information: a. Outline dimensions. I b. Weight. c. Typical efficiency vs. speed graph for variable torque load. I d. Compliance to IEEE 519-Harmonic analysis for particular jobsite including total voltage harmonic distortion and total current distortion. I 1) VFD manufacturer shall provide calculations, specific to this installation, showing total harmonic voltage distortion is less than 5%. Input line filters shall be sized and provided as required by VFD manufacturer to ensure compliance with IEEE standard 519-1992, Guide for Harmonic Control and Reactive Compensation for Static Power Converters. Acceptance of this calculation must be completed prior to VFD installation. I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15900-20 0208.0 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM I 2) Prior to installation, VFD manufacturer shallp rovide estimated total harmonic distortion (thd)caused by the VFD's. results shall be based on a computer aided circuit simulation of total actual system,with information obtained from power provider and user. 3) If voltage THD exceeds 5%, VFD manufacturer is to recommend additional equipment required to reduce the voltage THD to an acceptable level. 12. Install drive in accordance with recommendations of the VFD manufacturer. Complete all wiring in accordance with the recommendations of the VFD manufacturer. Certified factory start-up shall be provided for each drive by a factory authorized service center. A certified start-up form shall be filled out for each drive with copies provided to Architect, Owner, and a coy kept on file at the manufacturer. 13. Warranty shall be 24 months from the date of certified start-up, not to exceed 30 months from the date of shipment. Warranty shall include all parts, labor, travel time, and expenses. 14. Manufacturer shall be ABB Industrial Systems, Inc., or approved equal. 2.07 SMOKE DETECTORS A. Dual chamber ionization type with duct sampling tubes. UL approved with adjustable sensitivity. Arrange to stop associated fan on presence of smoke. Provide in return duct upstream of outside air connection and filters for all fan systems above 2000 CFM. 2.08 CARBON DIOXIDE SENSORS A. General: Wall-mounted carbon dioxide sensor. Infrared type. Provide locking protective clear plastic covers in areas where damage may occur at a minimum in the Gym and Multipurpose Room. B. Range and Accuracy: 0 to 2,000 ppm plus or minus 100 ppm. Maximum drift plus or minus 100 ppm per year. C. Output Signal:4 to 20 milliamp linearized. D. Calibration Interval: One year. E. Ambient Operating Conditions: 32°F to 122°F. 1 PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. B. Notify the Owners Representative in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. C. Do not begin work until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15900-21 0208.0 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM 1 3.02 GENERAL INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. I B. Provide all miscellaneous devices, hardware, software, interconnections installation and programming required to insure a complete operating system in accordance with the sequences of operation and point schedules. 3.03 LOCATION AND INSTALLATION OF COMPONENTS A. Locate and install components for easy accessibility; in general, mount 60 inches above floor with minimum 3'-0"clear access space in front of units. Obtain Owner Representative's approval on locations prior to installation. B. All instruments, switches,transmitters, etc.,shall be suitably wired and mounted to protect them from vibration and high temperatures. C. Identify all equipment and panels. Provide permanently mounted tags to all panels. ! D. Provide stainless steel or brass thermowells suitable for respective application and for installation under other sections; sized to suit pipe diameter without restricting flow. 3.04 INTERLOCKING AND CONTROL WIRING A. Provide all interlock and control wiring. All wiring shall be installed in a neat and professional 1 manner in accordance with Division 16 and all state and local electrical codes. B. Provide wiring as required by functions as specified and as recommended by equipment manufacturers,to serve specified control functions. C. Control wiring shall not be installed in power circuit raceways. Magnetic starters and disconnect switches shall not be used as junction boxes. Provide auxiliary junction boxes as required. Coordinate location and arrangement of all control equipment with the Owner's Representative prior to rough-in. D. Provide auxiliary pilot duty relays on motor starters as required for control function. E. Provide power for all control components from nearest electrical control panel or as indicated on the electrical drawings; coordinate with electrical contractor. F. All control wiring in the mechanical, electrical,telephone and boiler rooms to be installed in raceways. All other wiring to be installed in a neat and inconspicuous manner per local code111 requirements. 3.05 DDC POINT SUMMARY A. Provide all Data-base generation. B. Displays: System displays shall show all points in the system. They shall be logically laid out for ease of use by the owner. Provide outside air temperature indication on all system displays associated with economizer cycles. C. Run time Totalization: At a minimum, run time totalization shall be incorporated for each monitored supply fan, return fan, exhaust fan, hot water and chilled water pumps. Warning limits for each point shall be entered for alarm and or maintenance purposes. SEPTEMBER 2004 USD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15900-22 0208.0 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM 1 D. Trend Log: All binary and analog points shall have the capability to be trended. E. Alarm Points: All analog inputs (High/Low Limits)and selected digital input alarm points shall be prioritized and routed/auto-dial with alarm message per owner's requirements. F. Database Save: Provide back-up database for all stand-alone DDC panels on floppy disk. G. Provide all points required in above specification and in point schedule, included in this specification. 3.06 FIELD SERVICES A. Prepare and start DDCS under provisions of this section. B. Start-up and commission systems. Allow sufficient time for start-up and commissioning prior to placing control systems in permanent operation. C. Provide the capability for off-site monitoring at Control Contractor's local or main office. At a minimum, off-site facility shall be capable of system diagnostics and software download. Owner shall provide phone line for this service. D. Provide Owner's Representative with spare parts list. Identify equipment critical to maintaining the integrity of the operating system. 1 3.07 TRAINING A. Provide application engineer to instruct owner in operation of systems and equipment. B. Provide basic operator training for a minimum of 3 persons on data display, alarm and status descriptors, requesting data, execution of commands and request of logs. C. Provide training above as required up to 40 hours as part of this contract. 3.08 DEMONSTRATION A. Provide systems demonstration under provisions of Section 15010. B. Demonstrate complete and operating system to Owner's Representative. C. Provide certificate stating that control system has been tested and adjusted for proper operation. PART 4-SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 4.01 HEATING WATER SYSTEM A. Run heating water system on call for heating from and VAV reheat coil systems in occupied, override, or night low limit operating mode. B. When heating water system is off, B-1, P-1, B-2, P-2, and are off. C. When heating water system is on, start and stage B-1/BP-1 and B-2/BP-2 as required to maintain heating water temperature set point for heating water supply to heating system. Alternate lead/lag of B-1 and B-2. D. Interlock P-1 to run when B-1 is on and P-2 to run when B-2 is on. I ' SEPTEMBER 2004 0208.0 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15900-23 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM E. B-1 and B-2 burner controls set to maintain 180°F water temperature supply from boiler. F. Stop B-1 and B-2 if heating water temperature exceeds 210°F. 1 4.02 VAV ROOF TOP AC UNITS SYSTEM A. Run units during occupied schedules, override, warm up/cool down cycle, or night low limit modes I of operation. B. When system is off,supply fan off, outside air damper closed, return air damper open, relief damper closed. C. When AH system is on during occupied mode, start supply fan, open outside air damper to low occupancy minimum outside air position, this point will modulate after initial start to maintain acceptable CO2 level. Room sensor shall in sequence start-stop gas heating section, cooling section,outside air damper, return air damper, and relief air damper to maintain room occupied set point temperature at room sensor. Control outside, return and relief dampers as required for free outside air enthalpy economizer cooling to minimize mechanical cooling. Limit supply air temperature to a low limit of 50°F. When outside air enthalpy is greater than return air, position outside, return and relief dampers to minimum outside air operating position. Coordinate with air balancer. Open return air as needed to maintain acceptable CO2 levels. D. Modulate fan speed based in duct static pressure to maintain required flow to VAV boxes. Interlock with VFD for proper control of fan speed. I D. Provide manual high occupancy switch that changes damper positions to provide the higher minimum outside air listed in the schedule. High occupancy operation to be an adjustable timed operation, length established by Owner. E. Provide ionization type duct smoke detector(s), as required in the UMC for automatic fan shut down, in supply air duct and stop AH-1 when smoke is detected. Stop AH when fire alarm system initiates an alarm condition. Coordinate other fire/smoke shut down requirements with AHJ and provide necessary control and coordination with fire alarm contractor to comply. F. During unoccupied schedules,stop system and reduce room temperature set point to a night low limit setting selected by Owner. If space temperature drops below the night low limit temperature, start heating water system and run system only in a night low limit mode providing heat only, with outside and relief dampers closed and return dampers full open, until space temperature returns to the night low limit setting. When unoccupied mode changes to occupied, by time schedule or override, outside and relief dampers shall remain closed in a"warm up/cool down"cycle until space temperature reaches the occupied set point. F. Manual override of the unoccupied operating mode and night set back temperature is accomplished at the room sensor. Override is for an adjustable,timed period of 1 hr,2 hr, 3 hr, etc. as requested by Owner. During override operation AH-1 shall operate same as the occupied mode described above. 4.02 CONSTANT VOLUME ROOF TOP AC UNITS SYSTEM A. Run units during occupied schedules, override, warm up/cool down cycle,or night low limit modes of operation. B. When system is off, supply fan off, outside air damper closed, return air damper open, relief I damper closed. 1 SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15900-24 1110208.0 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM I I C. When AH system is on during occupied mode, start supply fan, open outside air damper to low occupancy minimum outside air position, this point will modulate after initial start to maintain I acceptable CO2 level. Room sensor shall in sequence start-stop gas heating section, cooling section, outside air damper, return air damper, and relief air damper to maintain room occupied set point temperature at room sensor. Control outside, return and relief dampers as required for I free outside air enthalpy economizer cooling to minimize mechanical cooling. Limit supply air temperature to a low limit of 50°F. When outside air enthalpy is greater than return air, position outside, return and relief dampers to minimum outside air operating position. Coordinate with air balancer. ID. Provide manual high occupancy switch that changes damper positions to provide the higher minimum outside air listed in the schedule. High occupancy operation to be an adjustable timed Ioperation, length established by Owner. E. Provide ionization type duct smoke detector(s),as required in the UMC for automatic fan shut down, in supply air duct and stop AH when smoke is detected. Stop AH-1 when fire alarm system I initiates an alarm condition. Coordinate other fire/smoke shut down requirements with AHJ and provide necessary control and coordination with fire alarm contractor to comply. I G. During unoccupied schedules, stop system and reduce room temperature set point to a night low limit setting selected by Owner. If space temperature drops below the night low limit temperature, start heating water system and run system only in a night low limit mode providing heat only, with outside and relief dampers closed and return dampers full open, until space temperature returns I to the night low limit setting. When unoccupied mode changes to occupied, by time schedule or override, outside and relief dampers shall remain closed in a"warm up/cool down"cycle until space temperature reaches the occupied set point. I H. Manual override of the unoccupied operating mode and night set back temperature is accomplished at the room sensor. Override is for an adjustable,timed period of 1 hr, 2 hr, 3 hr, etc. as requested by Owner. During override 1 4.03 VAV TERMINAL UNITS I A. Provide pressure independent control of VAV terminal units. Room sensor, terminal unit controller, damper operator,valve and valve operator provided by control contractor. Refer to VAV terminal unit specification concerning factory mounting of control items at VAV terminal unit manufacturing facility. Verify and coordinate as required this suggested procedure with each I specified or approved VAV unit supplier, making necessary allowances and adjustments. Provide 2 or 3 way valves per schedule. B. Room sensor modulates unit damper,through unit mounted controller, and reheat coil valve in I sequence to control room temperature. On decrease in room temperature, modulate damper toward scheduled minimum air volume. On further decrease in room temperature modulate coil valve toward open position. On rise in room temperature, reverse sequence. 1 C. Maximum CFM and minimum CFM for each VAV terminal unit may be set and verified at operator terminal. CFM and discharge temperature may be observed at operator's terminal. I4.04 KITCHEN HOOD EXHAUST FANS A. Controlled manually by wall switch in Kitchen I4.05 TOILET ROOM EXHAUST FANS A. Operate on owners schedule. I I SEPTEMBER 2004 0208.0 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15900-25 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM I 11 4.06 COMBUSTION AIR FIRE SMOKE DAMPERS A. Interlock with boilers and water heaters stop appliance firing when dampers close. Coordinate I with fire alarm contractor. I END OF SECTION 1 I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 15900-26 0208.0 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM 1 I ISECTION 16010 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS I PART 1 -GENERAL I1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and IDivision 1 Specification Sections, apply to this and the other sections of Division 16. 1.02 SUMMARY I A. This Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements for electrical installations. The following administrative and procedural requirements are included in this Section to expand the requirements specified in Division 1: I1. Submittals. I 2. Coordination drawings. 3. Record documents. I4. Rough-ins. 5. Electrical installations. I B. Electrical systems required for this work includes labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to complete installation of electrical work shown on Drawings, specified herein or required for a complete operable facility and not specifically described in other Sections of these ISpecifications. Among the items required are: 1. Service and distribution equipment shown on Drawings. IC. Existing Conditions: 1. Survey site to verify existing conditions. I1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Following is a list of abbreviations generally used in Division 16: 1. AHJ Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1 2. ADA Americans With Disabilities Act. 3. ANSI American National Standards Institute. 1 4. APWA American Public Works Association. 5. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials. I6. FCC Federal Communications Commission. ' 7. HVAC Heating-Ventilating and Air Conditioning. SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16010-1 I0208.0 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 8. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers. 9. IEC International Electrotechnical Commission. , 10. I ETA International Electrical Testing Association. 11. FM Factory Mutual. ' 12. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association 13. NFPA National Fire Protection Association. 1 14. NEC National Electric Code. 15. OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration. 16. UBC Uniform Building Code. 17. UFC Uniform Fire Code. 18. UL Underwriters'Laboratories, Inc. ' B. Provide: To furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. C. Furnish: Supply and deliver to the project site, ready for unpacking, assembly and installation. I D. Install: Includes unloading, unpacking, assembling, erecting, installation, applying, finishing, protecting, cleaning and similar operations at the project site as required to complete items of work furnished by others. 1.04 SUBMITTALS I A. General: Follow the procedures specified in Division 1. B. Additional copies may be required by individual sections of these Specifications. 1.05 COORDINATION DRAWINGS I A. Prepare coordination drawings in accordance with Division 1 Section 01100 "EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS,"to a scale of 1"=40'for the site plan and scale 1/8"=1'-0"or larger;detailing major elements, equipment and materials in relationship with other systems, installations,. Indicate locations where space is limited for installation and access and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the Work, including (but not necessarily limited to)the following: B. Indicate the proposed locations of major raceway systems,and materials. Include the following: 1. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases. I I 1 SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16010-2 0208.0 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 1.06 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Prepare record documents in accordance with the requirements in Division 1 Section "CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS." In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, indicate installed conditions for: 1. Major raceway systems,size and location. 2. Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, and actual equipment and materials installed. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of the NEC, latest adopted version with amendments by local AHJs. B. Conform to latest adopted version of the UBC with amendments by local AHJs. C. Obtain and pay for electrical permits, plan review, and inspections from local AHJs. D. Furnish products listed by UL or other testing firm acceptable to AHJ. E. Conform to requirements of the serving electric, telephone, and cable television utilities. 1.08 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, ' compliance labels,and other information needed for identification. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide like items from one manufacturer. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Provide new electrical materials of the type and quality detailed, listed by UL, bearing their label wherever standards have been established. Indicated brand names and catalog numbers are used to establish standards of performance and quality. The description of materials listed herein governs in the event that catalog numbers do not correspond to materials described herein. B. Provide material and equipment that is acceptable to AHJ as suitable for the use indicated. For example, provide wet labeled equipment in locations that are wet. C. Include special features,finishes, accessories, and other requirements as described in the Contract Documents regardless of the item's listed catalog number. D. Provide incidentals not specifically mentioned herein or noted on Drawings, but needed to complete the system or systems, in a safe and satisfactory working condition. I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16010-3 0208.0 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 1 PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 ROUGH-IN 1 A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual items to be installed. 3.02 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS A. General: Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of electrical systems, materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements: 1. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. 2. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. 3. Coordinate location of exterior underground utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service. 1114. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal data, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, refer conflict to the Engineer. 5. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required to be installed at a specified slope. 6. Earthwork: a. Refer to Division 2, Section"Earthwork." b. Perform excavation and backfill for the installation of electrical work. , END OF SECTION I 1 I 1 SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16010-4 0208.0 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 16109 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Connect equipment, whether furnished by Owner or other Divisions of the Contract, electrically complete. B. Power connections only in Division 16 for equipment provided by Owner or other Divisions. ' Equipment not set in place by Division 16. C. Ground all equipment with equipment grounding conductor. 1.02 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of the NEC, latest adopted version with amendments by local AHJs. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS A. Verify electrical characteristics of equipment prior to installation of conduits and wiring for equipment. B. Unless Otherwise Noted in Contract Documents, the Following Voltage and Phase Characteristics apply to Motors Furnished by Others: i1. 1/3 HP and Under: 120 volt, 1-phase. ' 2. 1/2 HP and Over: 208 volt, 3-phase. 3. 1/2 HP and Over: 480 volt, 3-phase. C. Coordinate HVAC voltage requirements with Drawings and equipment submittals prior to rough in. 3.02 MOTOR BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING A. Do not install electrical equipment or wiring on mechanical equipment without approval of Architect. B. Provide moisture tight equipment wiring and switches in ducts or plenums used for environmental air. C. Connect motor branch circuits complete from panel to motor as required by code and manner herein described. 1 SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16109-1 0208.0 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS 1 Divisions, provided by equipment I D. Motor starters,for equipment supplied by Owner and other installer for installation by Division 16. E. Motor starter control devices and wiring provided by other Divisions unless noted on Drawings. ' F. Install equipment feeder circuit to packaged HVAC equipment. Terminate feeder conductors at line terminals as directed by equipment manufacturer. Verify packaged HVAC and owner provided equipment fabricated with integral disconnect switch. 3.03 APPLIANCE/UTILIZATION EQUIPMENT , A. Provide appropriate cable and cord cap for final connection unless equipment is provided with same. Install receptacle to receive cord cap. B. Verify special purpose outlet NEMA configuration and ampere rating with equipment supplier prior to ordering devices and coverplates. 3.04 FREEZER AND COOLER BOX CONNECTIONS A. Obtain supplier's shop drawings prior to rough-in and provide complete connections per supplier's shop drawings. B. Provide connections to electric defrost elements,door heaters,vent heaters, door switches, lights, condensate drain heaters, blower fans, and the like. 3.05 KITCHEN RANGE EXHAUST HOOD, CLASS 1 A. Obtain supplier's shop drawings prior to rough-in and provide complete connections per supplier's 1 shop drawings. B. Provide connections to hood lights,fire suppression/extinguishing system, hood control panel, and the like. C. Provide interlocks to exhaust fan,make-up air unit, solenoid valves, and shunt trip breakers/contactors to deenergize electrical equipment located under hood. 3.06 KITCHEN WASTE DISPOSAL A. Obtain supplier's shop drawings prior to rough-in and provide complete connections per supplier's shop drawings. B. Provide connections to solenoid valves, and the like. END OF SECTION 1 I I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16109-2 0208.0 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Raceways. ' 2. Conduit fittings. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ' A. Provide raceways, wires, cables, connector, boxes, devices, finish plates and the like for a complete and operational electrical system. B. Electrical Connections: Connect equipment,whether furnished by Owner or other Divisions of the Contract, electrically complete. C. Supporting Devices: Safety factor of 4 required for every fastening device or support for electrical equipment installed. Support to withstand four times weight of equipment it supports. Bracing to comply with Seismic Zone 3 requirements. ' 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following according to the conditions of the contract and Division 1: ' 1. Raceways. 2. Conduit fittings. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of the NEC, latest adopted version with amendments by local AHJs. B. Furnish products listed by UL or other testing firm acceptable to AHJ. ' C. Comply with NECA, "Standard of Installation." 1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Raceway System is Defined as Consisting of: Conduit, tubing or duct and fittings including but not limited to connectors, couplings, offsets, elbows, bushings, expansion and deflection fittings and other components and accessories. B. Finished Surfaces: Prevent cutting in connection with finished work. Make repairs in a manner approved by Architect. I 1 SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16110-1 0208.0 RACEWAYS I I PART 2-PRODUCTS I 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Raceways: Allied Steel, Certainteed, Jones & Laughlin, Carlon, Kraloy, or approved. I B. Conduit Fittings: 0-Z Gedney, Thomas& Betts, Crouse Hinds, or approved. 2.02 CONDUITS I A. Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit(GRC): 1. Hot-dip galvanized after thread cutting. 2. Manufacture in conformance with Federal Specification WWC-581 and ANSI C80.1. I 3. Uniform finish coat with chromate for added protection. B. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: Alloy 6063,threaded at each connection. I C. Intermediate Metal Conduit(IMC): 1. Hot-dip galvanized after thread cutting. I 2. Manufacture in conformance with Federal Specification WWC-581. 3. Uniform finish coat with chromate for added protection. I D. PVC: I 1. Class 40 heavy wall rigid PVC, NEMA TC2. 2. Rated for use with 90C conductors. I 3. Manufacture in conformance with Federal Specification WC1094A and NEMA TC-2. 2.03 CONDUIT FITTINGS I A. Bushings: I 1. Insulated Type for Threaded Rigid, IMC Conduit or Raceway Connectors without Factory Installed Plastic Throat Conductor Protection: Thomas& Betts 1222 Series or O-Z Gedney B Series. ' 2. Insulated Grounding Type for Threaded Rigid, IMC Conduit and Conduit Connectors: O-Z Gedney BLG Series. B. Raceway Connectors and EMT Couplings: 1. Steel conduit and coupling bodies, with zinc electroplate or hot-dip galvanizing. I 2. Connector locknuts are steel, with threading meeting ASTM tolerances. Locknuts are zinc electroplated or hot-dip galvanized. SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16110-2 I 0208.0 RACEWAYS I I 3. PVC conduit and tubingfittings: NEMA TC g 3, match to conduit type and material. I C. Expansion/Deflection Fittings: 1. EMT, O-Z Gedney Type TX. I2. RMC, O-Z Gedney Type AX, DX and AXDX, Crouse& Hinds XD. IPART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION IA. Conduit: 1. Conduit Joints: Assemble conduits continuous and secure to Vaults. Provide watertight joints where, below grade or in damp locations. Seal PVC conduit joints with solvent cement and metal conduit with metal thread primer. All rigid conduit connections to be threaded, clean and tight (metal to metal). Threadless connections are not permitted for IGRC and IMC. 2. Conduit Placement: I a. Install conduit and raceways for electrical power wiring and signal systems wiring. Ib. Conceal all conduits. c. Make bends and offsets so the inside diameter is not reduced. Unless otherwise indicated, keep the legs of a bend in the same plane and the straight legs of I offsets parallel. d. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: Install in middle third of the slab thickness where 3. Below Grade Conduit and Cables: Place a minimum 3-inch cover of sand or clean earth fill around the cable or conduit on a leveled trench bottom. Lay conduit on a smooth level I trench bottom, so that contact is made for its entire length. Remove water from trench before electrical conduit is installed. 4. Maximum Bends: Install code sized pull boxes to restrict maximum bends in a run of Iconduit to 270 degrees. 5. Conduit Terminations: Provide conduits shown on Drawings which terminate without box, panel, cabinet or conduit fitting with not less than five full threads. Bushings and I metal washer type sealer between bushing and conduit end. 6. Terminations: Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align the I raceway to enter squarely, and install the locknuts with dished part against the box. Where terminations cannot be made secure with one locknut, use two locknuts, one inside and one outside the box. I 7. Flexible Conduit: install 12-inch minimum slack loop on flexible metallic conduit and PVC coated flexible metallic conduit. 1 SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16110-3 0208.0 RACEWAYS Where size is not indicated, minimum Drawings. 8. Conduit Size: Size as indicated trade size 1-inch. 9. Conduit Use Locations: a. Underground: PVC. b. Sharp Bends and Elbows: GRC, EMT use factory elbows. c. Install pull wire or nylon cord in continuous empty raceways provided for other111 systems. Secure wire or cord at each end. d. Elbows for Signal Cables: Use long radius factory ells where linking sections of raceway for installation of signal cable. 10. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits are stubbed above grade. Arrange so curved portion of bends is not visible above the finished slab. I END OF SECTION 1 I I I I I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16110-4 0208.0 RACEWAYS SECTION 16114 CABLE TRAYS I PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. The work covered under this Section consists of the furnishing of all necessary labor, supervision, materials, equipment, tests and services to install complete cable tray systems. B. Cable tray systems are defined to include, but are not limited to straight sections of ladder type cable trays, bends, tees,elbows, drop-outs, supports and accessories. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI/NFPA 70- NEC. B. ASTM B633- Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel. C. NEMA VE1 -Metallic Cable Tray Systems. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Follow the procedures specified in Division 1. ' B. Submit Drawings of cable tray and accessories including clamps, brackets, hanger rods, splice plate connectors, expansion joint assemblies, and fittings, showing accurately scaled components. Provide layout drawings indicating exact route of cable tray, coordinate layout with structural members, HVAC ducts, architectural appurtenances, and the like. tC. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on cable tray including, but not limited to, types, materials, finishes, rung spacings, inside depths and fitting radii. For side rails and rungs, submit cross-sectional properties including section modulus (Sx)and moment of inertia(IX). D. Provide operating and maintenance instructions from the manufacturer for project closeout, see Project Closeout Requirements in Division 1. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of cable trays and fittings of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA Standards Publication Number VE1, Cable Tray Systems. C. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC, as applicable to construction and installation of cable tray and cable channel systems(Article 318, NEC). D. UL Compliance: Provide products which are UL classified and labeled. I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16114-1 0208.0 CABLE TRAYS 1 E. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 70B, Recommended Practice for Electrical Equipment Maintenance pertaining to installation of cable tray systems. In particular,tray penetrations of fire-rated walls are to be firestopped utilizing packet style bagged firestopping material in and around cable tray. Cable trays are installed via 16 gauge, galvanized steel, sleeve system to close wall void spaces. Void space around sides and bottom of tray with respect to wall sleeve are fire sealed. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS111 A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with these Specifications, install cable tray and cable channel systems. B-Line Systems, Inc., Monopoint Systems,Wiremold's"Atlas"cable tray, or approved. 2.02 CABLE TRAY SECTIONS AND COMPONENTS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide metal cable trays, of types, classes and sizes indicated; with splice plates, bolts, nuts and washers for connecting units. Construct units with rounded edges and smooth surfaces; in compliance with applicable standards; and with the following additional construction features. B. Materials and Finish: Aluminum, extrude straight section and fitting side rails and rungs from Aluminum Association Alloy 6063. Make all fabricated parts from Aluminum Association Alloy 5052. 2.03 TYPE OF TRAY SYSTEM A. Ladder type trays consist of two longitudinal members (side rails)with transverse members (rungs)welded to the side rails. Space rungs 9-inches o.c. Rung Spacing in Radiused Fittings: 9-inches and measured at the center of the trays width. No portion of the rungs protrude below the bottom plane of the side rails. B. Tray sizes have 4-inch side rail height with a minimum nominal loading depth of 3-inches. C. Straight tray section have side rails fabricated as I-Beams. Supply all straight sections in standard 12-foot lengths, except where shorter lengths are permitted to facilitate tray assembly lengths as shown on Drawings. D. Tray Widths: 12 -inches. E. Make splice plates the bolted type as indicated below for each tray type. The resistance of fixed 1 splice connections between an adjacent section of tray not to exceed 0.00033 ohm. Provide splice plate construction such that a splice may be located anywhere within the support span without diminishing the cable tray rated loading capacity. 1. Make splice plates of 6063-T6 aluminum, using four square neck carriage bolts and serrated flange locknuts. Zinc plate hardware in accordance with ASTM B633, SC1. 2. Furnish splice plates with straight sections and fittings. F. Cable Tray Supports: Place so that the support spans do not exceed a maximum of 10-feet o.c. Construct supports from 12 gauge formed shape channel members 1-5/8-inch by 1-5/8-inch with necessary hardware i.e.,Trapeze Support Kits(9G-55XX-22SH)as manufactured by B-Line Systems or Engineer approved. SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16114-2 0208.0 CABLE TRAYS G. Support trapeze hangers by 1/2-inch minimum diameter electro-galvanized threaded rods. 2.04 LOADING CAPACITIES A. Cable trays shall meet NEMA class designations: 12B. ' PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install cable trays as indicated; in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that cable tray equipment comply with requirements of NEC, and applicable portions of NFPA 70b and NECA's Standards of Installation pertaining to general electrical installation practices. ' B. Coordinate cable tray with other electrical work as necessary to properly interface installation of cable tray work with other work. C. Remove burrs and sharp edges of cable trays. Provide No. 3 bare copper wire equipment ' grounding and bonding connections of sufficient capacity to assure a permanent and effective ground. D. Provide sufficient space encompassing cable trays to permit access for installing and maintaining cables. E. Provide grounding bond strap at all cable tray joints. Bond cable tray at 50-foot centers to ' overhead structure. 3.02 TESTING A. Test cable trays to ensure electrical continuity of bonding and grounding connections, and to demonstrate compliance with specified maximum grounding resistance. See NFPA 70B, Chapter 18,for testing and test methods. END OF SECTION 1 I 1 1 SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16114-3 0208.0 CABLE TRAYS I SECTION 16120 WIRES AND CABLES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes building wires and cables and associated splices, connectors, and terminations for wiring systems rated 600 volts and less. 1 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit product data for all materials included in this Specification Section, according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NFPA 70"National Electrical Code"for components and installation. B. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1. The Terms"Listed and Labeled": As defined in the"National Electrical Code,"Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL)as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordination: Coordinate layout and installation of cable with other installations. 1. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit field conditions and as approved by the Architect. 1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver wire and cable according to NEMA WC-26. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Wires and Cables: a. American Insulated Wire Corporation, Leviton Manufacturing Co. b. Carol Cable Company, Inc. c. General Cable d. Okonite SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 0208.0 WIRES AND CABLES 1 e. Rome f. Senator Wire&Cable Co. g. Southwire Co. 2. MC Cable: Alflex,AFC, Carol, or approved. 3. SO Cable: Okonite, Southwire,Tiger 4. Connectors for Wires and Cables: a. AFC, Monogram Co. b. AMP, Inc. I c. Anderson, Square D Co. d. Electrical Products Division, 3M Co. I e. O-Z/Gedney Unit, General Signal. 2.02 BUILDING WIRES AND CABLES A. UL-listed building wires and cables with conductor material B. Rubber Insulation: Conform to NEMA WC 3. C. Thermoplastic Insulation: Conform to NEMA WC 5. I D. Cross-Linked Polyethylene Insulation: Conform to NEMA WC 7. E. Ethylene Propylene Rubber Insulation: Conform to NEMA WC 8. F. Solid or stranded conductor for 10 AWG and smaller; stranded conductor for larger than 10 AWG. G. Color Code Conductors as Follows: _ I PHASE 208 VOLT WYE 240 VOLT DELTA 480 VOLT A Black Black Brown B Red Orange (High Leg) Orange C Blue Blue Yellow Neutral White White Gray Ground Green Green Green Isolated Ground Green w/yellow trace N/A N/A H. MC Cable: High strengthgalvanized alvanized steel or aluminum flexible armor. Full length minimum size No. 12 copper ground wire,THHN 90C conductors,full length tape marker. Minimum conductor content, 3-#12,#12 ground. Overall PVC or nylon cable tape. Short circuit throat insulators, mechanical compression termination. Manufacturers: Alflex,AFC, or Carol. I. Service Entrance Cable: Copper conductor, 600 volt insulation, XHHW,Type SE. SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16120-2 0208.0 WIRES AND CABLES I 1 2.03 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES IA. UL-listed factory-fabricated wiring connectors of size, ampacity rating, material, and type and class for application and for service indicated. Select to comply with Project's installation requirements. IPART 3 -EXECUTION I3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine raceways and building finishes to receive wires and cables for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. I 3.02 APPLICATIONS IA. Feeders: Type THHN/THWN, copper conductor, in raceway. B. Branch Circuits: Type THHN/THWN, copper conductor, in raceway. C. Fire Alarm Circuits: Power-limited fire protective signalling circuit cable, or as recommended by system supplier, in conduit. 1 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install wires and cables as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and the INECA"Standard of Installation." B. Pull conductors into raceway simultaneously where more than one is being installed in same raceway. I1. Use pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. I2. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips that will not damage cables or raceway. I C. Install exposed cable, parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible. D. Conductor Splices: Keep to minimum. i 1. Install splices and tapes apes that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than conductors being spliced. 1 2. Use splice and tap connectors that are compatible with conductor material. E. Wiring at Outlets: Install with at least 12 inches (300 mm)of slack conductor at each outlet. I F. Connect outlets and components to wiringand toground as indicated and instructed by manufacturer. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, according to 1 equipment manufacturer's published torque-tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals according to tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A. I SEPTEMBER 2004 USD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16120-3 0208.0 WIRES AND CABLES I drops in walls at accessible I G. MC Cable permitted in accessible building void spaces and verticalp building void spaces. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: 1. Upon installation of wires and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, 11 demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements. feeders of 100 ampand greater for conformity with 1000 volt I 2. Test conductor insulation on megohmmeter. Use Insulated Cable Engineers Association testing procedures. Minimum insulation resistance acceptable is 1 megohm for systems 600 volts and below. In the condition that the insulation resistance is less than 1 megohm notify Architect. I 3. Test Report: Prepare a typed tabular report indicating the testing instrument, the feeder tested, amperage rating of the feeder, insulation type,voltage,the approximate length of the feeder, conduit type, and the measured resistance of the megohmmeter test. Submit report with operating and maintenance manual. where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; I B. Correct malfunctioning products at site, otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and retest. i END OF SECTION II I I 11 I 1 I I I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16120-4 0208.0 WIRES AND CABLES SECTION 16130 BOXES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Outlet boxes. 2. Weatherproof outlet boxes. 3. Junction and pull boxes. 4. Floor boxes. 5. Moldable fire barrier. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Outlet System: Provide electrical boxes and fittings as required for a complete installation. Include but not limited to outlet boxes,junction boxes, pull boxes, bushings, locknuts, and all other necessary components. B. Code Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical boxes and fittings and size boxes according to NEC 370, except as noted otherwise. C. Flush Outlets in Insulated Spaces: Maintain integrity of insulation and vapor barrier. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Follow the procedures specified in Division 1. B. Provide Shop Drawings and Product Data for the Following Equipment: 1. Outlet boxes. �j 2. Weatherproof outlet boxes. !/ 3. Junction and pull boxes. 4. Floor boxes. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of the NEC, latest adopted version with amendments by local AHJs. B. Furnish products listed by UL or other testing firm acceptable to AHJ. I I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16130-1 0208.0 BOXES I PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS I A. Outlet Boxes: Bowers, Raco, or approved. C. Weatherproof Outlet Boxes: Bell, Red Dot, Carlon, or approved. 1 D. Junction and Pull Boxes: Circle AW, Hoffman, or approved. E. Box Extension Adapter: Bell, Red Dot, Carlon, or approved. F. Conduit Fittings: O-Z Gedney,Thomas& Betts, or approved. I G. Floor Boxes: Wiremold/Walker, Hubbell, Steel City, LEW Electric Fittings Company or approved. 2.02 OUTLET BOXES 1 A. Luminaire Outlet: 4-inch octagonal box, 1-1/2-inches deep with 3/8-inch luminaire stud if required. Provide raised covers on bracket outlets and on ceiling outlets. B. Device Outlet: Installation of one or two devices at common location, minimum 4-inch square, minimum 1-1/2-inches deep. Single or 2-gang flush device raised covers. Raco Series 681 and 686. ,11 C. Telephone/Data Outlet: 4-inch square, 2 1/8-inch,with single gang flush device raised cover. D. Multiple Devices: Three or more devices at common location. Install 1-piece gang boxes with 1-piece device cover. Install one device per gang. E. Masonry Boxes: Outlets in concrete, Raco Series 690. 1 F. Construction: Provide galvanized steel interior outlet wiring boxes, of the type, shape and size, including depth of box,to suit each respective location and installation; constructed with stamped knockouts in back and sides, and with threaded holes with screws for securing box covers or wiring devices. G. Accessories: Provide outlet box accessories as required for each installation, including mounting brackets,wallboard hangers, extension rings, luminaire studs, cable clamps and metal straps for supporting outlet boxes,compatible with outlet boxes being used and meeting requirements of individual wiring situations. 2.03 WEATHERPROOF OUTLET BOXES A. Construction: Provide corrosion-resistant cast metal weatherproof outlet wiring boxes, of the type, shape and size, including depth of box,with threaded conduit ends, cast metal face plate with spring-hinged waterproof cap suitably configured for each application, including face plate gasket, blank plugs and corrosionproof fasteners. Weatherproof boxes to be constructed to have smooth sides, gray finish. I I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16130-2 0208.0 BOXES I 2.04 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES A. Construction: Provide galvanized sheet steel junction and pull boxes, with screw-on covers; of the type shape and size, to suit each respective location and installation; with welded seams and equipped with steel nuts, bolts, screws and washers. B. Location: 1. Install junction boxes above accessible ceilings for drops into walls for receptacle outlets from overhead. 2. Install junction boxes and pull boxes as required to facilitate the installation of conductors and limiting the accumulated angular sum of bends between boxes, cabinets and appliances to 270 degrees. i2.05 BOX EXTENSION ADAPTER J♦r A. Construction: Diecast aluminum. B. Location: Install over flush wall outlet boxes to permit flexible raceway extension from flush outlet to fixed or movable equipment. Bell 940 Series, Red Dot IHE4 Series. 2.06 CONDUIT FITTINGS A. Requirements: Provide corrosion-resistant punched-steel box knockout closures, conduit locknuts and plastic conduit bushings of the type and size to suit each respective use and IIinstallation. 2.07 FLOOR BOXES -SINGLE GANG A. Construction: Deep recessed or cast steel fully adjustable before and after concrete pour with all required components for complete activation. Verify required components for application of service fittings, covers, monuments, and the like, attached to floor boxes. B. Activations: 1. Flush: Provide brass duplex or single signal cover, hinged with set screw lock. Carpet or tile finish ring. 2. Monuments: Provide stainless steel monuments with power receptacle or data grommet as noted. 3. Coordinate specific application of systems as noted on Drawings. C. Plastic floor boxes which glue together will not be considered. Plastic mechanically assembled floor boxes may be considered with prior approval. D. Location: Concrete floor. Use poke-thru of same construction in non-concrete structure. Verify exact locations. Ensure flush with finish surface. I 1 SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16130-3 0208.0 BOXES I 2.08 FLOOR BOXES -MULTIPLE GANG A. Construction: Deep steel,fully adjustable before and after pour. Equal to Walkerboy Omnibox multi-service floor box with carpet plates, device covers. Verify color. Partition for different power or signal applications. Provide required power receptacle devices and signal grommets or receptacles as noted. 2.09 FLOOR BOXES -POKE-THRU A. Fire rated for 4-hour, dual service,flush brass cover and service fitting prewired specification grade receptacle, voice/data jacks, Hubbell PT7 Series, or approved. 2.10 MOLDABLE FIRE BARRIER A. One part in tumescent elastomer. B. Under normal environmental conditions,the material shall be non-corrosive to metal and compatible with synthetic cable jackets. C. When exposed to flame or heat it shall be capable of expanding and comply with paragraph 300.21 of NEC and meet the requirements of UL1479,ASTM E 814. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Location: Locate boxes and conduit bodies so as to ensure accessibility of electrical wiring. B. Round Boxes: Avoid using round boxes where conduit must enter through side of box, which would result in a difficult and insecure connection with a locknut or bushing on the rounded surface. I C. Anchoring: Secure boxes rigidly to the substrate upon which they are being mounted, or solidly embed boxes in concrete or masonry. I D. Special Application: Provide weatherproof outlets for locations exposed to weather or moisture. E. Knockout Closures: Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed. F. Mount Center of Outlet Boxes, unless Otherwise Required by ADA, or Noted on Drawings, the Following Distances above the Floor: 1. Control Switches: 48-inches. 2. Receptacles: 18-inches. 3. Telecom Outlets: 18-inches. I 4. Other Outlets: As indicated in other Sections of Specifications or as detailed on Drawings. H. Coordinate all electrical device locations(switches, receptacles, and the like)with Drawings to prevent mounting devices in mirrors, back splashes, behind cabinets, and the like. SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16130-4 0208.0 BOXES I Provide moldable fire barrier pads at outlet boxes and equipment back boxes installed in rated wall assemblies. Comply with requirements of UBC, UFC and NEC. Refer to drawing A1.1 for identification of 1-hour rated construction (wall assemblies). END OF SECTION I 11 I I I I I I I I I I I SEPTEMBER 2004 0208.0 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16130-5 BOXES I i SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES I PART 1 GENERAL iii1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes various types of receptacles, connectors, switches, and finish plates. 1.03 SUBMITTALS IA. Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each product specified. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE IA. Comply with NFPA 70"National Electrical Code"for devices and installation. B. Listing and Labeling: Provide products that are listed and labeled for their applications and I installation conditions and for the environments in which installed. 1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the "National Electrical Code," Article I 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A"Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" I (NRTL)as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 1.05 COORDINATION A A. Wiring Devices for Owner Furnished Equipment: Match devices to plug connectors for Owner- furnished equipment. B. Cord and Plug Sets: Match cord and plug sets to equipment requirements. IPART 2 PRODUCTS I2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering II products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Wiring Devices: Ia. Arrow Hart Div., Cooper Industries. b. Bryant Electric, Inc. Ic. Eagle Electric Mfg. Co., Inc. SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16140-1 0208.0 WIRING DEVICES 1 0 d. General Electric Co. e. Hubbell Inc. I f. Leviton Mfg. Co., Inc. g. Pass &Seymour/Legrand. IP h. Slater Electric, Inc. I 2.02 WIRING DEVICES A. Comply with NEMA Standard WD 1, "General Purpose Wiring Devices." 1 B. Enclosures: NEMA 1 equivalent, except as otherwise indicated. C. Color: Gray(verify)except as otherwise indicated or required by Code. D. Receptacles, Straight-Blade and Locking Type: Comply with UL Standard 498, "Electrical Attachment Plugs and Receptacles,"heavy-duty grade except as otherwise indicated. Nylon face. Receptacle rating, 15A for general devices, 20A for dedicated use. E. Receptacles, Straight-Blade, Special Features: Comply with the basic requirements specified above for straight-blade receptacles of the class and type indicted, and with the following additional requirements: 1. Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) Receptacles: UL Standard 943, "Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters," feed-through type, with integral NEMA 5-20R duplex receptacle arranged to protect connected downstream receptacles on the same circuit. Design units 1 for installation in a 2-3/4-inch (70-mm)deep outlet box without an adapter. 2. Provide strand containment freature at conductor terminals. F. Snap Switches: Quiet-type a.c. switches, nylon face NRTL listed and labeled as complying with UL Standard 20 "General Use Snap Switches," and with Federal Specification W-S-896. Provide strand containment feature at conductor terminals. G. Wall Plates: Single and combination types, 302 stainless brushed satin,that mate and match with corresponding wiring devices. Features include the following: 1. Color: Matches wiring device except as selected by Architect. 2. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with heads colored to match plate finish. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install devices and assemblies plumb and secure. B. Install wall plates when painting is complete. C. Arrangement of Devices: Except as otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical, and grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates. devices and assemblies duringpainting.D. Protect . I P 9 1 SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16140-2 0208.0 WIRING DEVICES I i E. Adjust locations at which floor service outlets are installed to suit the indicated arrangement of partitions and furnishings. 3.02 IDENTIFICATION I A. Comply with Division 16 Section"Electrical Identification." 1. Switches: Where 3 or more switches are ganged, and elsewhere where indicated, identify each switch with approved legend engraved on wall plate. I 2. Receptacles and switches: Identify the panelboard and circuit number from which served, written in permanent ink, on the inside of the wall plate. I 3.03 GROUNDING A. Ground all devices as required by NEC. I3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Test wiring devices for proper polarity and ground continuity. Operate each operable I device at least 6 times. B. Test ground-fault circuit interrupter operation with both local and remote fault simulations according to manufacturer recommendations. 1 C. Replace damaged or defective components. 3.05 CLEANING i A. General: Internally clean devices, device outlet boxes, and enclosures. Replace stained or improperly painted wall plates or devices. IEND OF SECTION I 1' I It I I I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16140-3 0208.0 WIRING DEVICES I 111 SECTION 16170 CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS I PART 1 GENERAL I/ 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and I Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY iA. This Section includes individually mounted switches and circuit breakers used for the following: 1. Equipment disconnect switches. 111 2. Motor disconnect switches. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 16 Section "WIRING DEVICES" for attachment plugs and receptacles, and snap switches used for disconnect switches. I1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. II B. Product Data for disconnect switches and accessories specified in this Section. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain disconnect switches and circuit breakers from one source and by a II single manufacturer. B. Comply with NFPA 70 for components and installation. C. Listing and Labeling: Provide disconnect switches and circuit breakers specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1. The Terms "Listed"and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code,Article 100. I 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A"Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL)as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. I PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS 1 A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering disconnect switches and circuit breakers that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Disconnect Switches: , I a. Square D Co. b. Eaton Corp.; Westinghouse&Cutler-Hammer Products. c. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution &Control Div. SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16170-1 I 0208.0 CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS I d. Siemens Energy&Automation, Inc. 2.02 DISCONNECT SWITCHES I A. Enclosed, Nonfusible Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with lockable handle. B. Enclosed, Fusible Switch, 800 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, clips to accommodate specified fuses, enclosure consistent with environment where located, handle lockable with 2 padlocks, and interlocked with cover in CLOSED position. C. Enclosure: NEMA KS 1, Type 1, unless otherwise specified or required to meet environmental conditions of installed location. 1. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install disconnect switches in locations as indicated or as required by Code, according to manufacturer's written instructions. I B. Install disconnect switches level and plumb. C. Connect disconnect switches and components to wiring system and to ground as indicated and instructed by manufacturer. 1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. D. Identify each disconnect switch and circuit breaker according to indicate load served. 1 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: After installing disconnect switches and circuit breakers and after electrical circuitry has been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements. 1. Procedures: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS, Section 7.5 for disconnect switches and Section 7.6 for molded-case circuit breakers. Certify compliance with test parameters. B. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and retest. 3.03 CLEANING A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish including chips, scratches, and abrasions. END OF SECTION I I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16170-2 0208.0 CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS I ISECTION 16190 SUPPORTING DEVICES I PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Safety factor of 4 required for every fastening device or support for electrical equipment installed. Support to withstand four times weight of equipment it supports. 1.02 SUPPORTING DEVICES li A. Safety factor of 4 required for every fastening device or support for electrical equipment installed. Support to withstand four times weight of equipment it supports. Bracing to comply with Seismic Zone 3 requirements. I PART 2-PRODUCTS R 2.01 MATERIALS A. Hangers: Kindorf B-905-2A channel, H-119-D washer, C105 strap, 3/8-inch rod with ceiling flange. iB. Concrete Inserts: Kindorf D-255, cast in concrete for support fasteners for loads up to 800 lbs. 1 C. Pipe Straps: Two-hole galvanized or malleable iron. D. Luminaire Chain: Campbell Chain 75031, 90-lb. test with steel hooks. PART 3-EXECUTION 1 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide all electrical equipment supports. B. Verify mounting height of all luminaires or items prior to installation when heights are not detailed. C. Install vertical support members for equipment and luminaires, straight and parallel to building walls. D. Provide independent supports to structural member for electrical luminaires, materials, or equipment installed in or on ceiling,walls or in void spaces or over furred or suspended ceilings. 1 E. Do not use other trade's fastening devices as supporting means for electrical equipment materials or fixtures. IF. Do not use supports or fastening devices to support other than one particular item. G. Support conduits within 18-inches of outlets, boxes, panels, cabinets and deflections. H. Maximum distance between supports not to exceed 8-foot spacing. I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16190-1 0208.0 SUPPORTING DEVICES ./ I I. Securely suspend all junction boxes, pull boxes or other conduit terminating housings located I above suspended ceiling from the floor above or roof structure to prevent sagging and swaying. J. Provide seismic bracing per UBC requirements. I END OF SECTION I i I t 1 I I I I I I 1 I 1 I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16190-2 0208.0 SUPPORTING DEVICES I SECTION 16195 IDENTIFICATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Engraved labels shall be provided for identification of underground conduit systems. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: 1. Mark underground utilities in conformance with APWA. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 UNDERGROUND UTILITIES MARKERS A. Inert polyethylene plastic ribbon, 6-inch wide by 4 mil thick. B. Color code as recommended by APWA. Safety Red for electric power distribution. Safety Alert Orange for telephone, signal, data and cable TV. C. Imprint over entire length of ribbon in permanent black letters,the system description, selected from manufacturer's standard legend which most accurately identifies the sub-grade system]. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 UNDERGROUND UTILITIES MARKERS A. Install continuous tape, 6-inchs to 8-inches below finish grade, for each exterior underground raceway. B. Where multiple small lines are buried in a common trench and do not exceed an overall width of 16-inches, install a single marker. Over 16-inch width of lines, install multiple tapes not over 10-inches apart(edge to edge)over the entire group of lines. 1 END OF SECTION I 1 I SEPTEMBER 2004 USD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16195-1 0208.0 IDENTIFICATION I SECTION 16420 ELECTRICAL SERVICE I PART 1 -GENERAL 0 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Utility requirements IB. Fees: I1. Pay all fees levied by serving electric utility to provide service to this project. 2. Obtain fees from serving electric utility prior to submitting a bid. 1 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Utility Company Requirements: Comply in every respect with requirements of serving electric illutility pertaining to equipment installed by Division 16. 1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 1 A. Conform to requirements of the NEC, latest adopted version with amendments by local AHJs. B. Furnish products listed by UL or other testing firm acceptable to AHJ. it C. Conform to requirement of the serving electric utility. 0 PART 2—PRODUCTS(NOT USED) PART 3-EXECUTION Ii 3.01 INSTALLATION 1 A. Verify utility requirements prior to bidding and provide all associated work required by local utility including but not limited to: IEND OF SECTION $ 1 i, I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16420-1 0208.0 ELECTRICAL SERVICES I ISECTION 16450 GROUNDING I PART 1 GENERAL 1 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and $ Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment and basic requirements for grounding for protection of life, equipment, circuits, and systems. Grounding requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented in other Sections of these Specifications. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: Division 16 Section "WIRES AND CABLES"for requirements for grounding conductors. II. 1.03 SUBMITTALS I A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data for grounding rods, connectors and connection materials, and grounding fittings. 1 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NFPA 70. B. Comply with UL 467. iC. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1. The Terms"Listed"and"Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code,Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A"Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" I (NRTL)as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. PART 2 PRODUCTS I2.01 MANUFACTURERS I A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Chance: A. B. Chance Co. I2. Harger 3. ILSCO. I 4. Kearney. I5. Lyncole XIT Grounding. SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16450-1 0208.0 GROUNDING 6. O-Z/Gedney Co. 7. Raco, Inc. I 8. Thomas&Betts, Electrical. 2.02 GROUNDING AND BONDING PRODUCTS A. Governing Requirements: Where types, sizes, ratings, and quantities indicated are in excess of National Electrical Code (NEC) requirements, the more stringent requirements and the greater size, rating, and quantity indications govern. 1 2.03 WIRE AND CABLE GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Wires and Cables." Conform to NEC Table 8, except as otherwise indicated,for conductor properties, including stranding. 1. Material: Aluminum and copper. Use only copper wire for both insulated and bare grounding conductors in direct contact with earth, concrete, masonry, crushed stone, and similar materials. B. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green color insulation. C. Grounding-Electrode Conductors: Stranded cable. I D. Underground Conductors: Bare,tinned, stranded, except as otherwise indicated. E. Bare Copper Conductors: Conform to the following: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Assembly of Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 2.04 MISCELLANEOUS CONDUCTORS A. Grounding Bus: Bare, annealed-copper bars of rectangular cross section. 1 B. Braided Bonding Jumpers: Copper tape, braided No. 30 AWG bare copper wire, terminated with copper ferrules. C. Bonding Straps: Soft copper, 0.05 inch (1 mm) thick and 2 inches (50 mm) wide, except as indicated. 2.05 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS A. Pressure Connectors: High-conductivity-plated units. B. Bolted Clamps: Heavy-duty type. C. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Provided in kit form and selected per manufacturer's written instructions for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and connected items. 2.06 GROUNDING ELECTRODES SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16450-2 0208.0 GROUNDING I A. Grounding Rods: Copper-clad steel. B. Plate Electrodes: Copper, square or rectangular shape. Minimum 0.10 inch (3 mm)thick, size as indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION 1 A. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Comply with NEC Article 250 for types, sizes, and quantities of equipment grounding conductors, except where specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by NEC are indicated. 1. Install equipment grounding conductor with circuit conductors for the items below in addition to those required by Code: a. Feeders and branch circuits. b. Lighting circuits. c. Receptacle circuits. d. Single-phase motor or appliance branch circuits. e. Three-phase motor or appliance branch circuits. f. Flexible raceway runs. 2. Nonmetallic Raceways: Install an equipment grounding conductor in nonmetallic raceways unless they are designated for telephone or data cables. 3. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install an equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and above, including air cleaners and heaters. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct. 4. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heater Circuits: Install a separate equipment p grounding conductor to each electric water heater, heat-tracing assembly, and antifrost heating cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components. B. Signal and Communication Systems: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication systems, provide a No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding-electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet,wiring closet, and central equipment location. 1. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding conductor on a 1/4-by-2-by-12-inch (6-by-50-by-300-mm)grounding bus. 2. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal. C. Separately Derived Systems: Where NEC requires grounding, ground according to NEC Paragraph 250-26. I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16450-3 0208.0 GROUNDING I 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Ground electrical systems and equipment according to NEC requirements, except where Drawings or Specifications exceed NEC requirements. B. Grounding Rods: Locate a minimum of 1-rod length from each other and at least the same distance from any other grounding electrode. 1. Drive until tops are 2 inches (50 mm) below finished floor or final grade, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Interconnect with grounding-electrode conductors. Use exothermic welds, except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. Make these connections without damaging copper coating or exposing steel. C. Grounding Conductors: Route along the shortest and straightest paths possible, except as otherwise indicated. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. D. Underground Grounding Conductors: Use bare copper wire. Bury at least 24 inches (600 mm) below grade. E. Metal Water Service Pipe: Provide insulated copper grounding conductors, sized as indicated, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water servicer entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes by grounding-clamp connectors. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor to street side of fitting. Do not install a grounding jumper across dielectric fittings. Bond grounding-conductor conduit to conductor at each end. 11, F. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with grounding-clamp connectors. G. Ufer Ground (Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode): Fabricate according to NEC Paragraph 250-81(c), using a minimum of 20 feet (6 m) of bare copper conductor not smaller than No.4 AWG. Where base of concrete foundation is less than 20 feet (6 m) in length, coil excess conductor within base of concrete foundation. Bond grounding conductor to reinforcing steel to at least 4 locations, and to anchor bolts. Extend grounding conductor below grade and connect to building grounding grid or to a grounding electrode external to concrete. 3.03 CONNECTIONS A. General: Make connections so possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible. B. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Use for connections to structural steel and for underground connections, except those at test wells. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable. C. Equipment Grounding-Wire Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use pressure-type 1 grounding lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be terminated with winged pressure-type connectors. I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16450-4 0208.0 GROUNDING 0 I D. Noncontact Metal Raceway Terminations: Where metallic raceways terminate at metal housings without mechanical and electrical connection to housing, terminate each conduit with a grounding I bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to grounding bus or terminal in housing. Bond electrically noncontinuous conduits at both entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors, except as otherwise indicated. IE. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. Where these requirements are not available, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. F. Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by manufacturer of connectors. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on grounding conductor. G. Moisture Protection: Where insulated grounding conductors are connected to grounding rods or I grounding buses, insulate entire area of connection and seal against moisture penetration of insulation and cable. I3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests: Subject the completed grounding system to a megger test at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding I terminal, and at ground test wells. Measure ground resistance not less than 2 full days after the last trace of precipitation, and without the soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural if ground resistance. Perform tests by the 2-point method according to IEEE 81. Submit results to Engineer for approval prior to project closeout. B. Maximum grounding to resistance values are as follows- I1. Equipment Rated 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms. I2. Equipment Rated 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms. C. Excessive Ground Resistance: Where resistance toground g ound exceeds specified values, notify Owner promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance and to accomplish recommended work. END OF SECTION I I I I I SEPTEMBER 2004 0208.0 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16450-5 GROUNDING I SECTION 16470 SWITCHBOARDS AND DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS I PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1 1. Switchboards. 2. Distribution panelboards. B. Related Sections: 1 1. Section 16195, Electrical Identification. 2. Section 16420, Electrical Service. 1 3. Section 16450, Grounding. 4. Section 16475, Overcurrent Protective Devices. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION IA. Electrical Service System: 208/120 and 480/277 volts, 3-phase, 4 wire,wye. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Follow the procedures specified in Division 1. B. Provide Shop Drawings and Product Data for the Following Equipment: I1. Switchboards. I2. Distribution panelboards. C. Provide the following operating, maintenance and installation instructions from the manufacturer for project closeout, see Project Closeout Requirements in Division 1: I1. Switchboards. 1 2. Distribution panelboards. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of the NEC, latest adopted version with amendments by local AHJs. B. Furnish products listed by UL or other testing firm acceptable to AHJ. C. Conform to requirement of the serving electric utility. SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16470-1 0208.0 SWITCHBOARDS AND 1 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS I A. Switchboards: Cutler-HammerNVestinghouse, General Electric, Siemens, Square D, or approved. 1 B. Distribution Panelboards: Cutler-Hammer/Westinghouse, General Electric, Siemens, Square D, or approved. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Standards: Comply with requirements of UL 67, NEMA PB1 and NEC 384 in construction of switchboards. B. Switchboards: 1. Enclosures: a. Free standing, dead front with front accessibility. b. Framework constructed of formed, code gauge steel, rigidly welded and bolted together to support all cover plates, bussing and component devices during shipment and installation bolt steel base channels to the frame to rigidly support the entire shipping section for moving on rollers and floor mounting. c. Provide each section with individually removable top plate and open bottom to permit installation and termination of service and feeder raceways. d. Removable Front Covers: Screw attached. hinge on all hinged Provide removable hg pins doors. I f. Paint interior and exterior surfaces. Medium light gray finish, applied by electro- I deposition process over an iron phosphate pretreatment. 2. Bussing: a. Material: Extruded aluminum plated by ALTAN 70 or 80 process. b. Bus supports, connections and joints bolted together with hex-head bolts and Belleville washers. c. Ground Bus: Full length of switchboard, 50 percent of phase bus capacity. d. Neutral Bus: 100 percent rated,full length of switchboard. 3. Provide fully rated integrated equipment rating greater than the available fault current. Series rated switchboards are not acceptable. See Drawings for available fault current. 4. Lugs: Compression type rated for both aluminum and copper conductors. I C. Distribution Panelboards: Il SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16470-2 0208.0 SWITCHBOARDS AND DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS I I E. Concrete Pad: Provide concrete pad of 2500 to 3000 psi concrete reinforced with 8 gauge wire fabric or No. 6 reinforcing bars on 12-inch centers. Provide 10-inch thick base of gravel below I pad for support. Extend pad 6-inches on all sides from the exterior unit dimensions. Provide pad 8-inch thick with 3/4-inch by 10-foot ground rods at each corner. Thermally bond No. 2 bare copper to rods, reinforcement, and generator ground point. 1 3.02 TESTING I A. Before the equipment is installed, submit to Architect a factory certified test log of the generator set, showing a minimum of 4 hour testing with at least 1 hour at 50 percent, 75 percent and 2 hours at 100 percent rated load, continuously. Provide normal preliminary engine and generator tests before unit assembly. Check and top off all fluid levels prior to initial engine start-up. IB. Incorporate both transfer switches operation into final system test. I C. Prior to acceptance of the installation subject the equipment to full load test, using a load bank, for a period of 2 hours, then immediately subject it to building load,for a period of 3 hours. Correct defects which become evident during this test. The engine generator set manufacturer's representative conducts these tests. Supply fuel for test. ID. Provide thermographic scan of emergency distribution system bolted connections and conductor terminations during 100% load testing. Begin testing near end of required two hour full load test. IRecord results for engineer review and incorporation into Operation and Maintenance Manuals. E. Include the complete emergency system, consisting of generator, emergency distribution equipment and automatic transfer switches in final test operations. Top off fuel tank at end of I test. 3.03 PARTS AND SERVICE IA. The engine generator set supplier is an authorized dealer of the engine generator set manufacturer and is fully qualified and authorized to provide service and parts for both engine generator and such auxiliary equipment as may be required, published operating instructions or Iperiodic maintenance. IEND OF SECTION I I I I 1 I SEPTEMBER 2004 0208.0 USD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16620-9 DIESEL STANDBY POWER GENERATOR SYSTEM 1 1 SECTION 16630 I IA.'I II I IBATTERY POWER SYSTEMS PART I -GENERAL 1.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION I Modular battery source inverter system complete with charger, transfer mechanism and output circuit breakers. B. Inverter output, sine wave, 60 Hz. C. Provide continuously energized output with transfer mechanism capable of transferring HID lamp sources without extinguishing lamp arc. D. UL-924 listed system. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Follow the procedures specified in Division 1. B. Provide product data for all elements of the system including batteries. C. Shop drawings include battery interconnection schematic diagrams, block diagrams of interconnection of internal elements, input terminals and output circuit breakers. D. Manufacturer's installation instructions. E. Contract Closeout Submittals: 1. Modify Project Record Documents to indicate location of installation and supply branch circuit. 2. Provide complete operation and maintenance data. I I 1.03 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver cabinet and electronic components to project for installation in sequence of work and termination of line and load branch circuit raceways. B. Cover cabinet to prevent entrance of dust during construction. C. Deliver batteries to project only when system is capable of being energized and the batteries connected to the chargers. Do not store wet charged batteries without connecting to a charging system. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Lithonia ELV LC FT Series, or approved. I I SEPTEMBER 2004 0208.0 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16630-1 BATTERY POWER SYSTEMS I I 2.02 COMPONENTS I A. Cabinet: 1. Welded steel, 14 gauge, constructed to NEMA-1 Specifications. 2. Corrosion resistant paint finish, gray. 3. High density polyethylene shelf liners. B. Inverter Modules: I 1. Solid state, pulse width modulated. 2. On-line uninterruptible system,zero transfer time. I 3. Sinusoidal output waveform,maximum 5%THD at full load. 4. Ferroresonant transformer filter. I C. Charger: 1. Dual rate automatic design. Solid state charger with three recharge modes: fast charge, equalize charge and trickle charge. 2. Capable of fully recharging batteries with 24 hours following any rated discharge. 3. Reverse polarity protected. I 4. Provide fuse protection for system DC input and charger AC input and DC output. D. Monitor: I 1. Monitor AC input for brownout or failure condition. Transfer to battery source when AC input voltage drops below 80 percent of nominal voltage. 2. Low battery voltage shutdown set at 87.5 percent of nominal voltage. E. Return to Normal Source: 2 minute time delay return to normal source once normal source has been reestablished. F. Batteries: Long life, low maintenance lead-calcium with 1/4-inch plate thickness. ' G. Output: 1. 277 volt 60 Hz plus or minus 1 Hz. I 2. Voltage regulation, plus or minus 5 percent or less from 0 percent to 100 percent of rated load. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Battery Shelf: Acid resistant roll-out shelf with integral stops and safety chain. 1 SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16630-2 0208.0 BATTERY POWER SYSTEMS B. Status and Alarm Condition Monitor: 1 1. Indicator LEDs: a. Normal source. b. Inverter status. c. Charger fuse. d. Charger, high rate. e. Charger, trickle. f. Low battery voltage. g. Electrolyte low level alarm. 2. Test switch. 1 3. Audible alarm with silence switch to monitor charger and inverter malfunctions battery electrolyte level. and 4. Digital panel meter, indicates AC and DC voltage, AC amps of load and DC amps of battery during inverter operation. ' C. Supervision/Display Panel 1. Battery DC Voltmeter. 1 2. Output AC Voltmeter. 3. Charge current DC ammeter. 1 4. Inverter Bypass light, red. ' 5. Utility power"ON" light, normal operation, green. 6. High-charge light, amber. 1 7. Test Switch. 8. Input circuit breaker. ' D. Output circuit breakers as indicated on Drawings. E. Factory start-up service provided by inverter manufacturer. I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16630-3 0208.0 BATTERY POWER SYSTEMS I I PART 3 EXECUTION I 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Level dry protected area with stable temperature conditions. B. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations prior to start-up to prevent physical and electrical damage to components. 3.02 SCHEDULES A. Provide output circuit schedule indicating loads connected to each output circuit breaker. I END OF SECTION II I I I 1 I I I I I 1 SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16630-4 0208.0 BATTERY POWER SYSTEMS I I I I SECTION 16675 TRANSIENT: VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION (TVSS) PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes I1. TVSS for service entrance. TVSS for distribution panels. 2. I IA.1.02 SUBMITTALS General: Follow the procedures specified in Division 1. B. Submit all related TVSS Specifications, Drawings, maintenance manuals, installation instructions, and UL 1449, second edition, listed surge suppression ratings of specified protection modes. I I 1 IA.1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: ISO-9001 certification or TVSS manufacturer's complete quality control and documentation procedures of firms regularly engaged in the manufacturer of TVSS I product for Category-C3 (ANSI/IEEE C62.41)and whose product have been in satisfactory service for not less than 5 years. B. Provide local support for the TVSS. C. Warrant the service entrance TVSS for 5 years for complete parts and factory provided on site labor. Warrant the distribution panel TVSS for 1 year. D. Both the service entrance and distribution panel TVSS of the same manufacturer. 1.04 CODES AND STANDARDS Listed per UL 1449, second edition, and complimentary listed per UL 1283 as an RFI/EMI filter. B. Comply with ANSI/IEEE(C62.1 or C62.11)and C62.45 test procedures for Category-C3 established in C62.41 (1991). C. Comply with NEMA as applicable to construction and NEC 280 for installation and NEC 110.9/110.10 for overcurrent protection. D. Design and tested to survive the following 8x20 microsecond surge currents following IEEE Test Wye Systems Delta Systems Line to Ground: 10 x 25 KA Line to Line: 10 x 25 KA Line to Neutral: 10 x 25 KA Line to Ground: 10 x 25 KA Neutral to Ground: 10 x 25 K Procedures and wait times established in C62.1/C62.11 and C62.45: SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16675-1 0208.0 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESION(TVSS) 1 10KA)surge I E. The individual protection mode designed and tested to survive 1250 Category-C3 currents as described in IEEE C62.41 (1991). I PART 2 -PRODUCTS I 2.01 TVSS FOR SERVICE ENTRANCE A. Install TVSS devices at service entrances of each building and as shown on the riser diagram. B. Wye systems shall have suppression elements between each phase conductor and the system I neutral, between each phase conductor and the system ground and between the neutral conductor and ground. C. Each phase shall have a minimum of two modules. Fuse the surge modules at a minimum rating of 10 amp and a current limit rating of 200,000 AIC. Modules and fuses field replaceable. D. Provide visible indication of proper TVSS connection and operation. The indicator consists of an LED array. Use no single LED or neon indicators. E. Equip the TVSS device with an audible alarm that shall actuate when any part of the surge I circuitry has been damaged. Provide a silence button with the alarm. F. The TVSS shall exhibit Sine Wave Tracking circuitry and shall provide high frequency noise I filtering up to 40dB attenuation (100KHZ to 100MHZ). G. TVSS shall meet or exceed the following criteria: I 1. Minimum single impulse current rating (I-N +I-G-): 100,000 amp per phase. 2. Incorporate hybrid circuitry. I 3. UL 1449, second edition, (ANSI C62.41-1991 Category-C)clamping voltage shall not exceed the following: 1 Voltage L-N L-G N-G 120/208 400 volt 400 volt 400 volt 277/480 800 volt 800 volt 800 volt 4. The Category-C3 clamping voltage ANSI/IEEE C.62-41-1991 (20KV-1.2/50 microseconds, 10KA-8.20 microseconds shall not exceed the following: Voltage L-N L-G N-G 120/208 550 volt 550 volt 550 volt I 277/480 975 volt 975 volt 975 volt H. Provide full redundant protection for each phase that consists of solid-state components and shall operate bi-directionally. I I. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage of the TVSS: Greater than 110 percent of the nominal system voltage. J. Provide an internal disconnect(3-pole, UL listed). I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16675-2 0208.0TRANSIENT VOLTAGE I SURGE SUPPRESION(TVSS) I K. Manufacturers: EFI Electronics Corporation, Titan SE Series, Lea Internationa, Eaton—Cutler Hammer, Square D 'SurgeLogic'Series. 111 2.02 TVSS FOR DISTRIBUTION PANELS A. Install TVSS devices at designated distribution panels as shown on Drawings. B. Wye systems shall have suppression elements between each phase conductor and the system neutral, between each phase conductor and the system ground and between the neutral conductor and ground. C. Provide visible indication of proper TVSS connection and operation. D. Provide sine wave tracking circuitry in the TVSS. E. TVSS shall meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. Minimum single impulse current rating (L-N + L-G): 80,000 amp per phase. ' 2. UL clamping voltage shall not exceed the following: Voltage L-N L-G N-G ' 120/208 400 volt 400 volt 400 volt 277/480 800 volt 800 volt 800 volt F. TVSS shall consist of solid-state components and operates bi-directionally. The manufacturer of the surge panel shall offer either a surface or flush cover, as required by job conditions. G. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage of the TVSS: Greater than 110 percent of the nominal ' system voltage. H. Manufacturers: EFI Electronics Corporation,Titan BP Series, Lea International, Eaton-Cutler Hammer. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 SERVICE ENTRANCE A. Install one TVSS at each utility service entrance or as indicated on Drawings. Follow manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Install TVSS on the load side of the service entrance. Provide 3-pole breaker for disconnect in ' service entrance equipment, size breaker to manufacturers installation instructions. C. Provide 6AWG stranded copper conductor or larger conductors between TVSS and point of attachment. Keep the conductors short and straight as possible. Provide 36-inch maximum lead length of connecting conductors. D. Bond TVSS's ground to the service entrance ground. SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16675-3 0208.0 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESION(TVSS) 3.02 DISTRIBUTION PANELS A. Install one secondary TVSS at each distribution panel location or as indicated on Drawings. Follow manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Install TVSS on the distribution panel, per the manufacturer's installation instructions. Install 30/3 circuit breaker in panel to attach TVSS to electrical distribution system. C. Provide 6AWG stranded copper conductor or larger conductors between TVSS and point of attachment. Keep the conductors short and straight as possible. Provide 18-inch maximum length of connecting conductors. Prewired TVSS devices with conductors smaller than No. 10 wire are not acceptable. END OF SECTION I 1 I I I 1 I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16675-4 0208.0 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESION(TVSS) SECTION 16721 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the requirements for a Design/Build fire alarm system, including manual stations, detectors, signal equipment, controls, and devices. 1.03 DEFINITION A. FACP: Fire Alarm Control Panel. ' 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General: Zoned, noncoded, addressable, microprocessor-based fire-detection and alarm system with manual and automatic alarm initiation. ' B. Signal Transmission: Hard wired, using separate individual circuits for each zone of alarm initiation and alarm device operation. ' C. Audible Alarm Indication: By sounding of horns and bells. D. Visual Alarm Indication: By xenon-strobe-type units. E. System connections for alarm-initiating and alarm-indicating circuits. Class A wiring. F. System to provide complete coverage for"common" corridor, restroom and support areas, zoned ' east and west sides, per floor. G. System to have provisions for four (4) additional zones per floor for future tenants. Zones to be divided two(2)east and two(2)west. H. System to have provisions for flow and tamper on building sprinkler system and tamper in the fire protection water valve on the site. I. System to provide automatic elevator recall and activiation of mylar fire curtains over elevator doors. Contractor to carefully coordinate all aspects of new system interconnecton with elevator controls with the elevator supplier. J. System to have local and off-site notification to a source to be identified by the Owner. K. Provide annunciator panel to be located at the Ground Floor. Elevator lobby. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16721-1 0208.0 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 1 annunciators i B. Submit minimum 1/8" scale building drawings showing all devices, control panels, and other miscellaneous equipment required for a complete and operational system approved by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). I C. Submit riser diagram or interconnecting diagram detailing all wiring required for a complete and operational system. , D. Product Data for each type of system component specified including dimensioned plans and elevations showing minimum clearances and installed features and devices. Include list of materials and Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory(NRTL)-listing data. I E. Shop Drawings showing details of graphic annunciators. F. Wiring diagrams from manufacturer differentiating clearly between factory- and field-installed wiring. Include diagrams for equipment and for system with all terminals and interconnections identified. Make all diagrams specific to this Project and distinguish between field and factory wiring. G. Device Address List: Coordinate with final system programming. H. System operation description covering this specific Project, including method of operation and I supervision of each type of circuit and sequence of operations for all manually and automatically initiated system inputs and outputs. Manufacturer's standard descriptions for generic systems are unacceptable. I I. Operating instructions for mounting at the FACP. J. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of fire alarm system components certifying that their products comply with specified requirements. I K. Maintenance data for fire alarm systems to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1. Include data for each type of product, including all features and operating Isequences, both automatic and manual. Include recommendations for spare parts to be stocked at the site. Provide the names, addresses, and telephone numbers of service organizations that carry stock of repair parts for the system to be furnished. L. Submission to Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): In addition to routine submission of the above material, make an identical submission to the AHJ. Include copies of annotated Contract Drawings as needed to depict component locations to facilitate review. Upon receipt of comments Ifrom the AHJ, submit them to Engineer for review. Resubmit if required to make clarifications or revisions to obtain approval. Do not order materials or begin construction until final, written approval of the submittals is received from the AHJ. Submit copy of AHJ approval letter to Engineer for the record. M. Spare parts list itemizing each device, component and wire type for use in future tenant improvement projects. I N. Record of field tests of system. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE I A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced factory-authorized installer to perform work of this Section. I B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain fire alarm components from a single source who assumes responsibility for compatibility of system components. TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16721-2 I SEPTEMBER 2004 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 0208.0 I 111 I C. Compliance with p Local Requirements: Comply with the applicable building code, local ordinances, and regulations, and the requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction. D. Comply with NFPA 70. E. Comply with NFPA 72. F. Listing and Labeling: Provide fire alarm systems and components specified in this Section that are listed and labeled by Factory Mutual. I I1.G. Listing and Labeling: Provide systems and equipment specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. The Terms"Listed"and"Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code,Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A"Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL)as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. I1.07 COORDINATION OF WORK A. Coordinate all installation,connections and testing of the system with the work of other trades. I I I I I I I 1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed, I are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels clearly describing contents. I1. 2. 3. 4. Glass Rods for Manual Stations: Quantity equal to 15 percent of the number of manual stations installed; minimum of 6 rods. Lamps for Remote Indicating Lamp Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of the number of units installed, but not less than 1. Lamps for Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of the number of units installed, but not less than 1. Smoke Detectors, Fire Detectors, and Flame Detectors: Quantity equal to 10 percent of the number of units of each type installed, but not less than 1 of each type. 5. Detector Bases: Quantity equal to 2 percent of the number of units of each type installed, but not less than 1 of each type. 6. Printer Ribbons: 6 spares. SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY I 0208.0 16721-3 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS I I PART 2-PRODUCTS i 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering I products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Edwards Systems Technology; General Signal Unit. 2. FCI. 3. Notifier; Pitway Corp. Div. 4. Silent Knight 2.02 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM I A. Include the following system functions and operating features plus those additional functions and I features required by the authorities having jurisdiction: 1. Priority of Signals: Accomplish automatic response functions by the first zone initiated. Alarm functions resulting from initiation by the first zone are not altered by subsequent alarms. The highest priority is an alarm signal. Supervisory and trouble signals have second- and third-level priority. Higher-priority signals take precedence over signals of lower priority, even though the lower-priority condition occurred first. Annunciate all alarm I signals regardless of priority or order received. 2. Noninterfering: Zone, power, wire, and supervise the system so a signal on one zone does not prevent the receipt of signals from any other zone. All zones are manually I s the FACP after e initiating device or dcnormal. Systesthat requiebatteries orbattery back-up forthe programmng function are unacceptable. 3. Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) Response: The manual or automatic operation of an alarm-initiating or supervisory-operating device causes the FACP to transmit an appropriate signal including the following: a. General alarm. b. Fire-suppression system operation alarm. c. Smoke or heat detector alarm. d. Valve tamper supervisory. I e. Door release. f. Elevator recall. 1 g. Elevator shutdown. h. System trouble. 4. Transmission to Remote Central Station: Automatically route alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals to a remote central station service. TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16721-4 SEPTEMBER 2004 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 0208.0 I I 5. Silencing at the FACP: Switches provide capability for acknowledgment of alarm, supervisory, trouble, and other specified signals at the FACP; and capability to silence the local audible signal and light a light-emitting diode (LED). Subsequent zone alarms cause the audible signal to sound again until silenced by switch operation. Restoring alarm, II I supervisory, and trouble conditions to normal extinguishes the associated LED and causes the audible signal to sound again until restoration is acknowledged by switch operation. I 6. Loss of primary power sounds a trouble signal at the FACP. The FACP indicates when the fire alarm system is operating on an alternate power supply. 7. Loss of primary power at the FACP sounds a trouble signal at the FACP and the annunciator. An emergency power light is illuminated at both locations when the system is operating on an alternate power supply. 8. Annunciation: Manual and automatic operation of alarm- and supervisory-initiating I devices is annunciated both on the FACP and on the annunciator, indicating location and type of device. I 9. FACP Alphanumeric Display: Displays plain-English-language descriptions and addresses of initiating devices, alarms, trouble signals, supervisory signals, monitoring actions, system and component status, and system commands. I10. General Alarm: A system general alarm includes the following: a. Indicating the general alarm condition at the FACP and the annunciators. I b. Identifying the device that is the source of the alarm (or its zone)at the FACP and the annunciator. Ic. Initiating audible and visible alarm signals throughout the building. d. Initiating elevators'automatic recall operation. I e. Closing fire and smoke doors and deployable barriers normally held open by magnetic door holders. If. Stopping supply and return fans serving zone where alarm is initiated. g. Closing smoke dampers on system serving zone where alarm is initiated. I h. Initiating smoke-control sequence through a signal to the building's automatic temperature-control system. i. Unlocking designated doors. j. Recording the event on the system printer. II. Initiating transmission of alarm signal to remote central station. 11. Manual station alarm operation initiates a general alarm. I I I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 0208.0 16721-5 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS I I 12. Water-flow alarm switch operation: I a. Initiates a general alarm. b. Causes flashing of the device location-indicating lamp for the device that has I operated. 13. Smoke detection initiates a general alarm. I 14. Smoke detection for zones without alarm verification initiates a general alarm. 15. Smoke detection for zones with alarm verification causes the following: a. Audible and visible indication of an "alarm verification"signal at the FACP. b. Activation of a listed and approved "alarm verification"sequence at the FACP and I the detector. c. Recording of the event on the system printer. I d. General alarm initiation if the alarm is verified. e. FACP indication cancellation and system reset if the alarm is not verified. 16. Sprinkler valve tamper switch operation causes or initiates the following: a. A supervisory, audible, and visible "valve tamper" signal indication at the FACP ' and the annunciator. b. The location-indicating light to flash for the device that has operated. I c. A printed record of the event on the system printer. d. Transmission of supervisory signal to remote central station. 17. Low-air-pressure switch operation on a dry pipe or preaction sprinkler system causes or initiates the following: a. A supervisory, audible, and visible "sprinkler trouble" signal indication at the FACP and the annunciator. b. The location-indicating light to flash for the device that has operated. 1 c. A printed record of the event on the system printer. d. Transmission of trouble signal to remote central station. I 18. Remote Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Manipulation of controls at the FACP causes the selection of specific addressable smoke detectors for adjustment, display of their current status and sensitivity settings, and control of changes in those settings. The same controls can be used to program repetitive, scheduled, automated changes in sensitivity of specific detectors. Sensitivity adjustments and sensitivity adjustment schedule changes are recorded by the system printer. I I TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16721-6 I SEPTEMBER 2004 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 0208.0 1 B. Recording of Events: Print a record all alarm, supervisory, and trouble events on the system printer. Printouts are by zone, device, and function. When the FACP receives a signal, the alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions are printed. The printout includes the type of signal (alarm, supervisory, or trouble)the zone identification, date, and the time of the occurrence. The printout differentiates alarm signals from all other printed indications. When the system is reset, this event is also printed, including the same information for device, location, date, and time. A command initiates the printout of a list of existing alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions in the system. 1. Permissible Signal Time Elapse: The maximum permissible elapsed time between the actuation of any fire alarm or fire-detection system alarm-initiating device and its indication at the FACP is 2 seconds. 2. Independent System Monitoring: Supervise each independent smoke- or heat-detection system, duct detector, and elevator smoke-detection system for both normal operation and trouble. 3. Circuit Supervision: Indicate circuit faults by both a zone and a trouble signal at the FACP. Provide a distinctive indicating audible tone and LED-indicating light. The maximum permissible elapsed time between the occurrence of the trouble condition and its indication at the FACP is 200 seconds. 2.03 ADDRESSABLE DEVICES A. Alarm-Initiating Devices: Classified as addressable devices according to NFPA 72. 1. Communication Transmitter and Receiver: Integral to device. Provides each device with a unique identification and capability for status reporting to the FACP. 2. External Addressable Interface Unit: May be used where specified devices are not manufactured and labeled with integral multiplex transmitter and receiver. Arrange to monitor status of each device individually. 2.04 MANUAL PULL STATIONS A. Description: Double-action type, fabricated of metal or plastic, and finished in red with molded raised-letter operating instructions of contrasting color. ' ' 1. Break-Glass Feature: Stations requiring the breaking of a glass panel are unacceptable. Stations requiring the breaking of a concealed glass rod are acceptable. 2. Station Reset: Key or wrench operated, double pole, double throw, switch rated for the voltage and current at which it operates. Stations have screw terminals for connections. 2.05 SMOKE DETECTORS A. General: Comply with UL 268. Include the following features: 1. Factory Nameplate: Serial number and type identification. 2. Operating Voltage: 24-V dc, nominal. ' 3. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation. I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16721-7 0208.0 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS I 4. Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated encapsulated electronic components are I mounted in a module that connects to a fixed base with a twist-locking plug connection. The plug connection requires no springs for secure mounting and contact maintenance. Terminals in the fixed base accept building wiring. 5. Integral Visual Indicating Light: Connect to indicate detector has operated. 6. Remote Controllability: Individually monitor detectors at the FACP for calibration, III sensitivity, and alarm condition, and individually adjust for sensitivity from the FACP. B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors: Include the following features: I 1. Detector Sensitivity: Between 2.5- and 3.5-percent-per-foot (0.008- and 0.011-percent- 1 per-mm)smoke obscuration when tested according to UL 268. 2. Sensor: An infrared detector light source with matching silicon-cell receiver. yp C. Beam-Type Smoke Detector: Each detector consists of a separate transmitter and receiver with i the following features: 1. Adjustable sensitivity over a 6-level range, minimum. I 2. Linear Range of Coverage: 600 feet(183 m), minimum. 3. Tamper switch initiates trouble signal at the central FACP when either transmitter or I receiver is disturbed. 4. Separate color-coded LEDs indicate normal, alarm, and trouble status. Any detector trouble, including power loss, is reported to the central FACP as a composite "trouble" signal. D. Ionization-Type Smoke Detector: Multiple-chamber type operating on the ionization principle and actuated by the presence of invisible products of combustion. E. Duct Smoke Detector: Ionization type. 1. Sampling Tube: Design and dimensions as recommended by the manufacturer for the specific duct size and installation conditions where applied. 2. Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit. I 2.06 OTHER DETECTORS A. Thermal Detector: Combination fixed-temperature and rate-of-rise unit with mounting plate arranged for outlet box mounting; 135 deg F (57 deg C) fixed-temperature setting, except as indicated. 2.07 ALARM-INDICATING DEVICES A. General: Equip alarm-indicating devices for mounting as indicated. Provide terminal blocks for system connections. B. Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, operating on 24-V dc, with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind a grille. Horns produce a sound-pressure level of 90 dB, measured ' 10 feet(3 m)from the source. 1. Housing for horns to be white. I SEPTEMBER 2004 USD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16721-8 0208.0 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS I C. Visual Alarm Devices: Xenon strobe lights with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens. Mount lenses on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch (25-mm)high letters on the lens. 1. Devices have a minimum light output of 115 candela. 2. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals. 3. Combination devices consist of factory-combined, audible and visual alarm units in a single mounting assembly. 4. Housing to be white. 2.08 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS A. Description: Units are equipped for wall or floor mounting as indicated and are complete with 111 matching door plate. Electromagnet operates from a 120-V ac source and requires no more than 3 W to develop 25-lbf (111-N) holding force. Provide additional structural backing behind each hold open device installation to avoid damage to wall when doors are manually closed. B. Material and Finish: Match door hardware. 2.09 CENTRAL FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL(FACP) A. General: Comply with UL 864. B. Cabinet: Lockable steel enclosure. Arrange panel so all operations required for testing or for normal care and maintenance of the system are performed from the front of the enclosure. If more than a single unit is required to form a complete control panel, provide exactly matching modular unit enclosures. Accommodate all components and allow ample gutter space for interconnection of panels and field wiring. Identify each enclosure by an engraved, red, laminated, phenolic-resin nameplate. Lettering on the enclosure's nameplate shall not be less than 1 inch (25 mm) high. Identify individual components and modules within the cabinets with permanent labels. C. Systems: Alarm and supervisory systems are separate and independent in the FACP. The alarm-initiating zone boards in the FACP consist of plug-in cards. Construction requiring removal 111 of field wiring for module replacement is unacceptable. D. Control Modules: Types and capacities required to perform all functions of the fire alarm systems. Local, visible, and audible signals announce alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions. Each type of audible alarm has a different sound. E. Zones: Provide for all alarm and supervisory zones indicated. Provisions to be made for four(4) additional zones per floor divided into east and west sections for future tenants. Example: 1st Floor zone provisions for Tenant 1A— 1st Floor East, Tenant 1B— 1st Floor East, Tenant 1C— 1st Floor West, Tenant 1D- 1st Floor West, etc. F. Indicating Lights: Provide individual LED devices for each zone. An LED test switch for each FACP section illuminates all LED devices on that section of the control panel. Manual toggle test switches or push test-buttons do not require a key to operate. Alarm and supervisory signals light a red LED of the associated zone. Trouble signals light an amber LED for the associated zone. G. Resetting: Provide the necessary controls to prevent the resetting of any alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal while the alarm or trouble condition still exists. H. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arrange to provide the basic interface between human operator at the FACP and addressable system components, including annunciation, supervision, and control. A display with a minimum of 32 characters shows alarm, supervisory, SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 0208.0 16721-9 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 1 stem and component status messages and indicates control commands to be entered into the system for control of smoke detector sensitivity and other parameters. Arrange keypad for use in entering and executing control commands. I. Instructions: Printed or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a lexan plastic or glass cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Install the frame in a location observable from the FACP. Include interpretation and appropriate response for displays and signals, and briefly describe the functional operation of the system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions. 1 2.10 GRAPHIC ANNUNCIATORS A. Annunciator Panel: Indicate the building floor plan with a "You Are Here"designation. Provide an LED-indicating light on the floor plan in each zone. Mark zone boundaries on the annunciator floor plan. Provide lights that indicate the floor on which a signal was actuated if this differs from the zone. Engrave zone and floor designations on the face of the annunciator. B. Indicating lights include individual LED indicators for each type of alarm and supervisory device and an LED to indicate trouble. The actuation of any alarm or supervisory signal causes the illumination of a zone light, floor light, and device light. System trouble causes the illumination of all of these lights and also the trouble light. Additional LEDs indicate normal and emergency 111 power modes for the system. A toggle or push-button switch tests the LEDs mounted on the panel. The test switch does not require key operation. C. Faceplate: Satin-finished stainless steel or brushed aluminum. Floor plan and zone boundary lines are engraved in the faceplate and filled with colored paint. Floor plan lines are 1/4-inch- (6- mm-)wide black, and zone boundaries are 1/8-inch- (3-mm-)wide red. Engraved legends for the LEDs and switches are 1/4-inch-(6-mm-)high minimum, in letters filled with red paint. 2.11 SYSTEM PRINTER A. General: Printer is dot-matrix type, listed and labeled as an integral part of the fire alarm system. I 2.12 EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY - A. General: Components include valve-regulated, recombinant lead acid battery, charger, and an automatic transfer switch. Battery nominal life expectancy is 10 years, minimum. B. General: Components include nickel-cadmium-type battery, charger, and an automatic transfer switch. Battery nominal life expectancy is 20 years, minimum. II1 I II I 1 I TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16721-10 SEPTEMBER 2004 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 0208.0 I C. Battery capacity is adequate to operate the complete alarm system in normal or supervisory (nonalarm) mode for a period of 24 hours. At the end of this period, the battery has sufficient capacity to operate the system, including alarm-indicating devices in either alarm or supervisory mode,for a period of 15 minutes. 1. Magnetic door holders are not served by emergency power. Magnetic door holders are released when normal power fails. D. Battery Charger: Solid-state, fully automatic, variable-charging-rate type. Provide capacity for 150 percent of the connected system load while maintaining the batteries at full charge. In the event batteries are fully discharged, the charger recharges them completely within 4 hours. Charger output is supervised as part of system power supply supervision. IE. Integral Automatic Transfer Switch: Transfers the load to the battery without loss of signals or status indications when normal power fails. 2.13 WIRE A. Wire: Solid-copper conductors with 600-V rated, 75 deg C, color-coded insulation. 1. Low-Voltage Circuits: No. 16 AWG, minimum, or as recommended by system manufacturer and approved by AHJ. IPART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL rA. Install system according to NFPA standards referenced in Parts 1 and 2 of this Section. B. Fire Alarm Power Supply Disconnect: Paint red and label "FIRE ALARM." Provide with lockable Ihandle or cover. 3.02 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION IA. Manual Pull Stations: Mount semiflush in recessed back boxes with operating handles 48 inches (1220 mm)above the finished floor or lower as indicated. I B. Water-Flow Detectors and Valve Supervisory Switches: Connect for each sprinkler valve station required to be supervised. C. Smoke Detectors: Install ceiling-mounted detectors not less than 4 inches (100 mm)from a side wall to the near edge. Install detectors located on the wall at least 4 inches (100 mm), but not more than 12 inches (300 mm), below the ceiling. For exposed solid joist construction, mount detectors on the bottom of the joists. On smooth ceilings, install detectors not over 30 feet (9 m) Iapart in any direction. Install detectors no closer than 60 inches(1520 mm)from air registers. D. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 90 inches (2280 mm) above the finished 1 floor nor less than 6 inches (150 mm) below the ceiling. Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille or as indicated. Combine audible and visual alarms at the same location into a single unit. 111 E. Visual Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and not more than 80 inches (2030 mm) above the finished floor and at least 6 inches (150 mm) below the ceiling. I F. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor. i------iIimmmiMIMMIMIMIMMMIMMIMMil..1.11...1.111..1.1MIMIIIIIIIIIMillii SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16721-11 0208.0 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 1 1 G. FACP: Surface mount with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches (1830 mm) above the finished floor. I H. Graphic Annunciator: Arrange as indicated, with the top of the panel no more than 72 inches (1830 mm)above the finished floor. 3.03 WIRING INSTALLATION 1 A. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal raceway according to Division 16 Section "Raceways, Boxes, and Cabinets." Conceal raceway except in unfinished spaces and as indicated. B. Wiring within Enclosures: Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to the sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train the conductors to terminal points with no excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to the system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors. C. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull or outlet boxes, cabinets, or equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made. 1 D. Color Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building power wiring. Use one color code for alarm circuit wiring and a different color code for supervisory circuits. Color-code audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from alarm-initiating circuits. Use different colors for visual alarm-indicating devices. Paint fire alarm system junction boxes and covers red. E. Risers: Install at least 2 vertical cable risers to serve the fire alarm system. Separate risers in close proximity to each other with a minimum one-hour-rated wall, so the loss of one riser does not prevent the receipt or transmission of signal from other floors or zones. F. Wiring to Central-Station Transmitter: 1-inch (27)GRC between the FACP and the central-station transmitter connection as indicated. Install number of conductors and electrical supervision for connecting wiring as needed to suit central-station monitoring function. Final connections to terminals in central-station transmitter are made under another contract. 3.04 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components,wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 16 Section"Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." B. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification." I 3.05 GROUNDING A. Ground cable shields and equipment according to system manufacturer's instructions to eliminate I shock hazard and to minimize, to the greatest extent possible, ground loops, common mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments. B. Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main equipment rack or cabinet. Isolate from power system and equipment grounding. C. Install grounding electrodes of type, size, location, and quantity as indicated. Comply with installation requirements of Division 16 Section"Grounding." I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16721-12 0208.0 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMSIII I D. Ground equipment and conductor and cable hi shields. For audio circuits, minimize, to the greatest extent possible, ground loops, common mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other I impairments. Provide 5-ohm ground at main equipment location. Measure, record, and report ground resistance. I3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Provide services of a factory-authorized service representative to supervise the field assembly and connection of components and the pretesting, testing, and Iadjustment of the system. B. Pretesting: After installation, align, adjust, and balance the system and perform complete I pretesting. Determine, through pretesting, the conformance of the system to the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications. Correct deficiencies observed in pretesting. Replace malfunctioning or damaged items with new ones and retest until satisfactory performance and conditions are achieved. Prepare forms for systematic recording of acceptance test results. IC. Report of Pretesting: After pretesting is complete, provide a letter certifying the installation is complete and fully operable, including the names and titles of the witnesses to the preliminary Itests. D. Final Test Notice: Provide a 10-day minimum notice in writing when the system is ready for final acceptance testing. IE. Minimum System Tests: Test the system according to the procedures outlined in NFPA 72. Minimum required tests are as follows: 1 1. Verify the absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors and ground. 2. Test all conductors for short circuits using an insulation-testing device. I3. With each circuit pair, short circuit at the far end of the circuit and measure the circuit resistance with an ohmmeter. Record the circuit resistance of each circuit on the record drawings. I4. Verify that the control unit is in the normal condition as detailed in the manufacturer's operation and maintenance manual. I5. Test initiating and indicating circuits for proper signal transmission under open circuit conditions. One connection each should be opened at not less than 10 percent of the initiating and indicating devices. Observe proper signal transmission according to class of Iwiring used. 6. Test each initiating and indicating device for alarm operation and proper response at the control unit. Test smoke detectors with actual products of combustion. I 7. Test the system for all specified functions according to the approved operation and maintenance manual. Systematically initiate specified functional performance items at each station, including making all possible alarm and monitoring initiations and using all I communications options. For each item, observe related performance at all devices required to be affected by the item under all system sequences. Observe indicating lights, displays, signal tones, and annunciator indications. Observe all voice audio for routing, clarity,quality, freedom from noise and distortion, and proper volume level. 1 8. Test Both Primary and Secondary Power: Verify by test that the secondary power system is capable of operating the system for the period and in the manner specified. I SEPTEMBER 2004 USD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16721-13 0208.0 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS I F. Retesting: Correct deficiencies indicated bytests and completely retest work affected by such 1 deficiencies. Verify by the system test that the total system meets the Specifications and complies with applicable standards. 1 G. Report of Tests and Inspections: Provide a written record of inspections, tests, and detailed test results in the form of a test log. Submit log upon the satisfactory completion of tests. H. Tag all equipment, stations, and other components at which tests have been satisfactorily completed. 3.07 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING A. Cleaning: Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and marred finish to match original finish. Clean unit internally using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer. 3.08 DEMONSTRATION A. Startup Services: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to provide startup service and to demonstrate and train Owner's maintenance personnel as specified below. 1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, adjusting, and preventive maintenance. Provide a minimum of 4 hours'training. 111 2. Training Aid: Use the approved final version of the operation and maintenance manual as a training aid. 3. Schedule training with Owner with at least 7 days'advance notice. 4. Demonstration to be videotaped and two (2)copies of the tape provided to the owner. 3.09 ON-SITE ASSISTANCE A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within one year of date of Substantial Completion, I provide on-site assistance in adjusting sound levels, controls, and sensitivities to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to 3 requested adjustment visits to the site for this purpose. END OF SECTION I 1 I I I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16721-14 0208.0 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS I SECTION 16730 WIRELESS CLOCK SYSTEM I PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Division 1 applies to this section. Provide GPS wireless clock system, I complete. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1 1. 120 volt grounded electrical outlet at transmitter location. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. GPS: Global Positioning System, a worldwide system that employs 24 satellites in an network to determine geographic location anywhere in the world, and which employs and egrated Itransmits atomic time, the most accurate and reliable time. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION I A. GPS wireless clock system shall continually synchronize clocks throughout the facility, and shall be capable of clock readouts in multiple time zones where desired. B. The system shall synchronize all clocks to each other. The system shall utilize GPS technology to I provide atomic time. The system shall not require hard wiring. Clocks shall automatically adjust for Daylight Savings Time. I C. Analog Clocks shall be synchronized to within 10 milliseconds 6 times per day, and the system shall have an internal oscillator that maintains plus or minus one second per day between synchronizations, cced luuo D. The system shall includeso that an clointernalk clockaccuracy shall referencenotexso et hatpfailures orminof thes GPS 0.2secsignalnds.shall not cause the clocks to fail in indicating time. I E. The system shall incorporate a"fail-safe"design so that failure of any component shall not cause failure of the system. Upon restoration of power or repair of failed component, the system shall resume normal operation without the need to reset the system or any component thereof. I F. Clock locations shall be as indicated, and clocks shall be fully portable, capable of being relocated at any time. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS I A. Equipment and components furnished shall be of manufacturers latest model. IB. Transmitter and receiver shall comply with Part 90 of FCC rules,as follows: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 1 2. this device must accept interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 1 3. Transmitter frequency shall be governed by FCC Part 90.35. SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY I 0205.0 16730-1 WIRELESS CLOCK SYSTEM I I 4. Transmitter output power shall be governed by FCC Part 90.257(b). a C. System shall be installed in compliance with local and state authorities having jurisdiction. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit complete catalog data for each component, describing physical characteristics and method of installation. Submit brochure showing available colors and finishes of clocks. I B. Operating License: Submit evidence of application for operating license prior to installing equipment. Furnish the license, or if the license has not been received, a copy of the application for the license,to the Owner prior to operating the equipment. When license is received, deliver original license to Owner. C. Samples: Submit one clock for approval.Approved sample shall be tagged and shall be installed in the work at location directed. 111 D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit complete installation, set-up and maintenance instructions. 1.06 SUBSTITUTIONS: II A. Proposed substitutions,to be considered, shall be manufactured of equivalent materials that meet or exceed specified requirements of this Section. B. Proposed substitutions shall be identified not less than 10 days prior to bid date. C. Other systems requiring wiring and/or conduit between master and clocks, or which require connection of clocks to external electrical power supply will not be acceptable. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Permits: Obtain operating license for the transmitter from the FCC. B. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing commercial time systems with a minimum of 10 continuous years of documented experience. 2. Installer: Company with documented experience in the installation of commercial time systems. 1.08 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver all components to the site in the manufacturer's original packaging. Packaging shall contain manufacturer's name and address, product identification number, and other related information. B. Store equipment in finished building, unopened containers until ready for installation. 1.09 PROJECT SITE CONDITIONS A. Clocks shall not be installed until painting and other finish work in each room is complete. I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16730-2 0205.0 WIRELESS CLOCK SYSTEM I B. Coordinate installation of GPS receiver for access to the roof or exterior side wall so that the bracket and related fasteners are watertight. 1.10 SYSTEM STARTUP A. At completion of installation and prior to final acceptance, turn on the equipment, ensure that all equipment is operating properly, and that all clocks are functioning. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER: A. GPS wireless clock system shall be manufactured by Primex Wireless, Inc., N3211 County Road H, Lake Geneva WI 53147(800)537-0464 FAX(262)248-0061 www.primexwireless.com. 2.02 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION A. Transmitter Operation: When power is first applied to the transmitter, it checks for and displays the software version, then it checks the position of the switches and stores their position in memory. The transmitter then looks for the GPS time signal. Once the transmitter has received the GPS time, it sets its internal clock to that time. The transmitter then starts to transmit its internal time once every second. The transmitter updates its internal clock every time it receives valid time data from the GPS. B. Analog Clock Operation: 1. When the batteries are inserted into the clock:A) Press the red button when the red second hand is at the 12:00 position.At this time the microprocessor will lock in the location of the second hand. B)After the red second hand has passed over the minute hand (first second hash mark after minute hand), press and release the red button.At this time the microprocessor will lock in the location of the minute hand. The microprocessor then assumes the location of the hour hand. 2. After the red button has been pressed twice, the micro processor will start searching the channels. It will start at channel No. 1 and proceed one by one until it either decodes a valid signal or reaches channel No. 16. If no signal is detected the receiver will be shut off and will try again later. If a signal is received, the micro processor will store the channel number, set the clock to the receive the time. For the next minute the clock will beep every time that it receives a valid time signal. If the clock is in a good signal area it will beep once a second. If the clock beeps every few seconds, the clock is in a marginal signal area. Analog clocks can operate in marginal signal areas, but battery life will be about 25 percent shorter. 3. After initial set, the clock will shut off the receiver. On a pre-scheduled basis, the microprocessor will turn the receiver back on and starting with the stored channel, it will again look for a valid time signal. However, the beeper will not operate. ' 4. If the clock has not decoded a valid time signal for seven days, then it will go back to a double-step mode. Non-signal reception can be caused by low battery voltage. If this occurs, replace the batteries. 2.03 EQUIPMENT A. General: The clock system shall include a transmitter, a roof or window mounted GPS receiver, indicating clocks,and all accessories for complete operation. SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 0205.0 16730-3 WIRELESS CLOCK SYSTEM I B. Transmitter: Primex Wireless Model FM-72,consisting of wireless transmitter with GPS receiver. Unit shall obtain current atomic time from satellite. The clock system shall transmit time continuously to all clocks in the system. 1. Transmission: a. Frequency Range: 72.100 to 72.400 MHz. b. Transmission Range: one mile, open field. c. Radio technology: narrowband FM d. Number of channels: 16 a e. Channel bandwidth: 20 kHz maximum f. Transition mode: one-way communication I g. Data rate: 2 KBps h. Operating range: 0 degrees C.to 70 degrees C. 2. Transmitter: a. Transmitter output power: +26 to+30 dBm b. Frequency deviation: +/-4 kHz c. Transmitter power requirements: 120 VAC 60 Hz d. Internal power requirements: 5 VDC I e. Carrier frequency stability: +/-20 ppm 3. Transmitter shall have 16 selectable channels to assure interference-free reception. I 4. Transmitter shall have the following switches: a. Time zone adjustment switches for all time zones in the world. Includes all US time zones: Eastern, Central, Mountain, Pacific, Alaska and Hawaii. b. Daylight Saving Time bypass switch. 1 c. 12-hour or 24-hour display. 5. Transmitter housing shall be black metal case, 16-3/4 inches by 12 inches by 1-7/8 inches in size. 6. Antenna shall be 46 inches high,commercial type, mountedtop shallbcenter ofe transmitter 1 housing. Antenna gain shall be <2.2 dB. Antenna polarization 7. Transmitter housing shall incorporate a display which shall include the following: a. Time readout b. AM and PM indicator if 12-hour time display is set 1 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16730-4 SEPTEMBER 2004 WIRELESS CLOCK SYSTEM 0205.0 I I c. Day and date readout I d. Indicator for daylight savings or standard time Ie. LED which shall flash red in event of reception problem f. GPS reception indicator I 8. Transmitter shall contain an internal clock such that failure of reception from the GPS will not disable the operation of the clocks. 1 C. Power supply: Model Number: 140003 Input: 120 volt AC 50/60 Hz, 0.4 amp. Output: 9 volt DC, 1.5 amp. iD. GPS Receiver: Model Number Q11695, GPS roof mounted, with 15 foot cable attached (additional Primex Wireless extension cable available: 50, 100, 150, 200 foot). I1. The GPS Receiver shall be a complete GPS receiver including antenna in a waterproof case, 3-7/8 inches by 4-3/16 inches by 2 inches, designed for roof or outdoor mounting. Provide mounting bracket for attachment to roof structure. IE. Traditional analog clocks: Primex Wireless analog clocks, 12-1/2 inch diameter or 16 inch diameter as selected, color and finish as selected from manufacturer's standard colors and finishes.Analog clocks shall be wall mounted, and 12-1/2 inch diameter clocks shall have I polycarbonate frame and polycarbonate lens. Face shall be white. Hour and minute hands shall be black.Analog clocks shall be provided with red sweep second hand. 1 1. 12-1/2 inch analog clocks shall be battery-operated, and shall have 5-year battery life. 2. Analog clocks shall be capable of automatically adjusting for Daylight Saving Time. An Ion-off switch located on the transmitter shall disable this function if desired. 3. Time shall be automatically updated from the transmitter 6 times per day. 111 4. Analog clocks shall remember the time during changing of batteries. 5. 12-1/2 inch analog clock lock: Tamper-proof/theft resistant hangers and slots in the backs of the analog clocks. I 6. Provide 2 alkaline D-cell batteries with each 12-1/2 or 16-inch analog clock. Note Specifier: Select optional dial designs, case options and hands from manufacturer's brochure. 7. Analog clock receivers shall be as follows: Ia. Receiver sensitivity: >-110 dBm b. Receiver power: two alkaline D-cells Ic. Antenna type: internal d. Antenna gain: -7 dBd I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16730-5 111 0205.0 WIRELESS CLOCK SYSTEM I 8. If transmitter stops transmitting valid time signals due to power failure, the clocks will continue to function as accurate quartz clocks until a valid time signal is decoded. 9. Analog clock faces shall bear Owner's logo as indicated. 1 F. Wire guards: Provide one for each analog clock as follows: 111 1. Model No. 14131, 14 by 14 inch size,for nominal 12-1/2 inch diameter analog clocks. 2. Model No. 14123, 18 by 18 inch size,for 16 inch diameter analog clocks. I G. Cable Connection Sealant: Radio Shack Coaxial Cable Connector Sealant 278-1645, or approved electrical grade silicone sealant. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION I' A. Verify that construction is complete in spaces to receive equipment and that rooms are clean and dry. B. Verify that 120 volt electrical outlet is located within 6 feet of location of transmitter,and that outlet is operational and properly grounded. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. GPS Unit: Install on roof in location indicated, in clear view of the sky. Install unit in location free from standing water, and above accumulations of leaves or debris. Seal cable connection to GPS with cable connection sealant. Any added cable lengths must be protected from outside elements. B. Transmitter: 1. Locate transmitter where indicated, a minimum of 2 to 3 feet above the floor, away from large metal objects such as filing cabinets, lockers or metal framed walls. The preferred transmitter location for best transmission coverage is centrally located on the top floor of the building. 2. Attach receiver to transmitter using cable. 111 3. Connect antenna to transmitter, using care not to strip threads. 4. Connect power supply to the transmitter. 5. Set the channel number on the display to correspond to the FCC license. 6. Plug power supply into electrical outlet. C. Analog clocks: Perform the following operations with each clock: 1. Install D-cell batteries. 2. Set clock to correct time in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. I 3. Observe analog clock until valid signals are received and analog clock adjusts itself to correct time. I SEPTEMBER 2004 USD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16730-6 0205.0 WIRELESS CLOCK SYSTEM I I • 4. Install the analog clock on the wall in the indicated location, plumb, level and tight against wall. If using 12-1/5 inch clock, attach using clock-lock hanging method and suitable fasteners as approved by clock manufacturer. D. Wire guards: Secure to wall, using approved theft-resistant fasteners. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Prior to final acceptance, inspect each clock, adjust as required, and replace parts which are found defective. 3.04 CLEANING A. Prior to final acceptance, clean exposed surfaces of clocks, using cleaning methods recommended by clock manufacturer. Remove temporary labels from clock faces. Do not remove labels from backs of clocks. 3.05 DEMONSTRATION A. Provide training to Owner's representative on setting and adjusting clocks, replacing batteries and routine maintenance. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect finished installation until final acceptance of the project. END OF SECTION C ION Addendum No. 1 to the Specifications for GPS wireless clock system Section 13810 Note to specifier:When the coverage from the master transmitter and GPS receiver is insufficient to reach all destinations, expanded coverage may be obtained economically by the use of one or more wireless satellite transmitters and receiver switches. In such case, add the following to paragraph 2.03 of the specification. H.Additional Equipment 1. Wireless receiver switches: Switches shall receive time packets from the master transmitter and relay the synchronized time to the satellite transmitter connected to it. The unit shall include the following: a. Antenna mounted on top of the switch housing, 11-1/2 inches long b. Power Supply: Input: 120 VAC 50/60 Hz, 0.4amp Output: 9 volt DC, 1.5 amps c. RS 232 data cable, 5 feet long d. Daylight Saving Time bypass switch e. Dimensions: 4-1/4 inches long, 5-3/4"wide, 1-1/4 inches deep SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16730-7 0205.0 WIRELESS CLOCK SYSTEM I I f. Weight: 12 ounces g. Operating range: 32 degrees F to 158 degrees F (0-70 degrees C) 2. Satellite transmitters: Satellite transmitters shall receive the signal from the wireless receiver switches and transmit the signal to the devices in its vicinity, which are out of range from the master transmitter. The unit shall include the following: I a. Antenna mounted on top of the housing, 46 inches long b. Power Supply: I Input: 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 0.4 amp Output: 9 volt DC, 1.5 amps. c. 6 foot cord d. Approximately one Watt transmission e. 72 MHz frequency f. 16 selectable channels I g. Time zone adjustment switch h. LCD display showing time, date and signal verification I i. Housing: black metal casing: j. Dimensions: 16 inches wide by 12 inches deep by 1-7/8 inches high I k. Weight: 7-3/4 pounds I. Operating range: 32 degrees F to 158 degrees F (0-70 degrees C) Note to specifier: Add the installation of the additional equipment in paragraph 3.02 as follows: 1: E. Receiver switches: Locate as required to provide complete coverage of the area designated for each switch. Install the receiver switch in the location or locations indicated, and secure to supports using fasteners suitable for the surface to which it is attached. 1. Align the antenna vertically. 2. Set receiver switch to the same channel number of the transmitter it will be receiving its signal from. F. Satellite transmitter: Install within 5 feet of the receiver switch and connect using the supplied cable. 1. Set the satellite transmitter to the channel as indicated on the approved submittal and FCC license. 2. Set switch B for time zone offset from UTC. 1 SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16730-8 0205.0 WIRELESS CLOCK SYSTEM I I 3. Set switch#3 to down position. Note to specifier: If you require Daylight Saving Time bypass, remove access cover on receiver switch and change dip switch#5 to the 'ON'position. I 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16730-9 0205.0 WIRELESS CLOCK SYSTEM I SECTION 16740 TELEPHONE/DATA RACEWAY SYSTEM PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Telephone/Data Raceway System. B. Related Work: I1. Section 16110, Raceways. 2. Section 16130, Boxes. 3. Section 16140, Wiring Devices. 4. Section 16195, Identification. 5. Section 16750, Intercommunications, Master Clock, Paging System. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI/EIA/TIA-569, Commercial Buildin Stan Spaces. 9 Bard for Telecommunications Pathways and B. ANSI/EIA/TIA-607, Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: Provide an empty ANSI/EIA/TIA-569 compliant raceway system for the building telephone/data system wiring as indicated on Drawings and as specified herein. 1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data and shop drawings in accordance with Division 1. B. Modify product data and shop drawings to reflect construction modifications. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT A. Raceway components as applicable under related sections. B. Furnish and install all plywood terminal boards, sized as shown on Drawing . 3/4-inch thick, void-free, and fire retardant,finished with two coats of enamel, white oroANSI gray. Hold plywood up 4-inches above finished floor. 111 C. Wiring, instruments and equipment will be furnished and installed by others. I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16740-1 0208.0 TELEPHONE/DATA RACEWAY SYSTEM I I PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install electrical work in telecommunications equipment rooms as shown on Drawings. Coordinate with the telephone company, Owner's Representative, and with other trades working in the area. B. Install plastic-jacketed pull lines printed with accurate sequential footage in all empty conduits longer than 15-feet or with more than one 90-degree bend. C. Provide copper grounding bus bars and listed copper conductors at each terminal board, bonded through to the main equipment room and to the building ground grid, per ANSI/EIA/TIA-607. D. Provide insulated bushings on all conduits and sleeves. E. Conduit bodies (condulets)are not to be used in data raceway system. F. Install listed firestop material in all sleeves. I G. Seal and cap all conduits entering from outside of the building. END OF SECTION I a I I I I I i RIDER ELEMENTARY 16740-2 TTSD-ALBERTA SEPTEMBER 2004 0208.0 TELEPHONE/DATA RACEWAY SYSTEM I 111 SECTION 16750 INTERCOMMUNICATIONS, MASTER CLOCK, PAGING SYSTEM PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. General Conditions and General Requirements as listed in Index to Specifications apply to work included in this Section. B. Follow the procedures specified in Division 1. 1.02 SYSTEMS INCLUDED A. Intercom/Master Clock/Paging System 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The integrated system shall allow authorized telephones to access the following functions: 1. Two-way communication to any room speaker. 2. Sixteen (16)paging zones. 1 3. Make All-Page announcements to all speakers simultaneously. 4. Activate up to eight(8)zones of speakers for class change tones. 1 5. Activate any one of eight(8)master clock schedules. 6. Activate any one of nine (9)tones to all speakers. 7. Assignment of associated speaker to paging zone. 8. Distribute program (music), furnished by school district, to individual speakers or groups of speakers. 9. Communication to individual rooms by handset dial code. B. The system shall allow system monitoring and administration from a local Windows based PC via a modem. C. The system shall lend itself to expansion to 358 single stations by addition of modules. System will be individually equipped for three hundred (300) speaker stations, and twenty (20) high level (100 watts minimum)paging zones. ICSBASERM D. Room speakers shall be programmable and may be assigned any three, four or five digit number. Any room number may be reassigned at any time, and it shall not be dependent on wiring or circuit numbers. SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16750-1 0208.0 INTERCOMMUNICATIONS,MASTER CLOCK,PAGING SYSTEM I I I E. located shown to through Call-inswitches the telephoneshallbe system to aas designatedon telephonethedrawings extension.andprovide The answeringameans parplace ty shalla becall informed via a pre-programmed digital voice where the call is coming from and whether the call is a normal or an emergency call. The system will inform the answering party how to answer the call. In the event that the primary designated telephone extension does not answer within a predetermined time, the call can be routed to another extension or a pre-programmed voice announcement can be played over one or more speakers. F. A programmable pre-announce tone shall sound immediately before the intercom path is openedli and a supervisory tone shall continue to sound at regular intervals when speaker monitoring is active. G. Master Time Controller I 1. Non-volatile memory capacity for storing 550 events and up to 100 Calendar dates for schedule changes. I 2. Ability to review, edit and delete events via a Windows 95/98 PC running the configuration program. 3. Review events from any entered time of day. 4. Events shall be programmable to any or all of eight(8)zone circuits. I 5. Selection of any of eight (8) schedules to allow flexibility due to seasonal changes or special events. 6. Fully automatic Calendar execution. 7. User programmable Automatic Daylight Savings Time Change. I 8. Programmable Music-on-Class-Change. This feature shall be programmable from 1 to 3600 seconds(60 minutes). 9. Separate bell-tone selection and separate bell duration for each event. 10. Latched operation of zones to control lighting or other devices. I 11. Interface with most types of secondary slave clocks whether synchronous wired or electronic. 12. User-Programmable custom slave clock correction. Output relays rated at 5 amperes shall be provided on all zone circuits as necessary. 13. Lithium battery will provide not less than 5 years battery back-up for timekeeping function. H. Telephone Interface 1, Integrate an isolated 'T-trunk'communication link between Intercommunication System and Telephone System. 1 SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16750-2 0208.0 INTERCOMMUNICATIONS,MASTER CLOCK,PAGING SYSTEM I I I I 1 I Ii. I PART 2 -PRODUCTS I 2.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following system equipment is based upon products manufactured by G.B. Manchester Corporation: 1. Base bid manufacturerers: Dukane,Aipohone(Alternate Bid manufacturer). 2. 3. B. Controlle 1. lase Telecenter ICS®manufactured by Rauland-Borg Corp. The intent of this specification is to establish a standard of quality, function and features. Proposed systems shall be submitted in keeping with contract documents. Rauland model ICS2BASERM with all components required to P q comply with this specification. Locate in the telephone room. C. Amplifier: 1 Rauland CMA 120 with 25%spare power capacity. D. Remote program and microphone and call-in displayinterface: I1. Rauland model ICSPMI with 1295 microphone. 2. Rauland model ICSDTD. E. Surface wall mount speakers 1. Rauland model ACCWB5 Rauland model ACC1101 back box Rauland model ACC1104 T-bar support F. Ceiling speakers: 2.3. Rauland model ACC1400 baffle/speaker assembly G. Call-in Switches: 1 1. Rauland model TCDCS2: H. Exterior Weatherproof horns: 1. Rauland model surface backbox ACC1118 2. Rauland model ACC1014 Baffle 3. Rauland model 3607a in speaker-horn P 9 9 SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16750-3 0208.0 INTERCOMMUNICATIONS,MASTER CLOCK,PAGING SYSTEM 1 I I I. Wiring: Refer to wiring diagrams on Drawings. J. Telephone Interface: 1. Provide three telephone interface modules to permit communication paths between Intercom System and Telephone System. 2. Provide cabling, as required, between Intercom System and analog port of telephone system. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with the Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting the performance of the Integrated Electronic Communications Network system work. B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install system in accordance with NFPA 70 and other applicable codes. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Furnish and install all equipment, accessories, and materials to provide complete and operating integrated intercom/communications system. B. Wiring Methods: 3. Install wiring in raceway except within consoles, desks, and counters, and except in accessible building void spaces above suspended ceilings. Use UL listed plenum cable in environmental air spaces including plenum ceilings. Conceal wiring except in unfinished spaces. 4. Connect head-end wiring on new terminal blocks in a convenient location in a neat and quality workmanlike manner, terminate wiring (including all conductors whether used or not) on new blocks and cable (wire) into new head-end equipment. All wires to be identified by the actual room number and laid down in sequence. C. Impedance and Level Matching: I 1. Carefully match input and output impedance's and signal levels at signal interfaces. Provide matching networks where required. D. Control Circuit Wiring: 1. Install control circuits in accordance with NFPA 70 and as indicated. Provide number of conductors as recommended by system manufacturer to provide control functions indicated or specified. SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16750-4 0208.0 INTERCOMMUNICATIONS,MASTER CLOCK,PAGING SYSTEM I 2. The contractor shall mount a main distribution frame behind the Integrated Electronic Communications Network console. All wires shall be laid down on terminal punch blocks and identified by the actual room location it serves. All the communications points shall be wired into this main distribution frame, laid down in sequence, and identified by which line it is on and the point position it serves. 1 3. All housings are to be located as specified and shown on drawings. 4. Make installation in strict accordance with approved manufacturer's drawings and instructions. 5. The contractor shall provide necessary transient protection on the AC power feed, all station lines leaving or entering the building, and all central office trunks. All protection shall be as recommended by the equipment supplier and referenced to earth ground. E. Wiring Within Enclosures: 1. Provide adequate length of conductors. Bundle, lace, and train the conductors to terminal points with no excess. Provide and use lacing bars. 2. Provide physical isolation from each other for speaker-microphone, line-level, speaker-level, and power wiring. Run in separate raceways, or where exposed or in same s , mnaaoto speaker-microphonesencloureprovide and ea parallelinch i powerimum andseptelephonertionbetween wiring. Provideconductphysical separation as recommended by equipment manufacturer for other Integrated Electronic Communications Network system conductors. F. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: 1. Make splices, taps and terminations on numbered terminal punch blocks in junction, pull, and outlet boxes, terminal cabinets and equipment enclosures. G. Identification of Conductors and Cables: 1. Use color coding of conductors and apply wire and cable marking tape to designate wires and cables so all media are identified in coordination with system wiring diagrams. H. Weatherproofing: 1. Provide weatherproof enclosures for items to be mounted outdoors or exposed to weather. p I. Repairs: 1. Wherever walls, ceilings, floors, or other building finishes are cut for installation, repair, restore, and refinish to original appearance. 3.03 GROUNDING A. Provide equipment grounding connections for Integrated Electronic Communications ca ons Network systems as indicated. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A to assure permanent and effective grounds. SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16750-5 0208.0 INTERCOMMUNICATIONS,MASTER CLOCK,PAGING SYSTEM I 1 B. Ground equipment, conductor, and cable shields to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize to the I greatest extent possible,ground loops, common mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments. Provide 5-ohm ground at main equipment location. Measure, record, and report ground resistance. C. Terminate equipment/signal ground conductors at reference ground bus in MDF Room. I 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Services: 1 1. Provide services of a factory authorized service representative location to supervise the field assembly and connection of components and the pre-testing, testing, and adjustment of the system. B. Inspection: I 1. Make observations to verify that units and controls are properly labeled, and interconnecting wires and terminals are identified. Provide a list of final tap settings of paging speaker line matching transformers. i, C. Testing: 1. Rectify deficiencies indicated by tests and completely re-test work affected by such deficiencies at Contractor's expense. Verify by the system test that the total system meets the Specifications and complies with applicable standards. I 3.05 COMMISSIONING A. Train Owner's operation and maintenance personnel in the procedures and schedules involved in I operating, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventative maintenance of the system. Provide a minimum of 4 hours training. Operators Manuals and Users Guides shall be provided at the time of this training. B. Schedule training with Owner through the Architect, with at least seven days advance notice. 3.06 OCCUPANCY ADJUSTMENTS: A. When requested by the Architect within one year of date of Substantial Completion, provide I on-site assistance in adjusting sound levels, resetting matching transformer taps, and adjusting controls to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to three (3) visits to the site for this purpose. 3.07 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Prior to final acceptance, clean system components and protect from damage and deterioration. I END OF SECTION I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16750-6 I 0208.0 INTERCOMMUNICATIONS,MASTER CLOCK,PAGING SYSTEM I I I SECTION 16906 I I OCCUPANCY SENSORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY I A. Related Sections: 1 1 I1.02 1. Section 16110, Raceways. 2. Section 16120,Wires and Cables. 3. Section 16140,Wiring Devices. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The occupancy sensors shall sense the presence of human activity within the desired space and enable or disable the on/off manual lighting control function provided by local switches. B. Upon detection of human activity by the detector, initiate a time delay to maintain the lights on for a preset period of time. Field adjustable time delay setting from 30 seconds to 15 minutes. C. Sensors shall have factory set PIR sensing sensitivity for maximum sensitivity. Provide time delay at 10 minutes. D. Install system in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. E. All line voltage sensors, control units, and relays UL listed 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Follow the procedures specified in Division 1. e B. Provide, on reproducible architectural floor plan, a layout of sensors indicatingtheir sensing distribution. C. Provide wiring diagrams indicating low voltage and line voltage wiring requirements. I I I II IC.PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 PASSIVE INFRARED SENSORS-GENERAL A. The passive infrared sensors shall detect presence, in the floor area being controlled, by detecting changes in the Infrared energy. Detect small movements, i.e., when a person is writing while seated ata desk. B. Provide a temperature compensated dual element sensor and a multi element fresnel lens. The sensor shall utilize DIP switch adjustments for"on"mode operation, time delay, and sensitivity. D. Provide a daylight filter which ensures that the sensor is insensitive to short-wavelength infrared waves, i.e., those emitted by the sun. SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16906-1 0208.0 OCCUPANCY SENSORS I E. The sensors not to protrude more than 1-1/2-inches from the wall or ceiling and should blend in I aesthetically. F. Conceal adjustments and mounting hardware under a removable cover to prevent tampering with adjustments and hardware. G. Low Voltage Sensors: I 1. Sensor shall provide complete coverage of the controlled area. 2. Sensors shall operate on 24VDC power. 3. Sensors shall operate remote power switch packs. 4. Sensors can be wired in parallel to allow coverage of large areas. 5. Manufacturers: The Watt Stopper CI Series Sensor Switch CM-9 and WV-16 or approved. H. Wall Switch Sensors: 1. 300 sq.ft. area coverage, with a field of view of 180 degrees. 2. Completely self-contained sensor system that fits into a standard single gang box. Internal transformer power supply, a latching dry contact relay switching mechanism compatible with electronic ballasts, compact fluorescent, and inductive loads. Triac and other harmonic generating devices are not allowed. 3. Rated to switch loads from 0 to 800 watt incandescent or fluorescent 120 volt and 0 to 1000 watts for 277 volt. 4. Provide adjustable daylight feature that holds lighting"off'when a desired footcandle level is present. 5. Provide integral off override switch with no leakage current to the load or ground. 6. Provide hard 1mm poly lR2 lens, soft lens is not acceptable. 7. Manufacturers: The Watt Stopper WA Series, sensor switch or approved. 2.02 DUAL TECHNOLOGY SENSORS I A. Utilize same technologies as passive infrared and ultrasonic or audio sensing technology. B. Upon a person entering a space, motion from both technologies must be sensed before lighting will be turned on. After this has occurred, detection by either technology will hold lighting on for the set time period. Sensor shall have a retrigger time delay where only one motion is necessary to turn on the lights within 5 seconds after turning off. I • C. Manufacturers: The Watt Stopper DT Series, Sensor Switch CM-PDT and WV-PDT or approved. I 1 SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16906-2 0208.0 OCCUPANCY SENSORS I 2.03 PHOTOCELL ON/OFF CONTROL A. Adjustable light levels, 0.1 to 400 footcandles. B. Adjustable dead band, 0 to 100 footcandles. C. Operating voltage, 2 to 24 VACNDC. D. Operating current, 15 MA. E. Manufacturers: Sensor Switch CM-PC or approved. PART 3 -EXECUTION. 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install occupancy sensors as directed by manufacturer's instructions. Complete all electrical connections to all control circuits, occupancy sensors, power supply pack and low voltage wiring. B. Verify with manufacturer's representative that the sensors are laid out in compliance to manufacturers published sensing distribution. Provide additional sensors for complete coverage of the space being sensed. 3.02 QUALITY CONTROL A. Use manufacturer's published testing and adjusting procedures to adjust sensors time delay, daylight sensitivity, and passive infrared sensitivity to satisfaction of the Owner. END OF SECTION I I I I I I I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 0208.0 16906-3 OCCUPANCY SENSORS 1 1 1 1 1 1 i APPENDIX 1 -CITY OF TIGARD PROCESS FOR RECORDING INSPECTIONS I a Ai Building Division Notification I . . •II�� Tri-County Process for Recording Inspections City of Tigard 1 1. Perform the requested or required inspection. I 2. Leave an inspection report on the job site within a weatherproof container or structure provided by the contractor/applicant. The report must include: • Inspection type. I • Permit number. • Job address. • Name and contact phone number of the building inspector. • Jurisdiction of authority. • Inspection results to include: Approval: ❑ Approval. ID Approval with conditions. ❑ Approval with corrections. IPartial approval: 0 Description of the portion of the project that is approved. Not approved: 0 Description of the noncompliance,written clearly and legibly. ID Description of the location(when specific). ❑ Code reference citation upon request. 0 Timeframe for corrections to be made,if required. 111 3. The inspector must leave an inspection approval history report on site. This record must be one of the following: • Job Information Record. I • Inspection Sign-off Card. • Any other form of inspection report. I 4. After each electrical inspection,the inspector contacts the electrical contractor of the results by one of the following: • Phone. • Fax. • Mail. I 5. The inspector records the inspection data at the jurisdiction's office. All inspection records must be accessible to the public. I 6. When a Temporary Occupancy or Conditional Occupancy is requested or approved,the building inspector: • Details the conditions of Temporary Occupancy. I • Lists the projected completion date. • Enters the project into the process for reinspection. i 7. When all inspections have taken place and have been approved,the inspector provides a Certificate of Completion or Final Inspection Report with approval to occupy. Note: A commercial certificate of occupancy will be provided when all applicable requirements have been satisfied. Iis\Building\Forms\tnspProcess.doc 1/5/04 1 Building Division Notification 1 �I'i� Weatherproof Containers City of Tigard 1 As a result of recent Senate Bill 512 and the formation of the Tri-County Building Industry Service Board,new rules regarding recording of inspections have been written. Part of these new rules include the requirement that weatherproof containers are provided at building sites to contain plans, specifications, inspection records, and job cards. These rules affect all jurisdictions within Multnomah, Clackamas, and Washington counties. As of July 1, 2001, the City of Tigard will require the following: I • a minimum 4-inch ABS pipe with one threaded and one capped end; and or inside the arae; and • the ABS pipe shall be located at either the temporary power polegarage;, 111 • the ABS pipe shall be capable of containing the approved plans, engineering calculations, up- to-date inspection records, and a City of Tigard job card. Exceptions: 1. Job shacks where contractors have multiple construction sites within the same , subdivision. This would require prior approval and arrangement with the inspection staff. 111 2. Commercial projects with job shacks and interior alterations where the plans could be kept inside the structure. The City of Tigard inspection staff will be noting this on inspection reports. As of August 1,2001 inspections will not be performed without this container and the , required documents being on site. The rules for recording inspections are printed on the back of this notice. Questions regarding these rules should be directed to: Gary Lampella Building Official (503) 718-2448 I i:\Building\Forms\Weatherproof.doc 1/5/04 1 I 1 1 1 11111 1 1 I ' APPENDIX 2-GEOTECH REPORT 1 : URS May 18, 2004 ' Tigard-Tualatin School District 23J 6960 SW Sandburg Street Tigard, Oregon 97223 r Attn: Mr. Stephen Poage ' Director of Capital Projects Re: Geotechnical Investigation ' Alberta Rider Elementary School Tigard-Tualatin School District 23J Tigard, Oregon URS Job No: 25695391.10001 Dear Mr. Poage: We are pleased to submit herewith our report entitled "Geotechnical Investigation, Alberta Rider ' Elementary School, Tigard-Tualatin School District 23J, Tigard, Oregon." This report formally documents our conclusions and recommendations regarding the proposed project. It has been our pleasure to assist you with this project. Should you have any questions regarding the contents of this report,please call us at your convenience. Yours very truly, i URS �4��PR P �S���G,INFF�% 5984774 uor OREGON ti 4$4) Y ZYg,2o v /A0 ' Bryan J. Duevel,P.E. !EXPIRES: /2/.3//oc— J : an M. Willman, Ph.D., P.E. Project Engineer Manager, Geotechnical Engineering ' URS Corporation 111 SW Columbia,Suite 1500 Portland,OR 97201-5850 Tel:503.222.7200 Fax:503.222.4292 TABLE OF CONTENTS Section 1 Introduction I 1-1 1.1 General 1.2 Proposed Construction 1-1 1.3 Scope of Work 1-1 1-1 I Section 2 Field and Laboratory Investigations 2.1 I 2.1 Field Exploration 2.1.1 Test Pits 2-1 2.1.2 Subsurface Borings 2-1 ' 2.1.3 Dynamic Cone Penetrometer 2-1 2.1.4 Field Resistivity 2.2 Laboratory Testing 2-22-2 2-2 I Section 3 Site Description 3-1 3.1 Surface Conditions I 3.2 Regional Geology 3-1 3.3 Subsurface Conditions 3-1 3.4 Slope Stability Assessment 3-1 3.5 Site Hydrogeology 3-2 I 3-2 Section 4 Design Recommendations 4-1 I 4.1 General 4.2 Shallow Foundations 4-1 4.2.1 Earth Pressures and Friction Factor 4-1 I 4.2.2 Slabs on Grade 4-2 4.3 Retaining Walls 4-2 4.3.1 Retaining Wall Design Parameters 4-2 4.3.2 Equivalent Fluid Densities - 4-3 I 4.3.3 Additional Lateral Pressures 4-3 4.3.4 Retaining Wall Backfill 4-3 4.4 Site Preparation 4-4 14-44.4.1 General 4.4.2 Dry Weather Earthwork 4-4 4.4.3 Wet Weather Earthwork 4-4 4.4.4 Rock Rippability 4-4 I 4.4.5 Structural Fill 4-5 4.5 Slopes 4-5 4.6 Temporary Shoring 4-6 4.7 Seismic Design 4-6 I 4.8 Corrosion 4-6 4.9 Pavement Recommendations 4-6 4.10 Athletic Field Recomedations 4-7 m I 4-9 Section 5 Sensitive Site Status 5-1 Section 6 Construction Monitoring 6-1 Section 7 Closure 7-1 I Section 8 References 8-1 URS 0;25695391 TTSD Alberta RideATTSD Report Fin81.d0e118-MAY-04 I 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS List of Tables I Table 1 Measured Resistivity 4-7 Table 2 Laboratory Corrosion Tests 4-7 Table 3 Assumed Traffic Loading 4-7 I Table 4 Recommended Pavement Section 4-8 List of Figures I Figure 1 Vicinity Map Figure 2 Site Map Figure 3 Standard Slab and Wall Drainage Detail I List of Appendices • I Appendix A Subsurface Exploration Logs Appendix B Dynamic Cone Penetrometer Test Logs I Appendix C Laboratory Testing Appendix D Wetlands Review I I I 1 I I I I JPS 0i25695391 TTSD Alberta RidMTTSD Report Fkial.doc118-MAY-04 11 i SECTIONONE Introduction 1.1 GENERAL This report presents the results of our geotechnical investigation performed for the proposed Alberta Rider Elementary School in Tigard, Oregon. This work was completed in accordance with our proposal to Tigard-Tualatin School District 23J dated May 16, 2003. The project site is located approximately as shown on the Vicinity Map, Figure 1. The Site Map presented on Figure 2 shows a preliminary plan layout of the site. The purpose of this investigation was to explore the surface and subsurface conditions at the ite, analyze the conditions encountered, and prepare design and construction recommendations sfor support of the proposed school. These recommendations along with supporting data are documented in this report. 1.2 PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION This project involves the construction of a new school with an approximately 40,000 square feet ' footprint, a new entrance drive, parking lots, and athletic fields. At the time of this report, two separate manifestations of the planned development were available. This report is applicable to either development scenario. For the purposes of this report, we have assumed that column loads will not exceed approximately 80 kips and continuous wall loads will not exceed 3 kips per lineal foot. Specific loads and settlement criteria were not available at the time of this report. 1.3 SCOPE OF WORK The scope of this investigation included completion of the following: ' 1. Review of previous reports foreot site. This has been augmented with informatiocal n obtained ed from site d geological information to the 2. Examine historical aerial photographs to evaluate historical site development and instabilities. P slope ' 3. Conduct a subsurface investigation consisting of drilling and sampling at 3 boring locations and 15 test pit locations to characterize the subsurface soils and bedrock. 4. Perform a laboratory testing program to characterize the physical and engineering properties of the subsurface soils, including moisture content,plasticity, and gradation. 5. Conduct a geologic site reconnaissance to identify and characterize any unstable conditions that could adversely impact the site and proposed development. 6. Complete a wetlands review for the site consisting of a site reconnaissance to evaluate the ' site for potential wetlands. 7. Recommendations for foundation support of the proposed school. These include foundation bearing capacities, footing sizes and depths, estimated settlements, earth pressures and the allowable sliding friction coefficient. 8. Recommendations for slabs-on-grade including subgrade preparation, base course gradation, compaction and subgrade modulus. URS 0:125695391 TTSD Alberta RiderWTTSD Report Finat.dod18-MAY-04 1-1 SECTIONONE Introduction 9. Recommendations for retaining wall and below grade retaining wall design, including I earth pressures for restrained and unrestrained retaining walls. Additionally, drainage and backfill recommendations are included. 10. General recommendations regarding construction and earthwork. 11. Determination of the corrosion potential at the proposed site with field and laboratory tests. These tests included field resistivity,pH, chloride and sulfate contents. 12. Perform dynamic cone penetration tests at the site to assess the in situ subgrade characteristics for pavement design. I 13. Recommendations for pavement sections based on the anticipated traffic, pavement life, and soil conditions encountered. Both"light"and"heavy"duty sections are developed. 14. Recommendations for the design of new play fields including estimated percolation rates, settlements, drainage and construction considerations. 15. Preparation of 5 copies of this report describing our investigations and recommendations t regarding geotechnical suitability of the site. 1 URS I 1 1 1 1 1 I 0:125695391 TSO Alberta RiderVTTSD Report Final.doct18-MAY-04 1-2 I SECTIONTWO Field and LaboratoryInvestigation est�gation I 2.1 FIELD EXPLORATION The field exploration program was conducted on June 4, 5, 13, and 14, and July 1, 2003. The program consisted of a reconnaissance of the site for visual indications of slope instability and a I subsurface exploration program. The subsurface investigation included the completion of 15 test pits, 3 soil borings, 11 dynamic cone penetrometer tests, and 4 field resistivity tests. I 2.1.1 Test Pits The 15 tests pits were completed across the site, with a focus on the approximate location of the I proposed school building, as shown on the Site Map, Figure 2. The test pits were excavated by Brownsfield Environmental and Construction, LLC., of Sandy, Oregon using a Case 9030B excavator. Test pits were completed to depths of between 12 and 19.5 feet below ground surface (bgs). The test pits were terminated in bedrock. Representative soil samples were collected from the test pits prior to being backfilled with the excavated soils. The test pit logs are presented in Appendix A. 111 2.1.2 Subsurface Borings IThree soil borings were completed in the vicinity of the proposed school footprint, as shown on the Site Map, Figure 2. Drilling was performed by Geotech Exploratons, Inc., of Tualatin, I Oregon using a truck-mounted CME-75 drill rig. Soil borings were terminated at depths ranging from 29 to 31 feet bgs and were all terminated in bedrock. Borings were advanced using hollow stem auger methods to competent bedrock and NX wireline coring methods to the completion of I the boring. Upon completion of the borings, boreholes were backfilled with bentonite chips in compliance with the state of Oregon Water Resources Department requirements. The soil boring logs are presented in Appendix A. ISoil samples were obtained during drilling by driving a 2.5 inch inside diameter / 3.25 inch outside diameter ring sampler (Dames & Moore Type-U) with a 300 pound hammer falling 30 inches. A 140 pound hammer was used to drive the sampler for B-03-2003. Recorded blows 1 required to advance each 6 inches of penetration are shown on the boring logs. Sampling resistances for the Type-U Sampler were converted to equivalent Standard Penetration Resistances (N) using relationships from Winterkorn and Fang (1977) I calculations. The N value is used to determine the in situ relative densityoffor enggranularoils and the consistency of cohesive soils based on established correlations. Field reported blow co an are recorded on the boring logs. Retrieved ring samples were wrapped in watertight bags,placed I in plastic containers, sealed, and temporarily stored in padded boxes for transportation to our laboratory. The soil boring logs are presented in Appendix A. IThe stratigraphic contacts indicated within each log represent the approximate boundaries between soil types; actual transitions may be more gradual and indistinct. The soil and groundwater conditions depicted are only for the specific dates and locations reported, and I therefore, are not necessarily representative of other times and locations. URS 0:125695391 TTSD Alberta RidertTTSD Report Finel,doci18-MAY-04 2-1 SECTIONTWO Field and Laboratory investigation i 2.1.3 Dynamic Cone Penetrometer Twelve Dynamic Cone Penetration (DCP) tests were performed in areas of the site that may be paved. The DCP is a widely used device to determine the in situ strength properties of base materials and subgrade soils. The four main components of the DCP include the cone,rod,anvil and hammer. The cone is attached to one end of the DCP rod while the anvil and hammer are attached to the other end. Energy is applied to the cone tip through the rod by dropping the 17.64-pound hammer a distance of exactly 22.6 inches against the anvil. The diameter of the cone is 0.1575 inches larger than the rod to ensure that only tip resistance is measured. The number of blows required to advance the cone into the subsurface materials is recorded. The DCP index is the ratio of the depth of penetration to the number of blows of the hammer. This can then be correlated to a variety of material properties, including California Bearing Ratio (CBR) and Resilient Modulus. Logs of the DCP test results are included in Appendix B. 2.1.4 Field Resistivity The field resistivity of the soils at the site was measured with a Stratascout Model 40C resitivity meter. Resistance was measured using the 4-point (Wenner) configuration at equal spacings of 5, 10, and 20 feet between each electrode. Four resistivity tests were performed at the locations shown on the site map, Figure 2. • I 2.2 LABORATORY TESTING The soil samples collected as part of the surface and subsurface investigations were tested to refine the field classifications and to evaluate physical properties of the soils. All tests were conducted in general accordance with applicable ASTM standards. The laboratory testing ' program consisted of the following: • Visual Soil Classification in general accordance with ASTM Test Method D2487. 1 • Grain size analysis — Mechanical Testing in general accordance with ASTM Test Method D422 and D1140. • Moisture Content in general accordance with ASTM Test Method D2937. • Liquid and Plastic Limits (Atterberg Limits) in general accordance with ASTM Test Method D4318. • • pH in general accordance with EPA 150.1. • Chloride and sulfates in general accordance with EPA 300.0. The results of the physical laboratory tests conducted are summarized on the soil boring logs in Appendix A. Plots of the Atterberg Limit tests are contained in Appendix C. I URS 0%25695391 TTSD Alberta RiideAITSD Report Final.doc%t8-MAY-04 2-2 i SECTIONTHREE Site Description 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS ' The site is located near the crest of Bull Mountain as shown on the Vicinity Map, Figure 1. The topography across most of the site is relatively gentle, with elevations ranging from a high of approximately 574 feet above Mean Sea Level (MSL) along the northwestern boundary to the site to 515 feet above MSL in the far southeast corner of the site. The maximum slopes present Ion-site approach 25% at the northwest edge of the site. Elsewhere, maximum slopes are approximately 15%, located in the northwest and southeast portions of the site. ' 3.2 REGIONAL GEOLOGY Regionally, the site is located in the northern Willamette Valley physiographic province, an ' elongate, roughly north-south trending alluvial valley that lies between the Coastal Range and Cascade Mountains to the west and east, respectively(Orr, et. al., 1992). It is also located within the Portland fold belt, a seismotectonic province defined by Unruh et al. (1994). The tectonic underpinnings of this latter province are not well understood and complicated by the fact that this area lies in a transition zone between the rotating forearc block and the continental interior (Wells et al, 1998). ' Specifically, the site is located in the Tualatin Basin, a northwest trending synclinal subbasin to the Willamette Valley basin (Unruh et al., 1994). The Tualatin Basin is fault bound along its ' eastern margin which is bound by the Portland Hills (Madin, 1990). Internal structure to the basin includes the faulting that has resulted in the formation of the Bull Mountain and Cooper Mountain anticlines. The site is located immediately south of the anticline axis as mapped by 1 Madin. 3.3 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS ' The results of the subsurface investigation show that the site is underlain by approximately5 to 9 Quaternary feet of medium stiff, brown, lean clay. This clay is weathered late Q ary windblown silt. ' Underlying the weathered silts is 2 to 6 feet of stiff, reddish brown, lean clay. This clay is basalt bedrock residuum that grades to extremely to highly weathered basalt at depths ranging from 8 to 16 feet below ground surface. The basalt bedrock is Miocene-aged Columbia River Basalts. The highly weathered basalt is very weak (indicating it can be pealed with a pocketknife) and highly fractured. The degree of weathering gradually decreases with depth. The rock grades to moderately weathered, moderately strong (requiring a hammer blow to break a sample) basalt at ' depths between 21 and 26 feet bgs. The Rock Quality Designation (RQD) is commonly used as an index to describe a rock's degree of fracturing (Deere and Deere, 1989). The RQD is determined by summing the lengths of core I pieces greater than 4 inches over a run and dividing this sum by the total length of the run. RQD values measured for the moderately weathered basalt ranged from 0 to 32 percent. The fractures • per foot ranged from 5 to greater than 10. URS 0125695391 TTSD Alberta RidetiTTSD Report Final.dooNB-MAY-04 3-1 • SECTIONTHREE Site Description 3.4 SLOPE STABILITY ASSESSMENT , URS conducted a site reconnaissance and aerial photograph review to assess the site and surrounding properties for potential recent or ancient landslides. Aerial photographs from 1936, 1940, 1963, 1972, 1983, and 1996 were reviewed to assess the site and adjacent properties for historical slope instabilities. The 1936 and 1940 photographs indicate that the Rider residence is present along with buildings to the immediate south and east of the Rider property. The site and surrounding properties are open fields with some orchards. A steep sided drainage leads to the south-southeast from near the southeast corner of the site. The eastern portion of this site slopes towards this drainage. Slopes along this drainage appear generally stable though a potential small surficial failure is present approximately 1000 feet from the site in this drainage. Indications of global instability were not observed in the 1936 or 1940 aerial photographs. The drainage to the southeast of the site had become overgrown in the 1963 aerial photograph. , There is a small slope failure immediately north of Beef Bend Road and south of the site by approximately 2000 feet. There is still one building present to the east and south of the Rider property. By 1972 the building to the south of the Rider property had been demolished. Indications of global stability issues were not observed in the 1963 or 1972 aerial photographs. The site is similar to as it appears today in the 1983 and 1996 aerial photographs. The building to the east of the Rider property is no longer present. The drainage to the southeast of the site is heavily overgrown and there are residential buildings on the east side of the drainage. James Schick, a URS Certified Engineering Geologist conducted a site reconnaissance on June 23, 2003. Evidence of slope instability was not observed on the site. A visual reconnaissance was also conducted in the drainage to the southeast. Indications of past slope failures including scarps, pistol-butt tree trunks, hummocky terrain or jackstrawed trees were not observed. Based on the aerial photograph review and site reconnaissance,there does not appear to be a significant slope stability issue associated with the site. , 3.5 SITE HYDROGEOLOGY Groundwater was not encountered during the subsurface investigation. URS conducted a review 1 of water well logs publicly available from the Oregon Water Resources Department. Static groundwater levels reported on well logs are in excess of 150 feet bgs in the vicinity of the site. Perched groundwater may be present within the fine-grained soils during the winter months. However, discharge from these perched systems is anticipated to be minimal. I URS 1 0:125695391 TTSD Alberta RideATfSD Report Final.doc 1&MAY-04 3-2 I SECTIONFOU . . Design Recommendations 4.1 GENERAL IFoundation loads for the new school building Architects. We understand that column loads r aree r not antic pateto dboEexced 80 Associates Icontinuous wall loads will not exceed 3 kips per lineal foot. Based on the soil conditions ipr and at the site, URS recommends the use of conventional continuous or isolated shallow foundations present be used to support the proposed structure. 4.2 SHALLOW FOUNDATIONS IIn our opinion, the school can be adequately supported with conventional shallow footings. For footings that bear on shallow, undisturbed native soils,tlnuous we recoor isolated I net allowable bearing pressure of 2,000 pounds per square foot (psf). For footings founded at a depth of 10 feet or greater, we recommend a net allowable bearingat a o psf Bearing pressures may be increased by one-third when considering transient loads suuc h I and seismic forces. We recommend that a unit weight of 115 pounds per cubic foot cwindas to calculate the overburden pressure due to excavation. Backfill soils will fl he used than excavated soils but not enough to significantly influence the bearing pressureslightly heavier Exterior footings should be founded at least 18 inches provide frost protection. Continuous wall footings should have ta mini umh the lst widt ofexterio18 grade to inches I and isolated column footings should have a minimum plan dimension of 24 inches. Given e anticipated column loads for the structure, square footings should have a minimum width the feet. of 6.5 IWe recommend that excavations for foundations be accomplished with a straight-edged bucket to minimize disturbance of the bearing surfaces. Following excavation, the bbeading surfaces should be thoroughly cleaned of loosened or disturbed soil, by hand if necess ariny soft or unsuitable soils encountered at the base of foundation excavations should be removed�y replaced with compacted structural fill meeting the requirements described below. and IFor foundations designed and constructed as specified above, we estimate settlements order of less than 0.5-inch. We anticipate that the majority of the settlement will occur du the construction, essentially as the loads area lied. ung I occur within three weeks following application of the oadsmainder of the settlement will likely I I I I URS 0125695391 rrso Alberta RiderlTTSD Report Final.doc118-MAY-04 4-1 . i SECTIONF OUR Design Recommendations i 4.2.1 Earth Pressures and Friction Factor Passive earth pressures acting against the toe of the shallow foundations and friction on the base of the foundations may be considered to provide resistance to lateral forces tending to cause I translational sliding. These structural members should be considered for counteracting lateral forces only if the member is placed in direct contact with tested and approved soils. If the foundation is constructed by using forms, lean concrete may be placed between the footing and the undisturbed wall of the adjacent excavation in order to provide the direct contact required to consider passive pressure for counteracting lateral movement. The lean concrete should have a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 1,500 psi. An allowable passive pressure having an equivalent fluid density of 250 pcf may be used for design. This is based on a factor of safety of two. An ultimate friction factor of 0.5 for mass concrete on compacted granular fill can be used for design for those portions of the foundations with full positive pressure on the base of the foundation. For foundations placed directly on native clay, an ultimate friction factor of 0.3 should be used. Only long-term dead loads should be considered in calculating the available friction on the foundation base. 4.2.2 Slabs on Grade I The subgrade under all floor slab areas should be prepared in accordance with Section 4.4. We recommend that floor slabs be underlain by a minimum 6-inch thick granular base course to provide uniformity of support and to act as a capillary break against moisture migration through the slab. The granular base course should consist of a well-graded gravel or crushed rock with a maximum nominal size of and having less than 5 percent by weight passing the No. 200 sieve. The base course should be compacted to at least 95 percent of its maximum dry density as determined by the modified proctor test (ASTM Test Method D1557). We recommend a I modulus of subgrade reaction of 225 pounds per cubic inch(pci)for the base course. Even with a capillary break as outlined above, there is the possibility of some floor moisture or dampness. If floor moisture is a critical consideration due to storage of materials directly on the floor slab, or because of the use of glued down impervious floor coverings such as tile or linoleum, we recommend the use of an under-slab impermeable membrane placed directly below the slab. To maximize water tightness, the membrane must be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. URS understands that foundation elevations of the school will be a split level design where a I portion of the school is situated on about 15 feet of fill, while others are at grade or excavated to a nominal depth. Given this layout, URS recommends that vapor barriers be installed under the portions of the school that are not situated on a significant fill layer. This will mitigate the 111 potential moisture issues as described above. 4.3 RETAINING WALLS I. Following are typical design parameters for wall types that we believe represent the range of systems that may be constructed at this site. Please contact us if any additional design values or wall types need to be addressed. 0:\25695391 TTSD Alberta Rider%TTSD Report Final.docll&MAY-04 4-2 I I1. Enclosures: I a. Flush Panelboards Rated 600 Amp or Less: Maximum enclosure depth, 5-3/4-inches. Ib. Wiring Gutter Size: 5-inches at sides, 6-inch top and bottom. c. Finish: Galvanized metal. 1 2. Bussing: a. Aluminum bar with suitable electroplating (tin)for corrosion control at connection. 1 b. Provide ground bar to accommodate specified terminal lugs. c. Predrill bus for bolt-on type circuit breakers. d. Provide double lugs or landing pads for feed through feeders as required. I e. Provide feed through feeder lugs for field connection of multi-section flush panel sections. f. When distribution panel is feeding isolated ground circuits, provide isolated ground bar, insulated from panelboard enclosure, to accommodate specified terminal lugs. I 3. Provide fully rated integrated equipment rating greater than the available fault current. See Drawings for available fault current, Minimum rating is 10,000 amps. 4. Lugs: Compression type rated for both aluminum and copper conductors. I 5. Breakers: Bolt-on type. I6. Covers: a. Hinged door with door-in-door construction, flush lift latch and lock, two keys per Rpanel. Key all distribution panelboards alike. b. Paint all surfaces with medium light gray finish suitable for field painting to match wall finish. Ic. Surface panels to have metal trim covers with no sharp edges or corners. Surface panel enclosure finish to match trim cover. 1, d. Where two or more panels are installed side-by-side, provide covers of same height with each trim independently removable without disturbing the other sections. 11 e. Where located interior provide custom finish to match surrounding finish wall surface. If. Where panels are mounted in finished interior areas in normal view of the building occupants, paint covers to match adjacent wall surface. 1 7. When indicated on Drawings, provide 200 percent rated copper neutral assembly. SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16470-3 0208.0 SWITCHBOARDS AND 1 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS 4 8. When indicated on Drawings, provide an insulated ground bus in addition to the I equipment ground bus. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION I A. General: Equipment arrangement in electrical room is based on one manufacturer. Coordinate space requirements with equipment supplier. Main code required and manufacturer's clearances. I B. Switchboards: 1. Install switchboards,as directed by manufacturer's installation instructions, on 3 1/2:" I raised concrete base. 2. Install equipment in conformance with work space requirements of NEC 110-16. 1 3. Locate equipment in rooms or spaces dedicated to such equipment, NEC 384-2. Coordinate with other Divisions of work. 1 C. Distribution Panelboards: 1. Install distribution panelboards as directed by manufacturer's installation instructions. I 2. Install distribution panelboards surface or flush mounted in accessible locations as indicated on Drawings. Maintain or exceed minimum clearances required by code. I 3. Where flush panels are installed, verify available recessing depth and coordinate wall framing with other Divisions. 4. Feeder conductors to enter directly in line with lug terminals wherever practicable. Feeder conductors, except ground and neutral, not to exceed 45 degree deflection from raceway entry to feeder phase lugs. 5. Paint panel cover and surface mounted enclosure(if surface allowed)to match finished wall color where panels are located in finished spaces. 6. Where panels are installed flush, provide two spare 1" conduits from panel to accessible space above and below the panel. 7. Where panels are installed flush in fire rated walls maintain fire rating of wall. I 3.02 CLEANING A. Thoroughly clean the exterior and the interior of each switchboard and distribution panelboard in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Vacuum construction dust, dirt and debris out of each switchboard and distribution panelboard. I C. Where enclosure finish is damaged, touch up finish with matching paint in accordance with manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions. END OF SECTION 1 SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16470-4 0208.0 SWITCHBOARDS AND DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS I SECTION 16475 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 111 1. Fuses. 2. Circuit breakers. 3. Fuse cabinet. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16170, Circuit and Motor Disconnects. 2. Section 16470, Switchboards and Distribution Panelboards. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Follow the procedures specified in Division 1. B. Product Data: 1. Provide instantaneous let-through current curves and average melting time current curves for fuses supplied to project. 2. Provide product data and time/current trip curves for circuit breakers supplied to project. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Fuses: Bussmann Division, McGraw-Edison; Shawmut Division, Gould Electronic, Littelfuse, or approved. B. Circuit Breakers: Cutler-Hammer/Westinghouse, General Electric, Siemens, Square D, or approved. C. Fuse Cabinet: Bussmann, Circle AW, Gould-Shawmut, Littelfuse, Siemens, Square D, or approved. 111 2.02 FUSES A. Characteristics: Dual element, time delay, current limiting, nonrenewable type, rejection feature. B. Combination Loads: Class RK1, 1/10 to 600 amp, UL Class L, above 600 amps. C. Motor Loads: UL Class RK5, 1/10 to 600 amp. I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 0208.0 16475-1 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 1 D. Fuse pullers for complete range of fuses. 2.03 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS Ii A. One,two or three-pole bolt on,single handle common trip, rated 15 to 800 amp, 250VAC as indicated on Drawings. B. Overcenter toggle-type mechanism, quick-make, quick-break action. Trip indication is by handle position. C. Calibrate for operation in 40C ambient temperature. D. 15 to 100 Amp Breakers: Permanent trip unit containing individual thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pole. E. Greater than 100 Amp Breakers: Variable magnetic trip elements setbya single adjustment. Provide push-to-tripbutton on cover on breaker for mechanical tripping. F. Provide removable load lugs, UL listed for compression type lugs, copper conductors only. G. Provide all circuit breakers series rated and when series combination ratings are applied, identify all equipment enclosures as required by NEC 110-22. 2.04 FUSE CABINET A. Enclosure: , 1. Provide metallic cabinet surface mounted,with internal shelves,trim cover with hinged and latched door. 2. Size cabinet such that spare fuses required by these Documents do not exceed 50 percent of cabinet volume. B. Label: Provide engraved label to identify as Spare Fuse Cabinet. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Fuses: For each class and ampere rating of fuse installed, provide the following quantities of spares for quantity of fuses installed: 1. 0 to 24: Provide 6 spare. I 2. 25 to 48: Provide 9 spare. 3. 49 and Above: Provide 12 spare. B. Circuit Breakers: 1. Provide circuit breakers, specified herein and on Drawings,for installation in panelboards, individual enclosures or combination motor starters. TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16475-2 SEPTEMBER 2004 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 0208.0 I I 2. Provide ground fault interrupter circuit breakers for equipment in damp or wet locations. 3. Provide device on handle to lock breaker in "ON"position for breakers feeding time switches, night lights and similar circuits required to be continuously energized. END OF SECTION I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 0208.0 16475-3 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES I ST CONTACTORSE ECANDIONC O16485NTROL DEVICES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Contactors. 2. Time switches. 3. Photoelectric switch. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16120,Wires and Cables 2. Section 16140,Wiring Devices. I3. Section 16195, Identification. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Follow the procedures specified in Division 1. B. Product Data: Submit product catalog cut sheets for contactors, time switches and photoelectric switches. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Contactors: Asco, Cutler-Hammer/Westinghouse, General Electric, Square D, or approved. B. Electronic Time Switches: Paragon, Sangamo, Tork, or approved. C. Photoelectric Switches: Precision, Paragon, Tork, or approved. 2.02 CONTACTORS A. Lighting: 1. Continuously rated 20 amp per pole for all types of ballast and tungsten lighting and resistance loads, do not derate for use on high-inrush loads. 2. Power Contacts: a. Double break, silver-cadmium-oxide. b. Auxiliary arcing contacts not acceptable. SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16485-1 0208.0 CONTRACTORS AND CONTROL DEVICES 1 c. Convertible Contacts, N.O. or N.C. d. Contact status, N.O.or N.C.,clearly visible. I 3. Approved per UL 508. 4. Design in accordance with NEMA ICS2-211B, rated for application to 600 volt maximum. 5. Electrically Held Contactor Coil: Continuously rated and encapsulated. 6. Mechanically Held Contactor: Encapsulated latch and unlatch coils, coil clearing contacts. B. Enclosures: NEMA enclosure suitable for location and use,flush or surface mount as indicated on Drawings. 2.03 ELECTRONIC TIME SWITCHES I A. Double pole, single throw; one N.O. contact,one N.C. contact. 24-hour digital. Battery power source to provide minimum of 3 years of memory back-up. Eight event setpoints. Provide enclosure with separate hinged door, recessed or surface as indicated on Drawings. 2.04 PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES A. Characteristics: 1. Hermetically sealed light sensitive element installed in diecast weatherproof enclosure. I 2. Adjustable external light level slide. 3. Swivel adjustable enclosure. I B. Electrical Rating: 120VAC, 1800VA, connected for pilot duty unless otherwise indicated. I PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION I A. Contactors: 1. Provide vibration isolation mounting pads for electrically held contactors installed within or on walls which are common to occupied spaces. Isolate terminals and operating mechanisms from enclosure. 2. Install contactors and relays to reduce noise such that it will not create a disturbance or distraction in the areas in which such equipment is located. B. Control Devices: 1. Install time switches and other automatic control devices in accessible locations near the source of power or grouped at a common location in mechanical rooms or similar spaces. I TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16485-2 SEPTEMBER 2004 CONTRACTORS AND CONTROL DEVICES 0208.0 I 2. Install photoelectric control devices at such locations as necessary to be most effective. Avoid locating photoelectric devices in or at locations where they can be influenced by other than natural light or under eaves. Verify location of equipment with Architect. C. Exterior Lighting Control: Control exterior lighting using photoelectric switches to energize contactors controlling lighting circuits. Time clocks used to deenergize lighting at any preset time if desired. END OF SECTION I I p I I I I I I I I I I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 0208.0 16485-3 CONTRACTORS AND CONTROL DEVICES I I 111 I SECTION 16515 INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes interior lighting fixtures, lamps, ballasts, emergency lighting units, and accessories. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 16 Section "Exterior Lighting" for exterior security lighting, roadway and parking lot lighting, poles, and standards. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data describing fixtures, lamps, ballasts, and emergency lighting units. Arrange Product Data for fixtures in order of fixture designation. Include data on features and accessories and the following: 1. 2. Outline drawings indicating dimensions and principal features of fixtures. Electrical Ratings and Photometric Data: Certified results of independent laboratory tests for fixtures and lamps. 3. Batteryand charger data for emergency lighting units. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Component Standard: Provide components that comply with NFPA 70 and that are listed and labeled by UL where available. B. Listing and Labeling: Provide fixtures, emergency lighting units, and accessory components specified in this Section that are listed and labeled for their indicated use and installation conditions on Project. 1. Special Listing and Labeling: Provide fixtures for use in damp or wet locations, and recessed in combustible construction that are specifically listed and labeled for such use. 2. The Terms"Listed"and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100. 3. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A"Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL)as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. C. Coordinate fixtures, mounting hardware, and trim with ceiling system and other items, including work of other trades, required to be mounted on ceiling or in ceiling space. SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY I 0208.0 16515-1 INTERIOR LIGHTING 1 1.05 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner ua concurrenthave er wi with, r otherlsions of warrrant es made bye Contract Documents and shall be the Contractor under in addition requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranty for Batteries: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer agreeing to replace rechargeable system batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. 1. Special Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard but not less than 10 years after date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for last 9 years. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, fixtures that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified in the Fixture Schedule indicated on the Drawings. 2.02 FIXTURES AND FIXTURE COMPONENTS,GENERAL A. Metal Parts: Free from burrs, sharp corners, and edges. B. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, except as indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. C. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free from light leakage under operating conditions, and arranged to permit relamping without use of tools. Arrange doors, 111 frames, lenses, diffusers, and other pieces to prevent accidental falling during relamping and when secured in operating position. D. Reflecting Surfaces: Minimum reflectance as follows, except as otherwise indicated: 1 1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent. 4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent. I I 1 a TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16515-2 SEPTEMBER 2004 INTERIOR LIGHTING 0208.0 I E. Lenses, Diffusers, Covers,ers, and Globes: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic or water white, annealed crystal glass, except as otherwise indicated. I1. Plastic: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. 1 2. Lens Thickness: 0.125 inch (3 mm) minimum; except where greater thickness is indicated. 1 F. Fixture Support Components: Comply with NEC and UBC requirements for Seismic Zone 2 1. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch (12-mm) steel tubing with swivel ball fitting and ceiling Icanopy. Finish same as fixture. 2. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch (12-mm) steel tubes with single canopy arranged to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture. I3. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch- (5-mm-) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod. 1 4. Hook Hanger: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug. IG. Fluorescent Fixtures: Conform to UL 1570. H. Fluorescent Ballasts: Electronic integrated circuit, solid-state, programmed start, full-light-output, energy-efficient type compatible with lamps and lamp combinations to which connected, 20 percent THD. 1. Certification by Electrical Testing Laboratory(ETL). I2. Labeling by Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association (CBM). 3. Type: Class P, high power factor, except as otherwise indicated. 1 4. Sound Rating: "A"rating, except as otherwise indicated. I5. Voltage: Match connected circuits. I. High-Intensity-Discharge(HID) Fixtures: Conform to UL 1572. I J. HID Ballasts: Conform to UL 1029 and ANSI C82.4. Include the following features, except as otherwise indicated. 1. Constant wattage autotransformer (CWA) or regulating high-power-factor type, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Operating Voltage: Match system voltage. 1 3. Single-Lamp Ballasts: Minimum starting temperature of minus 30 deg C. 4. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 40 deg C. I 5. Open circuit operation will not reduce average life. I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16515-3 0208.0 INTERIOR LIGHTING 1 igniter/starter High-Pressure Sodium (HPS) Ballasts: Equip with a solid-state having an average life in pulsing mode of 10,000 hours at an igniter/starter case temperature of 90 deg C. I 7. Encapsulation: Manufacturer's standard epoxy-encapsulated model designed to minimize audible fixture noise. K. Auxiliary, Instant-On, Quartz System: Automatically switches quartz lamp when fixture is initially energized and when momentary power outages occur. Turns quartz lamp off automatically when HID lamp reaches approximately 60 percent light output. I L. Incandescent Fixtures: Conform to UL 1571. M. Emergency Fluorescent Power Supply Unit: Conform to UL 924. 1 1. Internal Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit factory mounted within fixture body. I a. Test Switch and LED Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening fixture or entering ceiling space. b. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type with minimum 10-year III nominal life. c. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type. I d. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when supply circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Relay disconnects lamp and battery and automatically recharges when normal voltage is restored. N. Recessed luminaires installed in rated ceilings and walls. 1. Maintain integrity of rated surface. 2. Luminaire of equal or greater rating or provide equivalent rated enclosure. 1 2.03 LAMPS A. Comply with ANSI C78 series that is applicable to each type of lamp. I B. Fluorescent Color Temperature and Minimum Color-Rendering Index (CRI): 3500 K and 85 CRI, except as otherwise indicated. C. Metal Halide Color Temperature and Minimum Color-Rendering Index (CRI): 3600 K and 70 CRI, except as otherwise indicated. D. Flourescent Lamps: Provide low mercury content linear and compact lamps. I E. Metal Halide: Pulse start where available. 2.04 FINISHES A. Manufacturer's standard, except as otherwise indicated, applied over corrosion-resistant treatment or primer,free of streaks, runs, holidays,stains, blisters, and similar defects. 1 SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16515-4 0208.0 INTERIOR LIGHTING I I PART 3 EXECUTION 111 i: 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Set units plumb, square, and level with ceiling and walls, and secure according to manufacturer's written instructions and approved Shop Drawings. Support fixtures according to requirements of Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." B. Support for Recessed and Semirecessed Grid-Type Fluorescent Fixtures: Units may not be supported from suspended ceiling support system. Install support system rods or wires at a minimum of 2 rods or wires for each fixture, located not more than 6 inches (150 mm)from fixture corners. 1. Install support clips for recessed fixtures, securely fastened to ceiling grid members, at or near each fixture corner. 2. Fixtures Smaller than Ceiling Grid: Install a minimum of 4 rods or wires for each fixture and locate at corner of ceiling grid where fixture is located. Do not support fixtures by ceiling acoustical panels. 3. Fixtures of Sizes Less than Ceiling Grid: Center in acoustical panel or as indicated on reflected ceiling plan. Support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-inch (20-mm) metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees. C. Support for Suspended Fixtures: Brace pendants and rods over 48 inches (1200 mm)long to limit swinging. Support stem-mounted, single-unit, suspended fluorescent fixtures with twin-stem hangers. For continuous rows, use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for suspension for each unit length of chassis, including one at each end. D. Camping: Where specific lamp designations are not indicated, lamp units according to manufacturer's instructions. 3.02 CONNECTIONS A. Ground lighting units. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding connections, according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. i3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replaced damaged fixtures and components. B. Give advance notice of dates and times for field tests. C. Provide instruments to make and record test results. D. Tests: Verify normal operation of each fixture after fixtures have been installed and circuits have been energized with normal power source. Interrupt electrical energy to demonstrate proper operation of emergency lighting installation. Include the following information in tests of emergency lighting equipment: 1. Duration of supply. 2. Low battery voltage shutdown. 3. Normal transfer to battery source and retransfer to normal. SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY i 0208.0 16515-5 INTERIOR LIGHTING 1 I 4. Low supply voltage transfer. s E. Replace or repair malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until all units operate properly. F. Report results of tests. G. Replace fixtures that show evidence of corrosion during Project warranty period. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean fixtures after installation. Use methods and materials recommended by manufacturer. B. Adjust aimable fixtures to provide required light intensities. END OF SECTION 1 I I I 1 1 1 I I 1 a TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16515-6 SEPTEMBER 2004 INTERIOR LIGHTING 0208.0 SECTION 16525 EXTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes exterior lighting fixtures, lamps, ballasts, pole standards, and accessories. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: I1. Division 16 Section "Interior Lighting" for interior fixtures, lamps, ballasts, emergency lighting units, and accessories; also for exterior fixtures normally mounted on buildings. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. rB. Product Data describing fixtures, lamps, ballasts, poles, and accessories. Arrange Product Data for fixtures in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, poles, accessories, finishes, and the following: 1. Outline drawings indicating dimensions and principal features of fixtures and poles. 2. Electrical Ratings and Photometric Data: Certified results of independent laboratory tests for fixtures and lamps. C. Anchor-Bolt Templates: Keyed to specific poles and certified by manufacturer. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Component Standard: Provide components that comply with NFPA 70 and that are listed and labeled by UL where available. B. Comply with ANSI C2. C. Listing and Labeling: Provide fixtures and accessories specified in this Section that are listed and labeled for their indicated use and installation conditions on Project. 1. Special Listing and Labeling: Provide fixtures for use underwater that are specifically listed and labeled for such use. Provide fixtures for use in hazardous (classified) locations that are listed and labeled for the specific hazard. 2. The Terms"Listed"and"Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code,Article 100. 3. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A"Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL)as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16525-1 0208.0 EXTERIOR LIGHTING ilimmmomomm.05 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF POLES I/ A. General: Store poles on decay-resistant treated skids at least 12 inches (300 mm) above grade and vegetation. Support pole to prevent distortion and arrange to provide free air circulation. B. Metal Poles: Retain factory-applied pole wrappings until just before pole installation. For poles with nonmetallic finishes, handle with web fabric straps. 1.06 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by manufacturer and Installer agreeing to replace external parts of lighting fixtures exhibiting a failure of finish as specified below. This warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights and remedies the Owner may have under the Contract Documents. 1. Protection of Metal from Corrosion: Warranty against perforation or erosion of finish due to weathering. 2. Color Retention: Warranty against fading, staining, and chalking due to effects of weather and solar radiation. 3. Special Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,fixtures that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified in the Fixture Schedule indicated on the Drawings. 2.02 FIXTURES AND FIXTURE COMPONENTS,GENERAL A. Metal Parts: Free from burrs, sharp edges, and corners. 1 B. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum, except as otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. I C. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or deform in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed fixtures. D. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free from light leakage under operating conditions, and arranged to permit relamping without use of tools. Arrange doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other pieces to prevent accidental falling during relamping and when secured in operating position. Provide for door removal for cleaning or replacing lens. Arrange for door opening to disconnect ballast. E. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel. I I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16525-2 0208.0 EXTERIOR LIGHTING I F. Reflecting Surfaces: Minimum reflectances as follows, except as otherwise indicated: 1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent. G. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. H. Lenses and Refractors: Materials as indicated. Use heat-and aging-resistant, resilient gaskets to seal and cushion lens and refractor mounting in fixture doors. J. Fluorescent Fixtures: Conform to UL 1570. K. Fluorescent Ballasts: Class P, low-temperature, electromagnetic type, compatible with the lamps and lamp combinations to which connected. 1. Certification by Electrical Testing Laboratory(ETL). 2. Labeling by Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association (CBM). 3. Sound Rating: "A"rating, except as otherwise indicated. 1 4. Voltage: Match connected circuits. L. High-Intensity-Discharge (HID) Fixtures: Conform to UL 1572. M. HID Ballasts: Conform to UL 1029, and ANSI C82.4. Constant wattage autotransformer (CWA) or regulating high-power-factor type, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Ballast Fuses: One in each ungrounded supply conductor. Voltage and current ratings as recommended by ballast manufacturer. 1 2. Operating Voltage: Match system voltage. 3. Single-Lamp Ballasts: Minimum starting temperature of minus 30 deg C. 4. Open circuit operation will not reduce average life. 5. High-Pressure Sodium (HPS) Ballasts: Equip with a solid-state igniter/starter having an average life in pulsing mode of 10,000 hours at an igniter/starter case temperature of 90 deg C. 6. Noise: Uniformly quiet operation,with a noise rating of B or better. N. Incandescent Fixtures: Conform to UL 1571. O. Lamps: Comply with ANSI C78 series that is applicable to each type of lamp. Provide fixtures with indicated lamps of designated type, characteristics, and wattage. Where a lamp is not indicated for a fixture, provide medium wattage lamp recommended by manufacturer. 111I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16525-3 0208.0 EXTERIOR LIGHTING 1 I 2.03 FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS A. Pole-Mounted Fixtures: Conform to AASHTO LTS-3. B. Wind-load strength of total support assembly, including pole, arms, appurtenances, base, and anchorage, is adequate to carry itself plus fixtures indicated at indicated heights above grade without failure, permanent deflection, or whipping in steady winds of 100 mi./h (160 km/h) with a gust factor of 1.3. C. Arm, Bracket, and Tenon Mount Materials: Match poles'finish. D. Mountings, Fastenings, and Appurtenances: Corrosion-resistant items compatible with support components. Use materials that will not cause galvanic action at contact points. Use mountings that correctly position luminaire to provide indicated light distribution. E. Pole Shafts: As noted on Fixture Schedule. F. Pole Bases: Anchor type with galvanized steel hold-down or anchor bolts, leveling nuts, and bolt covers. 2.04 FINISHES A. Metal Parts: Manufacturer's standard finish, except as otherwise indicated, applied over corrosion-resistant primer, free of streaks, runs, holidays, stains, blisters, and similar defects. B. Other Parts: Manufacturer's standard finish, except as otherwise indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION I A. Set units plumb, square, level, and secure according to manufacturer's written instructions and approved Shop Drawings. B. Concrete Foundations: Construct according to Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." 1. Comply with details and manufacturer's recommendations for reinforcing, anchor bolts, nuts, and washers. Verify anchor-bolt templates by comparing with actual pole bases furnished. 2. Finish: Trowel and rub smooth parts exposed to view. C. Pole Installation: Use web fabric slings(not chain or cable)to raise and set poles. D. Fixture Attachment: Fasten to indicated structural supports. E. Fixture Attachment with Adjustable Features or Aiming: Attach fixtures and supports to allow aiming for indicated light distribution. F. Lamp fixtures with indicated lamps according to manufacturer's written instructions. Replace malfunctioning lamps. 3.02 GROUNDING A. Ground fixtures and metal poles according to Division 16 Section "Grounding." 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each installed unit for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components. SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16525-4 0208.0 EXTERIOR LIGHTING I I 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean units after installation. Use methods and materials recommended by manufacturer. B. Adjust aimable fixtures to provide required light intensities. END OF SECTION I I I I I I 1 I I I I I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16525-5 0208.0 EXTERIOR LIGHTING TIO16620 I IDIESEL STANDBYSECPOWENR GENERATOR SYSTEM PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Diesel engine. 1 2. Diesel generator. 3. Generator control panel. 1 4. Remote alarm annunciators. 5. Transfer switch(es). 6. Auxiliary equipment. 7. Weather enclosure 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The engine generator set, in conjunction with the necessary control and accessories, will comprise a complete operating package for installation at local elevation and ambient temperature extremes (average maximum and average-minimum)as recorded by local U.S. Weather Bureau meteorological station. B. Provisions and connection of automatic transfer switches to comply with NFPA-76 requirements. Include control wiring with transfer switch for automatic start/stop control to generator control panel equipment. C. Provide diesel fuel source, unless otherwise noted, including storage, pumps, sensors, piping, venting and other associated equipment. D. Provide exhaust system in compliance with federal, state and local environmental air quality standards. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Follow the procedures specified in Division 1. B. Provide Shop Drawings and Product Data for the Following Equipment: 1 1. Diesel engine. 2. Diesel generator. 1 3. Generator control panel. 4. Remote alarm annunciator including interconnection wiring diagrams. SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16620-1 0208.0 DIESEL STANDBY POWER GENERATOR SYSTEM I 5. Transfer switch(es)including interconnection diagrams between transfer switche(es)and 111 generator controller. 6. Auxiliary equipment. 7. Weather enclosure. C. Include the Following in Shop Drawing Submittals: 1. Plan and elevations of the diesel generator set and weather enclosure offered hereunder and its installation requirements including fuel tanks. I/ 2. Technical literature describing the diesel engine generator set performance including certified engine horsepower curves. 3. Drawings and literature describing auxiliary equipment furnished including mounting detail, exhaust and supply ductwork, and required wall louvers. I 4. Operations and maintenance data. Include standard schematic wiring diagrams, interconnecting wiring diagrams for the entire standby system. D. Provide the following operating and maintenance and instructions from the manufacturer for project closeout, see Project Closeout Requirements in Division 1: 1. Diesel engine. 2. Diesel generator. 3. Generator control panel. 4. Remote alarm annunciators. t 5. Transfer switch. 6. Auxiliary equipment. 7. Weather enclosure. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Generator set the product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of this type of equipment and one that has a local distributor and service organization. Configure the generator for single unit operation. B. Generator supplier is responsible for engine, generator, automatic transfer switches, battery I charger,engine block heater,weather housing, fuel transfer pumps, automatic start/stop control equipment and circuitry,so that there is one source of supply and responsibility. 1 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS 1 A. Generac or prior approved. I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16620-2 0208.0 DIESEL STANDBY POWER GENERATOR SYSTEM I I2.02 RATING IA. atof operatingBasethe raccessoriesingthe includingenginegenerator but not limitedseton tooperation radiatorof, fanthe, airset cleanerswhenequipped, lubricatingwith oil pumpnecessary, fuel transfer pump, fuel injection pump,jacket water pump, governor, charging generator, Ialternating current generator and exciter regulator. B. Provide the engine generator set capable of producing rated voltage and output continuously for Standby power applications at the ambient temperature and altitude conditions. Provide ratings I from the manufacturer's standard published data. Special ratings are not acceptable. Refer to Drawings for output ratings. I2.03 ENGINE A. Diesel: Diesel engine, liquid cooled producing 1.5 HP per KW to operate at 1800 rpm for full electrical output rating. Engine to be mounted to continuous structural steel frame under 1 complete unit. B. Fuel System: 1. Provide the engine with a complete fuel system consisting of fuel pump, fuel filter, injector pump injectors and associatedP9• iP in Provide a subbase tank mounted to structural steel frame. The subbase tank is heavy gauge furnished complete with minimum capacity for 48 hours continious operation under full load. Provide the tank with low fuel sensing device, manual fill, fill cap and flexible connections to engine completely installed. Provide an auxiliary manual fuel priming pump for emergency use. Install fuel I lines from tank to the generator. Subbase tank size is not to exceed generator housing outside diameter or increase generator height by more than 18-inches. 2. Provide flexible fuel supply and return lines. 1 3. Provide the subbase tank as a package system. Manufacturers: Simplex, Tramont, Pryco. IC. Fuel and Lubricants: The engines meet requirements specified herein when operating on diesel fuel conforming to W-F-800, grade DF-1 or DF-2. The engines meet requirements specified herein using lubricating oil conforming to MIL-L-2104, viscosity grade as recommended by engine I manufacturer. D. Lubrication: 1 1. The engine shall have a gear-type lubricating oil pump for supplying oil underressure the main bearings, pistons, piston points, timing gears, camshaft bearings and valve to rocker mechanism. I 2. Provide full flow oil filters, conveniently located for servicing. Equip the filter with a spring loaded bypass valve to ensure oil circulation if filters are clogged. Provide a suitable oil Icooler as recommended by engine manufacturer. 3. Provide an oil drain line extension with manual shutoff valve as part of the engine oil pan. IlE. Air Cleaners: Provide the engine with one or more dry type air cleaners. I SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16620-3 0208.0 DIESEL STANDBY POWER GENERATOR SYSTEM I F. Heaters: 1. The engine liquid cooling ry system is 1 heated teFdn yan n auxiliary u ambient of 2e electric r c liquid heater to ensure a minimum coolant temp F. 2. The engine liquid cooling system heater has an automatic control thermostat and oil pressure disconnect switch. G. Engine Speed Governing System: 1. Provide the engine speed governing system suitable for controlling the speed of the generator set within the requirements specified herein without intermediate adjustment. 2. generator enerator is equipped with American-Bosch or equal electronic governor. 1 H. Batteries and Charger System: 1. Install new lead-acid batteries Group 8D-225A hour minimum having sufficient capacity for cranking the engine for at least 30 seconds at firing speed in the ambient temperatures specified in these Specifications and with capacity for starting the diesel engine a minimum of four times. 2. Provide the batteries complete with intercell connections and mounted in a metal frame or rack of corrosion-resisting metal. 3. Provide the battery charger enclosed (weatherproof if exterior),wall-mounted, constant- voltage, heavy-duty, industrial type designed for operation from 120 volt, 1-phase, 60 Hz, AC power. The charger is suitable for keeping the engine starting batteries in a charged condition during periods when the engine is idle. Rectifier elements are silicon diodes capable of continuous operation at full rated load using convection cooling in ambient I temperatures up to 125°F. The charger automatically adjusts from full rated output to trickle charge and from trickle charge to full rated output, depending on the state of charge of the battery. Provide the charger equipped with a voltmeter,ammeter and AC and DC circuit protection. LaMarche A46 or approved. I 4. Where battery is exposed to outside temperature, provide battery heater. I. Cooling System: I 1. Provide the engine with a cooling system having sufficient capacity for cooling the engine when the generator set is delivering full-rated load in the ambient temperature. Install permanent type antifreeze solution to the coolant for minus 20°F. 2. Equip the engine with an engine driven, centrifugal-type water circulating pump and thermostatic valve to maintain the engine at recommended temperature level. I 3. Equip the engine with a radiator and fan of a type and capacity recommended by engine manufacturer. Provide blower fan. 1 J. Exhaust System: Provide suitable silencer of the critical residential type,with the engine. Use stainless-steel,flexible exhaust pipe from engine exhaust to silencer. Provide exhaust opening rain guard. Support silencer independently of engine and weather enclosure. II TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16620-4 SEPTEMBER 2004 DIESEL STANDBY POWER GENERATOR SYSTEM 0208.0 I I K. Safety Controls: Provide the engine equipped with automatic safety controls which will shut down I the engine in the event of low lubricating oil pressure, high jacket water temperature, low water coolant level, overcrank and engine overspeed, and will make electrical contacts for alarm lights on the control panel. I L. Engine Instruments: The engine mounted instrument panel contains at the minimum, the following gauges or equipment for proper engine surveillance and maintenance: 1. Engine water temperature. 2. Engine oil pressure. I3. Engine running hour meter. 4. Oil temperature gauge. I5. Engine mounted battery charger ammeter or voltmeter. 6. Emergency stop pushbutton. 1 7. Overcrank safety shutdown (red). I8. Overspeed safety shutdown (red). 2.04 GENERATOR 1 A. Rating: 1. The generator is capable of producing rated voltage and output at 0.8 power factor. 1 2. Provide the generator rating applicable for continuous service in standby power application. Maximum voltage dip on full load and power factor is 15 percent. 111 B. Construction: 1. Provide the generator with a revolving field, single bearing type, coupled directly to the I engine flywheel through a flexible driving disc for positive alignment. Provide the rotor dynamically balanced up to 25 percent overspeed. 2. Provide the generator of heavy-duty, compact design. The insulation is Class F or better, as recognized by NEMA MG-1. The generator is equipped with full amortiser windings for paralleling. I 3. The generator field excitation is performed by rotating exciter mounted on the generator rotor shaft through a brushless rotating diode system. 4. Provide the voltage regulator of the static type with silicon diode control, mounted in the generator control panel. Provide a built-in voltage adjusting rheostat with 10 percent voltage adjustment. I 5. Provide generator output circuit breakers (2) integral to generator output terminal enclosure. Breaker sizing indicated on plans, 50 KAIC IER minimum. 6. Provide 12 lead generators. I i SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16620-5 0208.0 DIESEL STANDBY POWER GENERATOR SYSTEM I C. Generator Set Performance: 1. Provide the voltage regulation from no load to rated load within a band of plus or minus 1 percent of rated voltage. The steady state voltage stability remains within a 0.5 percent band of rated voltage. Steady state voltage modulation does not exceed 1 cycle per second. cluding 00 percent f rated p 2. For not excaddition of load up to and 15 percent of atednvoltage.lThevoltage orecoversothe ldoes to and maintains nswithin the steady band in not more than 1.5 seconds. I 3. The frequency regulation from no load to rated load is in accordance with that defined by engine governor performance. For addition of load up to 90 percent of rated load, the frequency recovers to the steady state frequency band within 5 seconds. D. Mounting: 1. Provide the engine and generator equipped with a common steel weldment subbase for mounting the engine generator unit to a concrete base foundation. 2. Provide the engine equipped with spring type vibration isolators between the subbase I and the concrete foundation. Seismic Zone 4 minimum. 2.05 GENERATOR CONTROL PANEL I A. The generator control panel includes both engine and generator instrumentation and is unit mounted on the generator junction box by means of vibration isolators. Generator instrumentation includes voltmeter,ammeter, current transformers, combination ammeter/voltmeter,4 position 3-phase selector switch, dial type frequency meter, panel lights and switch,voltage adjuster and rheostat with plus or minus 5 percent adjustment range, idle/run governor control switch,governor speed adjusting potentiometer, auto-off-manual engine mode selector switch. Provide fault indicating lamps on the panel with a push-to-test switch,to indicate low oil pressure, high water temperature,overspeed and overcrank. Shut down the engine under any of the above conditions and generator is not restarted until the system is manually reset. Provide an engine failure contact that closes on engine shut down. The control panel includes solid-state circuitry for over-cranking protection. Designed to open the cranking circuit after a minimum of three cranking cycles of 30 seconds,crank/15 seconds pause if engine fails to start. I 2.06 REMOTE ALARM ANNUNCIATORS A. Provide remote annunciators, storage battery powered, to operate outside of the generator room at locations detailed on Drawings. The annunciators indicate alarm conditions of the emergency I/ generator on one panel using separate indicator lights as follows: 1. Individual, visual signals indicating: I a. When the generator is operating. I b. When the battery charger is malfunctioning. 2. Individual, visual signals plus a common, audible signal to warn of an engine-generator alarm condition indicates: a. Low lube oil pressure alarm. I RIDER ELEMENTARY 16620-6 TTSD-ALBERTA SEPTEMBER 2004 0208.0 DIESEL STANDBY POWER GENERATOR SYSTEM I b. Low lube oil pressure shutdown. c. High water temperature alarm. d. High water temperature shutdown. e. Overcrank (failure to start). f. Overspeed. g. Lamp test switch (press to test type). Provide alarm silence switch and pilot light. ' h. Oil temperature. i. Low water coolant level alarm. 1 j. Low fuel level(20%of full)alarm. B. Provide alarm horn, alarm silence switch and lamp test switch integral to annunciator. C. Provide flush wall mount annunciator. Mount annunciator in location indicated onlan . p s 2.07 TRANSFER SWITCH A. Provide transfer switch, 3-pole, rated 600 volt, contactor type unit of amperage detailed. The transfer switch is suitable for use on types of loads without derating, either open or enclosed. Accessories and equipment are front accessible for ease of maintenance or removal. B. Switch is inherently double throw and mechanically interlocked to ensure only one of two power positions, normal or emergency. C. Accessories: Equip each switch with the following accessories and controls: 1 1. Time delay engine start(1/2-30 seconds) 2. Time delay, normal to emergency(1 -60 seconds) 1 3. Time delay, emergency to normal (0.2-30 minutes)with 5 minutes unloaded. Running for engine cool down cycle 4. Time Delay Neutral Switch (switch rests in open position prior to switch operation)(0-10 seconds). 5. Test switch to simulate normal power failure 6. Engine starting contact. 1 7. Two pilot lights to indicate transfer switch position. 8. Two sets of normally open and normally closed contacts 9. Provide voltage sensors to monitor ungrounded lines of the normal source of power Manual bypass equipment, a manual operator capable of transferring power source ' utilizing the contacts in the switch. Provide written instructions fastened to structure in a plastic diffuser frame for operation of switch in manual mode and test. SEPTEMBER 2004 TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16620-7 0208.0 DIESEL STANDBY POWER GENERATOR SYSTEM I 10. Lugs: Compression type, set screw lugs are not acceptable. 11. NEMA 1 enclosure. I D. Configure switch to automatically exercise generator as directed by Owner. E. Provide required control wiring and heater wiring between generator and transfer switch location. 1 2.08 WEATHER ENCLOSURE A. Outdoor Weather-Protective Housing: Factory-assembled to generator set base and radiator cowling. Provide ample airflow for generator set operation. Provide hinged side-access doors and rear control door. Provide lockable doors. Standard color sheet metal. B. Doors give full access to engine, generator control and termination area. Doors have padlock provisions,with integral braces for locking full open during servicing. C. Provide louvered (rainproof)operation with doors locked closed and engine fully operational at maximum ambient temperature. D. Steel is 16 gauge minimum for panels. E. Anchor provisions to secure enclosure to concrete pad are integral to enclosure structure. Space I for water drainage under enclosure wall/door panel areas is designed into enclosures. F. Provide mounting brackets for the following: 1. Battery charge mounting (120 volt). 2. Fluorescent interior lighting (similar to Kenai! 7100 Series). 3. Light switch and servicing receptacle (weatherproof F.S. Series box). 1ii 4. Disconnect switches for heaters. 1 5. Mounting for contactors, relays and generator stator winding heater. 6. Silencer and exhaust flange. PART 3 -EXECUTION i 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Engine-generator unit,coordinate with generator concrete slab pour(or mounting foundation), mounting requirements to eliminate vibration movement, per manufacturer's specifications. B. Provide wiring within transfer switches in accordance to NFPA-76A and NEC requirements. 1 C. Install and connect the automatic transfer switches components of essential electrical system so that within 10 seconds of a power supply drop in the Utility Company's normal service,the generator starts and automatically transfer loads to the generator source. 111 D. Installation is in accordance with local, state and federal codes. Verify code requirements as associated with engine generator,transfer switch,fuel storage and transfer prior to installation. I TTSD-ALBERTA RIDER ELEMENTARY 16620-8 SEPTEMBER 2004 0208.0 DIESEL STANDBY POWER GENERATOR SYSTEM I SECTIONFOUR Design Recommendations 4.3.1 Retaining Wall Design Parameters Lateral soil pressures on a retaining wall depend on several factors including retained soil type, wall fixity, drainage provisions and the influence of surface loads imposed behind the wall. We have provided typical design parameters for wall types that we believe represent the range of retaining wall systems that are likely to be constructed at this site. Our recommendations are based on the following assumptions: �■ • Retaining walls will be designed to restrain both existing g soils and constructed fills. • Retaining walls will be backfilled with free draining crushed rock, in accordance with Section 4.3.4 of this report. • Adequate subsurface drainage will be provided. • Walls will be 12 feet high or less. 111 4.3.2 Equivalent Fluid Densities Unrestrained walls have no fixity at the top and are free to rotate about their base through tilting or translation. Most cantilever retaining walls fall into this category (unless they are attached to buildings or other structures). A lateral movement of 0.005 times the height of the retaining wall may be required to achieve this active pressure. For these walls, we recommend that a lateral equivalent fluid density of 35 pcf be used for design. Restrained walls are rigid structures where essentially no relative movement occurs between the structure and the soil. Most basement walls and other rigid walls that are restrained by buildings, parking decks, floor slabs or other perpendicular walls fall into the category of restrained walls. For restrained walls, we recommend that a lateral equivalent fluid density of 40 pcf be used for design. 4.3.3 Additional Lateral Pressures Additional lateral support will be provided by passive resistance of soil compacted adjacent to the sides of the wall foundations. For design purposes, an allowable equivalent fluid density of 250 pcf may be used to estimate the passive resistance. See Section 4.2.1 for additional information regarding construction requirements to realize this passive earth pressure. If cohesive soils are used as backfill, hydrostatic pressures or surcharge effects from surface loads exist, the equivalent fluid density will be significantly higher and URS should be contacted for additional design information. I 1 I 0:125695391 ITS°Alberta RidenTTSD Report Final.doe118-MAY-04 4_3 SECTIONFOUR Design Recommendations 4.3.4 Retaining Wall Backfill I Backfill within 3 feet of retaining walls should consist of free draining crushed rock, free of organics and debris. This material should meet the requirements of the 2002 Oregon Department of Transportation (ODOT) Standard Specifications for Construction for "Granular Wall Backfill", Section 00510.12. Backfill beyond 3 feet from the wall should meet requirements described in Section 4.4.5. We recommend that all fill be compacted to 95% of the maximum dry density as determined by the Modified Proctor test (ASTM D1557). Additionally, we recommend that any backfill that is placed within 5 feet of the wall (measured horizontally) be compacted with lightweight, hand operated compaction equipment. Over-compaction of this fill can increase wall pressures. We recommend the placement of a 4-inch diameter slotted PVC pipe wrapped in non-woven geotextile fabric at the base of the wall backfill to facilitate drainage of this area. This is typically as shown in Figure 3. 4.4 SITE PREPARATION 1 4.4.1 General Prior to construction of any new foundations, all areas that will receive fill, base rock, or structures should be stripped of all surface vegetation, organic topsoil and any deleterious materials that might be encountered. Any soft or unsuitable soils encountered during stripping or excavation should be removed and replaced with compacted structural fill meeting the requirements described in Section 4.4.5. • 4.4.2 Dry Weather Earthwork After areas are stripped or excavated to design elevations, we recommend scarification of the resulting subgrade in all areas that will receive fill or structures to a depth of 8 inches. The scarified soil should be brought to 2% above optimum moisture content, and compacted to at least 95 percent of its maximum dry density as determined by the standard proctor test, ASTM D698. I 4.4.3 Wet Weather Earthwork We anticipate that the native clay found at the site will be susceptible to erosion. Therefore, r during or after wet weather, it may be necessary to import granular materials for structural fill or to protect open subgrade materials. It may also be necessary to install a granular working pad to support construction equipment. Delays in site earthwork activities should be anticipated during periods of heavy rainfall. Additionally, site clearing and stripping activities may expose subgrade material that may be damaged if subjected to disturbance from construction traffic. During wet weather, we recommend that site stripping and excavation be performed using an excavator with a straight-edged bucket that does not traverse the final subgrade. URS 1 0:125695391 TTSD Alberta Rid:ATTSO Report Final.docc1&MAY.04 4-4 1 111 SECTIONFOUR Design Recommendations When a granular working base is used to protect open subgrade material and construction $ equipment, the base should consist of a suitable thickness of crushed rock or ballast placed by end-dumping off an advancing pad of rock fill. Areas that contain native alluvium materials are moisture sensitive, and it may be necessary to place a geotextile fabric beneath the working Iblanket to prevent the intrusion of fines into the rock. Because construction practices can greatly affect the amount of rock required, we recommend that if conditions require the installation of a granular working blanket, the design, installation and maintenance be made the responsibility of the contractor. After installation, the working blanket should be compacted with a minimum of four passes with a smooth-drum roller. 4.4.4 Rock Rippability Rock may be encountered during foundation excavation depending upon the final design and layout of the new school. Site exploration indicated that the depth to weathered bedrock varies from 8 to 16 feet below existing grades. The upper 10 feet of this rock(18-26 feet bgs) is highly weathered and highly fractured. Excavation of the upper portions of this weathered rock (2 to.9 I feet) was performed with a Case 9030B excavator and a general purpose bucket. Refusal was typically encountered at about 15 to 20 feet below ground, close to the maximum reach of the Iexcavator. We recommend the use of heavy excavation equipment outfitted with rock buckets.to excavate the weathered rock. We do not anticipate the need for blasting or pneumatic breakers to achieve foundation grades. 4.4.5 Structural Fill 1 We recommend that all fills intended to support structures be PP placed in horizontal lifts not exceeding about 8 inches in loose thickness and be compacted to at least 95 percent of the 0 maximum dry density as determined by the Modified Proctor method (ASTM D1557), unless where specified above. II Imported structural fill should be clean, well-graded granular material, free of organics and debris and meeting the requirements of the 2002 ODOT Standard Specifications for Construction for "Granular Structural Backfill", Section 00510.13. The procedure to achieve proper density of a I compacted fill depends on the size and type of compacting equipment, the number of passes, thickness of the layer being compacted, and certain soil properties. When the size of the excavation restricts the use of heavy equipment, smaller equipment can be used, and the soil I must be placed in lifts thin enough to achieve the required compaction. We recommend that methods of compaction be left to the discretion of the contractor, with compaction testing provided by URS. IWe do not recommend the use of on-site soils for structural fill. This material may be used for miscellaneous fill and landscaping applications around the site provided these areas are not intended to support structures. On-site soils should be compacted to at least 95% of the 1 maximum dry density as determined by the standard proctor test,ASTM D698. 1 URS 4-5 0:125695391 TTSD Alberta RideATTSD Report Final.dotll&MAY-04 SECTIONFOUR Design Recommendations 4.5 SLOPES I Depending on the Contractor's proposed excavation and shoring plan, temporary cut slopes may be required during construction. Cut slope inclinations must be made in accordance with regulations established by the Oregon Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OR- OSHA). In accordance with OR-OSHA, the clay soils in the upper 15 feet of the site are classified as Type B. The maximum allowable slopes for excavation less than 20 feet deep in Type B soils is 1H:1V (Horizontal:Vertical). Flatter slopes will be required if water or seepage is present. I Significant slope work is not anticipated at this site. Allowable finished slopes will depend upon the type of fill material that is being used, or the location of any cut slopes. For planning purposes we recommend that any finished cut or fill slopes less than 8 feet high be designed no steeper than 2H:1 V. On-site fill used to construct slopes or embankments at the site should be compacted per Section 4.5.2. All permanent slopes will require erosion protection. Erosion protection should follow procedures described in the Tigard Community Development Code Chapter 18.745, "Landscaping and Screening". 4.6 TEMPORARY SHORING URS does not anticipate the need for temporary shoring for the recommended overexcavation activities. Should shoring be necessary for other parts of the project not described in this report, the Contractor must submit a shoring and excavation plan to the Owner and URS at least 2 weeks before the start of excavation. The plan should show the design of shoring, bracing, sloping, or other provisions to be made for worker protection from the hazard of caving ground and for any trench or excavation over four feet in depth. The shoring and excavation plan must be prepared and stamped by a civil engineer registered in the State of Oregon. A uniform lateral pressure of • 20 multiplied by the wall height (in pounds per square feet) is appropriate for temporary shoring design. Figure 4 illustrates the pressure distribution on the temporary shoring. 4.7 SEISMIC DESIGN The site lies within Seismic Zone 3 as defined by the 1998 version of the OSSC. Based on the soils encountered during the exploration program, OSSC Soil Type Sc (very dense soil and soft rock) represents the closest approximation to the site conditions and is recommended for use in design. The seismic response coefficients that corresponds with Z=0.3 and Sc are Ca= 0.33 and C,,=0.45 and were obtained from tables 16-Q and 16-R of the UBC,respectively. 4.8 CORROSION 1111111:1 The corrosion potential of site soils was measured by performing field resistivity tests and laboratory tests for pH, sulfate and chloride content of the samples collected from the site. The four field resistivity test lines are shown on Figure 2. The results of these tests are shown in, Table 1. The results of the laboratory tests are shown in Table 2. URS0:125695391 TTSO Alberta RideATTSD Report Final docile-MAY-04 4-6 I ill SECTIONFOUR Design Recommendations TABLE 1: MEASURED RESISTIVITY(ohm-cm) IT t . - Electrode Spacing es Line 5 _ 10 . 20 R1R2 28,400 55,500 155,000 34,500 66,500 143,000 R3 34,300 65,100 132,000 I R4 33,400 62,400 140,000 iTABLE 2: LABORATORY CORROSION TESTS Test Pit 'Depth(ft) Sulfate Chloride P : :pH . TP-3 9 5.4 7.18 0.611 TP-6 4 5.4 5.29 0.585 ITP-12 7 5.7 5.56 _ 0.629 The results of these tests indicate that the soils are moderately to mildly corrosive to carbon steel. The risk of sulfate attack on concrete is negligible. 1 4.9 PAVEMENT RECOMMENDATIONS We anticipate that vehicle traffic will consist of automobiles, buses, and trucks. Estimated traffic loads were provided to URS by Ellis Eslick Associates Architects. Additional vehicle loads were I estimated for deliveries to the school. Heavy duty pavements are considered to be bus lanes and the entrance road. Light duty pavement is considered for parking areas. III TABLE 3: ASSUMED TRAFFIC LOADING iVehicle Type ` Heavy Duty ''..Light Duty Automobiles 670 vehicles/day 100 vehicles/week day Buses 10 vehicles/day 1 vehicle/week day 1 Heavy Trucks 2 vehicles/week day 1 vehicle/week day Semi-Trucks 1 vehicle/week day 1 vehicle/week day IEach vehicle will constitute a pass singleover the pavement. Following the AASHTO (1986) procedure, this traffic volume will produce about 310,000 rigid pavement and 285,000 flexible 1 pavement 18 kip equivalent axle loads (EALs) for the bus lanes and 50,000 flexible pavement EALs for the parking areas over the design life of 20 years. This is based on an initial serviceability index of 4.2 and a terminal serviceability index of 2.0. 1 I I URS O:t256953g1 TTSD Alberta RiderVTTSD Report Final.doeNB-MAY-04 4-7 I SECTIONFOUR Using the traffic loads described above and a resilient subgrade modulus Design of 6,000 psi (basedRecommendations on dynamic cone penetration tests), the pavement recommendations shown in Table 4 are recommended. A flexible and rigid heavy duty pavement section were developed. Flexible pavement may be used for the entry driveway to the school. Rigid pavement should be used in the proposed bus circle as the tight radius curves may cause shoving and bleeding to the flexible asphaltic concrete pavement. Table 4: RECOMMENDED PAVEMENT SECTIONS* Section 1 —Heavy Duty(Rigid) 4 in.Portland d Cement Concrete;over 1 10 in. Aggregate Base; over Woven Separation Geotextile; over 8 in. Compacted Subgrade Section 2—Heavy Duty(Flexible) 4 in. Level 2 HMAC; over 8 in.Aggregate Base; over 111 Woven Separation Geotextile; over 8 in. Compacted Subgrade Section 3—Light Duty(Flexible) 3 in.Level 2 HMAC; over I 6 in.Aggregate Base; over Woven Separation Geotextile; over 8 in. Compacted Subgrade *A11 materials should meet the 2002 ODOT Standard Specifications for Construction. Areas that are to receive pavement should be stripped and prepared in accordance with the 1 recommendations in Section 4.4. Stabilizing the subgrade with a woven geotextile separation fabric (meeting the requirements of AASHTO M288-96 Class 2)will maintain segregation of the subgrade soil and aggregate base. If the subgrade soils are allowed to migrate upward into the base course, the result would be decreased pavement support. The aggregate base should conform to the requirements in the 2002 ODOT Standard Specifications for Construction Section 2630 for 1-1/2-in minus material. Aggregate base should be compacted to 95% of the maximum I dry density as determined by the modified proctor test(ASTM D1557). We recommend that the hot mix asphaltic concrete and Portland cement concrete conforming to the 2002 ODOT Standard Specifications for Construction be used for all pavements. Minimizing subgrade saturation is an important factor in maintaining subgrade strength. Water allowed to pond on or adjacent to pavements could saturate the subgrade and cause premature pavement deterioration. To avoid this, the pavement should be sloped to provide rapid surface drainage, and positive surface drainage should be maintained away from the edge of the paved areas. Design alternatives that could reduce the risk of subgrade saturation and improve long- term pavement performance include crowning the pavement subgrade to drain toward the edges, rather than to the center of the pavement areas; and installing surface drains next to any areas where surface water could pond. Properly design and constructed subsurface drainage will II reduce the time subgrade soils are saturated and improve subgrade strength and performance. I 1URS4-8 0:25695397 TTSD Alberta RideATrSD Report Final.doc116-MAY-04 SECTIONFOUR Design Recommendations mendations 4.10 ATHLETIC FIELD RECOMMEDATIONS The native soil below the proposed.play fields is entirely composed of clay. This material is estimated to have an infiltration rate of about 0.05 inches/hour l Conservation Service, 1986). We recommend the placement of a drainage fill below the play lfield surface due to the poor drainage characteristics of the native soils at the site. Drainage fill should consist of free- draining sand or gravel with less than 5% passing the No. 200 sieve. The subsurface drainage system should be designed with a conveyance scheme to remove water that collects at the interface between the drainage fill and the native clay soils. Construction of the new play fields should be performed in accordance with the recommendations presented in Section 4.4. URS recommends that construction take place during the dry season to aid in the prevention of contamination of the drainage fill with fines from the underlying clay. Drainage fill should be placed in horizontal lifts no greater than 10 inches in thickness and compacted to a minimum of 92% of the maximum dry density as determined from the Modified Proctor test(ASTM D1557). For play field surfaces designed and constructed as specified in Section 4.4,we estimate settlements will be negligible. 1 111 URS 1 p I I I I I 0125695391 TTSD Alberta Rider1TTSD Report Final.doc118.MAY-04 4-9 I 111 SECTIONFIVE Sensitive Site Status Tigard Community Development Code Section 18.775 defines "sensitive" sites that may be unsuitable for development. Included in the definition of sensitive sites are locations where existing slopes exceed 25%. Existing slopes at the site approach 25% at the northwest edge of the site, but no new facilities are planned in this area. Slopes in the area of the new structure are generally less than 10%. Further, the proposed site plan meets the acceptance criteria for sites built in areas with slopes greater than 25%, outlined in Section Tigard Community Development Code Chapter 18.775.070.C. These criteria are as follows (description of the site compliance is provided in italics): 1. The extent and nature of the proposed land form alteration or development will not create site disturbances to an extent greater than that required for the use; - The proposed school and appurtenant facilities will disturb only their immediate footprints. These disturbances will not affect the stability of the site. 2. The proposed land form alteration or development will not result in erosion, stream sedimentation, ground instability, or other adverse on-site and off-site effects or hazards to life or property; - Proper restoration of the site will ensure no erosion and stream sedimentation will occur. Structures constructed per the recommendations in the report will not adversely affect , 111 ground stability. 3. The structures are appropriately sited .and designed to ensure structural stability and proper drainage of foundation and crawl space areas for development with any of the following soil conditions: wet/high water table; high shrink-swell capability; compressible/organic; and shallow depth-to-bedrock; and - Structures designed and constructed with the parameters and recommendations described in this report will be stable and provide adequate drainage. Refer to Sections 4.2 through 4.5. 4. Where natural vegetation has been removed due to land form alteration or development, the areas not covered by structures or impervious surfaces will be replanted to prevent erosion in accordance with Chapter 18.745,Landscaping and Screening. - Project specifications must contain a section regarding site restoration insuring the finished site meets the requirements of Chapter 18.745. I t 1 1 URS 0:125695391 TTSD Alberta RideATTSD Report Final.doc11&MAY.04 5-1 _ii 11 SECTIONSIX construction Monitoring J We recommend that URS be retained to provide construction monitoring and testing services during earthwork activities and foundation construction. The purpose of our field monitoring services is to confirm that site conditions are as anticipated, to provide field recommendations as Irequired based on conditions encountered, and to document the activities of the contractor to assess compliance with the project recommendations provided by URS. I I I I I 1 0 0 I I I . •I 1 URS 0:125695391 TTSD Alberta RiderlTTSD Report Final.doell&MAY-04 6-1 SECTIONSEVEN Closure The analyses, conclusions and design recommendations presented in this report are based on site conditions as they existed at the time of our field exploration, and further assume that the conditions encountered are representative of subsurface conditions within the study area. If conditions different from those described in this report are encountered or appear to be present beneath excavations, URS should be advised at once so that additional recommendations may be provided where necessary. This report was prepared for the exclusive use of the ool District and its agents and consultants. It should be made available to prospective ucontactoalatin rss for information on factual data only and not as a warranty of subsurface conditions similar to those interpreted from the borehole logs or discussions presented in this report. 111 1 $` 1 I 1 I URS I I 0:125695391 TESD Alberta Rider1TTS0 Report Final.doe118-MAY-04 7-1 I • SECTIONEIGHT References American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials, 1986. AASHTO 111 Guide for Pavement Structures,AASHTO, Washington D.C. Deere,D.U., and Deere,D.W., 1989. The Rock Quality Designation(RQD)in Practice, in Rock I Classifications Systems for Engineering Purposes. Ed. Louis Kirkaldie, ASTM STP 984, Philadelphia: American Society for Testing and Materials,pp. 91-101. I Madin, I.P. (1990). Earthquake Hazard Geology Maps of the Portland Metropolitan Area, Oregon. Oregon Department of Geology and Mineral Industries (DOGAMI), Open-File Report 0-90-2. 4 Oregon Department of Transportation, 2002. Oregon Standard Specifications for Construction, Salem, Oregon. I Orr, E.L., Orr, W.N. and Baldwin, E.M., 1992. Geology of Oregon, Fourth Edition, Kendall/Hunt Publishing Company, Dubuque,Iowa. U.S. Soil Conservation Service, 1986. Technical Release 55: Urban Hydrology for Small 4 Watersheds, U.S. Department of Agriculture. Unruh, J.R., Wong, I.G., Bott, J.D.J., Silva, W.J., and Lettis, W.R., 1994. Seismotectonic I Evaluation: Scoggins Dam, Tualatin Project, Northwestern Oregon; William Lettis & Associates and Woodward-Clyde Federal Services, unpublished final report prepared for the U.S. Bureau of Reclamation, Denver, CO. Wells, R.E., Weaver, C.S., and Blakely, R.J., 1998. Forearc Migration in Cascadia and its Neotectonic Significance: Geology, v. 26,p. 759-762. I Winterkorn, H.F., and Fang, H-Y., 1975. Foundation Engineering Handbook, Van Nostrand Reinhold Company,N.Y.,N.Y. I 1 I I I I I 1 ults 0:125695391 TTSD Alberta RidenTTSD Report Final.doc11$-MAY-04 8-1 4',.. . ,.• 21 - ,,..- '''.'\I ',... va,'••• 4::,„_•:4•1",...,, -4/A,\'',.X. '..., .' '''V,:13-;: l.4'.?A'ii.,,./,:x- \-1‘1,..'.N.1, 'L.:::,j:,.- -•"-.1. ?/...,'•i..ii\% '1 \0.1 < 1 i 1 tl� �' ?• /:NY '~ •�• • �� .1 . •� �" �( '�t 'L r 1 SII• Z C 24 LT. ° , • I '•'1� 1 •�' Jr --,,,--•---:::::-.4.:` •••••.5.1,, .-c••••-•.:-.-....-1 .'"?.,-----:;";',..--'. '�•. \, r* \ '• - i - •_11 \,1� 1 \ a N �.' . • J .�'\- aal:•••-\ r`.: \ ♦° _ 1 1 ' H-2.\\•1 t` ,�.', ...1.-•.'','„:;,. 1 1 .4. d. 11 1 •, kg • J . • '\,.t�I .1.1 '-. l �r' i •. .\•�';, .,•,.`.• F ''''''''..----:- ...,.•-` _ - .� 1p �.L.r••. •. ."•!, 1 � y! J\J' • ,�/ .1 /1 1.14.4) •\\\��♦. .`'\. \. •••.:,c;,....--:•,_.•. . ` -`L"r:::.q... r �•. ° •N1fJ•j. •i• :• :I\ 0 - lir'i ) } \\ ` \\ir r. 1� •v, • M 2 .y • r Y. •'- -_.�:•'it- �� -. r rA\\ \\ \\• \`j /s. tom • , •, ./...\. ' `` r,l •, .•1'� t\ • 1 t, • 1 .• • '. 111 ~ � :1 ! 4611 �r ., •ili \t14 1, ;t �,'{ • .,1 . 4 ••\` v\•1 �~ C--- � yi i /// 1, SII Ji L • .• :� ,���•'�\. r:�l 1 �\ •\.-7, . , . ( ._'1 . \\\� • ` r ,'•a\ ::'.:: :' ,"• •! L'\ ..•_ ♦:c —. t. `.• !!1'74Z,`• :•-''•'-'. `4 O ti'\:;• "l.._' •>C i N to to• \ 1 :-- ) t•`1`c /,•▪••- • 04 (1;:::';`::::)•' •M/•"•\..........."r + �` .\ t I 114 ..\ ` \ .\�,•;.-� N AV i �. / • \z •�\: r • y'1' 1�) ''Sl����1..�� .I i �,I ' 1` •1 \`\\ ��p�'1O1t4 ��.~ 1-,\ , �:'•/��.; +-- a • Y ; (itati )•% \\\ 1\•1'44 46 i � } ^ { \t 1 i •••_..;• 5'4' p. c',./V;..,,%: t• ' a`l °..i ..'1;r. .. "'''''.\\ gi,\`4 ' Iqv,//i•./' ���'`I , / 1 I r 01 '� 4`• "2:',j :.'''''.•-'••-:-'4. 7. (r/^ ,11•I I1 . t .411I'�I t,r.- ---''/ /� .,./ //' ;• \ R''1 '34 ' 2•pt IM \,..1r. ° . /J. • - '.., 1 ,-,? t r:; ;• , ,1•ii•!'les ''',•-!•-•:•-,"- \4 �a ,.. \;•,..\ \5�•\ ,ft\\ 31'^ "1•, ' I 1\c /�„ ''r.I' /• 'mac�. - ,/ 1�. 1',r 01 (• "Il...\ I,',.•. 4' ••'x'11 "1•i .J '``. I \ �,r, t111►�„•!1 4 •' ° /''f,,• nM1• -• ! `rte (l . 1 I 1 �\ r't 1 I ' ;l1p,l t' , 1\ 1 \:, '�) t y,....1-1; �,'f I`ff ' I l f' li t , ” 1 �`��{.c i , • 4 _ �- -r'• iY ':"14°••41•I'40.-•' �tt ` r, :. •c-_ . _ _ \ Srr' \1f\ I% • Ili \, (I11• y0 /,4t iy'•4 \. \C" i 00 i Ill\`�(1\`..\ �`•-•'• e� I1 N •' •i \\ ; ‘ 1 ` 'y.•}' .,� •: � - % J ;';'''•41.•� t • \!�\\'4 ;. �//,,,:,L4_____.....„. `_���.\ ,'•a. . , I '.it-i • .�11 ;.,. ll ♦�r ( ..=-.ir,La /l`t ,,. i . .•' :111 --r '`, /) I / �• , ' 4 �, ( �. c•a. ;,••••.•:::-.:-.•-• ....„4"/„.V. tSWr 1 4tiok 1''40 11;1 ` p 1i'' I IN t'•�,,a y �1 :: • - . 1 Hl r 1 t %: 1 .r O r •' iA .a •1 1 ••:9---,..,.•_-... '� •a,• 1....', ` k • ,_.5..,,,... •V -----, Alir / / II a' • MOS PIM MN Mit ail Amik ini 1111i loot 4.10 sma el ilip via mii wow'-Hot hl•M4 MYl-3100A g‘MY now 4LL{Itemavo _ 3, GRANULAR WALL BACKFILL I [..... (SEE NOTE 2) °o°0 ' \7///X\ " 0 0 0000 0 °00 0 0 o 0 o 0 -STRUCTURAL FILL- ;00000 (SEE NOTE4) 0000 CONSTRUCTION °o°o°1 CUT SLOPEIH:1V 0 0 - X00001 0°0 3 °0°°, 1°o°o 1 10000 1 1 0 ° °0 0 0 °000 VAPOR BARRIER ;0x000 0 0 .- °o°o FLOOR SLAB °o°o CLAY ., ' , - o00 GRANULAR BACKFILL(SEE NOTE 3) ° >0001 o Y//,,v' v/CAU'." 1 FOOTING 0o, CLAY OR WEATHERED BASALT 4'PERFORATED PIPE WRAPPED IN FILTER FABRIC (SEE NOTE 1) NOTES: 1. FILTER FABRIC TO BE NON-WOVEN GEOTEXTILE SUCH AS LINQ 40EX,MIRAFI 140N,OR EQUIVALENT. I2. GRANULAR WALLBACKFILL TO MEET REQUIREMENTS OF THE 2002 ODOT STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION,SECTION 00510.12. GRANULAR BACKFILL SHOULD BE PLACED WITHIN 3 FEET OF THE WALL. 3. GRANULAR FILL TO CONSIST OF CLEAN,WELL-GRADED,3/4'MINUS DIAMETER CRUSHED ROCK AND SAND CONTAINING LESS THAN 5 PERCENT PASSING THE NO.200 US STANDARD SIEVE. 4. STRUCTURAL FILL TO MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE 2002 ODOT STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION,SECTION 00510.13. E k i STANDARD SLAB&WALL DRAINAGE DETAIL b. . um TTSD Alberta Rider Elementary School May 2004 Geotechnical Investigation 25695391 Tigard,Oregon FIGURE 3 . e • EXISTING GROUND SURFACE I \<-/ STRUT O H RAKER • 1 C BASE OF EXCAVATION 20(H+h) I LATERAL PRESSURES ON TEMPORARY SHORING FOR SIZING STRUTS OR RAKERS 111 NOTES: 1. "H'AND'h'ARE IN FEET. I 2. LATERAL PRESSURE 20(H+h)IS IN POUNDS PER SQUARE FOOT AND IS DISTRIBUTED OVER H. 3. h=EQUIVALENT SOIL DEPTH TO ACCOUNT FOR CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL STORAGE.(SOIL DENSITY IS ASSUMED TO BE 120 PCF.) 4. USE SIMPLE AREA DISTRIBUTION OF LATERAL PRESSURE DIAGRAM TO DETERMINE STRUT/RAKER DESIGN LOADS. 5. DIAGRAM ASSUMES THAT WATER TABLE IS BELOW THE BASE OF THE EXCAVATION. I =i 1 STRUT/RAKER LOADS I TTSD Alberta Rider Elementary School May 2004 Geotechnical Investigation URS25695391 Tigard,Oregon FIGURE 4 I APPENDIX A subs Exploration Exploration Logs I II I I I I a I I I I I I I I 0:125695391 TTSD Alberta RideATTSD Report Final.doeit841AY-04 1 iProject: TTSD Alberta Rider Elementary School Project Location: Tigard,Oregon Key to Log of Boring Project Number: 25695391.10001 ISAMPLES c o o� m a� 0 a) rd -0 am y > s CO,,, MATERIAL DESCRIPTION a w,a p m o. o o— -go) vcy REMARKS AND �I - C9 .iy 1.5.64) 8'o OTHER TESTS co O dN a raou a © u ® o la 10 El 12 COLUMN DESCRIPTIONS ElElevation: Elevation in feet referenced to (MSL)or site datum. mean sea level Lltholo Lo : Unified Soil Classification Code(USCS)for Depth:, Depth in feet below the ground surface. correspon rng lithologic unft. I f1] Sam le T e: Type of soil sample collected at depth interval Material Descrition: Description of material encountered; may include co or,moisture,grain size,and density/consistency. ® s own;same er symbols are explained below. 10 Water Content: Water content of soil sample measured in Sample Number Sample identification number. a oratory,expressed as percentage of dry weight of specimen. Sampling Resistance: Number of blows required to advance 11 Percent Passin #200 SievePercentage of sample passing the El driven sampler 12 inches beyond first 6-inch drive interval,or #200 sieve by weight. distance noted,using a 140-lb hammer with a 30-inch drop; 12 Remarks and Other Tests: Comments and observations © hydraulic down-pressure for tube sampler. regarding drilling or sampling made by driller or field personnel. Rec_ o_ veru: Percentage of driven or pushed sample length abbbrereviaiatand laboratory test results,using the following 111 recovered;"NA"indicates data not recorded. abtions: 1:: Gra hic Lo : Graphic depiction of subsurface material encountered;typical symbols are explained below. 1 TYPICAL MATERIAL GRAPHIC SYMBOLS I Lean Clay (. ." " : Basalt1 I TYPICAL SAMPLER GRAPHIC SYMBOLS OTHER GRAPHIC SYMBOLS mo4 Dames&Moore Type U to Wireline Coring 1 1 d 0 r m 0 N Soil classifications are based on the Unified Soil Classification System.Descriptions and stratum lines are interpretive;field descriptions may have been modified to i> reflect lab test results. Descriptions on these logs apply only at the specific boring YU locations and at the time the borings were advanced;they are not warranted to be `p representative of subsurface conditions at other locations or times. o1 a 0 i Project TTSD School Key Rider Elementary to Log of Boring Project Location: Tigard,Oregon Project Number: 25695391.10001111 KEY TO DESCRIPTIVE TERMS USED ON CORE LOGS DISCONTINUITY DESCRIPTORS 0 D• ip of discontinuity,measured relative to a plane normal to the core axis. 0 D• iscontinuity Tvpe: D Amount of Infilling: F - Fault Su - Surface Stain Sp - Spotty J - Shearet Pa - Partially Filled Fo• - FI - Filled Vo - VeiFoln No - None - Vein B - Bedding ac Aperture(inches : 0 Surface Shape of Joint: W - Wide (0.5-2.0) PI - Planar MW - Moderately Wide (0.1-0.5) Wa - Wavy N - Narrow (0.05-0.1) St - Stepped VN - Very Narrow (<0.05) Ir - Irregular T - Tight (0) Iipe of I._.__a. : 0 Roughness of Surface: Cl - Clay Slk - Slickensided [surface has smooth,glassy finish with visual evidence of striations] Ca - Calcite S - Smooth [surface appears smooth and feels so to the touch] C Fe - ChloritenOxide SR - Slightly Rough [asperities on the discontinuity surfaces are Gy - Iron distinguishable and can be felt] it- - GypsumledR - Rough [some ridges and side-angle steps are evident;asperities H - Manganese are clearly visible,and discontinuity surface feels very abrasive] Mn - Oxide VR - Very Rough [near-vertical steps and ridges occur on the No - None discontinuity surface] II Py - pyrite Qz - Quartz Sd - Sand ROCK WEATHERING I ALTERATION I Reco•nation Description Residual Soil Original minerals of rock have been an pbroken minerals,and original rock fabric is not apparent;materialdecomposed can be easily bo yhand sed to secondary minerals, Completely Weathered/Altered Original minerals of rock have been almost entirely decompo althoughoriginal fabric may be intact;material can be granulated by hand N M2-iin h--d ameter sample can be bris okendrreadily by handweakened acrossthat rock fabric minimum Et Highly Weathered/Altered sed;a # Moderately Weathered/Altered Romiicnimdiscolored m 2-inf cch-d 2-inch-diameter noticeably ample cannot bweakened,e broken than readiy by hand across rock fabric E Slightly Weathered/Altered Rode is slightly discolored,but not noticeably lower in strength than fresh rock Fresh/Unweathered Rock shows no discoloration,loss of strength,or other effect of weathering/alteration 0 c ROCK STRENGTH Recognition Description Can be indented by thumbnail LL Extremely Weak Rock Can be peeled by pocket knife in Very Weak Rock Can be peeled with difficulty by pocket knife g Weak Rock Can be indented 5 mm with sharp end of pick 0. Medium Strong Rock a, Strong Rock Requires one hammer blow to fracture X Very Strong Rock Requires many hammer blows to fracture W' Extremely Strong Rock Can only be chipped with hammer blows cc 0 o� o w 1 URS iii -01-200 ,Oregon Project Number: 25695391.10001 Sheet 1 of 2 1 Dategg Date(s) 6/13/2003 Loed Drilled By JDS Checked BJD By Drilling HSAlWireline Core Drill Bit Total Depth Method Sizerrype 4 1/4"I.D.Auger,NX-Core29,0 FT of Borehole I Drill Rig CME 75 Drilling Type Contractor Geo-Tech Explorations,Inc. Surface Elevation -m_ate 568.0 feet MSL Groundwater Level Not Encountered Sampling Hammer and Date Measured Method(s) D&M Data 300 lb IBorehole Bentonite Chips Backfill P Location See Figure 2,Site Map SAMPLES _ rnW G a .5: o J 1I O >.., n._, a 7, N > s o MATERIAL DESCRIPTION m a c o, REMARKS www o E E'v� 3 Q^ a. p0 -',m aa��cQ A 3 ca a) mG (A me `ca> 0 I- Z COWCO M:.. 0 _i MO 3-av j CL LEAN CLAY[CL],low plastidty,rapid dilatancy,micaceous,trace _organics,mottled,medium sh ,brown,mast. - I 2 - -565 - _ - III - 4- % - i --ii • - _ 1 7 18 1 - _ _ -560 8 - - - Jz _ I j 10� - - _O Grades to medium plasticity,no dilatancy,trace basaltic gravel, - _ 2 13 18 / stiff,reddish brawn,moist. _ lir; 12- - -555 - - I.. 14- 'R'F Basalt BASALT,highly to extremely weathered,very weak,highly @ 13.5'Driller notes co „X;X;X -fractured,Fe,Mn,Cl filled fractures,<5%vesicles>2mm in dia., - less cohesive,more grayish red brown,moist. 'X'X'Xgranular[less _ X X weathered] r -a 3 52 18 ' X LL 16-` _ - S XXX U - XXXyi El-550 18- X'.'X:XX'i _ - O _ XX X LU X} XX re X. XXXX p - XXX_ a XX _ I 20 Ix RS I Project: TTSD Alberta Rider Elementary School Log of Boring B-01-200311 Project Location: Tigard,Oregon Sheet 2 of 2 '`' Project Number: 25695391.10001 . I SAMPLES pppO��� o C ro 0 J I o N ti 7E m 9 m o g� MATERIAL DESCRIPTION e d a REMARKS N ' t U �� C 7 II WI) 02 T 7 (O N O w e W _L.� r2U ldV: 20 I— Z Wcem cc CD . 'x'X'X Basalt BASALT,highly to moderately weathered,moderately strong to - 4 50-5II " 11 X X - strong,highly fractured,Fe,Mn,Cl filled fractures.5-10%vesicles — 'x'X'x _<2mm in dia.,trace phenocrysts,brownish gray. " " x'.'.' CORE RUN 1-21-25.25 ft 100%Recovery.ROD 9%,greater than - Begin NX-Coring - x' ' ' - 10 fractures per foot. i'x'x 22— = • Y• xX* 5 51 kXk — - ix ' X :x x 24— x:.:.: -- -� • Xx ' ' X X X 'X'X% Grades to moderately to slightly weathered,strong,moderately - fractured,trace vesicles>2mm in dia.trace plagioclase — 26— xx...x -phenocrysts. x;xx' - CORE RUN 2-25.25-29 ft 100%Recovery.ROD 32%,5 to>10 _ Xx fractures per foot. _ 'X". — 6 43 x.'- . — ' - .".x.' _ x k —540 28— — $_ 'X xxx - - Boring terminated at depth of 29.0 feet bgs on 6/13/2003 and backfilled with bentonite chips upon completion. 30— — _ 32— — — —535 — — 34- - I e 2 36— — a — I —530 38— — 0 o _ I 40— ill:LL _ - 8 — ma' 42— '— - C1 O' _ - — tY CO,—525 — — cc o 0 a L ups I t I Project: TTSD Alberta Rider Elementary School Log of Boring B-03-2003 Project Location: Tigard,Oregon Project Number: 25695391.10001 Sheet 1 of 2 I Dated) 6/13/2003 Logged JDS , By Checked BJD Drilling By Method HSA/Wireline Core Drill 41/4"I.D.Auger,NX-Core of tgo Depth e 30.0 FT I Drill RigApproximate Type CME 75 Contractor Geo-Tech Explorations,Inc. Surface Elevation —562.0 feet MSL Groundwater Level Not Encountered Sampling Hammer and Date Measured Method(s) D$M Data 140 lb Borehole Bentonite Chips Backfill P Location See Figure 2,Site Map SAMPLES - om III O oi.f O ..1 0 O m -a 0 ._CO� m 0 CO MATERIAL DESCRIPTION m` a'> iztE 11.v,v, 0 c o do y c c REMARKS W d]w Q E loin 3 u-2 i O V Ham? ?..•:,73,a O w!n c A (6N. dC II— Z d!)a'Oo D . C7 _,. �o Nma 0 mac) tLay.' j CL LEAN CLAY[CLI,low plasticity,rapid dilatancy,micaceous,trace — —organics,mottled,stiff,brown,moist. — [560 2— — — 4- j _ 1 ■ Gra — des to medium plasticity,no dilatancy,trace basaltic gravel, 1 18 18 stiff,reddish brown,moist. 6-1 IIj - - -555 - - - 8- - A - 10— %Y%Y%% Basalt BASALT,extremely weathered,extremely to very weak(hard), -I % 'Y '- highly fractured,remant vesicles,reddish brown,moist. —■ 2 67 18 % O IIY"xY - q N —550 12— ;y;=;= — - Y Y PQ k O % Y _ Y Y g — m Y• YYY — I 'a 14- • }• .Y Y _ fV J YYY"Y" — J 7 IC at I y YYY;Y _Grades to highly weathered,weak to very weak,highly fractured II 3 106-6" 12 %"YYYY - Fe,Mn,CI filled fractures,5-15%vesicles>2mm in dia.,grayish red' m 16 • _' '_ brown. {L Y Y — ▪ Y Y • II g—545 — YX X X _ — 1 - YYY _ "YYY'Y YYY Y 21 0 18— • " Y 0 Y - 1 W XYYY C91 7 4 100-4" .33 Yx='Y . a _ Grades to highly to moderately weathered,weak to moderately Driller notes 20 .".".". strong, <5%vesicles>2mm in dia.,grayish brown. significant resistance I vRis • 1 Project: TTSD Alberta Rider Elementary School Log of Boring B-03-2003 Project Location: Tigard,Oregon Project Number: 25695391.10001 Sheet 2 of 2 SAMPLES o0 0 rn o o o, REMARKS C N C p —� e N co ;, _�� o�� MATERIAL DESCRIPTION m I dd m� au,N o a oU �� 87)§ m E E a g V-- td t V) in W O 0 o a)of.4 in �, Z ofd_ m� «� 2U aaol 20 — *'_'* Basalt BASALT,moderately weathered,weak to moderately strong, Begin NX-Coring -' * *' highly fractured,5%vesicles>2mm in dia.,grayish brown. - 1'*'**• CORE RUN 1-25-30 ft:89%Recovery,ROD 0%,>10 fractures111 - *'* -per foot. —540 22 -Moderately to highly weathered zone 22'to 22.5'bgs I ii. - 5 60 - - 24— ,'; — — Driller notes softer *'* - - drilling between * ' 24'-25 ' — x'.'Y Grades to weak,highly fractured,highly weathered lens<6.thick _ '*'*** from 25'to 30' s. 26— CORE RUN 2 5-30 ft: 50%Recovery,ROD 0%,>10 fractures _ —per foot. —535 — *;* ; — - - 6 30 xxxx.x - 28— — — •'* 30 * — Boring terminated at a depth of 30.0 feet bgs on 6/13/2003 and - - backfilled with bentonite chips upon completion. - 111 —530 32— — — - =I 34— _ — — — ao 36— — — —525 — — — 38— — J — 02 ii 40- H Y. - G1—520 42— — — C o Luo — — — F re 0 d I cc URS I i IProject: USD Alberta Rider Elementary School Key to Log of Test Pit Project Location: Tigard,Oregon Project Number: 25695391.10001 a to c H -J . co > IO m ar d o a e REMARKS AND .. n.- MATERIAL DESCRIPTION y i 1 in OTHER TESTS w m c w co co zz 0 2 v a 4t i 0 0 a F41 5 © 0 ® El COLUMN DESCRIPTIONS nElevation:Elevation in feet referenced to mean sea level n Material Description: Description of material encountered; (MSL)or site datum. may include color,moisture,grain size,and density/consistency I n Depth: Depth in feet below the ground surface. ❑7 Moisture Content, %. Moisture content of sample. ElSample Type: Type of soil sample collected at depth interval shown;sampler symbols are explained below. n Precent Passing#200 Sieve Precentage of sample passing the #200 sieve by weight. n Sample Number: Sample identification number. I Remarks and Other Tests: Comments and observations Graphic Lo.: Graphic depiction of subsurface material regarding excavation or sampling made by driller or field encountered;typical symbols are explained below. personnel. Field and laboratory test results(other than water content),using abbreviations explained below. ITYPICAL MATERIAL GRAPHIC SYMBOLS j Lean Clay '' } . Basalt I I TYPICAL SAMPLER GRAPHIC SYMBOLS Ii3 OTHER GRAPHIC SYMBOLS Disturbed Sample er4 a i1 111 S F 5 TYPICAL LABORATORY TEST ABBREVIATIONS a' 0 IJ m Soil classifications are based on the Unified Soil Classification k System.Descriptions and stratum lines are interpretive;field descriptions may have been modified to reflect lab test results. o Descriptions on these logs apply only at the specific test pit locations LT. and at the time the test pits were excavated;they are not warranted to S be representative of subsurface conditions at other locations or times. I a U a ,- W Y I a ctO a I (2 URS I Project: TTSD Alberta Rider Elementary School Log of Test Pit Project Location: Tigard,Oregon TP-01-2003 Project Number: 25695391.10001 Date(s) Logged Checked Excavated 6/4/2003 By JDS ByBJD Length of Width of Depth of Excavation 15.0 feet Excavation 3.0 feet Excavation 15.0 feet Excavation Case 9030 B Trackhoe Excavation BEC Approximate —571.0 feet MSL Equipment Contractor Surface Elevation Water Groundwater Not Encountered Weather Sunny,80's ObservationsSurface Location See Figure 2,Site Map Condition Grassy Field rn o >' mm .115 z a, a, a`, (-) m m a REMARKS AND > a.. I a.n r MATERIAL DESCRIPTION a,aa'i a, E E E a y.`) 4 c OTHER TESTS W l7. co00 O 0 NC 02r..) o_it 1,, 1 LEAN CLAY[CL],low plasticity,trace organics,medium stiff,brown, moist. —570 - III _ 1 - I 5— — _ f _ Increase in moisture content,mottled. Grades to medium plasticity,trace angular basaltic gravel,stiff,reddish I brown,moist. - x BASALT,highly weathered,highly fractured,very weak,moist. - Excavator notes difficult ▪ x excavation. 10- xxx- - -560 - XX . . _ - I . xx.x,. Grades to highly to moderately weathered,weak 10 S _ • xxxx ,'x NI x qxxx H _ • xxxx S - x x x - xxxxxx x x xxxxxx a15 '.'.', o Test Pit terminated at a depth of 15.0'bgs on 6/4/2003 due to hard r excavating conditions. m - JI 7 In o - z -0:4 0 - V I20- 2 0 0 - —550 ' •1 • IIProject: TTSD Alberta Rider Elementary School Log of Test Pit Project Location: Tigard, Oregon TP-02-2003 Project Number: 25695391.10001 IIDate(s) 6/4/2003 Logged JDS Checked BJD Excavated By . By Length of Width of Depth of 1 15.0 feet 3.0 feet 19.5 feet Excavation Excavation Excavation Excavation Case 9030 B Trackhoe Excavation EEC Approximate -558.0 feet MSL Equipment Contractor Surface Elevation Water Groundwater Not Encountered Weather Sunny,80's Observations Location See Figure 2,Site Map Surface Condition Grassy Field rn c VI I G JO o d > .1 . m a>a`) 9 o to REMARKS AND >— a.— a o..0 s MATERIAL DESCRIPTION •H cu, OTHER TESTS mai mwE a ww 012 cc0 tEnz C7 � Q co I0 j LEAN CLAY[CL],low plasticity,rapid dilatancy,trace organics, micaceous,medium stiff,brown,moist. I I - TA 1 31.7 96.8 I 5- - _ I -550 - - Grades to medium plasticity,slow dilatancy,trace angular gravel,stiff, Ireddish brown,moist. 1073 - 2 28.4 87.1 I Ia / - m - 0. 15- C, j .... a. „ BASALT,highly weathered,very weak,highly fractured,5-10%vesicles 3 - >2mm dia.,Fe,Cl,Mn filled fractures,moist. - 0 N ILL -540 ,'.x„„„ Grades to highly to moderately weathered,weak to moderately strong b - U F Test pit terminated at a depth of 19.5'bgs on 6/4/2003 due to difficult - , 20- -excavation last 2.0'. 0 a , I 1 URS I Project: TTSD Alberta Rider Elementary School Log of Test Pit Project Location: Tigard, Oregon TP-04-2003 Project Number: 25695391.10001 Date(s) Logged Checked Excavated Bf4/2003 By JDS By BJD Length of Width of Depth of 15.0 feet 3.0 feet 16.5 feet Excavation Excavation Excavation Excavation Case 9030 B Trackhoe Excavation BEC Approximate -559.0 feet MSL Equipment Contractor Surface Elevation Water Groundwater Not Encountered Weather Sunny,80's Observations 2,Site MapSurface Grassy Field Location See Figure Condition C ca c >. o co v, I o m a> r v m` a I REMARKS AND .171 m aai- n a_ n MATERIAL DESCRIPTION N §rn OTHER TESTS ww t]2 co m = E '5 0 d$ cn C)Z 0 2U a* 0 % LEAN CLAY[CL],low plasticity,rapid dilatancy,trace organics,medium stiff,mottled brown,moist. • _ 0 - 111 1 . I _ 1 -550 Grades to medium plasticity,slow dilatancy,trace angular gravel,stiff, mottled reddish brown,moist. 10- - Increase in basaltic gravel j 5 =="X"X= BASALT,highly weathered,very weak,highly fractured,5-10%vesicles X*== = >2mm dia.,reddish brown,moist. 15- o .X.'.= Grades to highly to moderately weathered,weak to moderately strong a_ X XXXX Ca Pit terminated at a depth of 16.5'bgs on 6/4/2003 due to hard r - excavating through the last 2.0'. QLL - - - I 1-540 - - II r- re 0 a I cc 1URS I Project: TTSD Alberta Rider Elementary School Log of Test Pit Project Location: Tigard, Oregon TP-05-2003 Project Number: 25695391.10001 I Excavated 6/4/2003 Logged JDS By Checked BJD yLength of Width of Depth of I 15.0 feet 3.0 feet 16.5 feet Excavation Excavation Excavation Excavation Case 9030 B Trackhoe Excavation BEC Approximate —556.5 feet MSL Equipment Contractor Surface Elevation Water Groundwater Not Encountered Weather Sunny,80's Observations Location See Figure 2,Site MapSurface Grassy Field g Condition rn c a)I C T co N ~ g a d REMARKS AND ; . i Project: TTSD Alberta Rider Elementary School Log of Test Pit Project Location: Tigard, Oregon TP-06-2003 Project Number: 25695391.10001 Date(s)Excavated 6/412003 Logged JDS Checked BJD ByBy Length of Width of Depth of Excavation 15.0 feet Excavation 3.0 feet Excavation 19.0 feet Excavation Case 9030 B Trackhoe Excavation BEC S —568.0 feet MSL Equipment Contractor Surfaceurface Elevation Water Groundwater Not Encountered Weather Sunny,80's Observations Y Location See Figure 2,Site Map Surface GrassyField Condition a c c 7. O N O i— J e d i t m w`m o": d REMARKS AND it az c. as n MATERIAL DESCRIPTION d c OTHER TESTS Ma !7w �Z C7 0 c a,o �v a* 0 ^ % LEAN CLAY[CLI,low plasticity,trace organics,medium stiff,mottled brown to brownish gray,moist. - 1 / pH=5.4,Sulfates= 5.29 mg/L,Chlorides= 5--11 0.585 mg/L j Grades to medium plasticity,some weathered rock fragments,stiff,reddish — 3i 2 `brown,moist. I � I —560 - I 10— ;;' axxxxx BASALT,completely to highly weathered,extremely to very weak,wet on .x.x. fractures,highly fractured,reddish brown. I xxxxxx xxx w xxxxxx yi X X X xxx'x^ Y xxxxxx Xxx - A xxx It x x {, x x x i x xxx xxxxxx Grades to highly to extremely weathered,very weak I xxx _ xxx ' Excavator notes stiff, x x 15 xyx,— - not refusal as TP-1 xx.x*• • x x 3 - x x xx. JxX x xx 0 x xx 0 _ x x xx I• xxx,,. . LL—550 - Grades to highly to moderately weathered,weak to very weak I s xxx Test Pit terminated at a depth of 19.0'bgs on 6/4/2003 due to practical refusal. , 20— — — o o n I • cc Ups . I iProject: TTSD Alberta Rider Elementary School Log of Test Pit Project Location: Tigard, Oregon TP-07-2003 Project Number: 25695391.10001 I •Excavated 6/4/2003 Logged JDS Checked BJD Length of 15.0 feet Width of 3.0 feet Depth of 15.0 feet I Excavation Excavation Excavation Excavation Case 9030 B Trackhoe Excavation BEC Approximate —563.0 feet MSL Equipment Contractor Surface Elevation Water Groundwater Not Encountered Weather Sunny,80's Observations ii Location See Figure 2,Site Map CGrassy Field Coonndcedition rn o. 0 o m m I o _ a. > w 0 0 43 v m REMARKS AND m a� m n a� n MATERIAL DESCRIPTION 0 o OTHER TESTS ui ow a`aiz �U a ce c I 0 LEAN CLAY[CL),low plasticity,rapid dilatancy,micaceous,trace organics,medium stiff,mottled brown,moist. —560 - - I - - Grades to brown to brownish yellow _ . - _ Grades to medium plasticity,slow dilatancy,some angular basaltic gravel, stiff,reddish brown. 10— — I _ I4 * —550 - N " ".% BASALT,highly weathered,very weak,highly fractured,5-10%vesicles I 2mm dia.,Fe,Cl,Mn filled fractures. 0 15 " " Test Pit terminated at a depth of 15.0'bgs on 6/4/2003 due to excavator Kbreakdown.. IJ 0 03 m a - G r ..g N .o 0 F _ - 20— 0 s I URS • i Project: TTSD Alberta Rider Elementary School Log of Test Pit Project Location: Tigard, Oregon TP-08-2003 Project Number: 25695391.10001 Date(s) Logged Checked Excavated 614/20Q3 By JDS By BJD Length of 15.0 feet Width of 3.0 feet Depthof 15.0 feet Excavation Excavation Excavation Excavation Case 9030 B Trackhoe Excavation Approximate Approximate —569.0 feet MSL Equipment Contractor Surface Elevation Water Groundwater Not Encountered Weather Sunny,80's Observations Location See Figure 2,Site MapSurface 9 Grassy Field Condition em c To cd o e is m ~ `m v If,' =m REMARKS AND >.- c•- Q. n..0 IC MATERIAL DESCRIPTION 4 N 8 o OTHER TESTS m� �� m g3 m 0o o Ww Ow O O 01N u) cnz c7 2O ala 0 j LEAN CLAY(CLJ,low plasticity,rapid dilatancy,trace organics, miceaous,medium stiff,mottled brown to yellowish brown,moist. •- Grades to medium plasticity,slow dilatancy,fine angular basaltic gravel, 77�� 2 medium stiff,moist. �I � - —560 - 10— — = BASALT,highly weathered,very weak,5-10%vesicles>2mm dia., _'* reddish brown. 2?' == i x a = ` ~ ' Grades to highly to moderately weathered,weak,grayish brown,highly fractured. ;_; 0 15 = = Test Pit terminated at a depth of 15.0'on 6/4/2003 due to difficult a excavating conditions. - J J co co0 H E Y. - _ 8 N 3 -550 - - - U x 20— -- — F a 0 a I • Project: TTSD Alberta Rider Elementary School Log of Test Pit I Project Location: Tigard, Oregon TP-09-2003 Project Number: 25695391.10001 IExcavated 6/4/2003 Bogged JDS Checked BJD Length of 15.0 feet Width of 3.0 feet Depth of 14.5 feet I Excavation Excavation xcavaon Excavation Case 9030 B Trackhoe Excavation BEC EtiApproximate —564.0 feet MSL Equipment Contractor Surface Elevation Water Groundwater Not Encountered Weather Sunny,80's Observations Location See Figure 2,Site Ma CoGrassy Field 9 P Conndition dce rn _c I ei D. N o = 0 d co w le a d REMARKS AND m m a a� a MATERIAL DESCRIPTION a. OTHER TESTS ww w E EE -ao a,49 � fA co Z C� N �U a at I 0 LEAN CLAY[CL],low plasticity,rapid dilatancy,micaceous,mottled brown,moist. III 1 I —560 / - 5— — Increase in moisture content - 1 _ - Grades to medium plasticity,slow dilatancy,trace angular basaltic gravel. 2 stiff,reddish brown,moist. — 10 j I i`.'.', BASALT,highly weathered,very weak,5-10%vesicles>2mm dia., reddish brown. Increases to highly to moderately weathered,weak to moderately strong, : : : grayish brown. —550 - - I — 15— Test Pit terminated at a depth of 14.5'bgs on 6/4/2003 due to difficult —excavating conditions. CDO. I J co m O - F - r i.-t. g b U �' i 20— i O d I Project: TTSD Alberta Rider Elementary School Log of Test Pit Project Location: Tigard, Oregon TP-10-2003 Project Number: 25695391.10001 Date(s) 6/4/2003 Logged JDS Checked BJD I Excavated By By Length of Width of Depth of 15.0 feet 3.0 feet 13.0 feet ExcavationExcavation Excavation Excavation Case 9030 B Trackhoe Excavation BEC Approximate —562.0 feet MSL Equipment Contractor Surface Elevation Water Groundwater Not Encountered Weather Sunny,80's Observations Y Location See Figure 2,Site Map Condce Grassy Field I Condition a) y p� c L. O H O T to ~ L J ` a ' REMARKS AND :11�• a•.• a E E MATERIAL DESCRIPTION ,m §o OTHER TESTS w� o, Wiz' c� 00 0 �O all 0 7- LEAN CLAY[CLI,low plasticity,rapid dilatancy,trace organics, 1 micaceous,medium stiff,mottld brown,moist. —560 - - I 1 Grades to yellowish brown to brown - I 5— — I _ _ 1 Grades to medium plasticity,slow dilatancy,trace gravel,stiff,reddish brown,moist I 10— ;r='' xx..Y:Y BASALT,highly weathered,very weak,5-10%vesicles>2mm dia.,highly YYYYYx fractured,reddish brown,moist. x x x - X.X.X.- - X x x � X:11:11: 8—550 '.x.'=- d Grades to highly to moderately weathered,weak to moderately strong 1 X x Y Test Pit terminated at a depth of 13.0'bgs on 6/4/2003 due to difficult excavating conditions. m . Ia. 15— — — cl I a _ ,0 I iL - - - 1 . 0 2, • I C 0 n. I URS I I 1 Project: TTSD Alberta Rider Elementary School Log of Test Pit Project Location: Tigard, Oregon TP-11-2003 Project Number: 25695391.10001 1 Excavated 6/4/2003 Bogged JDS Checked BM By Length of Width of Depth of 15.0 feet 3.0 feet 16.5 feet Excavation Excavation Excavation Excavation Case 9030 B Traekhoe Excavation BEC Approximate —558.0 feet MSL Equipment Contractor Surface Elevation Water Observations Groundwater Not Encountered Weather Sunny,80's III Location See Figure 2,Site Map Surface Condition Grassy Field rn cu a O H J e a > >.. a.. a n,a . MATERIAL DESCRIPTION ;-' , OTHER AND m y `�� $c OTHER TESTS I co co Z 0 2 U a. 0 % LEAN CLAY[CL],low plasticity,rapid dilatancy,trace organics,medium stiff,mottled brown,moist. 5— j — Grades to medium plasticity,slow dilatancy,some angular basaltic gravel, stiff,mottled reddish brown,moist. —550 —0 2 - I 10— — % BASALT,highly weathered,very weak,5-10%vesicles>2mm dia.,highly xxx fractured,Fe,CI,Mn filled fractures,reddish brown. N — x idI x x F xxxx'. 6 xxxx it m _. xxxF _ IN y . Grades to highly to moderately weathered,weak to moderately strong — A. 15— xxxx x�- d xxx • x x i- x xxx '34 x xY- - Test Pit terminated at a depth of 16.5'bgs on 6/4/2003 due to difficult k ` excavating conditions. - ILL —540 - - - 8 N d U 1 m� 20— — — o d I rl URS 1 Project: TTSD Alberta Rider Elementary School Log of Test Pit I Project Location: Tigard, Oregon TP-12-2003 Project Number: 25695391.10001 Dates) 6/4/2003 Logged JDS Checked BJD ByExcavated BY Length of 15.0 feet Width of 3.0 feet Depth of 15.5 feet Excavation Excavation Excavation Excavation Case 9030 B Trackhoe Excavation BEC Approximate —562.0 feet MSL Equipment Contractor Surface Elevation Water Groundwater Not Encountered Weather Sunny,80's Observations Y Location See Figure 2,Site Map CoGrassy Field Conndcedition as c cb C aa, o m m 0 a) g> o o D. REMARKS AND >., o.. a El s MATERIAL DESCRIPTION h §o OTHER TESTS m ul• CO (.13Z C9 2c.) o.at 0 % LEAN CLAY[CLI,low plasticity,rapid dilatancy,micaceous,trace I organics,medium stiff,mottled,moist. —560 - - 1 Grades to brown to brownish yellow I Ti 1 31.3 5- - - %- I - 2 / Grades to medium plasticity,slow dilatancy,trace angular basaltic gravel, 33.1 pH=5.7,Sulfates= stiff,reddish brown,moist. 5.56 mg/L,Chlorides= 0.629 mg/L 1 I 8—550 - ;�;;� o - N xYYxYY BASALT,highly weathered,very weak,5-10%vesicles<5mm dia.,highly fractured,Fe and Mn filled fractures,moist. - - x'xXY xY Y Y Y Y YYx .. 5 Y.Y.x, Grades to highly to moderately weathered,weak to moderately strong YYY I a. 15— , x�x�— — o Yxx x ei: - Test Pit terminated at a depth of 15.5'bgs on 6/4/2003 due to difficult- excavating conditions. a, a _ o Ig b - - - 0 I al it o Q cc I URS 1 I IProject: TTSD Alberta Rider Elementary School Log of Test Pit Project Location: Tigard, Oregon TP-13-2003 Project Number: 25695391.10001 II Date(s) Logged Checked Excavated 6/4/2003 By JDS By BJD Length of Width of Depth of 1 15.0 feet 3.0 feet 15.0 feet Excavation Excavation Excavation Excavation Case 9030 B Trackhoe Excavation BEC Approximate -551.0 feet MSL Equipment Contractor Surface Elevation Water Groundwater Not Encountered Weather Sunny,80's ObservationsSurface y' ILocation See Figure 2,Site Map Condition Grassy Field ea n rn ° F o J in al 0 ' a > m w a� m.: m REMARKS AND > a.-• a n-o r MATERIAL DESCRIPTION '.`5. 'c OTHER TESTS ww 8 E EE it 0 o U) 0)z 0 �O ac 0 j LEAN CLAY ICL],low plasticity,rapid dilatancy,micaceous,trace organics,stiff,mottled brown,moist. -550 - - IGrades to brown to brownish yellow 1 • - 5- - - _ Grades to medium plasticity,slow dilatancy,some angular basaltic gravels, Istiff,reddish brown,moist. 10- - I -540 - - 1 2x- xx xx x= BASALT,highly weathered,very weak,highly fractured,Fe,Cl,Mn filled xxx x fractures,5-10%vesicles>2mm dia.,reddish brown. 8 xxxx x x m - [xxx xx, - Grades to moderately weathered,weak to moderately strong 0.o 15 x x x Test Pit terminated at a depth of 15.0'bgs on 6/4/2003 due to difficult G excavating conditions. I - :•.',, 0 _ G I a - - - 8 ..e - - U I a, _ - �1 20- 00 a -530 1 URS 1 Project: TTSD Alberta Rider Elementary School Log of Test Pit I Project Location: Tigard, Oregon TP-14-2003 Project Number: 25695391.10001 DDate(s)ted 61512003 Logged JDS Checked BJD 1111111 ExcavaLength of Width of Depth of Excavation 15.0 feet Excavation 3.0 feet Excavation 18.0 feet Excavation Case 9030 B Trackhoe Excavation BEC Approximate —554.0 feet MSL Equipment Contractor Surface Elevation Water Groundwater Not Encountered Weather Sunny,80's Observations Location See Figure 2,Site Map Surface Grassy Field Condition rn Canch 0 = C I- -' \ r m1 is £ m a) m a REMARKS AND >.- 0-- a 13..5 MATERIAL DESCRIPTION _ =cn w m o w E E E m pa w OTHER TESTS v) 0Z 0 iso mN 2U Q. 0I j LEAN CLAY[CL],low plasticity,rapid dilatancy,trace organics,medium stiff,brown,moist. • Decrease in organics,mottled brown to yellowish brown I —550 I 5� 1 — _ _ 1 Grades to medium plasticity,no dilatancy,trace angular gravel,stiff, 1 2 reddish brown,moist. - - I 10— — Degree of weathering decreases with depth,more gravel. I 4 d I- 1 1 —540 - • = BASALT,highly weathered,very weak,highly fractured,<5 vesicles >2mm dia.,Fe,CI;Mn filled fractures,moist. 15— I _= . — — a. ` • _ _ _ _ _ • = Grades to highly to moderately weathered,weakI m ▪x`__ E _`_`_ .ii ______ LL Test Pit terminated at a depth of 18.0'bgs on 6/5/2003 due to difficultI excavating conditions. b - . 1 20— — — I 0 a URSI 1 IProject: TTSD Alberta Rider Elementary School Log of Test Pit Project Location: Tigard, Oregon TP-15-2003 Project Number: 25695391.10001 Date(s) 6/5/2003 Logged JDS Checked BJD Excavated By . By Length of 15.0 feet Width of Depth of 3.0 feet Excavation 13.0 feet Excavation Case 9030 B Trackhoe Excavation BEC Approximate Equipment Contractor Surface Elevation `554.0 feet MSL Water Groundwater Not Encountered Weather Sunny,80's Observations I Location See Figure 2,Site Map Surface GrassyField Condition o, • c 0vi >-- o.-- n 5..a s MATERIAL DESCRIPTION °' co ts °' REMARKS AND ca w o w E E E m H ,o OTHER TESTS 0 0 u) u)Z C) U a % LEAN CLAY[CL],low plasticity,rapid dilatancy,trace organics, micaceous,medium stiff,some mottling,brown,moist. I • I —540 �( 1 Grades to brown to brownish yellow 5— % — _ I / Grades to medium plasticity,no dilatancy,moist. --2 2 I 10— — IBASALT,highly weathered,very weak,highly fractured,Fe,Cl,Mn filled x'='x fractures,reddish brown,moist. 8 Grades to moderately to slightly weathered,moderately strong to strong Test Pit terminated at a depth of 12.0'bgs on 6/5/2003 due to difficult excavating conditions. g—530 - - _ I - 1 o 15— a G ! i J 0 h . r i O S b - . U II 'SI a. 20— — C O a I s 'IRS f I APPENDIX B Dynamic Cone Penetrometer Test Logs I uRs 1 I I I I I I I I 1 I I I 1 0:125695391 TTSD Alberta RideATTSD Report Final.dod18-MAY-04 I . I DCP TEST DATA IProject: Tigard Tualatin School District Date: 6/27/03 Feature: DCP01 Station: DCP01 I 1 o- - _ , , : , ; 1 , ' ' ' - ' ' ' h ° ; HI I ; • ; : H ; i , Hi 1 1 ! , ! ; . 1 -10 _ , • I i• i! 111 ' 2' 1- 54 ! ' i . 1 " - . 1 11 E - i 0 - -20 ..0 : • • ' 1 ; I I 1 il -508 (1) "D =" I _ 1 1 o ri. 1 3 o _30- , I 1 . ' 1-762 3 1 i _ I! N I -40 - . I ! 11 1 I 1 i I i -1016 _ - 1 ! i 1 . , • . -50- 1 ' ! .i 111 . ! I !I -1270 i 10 100 CBR 1 (MM) TEST PROFILE (IN) • 0 o I 127 — Lean Clay 12.25"CBR 18 — 5 254 — — 10 1 381 — — 15 508 — 0 — 20 1 635 — Lean Clay 21.50"CBR 3 — 25 762 — — 30 I889 1016— — 40 1 1143— — 45 1270 50 I I • I I DCP TEST DATA Project: Tigard Tualatin School District Date: 6/27/03 1 Feature: DCP02 Station: DCP02 I o , . - I : o -10 : . t : . : • -254 I s _20If -508 CD .-•• -g•-• - = a) _ Ii,i11 -762 i 1 CI -30 r--i _ I I 1 1 , , 1 I • _ , . , i , -40 --1016 I - I I 1 I ! i -50 • . : I ' I ! I : ' I -1270 i 1 10 100 CBR (MM) TEST PROFILE (IN) I 0 0 127 — 5 I 254 — Lean Clay 17.50"CBR 5 — 10 381 — — 15 1 508 — — 20 635 — — 25 1 Lean Clay 16.50"CBR 18 762 — — 30 889 — — 35 I 1016— — 40 1143— — 45 1 1270 50 I I II I DCP TEST DATA IProject: Tigard Tualatin School District Date: 6/27/03 Feature: DCP03 Station: DCP03 I oi i . o 1 10 -254 - I ' i ! I - C 20 i I ; ; i , -508 ! .0 � � ll i 3 30I ( i -762 - ! ; ! ' ; � I � I � i i i ! j f 11 I -50 f 1270 1 10 100 CBR 111 1 o(MM) TEST PROFILE (IN) 0 I127 — — 5 254 — — 10 I 381 — — 15 UNASSIGNED 33.00"CBR 5 508 — — 20 I635 — — 25 762 — — 30 1 889 — — 35 1016— — 40 1 1143— — 45 1270 50 I 1 . I I DCP TEST DATA Project: Tigard Tualatin School District Date: 6/27/03 1 Feature: DCP04 Station: DCP04 1 0: o ; : , 1 -10 , i ! : -254 1 C -20- , i E ' : i -508 (V I a _ ' 3 0 -30- j i j I • 3 . I _ : ! ! 1 _ ! ! ! , 40 j 1-1016 I i ! - I I 1 10 100 CBR i (MM) TEST PROFILE (IN) I 0 0 127 — — 5 I 254 — — 10 381 — — 15 Lean Clay 34.00"CBR 6 508 — — 20 635 — — 25 1 762 — — 30 889 — — 35 I 1016— — 40 1143— — 45 1 1270 50 I I I I DCP TEST DATA IProject: Tigard Tualatin School District Date: 6/27/03 Feature: DCP05 Station: DCP05 I 1 o o i -10 _ —7 , I ; 11 . ' ; 454 , _ 11 1 I I I I z.....,C -20 -4S . , I 1 1 1 -508 - , , 1 -8 r- I 1 I 3 I 0 -30- _ _ I I 1 1 , 1 1 762 3 1 -40 ; 1 1 ' ; 1 ; ; I 1 : -1016 1 I I -50 1 • 1 0 • ! I-1270 100 CBR I 1 (MM) TEST PROFILE (IN) o o 1 127 – – 5 254 – , – 10 I 381 – – 15 UNASSIGNED 34.50"CBR 5 508 – – 20 I635 – – 25 762 – – 30 I889 – – 35 1016– – 40 - 1 1143– – 45 1270 50 1 I I I DCP TEST DATA Project: Tigard Tualatin School District Date: 6/27/03 1 Feature: DCP06 Station: DCP06 I co— i L i 1 I : ! : ! ! ! ' / . , -10_ 1 .: : • ' -254 _ ! I ' ' I • 1 , , ; ; 1 - ; I C -20- 11 a) 11 3 , 40 ; I , i I -1016 I - _ . -50 , ' 1 ' , i ! • : ! i-1270 • 1 10 100 CBR - I (MM) TEST PROFILE (IN) I 0 0 127 — — 5 1 254 — — 10 381 — — 15 1 UNASSIGNED 35.00"CBR 6 508 — — 20 635 — — 25 I 762 — — 30 889 35 I 1016— — 40 1143— — 45 1 1270 50 I I I . I DCP TEST DATA IProject: Tigard Tualatin School District Date: 6/27/03 Feature: DCP07 Station: DCP07 I 1 0= , i l l I! I i i , . , o I . -10- f , ,ii _254 I •-• - I I I l i ' I ' ! ( I = i 11111 I i i I ( I 506 N _ I j i ( I ' HHL I I -30 . 1 i I i i I i I i-762 _ I ! I 11 ; i ! I ! i I I i I iil _1016 I -50 ! ' . I, 1 1 ! 1 -1270-1270 1 10 100 CBR I I (MM) TEST PROFILE (IN) 0 0 I127 — — 5 254 LEAN CLAY 19.50"CBR 8 — 10 1 381 — — 15 508 — — 20 I 635 — — 25 LEAN CLAY 14.00"CBR 9 762 — — 30 I889 — — 35 1016— — 40 I1143— — 45 1270 50 I I 1 I DCP TEST DATA Project: Tigard Tualatin School District Date: 6/27/03 1 Feature: DCP08 Station: DCP08 I o . o I .10- r---7-1 • ' ' ' ' -254 1 _ 1, il-rnj - '..C... - -20 I j FT 11 I 1 -508 a) Z.% - .0 1 1 I 12 I II 111 a) -30 I _ CI ' j I -762 3 _ I j ; ! — 1 - I j -40 1016 I I ! _ II I ! -50 ' ! j 1 j : ! i-1270 1 10 100 CBR 111 (MM) TEST PROFILE (IN) I o - 0 127 — — 5 I 254 — — 10 381 — — 15 1 LEAN CLAY 35.50"CBR 6 508 — — 20 635 — — 25 I 762 — — 30 889 — — 35 I 1016— — 40 1143— — 45 I 1270 50 I I I . I DCP TEST DATA IProject: Tigard Tualatin School District Date: 6/27/03 Feature: DCP09 Station: DCP09 I o , , o I i1 I , I ; . - ! . 1"--1 li-254 -10 ' I _ ! ; i ; II ! : 11 0 I S -20 -C : 12 - — HH ; I ; -508 (D -o , ' I 3 I a -30 : Lill, 1 -762 3 . I - 0 , ! _ _ ! ! I ! I ! ; I -1016 1 i , : I - I -50 1 -1270 10 100 CBR I I (MM) TEST PROFILE (IN) o o I 127 - LEAN CLAY 13.25"CBR 17 - 5 254 - - 10 I381 - - 15 508 - - 20 I635 - LEAN CLAY 21.25"CBR 7 - 25 762 - - 30 I889 - - 35 1016- - 40 I1143- _ 45 1270 50 I I I I DCP TEST DATA Project: Tigard Tualatin School District Date: 6/27/03 I Feature: DCP10 Station: DCP10 I o o I ! ; ! H I -10 -254 . - . - , FT i . , , • . , . _ c -20- 1, ; 1 I i i i 1 i : -508 ai I _ 6. _ 1 !II II -30 -762 I . "1 I _ LH ' I ! ; _ , . -40 H -1016 - I _ . . -1270 -50 I 1 10 100 CBR (MM) TEST PROFILE (IN) I 0 0 127 - - 5 I LEAN CLAY 14.25"CBR 14 254 - - 10 381 - - 15 I 508 - - 20 635 - LEAN CLAY 19.75"CBR 5 - 25 I - 762 - - 30 889 - - 35 I 1016- - 40 1143- - 45 I 1270 50 I I I . . 1 DCP TEST DATA IProject: Tigard Tualatin School District Date: 6/27/03 Feature: DCP11 Station: DCP11 I I 0_ i , 0 i 10_ ' -254 _ -2 , _ ! i i ! ❑ I ... _ I -508 N a _ 3 � � I I � i � , , i � i ' � I I CD _ , -_ i I ! I !_7s2 3 ! II ! ! I I Ili i ' I ! i III ! I40 T 1016 I50 1 ! F1 U I i I-1270 100 CBR I (MM) TEST PROFILE (IN) 0 0 I 127 — — 5 254 — 10 I 381 — LEAN CLAY 24.75"CBR 9 — 15 508 — — 20 I635 — — 25 762 LEAN CLAY 5.50"CBR 1 -- 30 I889 — — 35 1016— — 40 • I1143— — 45 1270 50 1 I APPENDIX C Laboratory Testing I I I 1 I 1 1 1 1 I I I 1 1 URSO:\25695391 TTSD Alberta Ri0eATTSD Report Final doc\1 B-MAY-04 I 1 80 1 70 CH or OH 1 60 a IX 50 - 0 "A"LINE I v 40 D CL or OL 1 0- 30 MI I 20 • MH or OH 10 , I aim_ ML or OL o 0I 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 LIQUID LIMIT,LL I Sample Depth Sample am Boring ID #p (feet) Symbol Moisture LL PL P1 Classification I % B-02-2003 1 6-6.5 • 30.7 38 21 17 Lean Clay 8-02-2003 2 11-11.5 I 27.0 47 23 25 Lean Clay I N I m N I � a 7 m 0 CO IiLL N I- a.a ii O 01 C7 ctw ITTSD Alberta Rider Elementary School PLASTICITY CHART Tigard, Oregon 125695391.10001 I . UPS 1 80 1 70 - I CH or OH 60 1 a Lu 50 z "A" LINE > U 40 I a i CL or OL 5 - 30 1 m *• 20A I MH or OH 10 I CL-ML ML or OL 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 I LIQUID LIMIT,LL Sample I Sample Depth p Boring ID # (feet) Symbol Moisture LL PL PI Classification /e I TP-02-2003 1 4-4.5 • 31.7 44 20 24 Lean Clay TP-02-2003 2 10-10.5 m 28.4 45 19 26 Lean Clay TP-05-2003 1 4-4.5 ♦ 29.4 39 21 18 Lean Clay I TP-05-2003 2 10-10.5 * 27.4 42 20 22 Lean Clay a I- § 1 C. 0 I g a C 1- • I h 6. IV. 0-. O J 0 CC IU ITTSD Alberta Rider Elementary School PLASTICITY CHART I < Tigard, Oregon 25695391.10001 ., I APPENDIX D Wetlands Review I I I URS 1 I I 1 1 1 i 1. 1 I ' 0:125695391 TTSD Alberta Rider%TTSD Report FinaLdoc\18-MAY-04 I Memorandum ifftfi I To: Bryan Duevel,URS IFrom: Noah Herlocker,URS Date: July 8,2003 I Subject: Wetland Determination for the proposed Alberta Rider Elementary School Project Site IOn June 5,2003 a URS wetland scientist conducted an onsite wetland determination at the site of the proposed Alberta Rider Elementary School. The site is located in township 25, I range 1 west,and section 9 near the intersection of SW 130th Street and SW Bull Mt.Road in Tigard,Oregon. This study examined all areas located within the property line for the future elementary school,excluding the current residence that will be granted to the Tigard/ I Tualatin School District in the future. The unstudied property is identified on Figure 2 as "Future Expansion Area". This area was not examined at the request of the current residents. I The determination consisted of a preliminary review of the National Wetland Inventory' (NWI)Beaverton Quadrangle(USFWS 1981)and the Washington County Soil Survey2 (USDA 1982). This review looked for mapped wetlands and/or the presence of hydric soils I in the project vicinity. A subsequent pedestrian survey was conducted to look for potential wetland indicators identified in the 1987 Army Corps of Engineers Manual. The survey relied upon the presence or absence of hydrophytic vegetation,hydric soil characteristics,and Iprimary and/or secondary hydrologic indicators to determine if wetlands were present on site. The site is located on a hillside associated with Bull Mountain. From the northern property I line(SW Bull Mt.Rd.),the topography of the site includes an initial rise in elevation,heading south to a summit. After this,the topography slopes downward to the south becoming steeper toward the southern property line. The topography is steepest in the SE corner of the Iproperty(Figure 2). The north portion of the site,defined as the area rising from Bull Mt.Road to the highest I point on site,is a grassland community dominated by tall oatgrass(Arrhenatherum eliatus, NI)and sweet vernaigrass(Anthoxanthum odoratum, FACU). The sub dominant vegetation consisted of Douglas fir(Pseudotsuga menziesii, NI)along the western property line;beaked I hazelnut(Corylus cornuta, NI)along the northern property line;and a mix of herbaceous vegetation including:velvetgrass(Holcus lanatus, FAC),common vetch(Viccia sativa, NI), common dandelion(Taraxacum officianale, NI),oxeye daisy(Chrysanthemum I leucanthemum, NL),Himalayan blackberry(Rubus discolor, FACU),English ivy(Hedera helix, NL),and Queen Anne's lace(Daucus carrota, NI). I In the southern portion of the site,defined as the area of land sloping down gradient and south of the highest point on site,the vegetation was also dominated by tall oatgrass and I 'U.S.Fish and Wildlife Service(USFWS). Beaverton Quadrangle,OR[map). 1:24,000. 15 Minute Series. Portland,OR:USFWS,Region 1, 1981 I2 Green,George L. 1982. Soil Survey of Washington County,Oregon. U.S.Department of Agriculture,Soil Conservation Service in cooperation with the Oregon Agricultural Experiment Station Page 1 of 2 I a 1R sweet vernal grass. The sub dominant vegetation,however,included a different assemblage of plant species. These included Kentucky bluegrass(Poa pratensis, FAC),sheep sorrel (Rumex acetosella, FACU+),tall fescue(Festuca arundinaceae, FAC-),orchard grass (Dactylis glomerata, FACU),and English plantain(Plantago lanceolata, FAC). The preliminary review of the NWI map showed no wetlands in the vicinity of the project 1 site. The soil survey mapped"Comelious and Kinton silt loams,2 to 7 percent slopes" onsite. This soil series is not hydric. No evidence of prolonged seasonal or permanent surface inundation or soil saturation was observed. The topography of the site was steep enough to prevent surface water from collecting in quantities necessary for the formation of wetland characteristics.No hydrophitic vegetation was observed during the site visit. The three species with a wetland facultative status(FAC)are highly cosmopolitan species that inhabit a variety of soil types and moisture regimes. No wetland obligate status plant species were observed. Where the topography appeared its flattest,soil pits were excavated. Soils were examined in all four corners and the middle of the project site. Observed soils lacked hydric soil indicators. No primary or secondary indicators of hydrology were observed. Based on these observations,it was determined that no wetlands were present on the site of ' the proposed Alberta Rider Elementary School. I 1 .1 1 1 Page 2 of 2 Memorandum URS To: Bryan Duevel,URS 1 From: Noah Herlocker,URS Date: July 8,2003 ISubject: Wetland Determination for the proposed Alberta Rider Elementary School Project Site IOn June 5,2003 a URS wetland scientist conducted an onsite wetland determination at the site of the proposed Alberta Rider Elementary School. The site is located in township 25, Irange 1 west,and section 9 near the intersection of SW 130th Street and SW Bull Mt.Road in Tigard, Oregon. This study examined all areas located within the property line for the future elementary school, excluding the current residence that will be granted to the Tigard/ I Tualatin School District in the future. The unstudied property is identified on Figure 2 as "Future Expansion Area". This area was not examined at the request of the current residents. I The determination consisted of a preliminary review of the National Wetland Inventory' (NWI)Beaverton Quadrangle(USFWS 1981)and the Washington County Soil Survey2 (USDA 1982). This review looked for mapped wetlands and/or the presence of hydric soils Iin the project vicinity. A subsequent pedestrian survey was conducted to look for potential wetland indicators identified in the 1987 Army Corps of Engineers Manual. The survey relied upon the presence or absence of hydrophytic vegetation,hydric soil characteristics,and Iprimary and/or secondary hydrologic indicators to determine if wetlands were present on site. The site is located on a hillside associated with Bull Mountain. From the northern property Iline(SW Bull Mt.Rd.),the topography of the site includes an initial rise in elevation,heading south to a summit. After this,the topography slopes downward to the south becoming steeper toward the southern property line. The topography is steepest in the SE corner of the i property(Figure 2). The north portion of the site,defined as the area rising from Bull Mt. Road to the highest Ipoint on site,is a grassland community dominated by tall oatgrass(Arrhenatherum eliatus, NI)and sweet vernalgrass(Anthoxanthum odoratum, FACU). The sub dominant vegetation consisted of Douglas fir(Pseudotsuga menziesii, NI)along the western property line;beaked I hazelnut(Corylus cornuta, NI)along the northern property line;and a mix of herbaceous vegetation including:velvetgrass(Holcus lanatus, FAC),common vetch(Viccia sativa, NI), common dandelion(Taraxacum officianale, NI),oxeye daisy(Chrysanthemum Ileucanthemum, NL),Himalayan blackberry(Rubus discolor, FACU),English ivy(Hedera helix, NL),and Queen Anne's lace(Daucus carrota, NI). IIn the southern portion of the site,defined as the area of land sloping down gradient and south of the highest point on site,the vegetation was also dominated by tall oatgrass and I 'U.S.Fish and Wildlife Service(USFWS). Beavertonuad Q Tangle,OR[map]. 1:24,000. 15 Minute Series. Portland,OR:USFWS,Region 1, 1981 I 2 Green,George L. 1982. Soil Survey of Washington County,Oregon. U.S.Department of Agriculture,Soil Conservation Service in cooperation with the Oregon Agricultural Experiment Station IPage 1 of 2 . RS sweet vernal grass. The sub dominant vegetation,however,included a different assemblage of plant species. These included Kentucky bluegrass(Poa pratensis, FAC),sheep sorrel I (Rumex acetosella, FACU+),tall fescue(Festuca arundinaceae, FAC-),orchard grass (Dactylis glomerata, FACU),and English plantain(Plantago lanceolata, FAC). The preliminary review of the NWI map showed no wetlands in the vicinity of the project site. The soil survey mapped"Comelious and Kinton silt loams,2 to 7 percent slopes" onsite. This soil series is not hydric. No evidence of prolonged seasonal or permanent surface inundation or soil saturation was observed. The topography of the site was steep enough to prevent surface water from collecting in quantities necessary for the formation of wetland characteristics.No hydrophitic vegetation was observed during the site visit. The three species with a wetland facultative status(FAC)are highly cosmopolitan species that inhabit a variety of soil types and moisture regimes. No wetland obligate status plant species were observed. Where the topography appeared its flattest,soil pits were excavated. Soils were examined in all four corners and the middle of the project site. Observed soils lacked hydric soil indicators. No primary or secondary indicators of hydrology were observed. Based on these observations,it was determined that no wetlands werepresent on the site of the proposed Alberta Rider Elementary School. I I I I I I Page 2 of 2 I I I I I I i APPENDIX 3-SEISMIC HAZARD REPORT I I I 'ORS -_ i Seismic Site Hazard Investigation Alberta Rider Elementary School Tigard-Tualatin School District 23J Tigard, Oregon URS Job # 25695391.10001 i - •� 4 • =fP�' t �r .l.;+r i -s'M'•tis a+v „i' .�,. 41. • i •-. i f SAY 'y`y•+,c. ` ec,, I •^ +fY Jnr-..•h{ Te�� y ' E ,'£ '� .. ter. 4" %�fsK 1 IT • • Prepared for Tigard-Tualatin School District 23J I July 2003 Prepared by URS Corporation I I URS I July 31,2003 Tigard-Tualatin School District 23J 6960 SW Sandburg Street Tigard, Oregon 97223 Attn: Mr. Stephen Poage Director of Capital Projects Re: Seismic Site Hazard Investigation Alberta Rider Elementary School Tigard-Tualatin School District 23J Tigard, Oregon URS Job No: 25695391.10001 Dear Mr. Poage: We are pleased to submit herewith our report entitled "Seismic Site Hazard Investigation, Alberta Rider Elementary School, Tigard-Tualatin School District 23J, Tigard, Oregon." This report formally documents our conclusions and recommendations regarding the proposed project. It has been our pleasure to assist you with this project. Should you have any questions regarding the contents of this report, please call us at your convenience. Yours very truly, URS Corporation 911,044-16\-- PROFN A 1 r-04- /4 Sr* I rf Bryan J. Duevel, PE /. to epor- 01� :rian M. Wi Ian, Ph.D.,P.E. Project Engineer �� ` "• Manager, Geotechnical Engineering e 4447,10 * '40/ M *O EXPhtFc• . 6 3 URS Corporation 111 SW Columbia,Suite 900 Portland,OR 97201-5814 Tel: 503.222.7200 Fax:503.222.4292 I I TABLE OF CONTENTS ISection 1 Introduction 1-1 1 1.1 General 1-1 1.2 Scope of Work 1-1 Section 2 Geologic Setting 2-1 I 2.1 Site Description 2-1 I 2.2 Regional Geologic Structure 2-1 2.3 Site Geology 2-1 2.4 Site Hydrogeology 2-2 ISection 3 Seismic Conditions 3-1 3.1 Earthquake Effects-General3-1 3.2 Historical Seismicity 3-1 3.2.1 Significant Earthquakes 3-1 3.2.2 Summary 3-3 3.3 Earthquake Sources 3-3 3=4 Fault Descriptions 3-4 I 3.4.1 Helvetia Fault Zone 3-5 3.4.2 Newberg Fault 3-5 3.4.3 Portland Hills Fault 3-5 I 3.4.4 - Bolton Fault 3-6 3.4.5 Mt. Angel Fault 3-6 3.4.6 East Bank Fault 3-7 I 3.4.7 Oatfield•Fault 3-7 3.4.8 Clackamas River Fault Zone 3-7 3.4.9 Grant Butte,Damascus,Tickle Creek Fault Zone 3-8 1 3.4.10 Other Fault Zones 3-8 3.4.10.1 Sherwood Fault 3-8 3.4.10.2 Dairy Creek Fault 3-8 I 3.4.10.3 Beaverton Fault 3-9 3.4.11 Cascadia Subduction Zone 3-9 3.4.11.1 Megathrust 3-9 Section 4 Design Ground Motion 4-1 g I 4.1 Ground Motion Analyses 4-1 4.1.1 Geomatrix 1995 Probabilistic Study 4-1 4.1.2 URS 2001 Probabilistic Study 4-1 4.1.3 URS/DOGAMI 2000 Portland Metropolitan Study 4-1 4.1.4 1998 OSSC Zonation 4-1 I 4.1.5 Results Comparison 4-2 4.2 Recommended Design Ground Motions 4-2 I \worsprojects\zss95391 TrSD Alberta RiderVTTSD__sersmc_hazara.doc\31-JUL-03 i TABLE OF CONTENTS Section 5 Seismic Hazard Evaluation 5-1 5.1 Anticipated Foundation Design 5-1 5.2 Seismic Hazards 5-1 5.2.1 Liquefaction Hazard 5-1 5.2.2 Tsunami/Seiche Hazard • 5-1 5.2.3 Seismic Slope Stability Hazard 5-1 5.2.4 Surface Rupture Hazard 5-2 5.2.5 Ground Shaking Amplification Hazard 5-2 Section 6 Closure 6-1 Section 7 References 7-1 List of Tables Table 1 Comparison of Peak Ground Accelerations 4-2 List of Figures Figure 1 Vicinity Map Figure 2 Site Map Figure 3 Tectonic Structures f the Tualatin Basin I I URS I I I I I I I \\Poi zxo ectss2569S391 TrSD Alberta RidenrrSD_seismic_hazprd.doo131-JUL-03 II I SECTIONONE Introduction 1.1 GENERAL This report presents the results of our seismic site hazard investigation for the proposed Alberta Rider Elementary School in Tigard, Oregon. This work was completed in accordance with our proposal to Tigard-Tualatin School District 23J dated May 16, 2003. The project site is located approximately as shown on the Vicinity Map, Figure 1. The project involves the construction of a new elementary school with a footprint of approximately 40,000 square feet, as well as an entrance drive, parking lots and play fields. The Site Map presented on Figure 2 shows a preliminary plan layout of the site. The proposed school is considered to be a "special occupancy structure" under Oregon Revised Statutes (ORS) 455.447. As such, a seismic site hazard investigation is required per Oregon Structural Specialty Code (OSSC) Section 1804.1. This report is prepared in accordance with OSSC Section 1804.3.2. The purpose of this report was to evaluate the surface and subsurface conditions at the site and to evaluate the potential seismic hazards of the proposed school. This report is a companion to the geotechnical report entitled"Foundation Investigation, Alberta Rider Elementary School,Tigard-Tualatin School District, Tigard, Oregon." This report was submitted to the Tigard-Tualatin School District in July 2003. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK • The scope of this investigation included completion of the following: 1. Description of the site geologic setting including regional geology, site topography, subsurface stratigraphy and groundwater. 2. Description of the seismic setting including the regional tectonic framework, historical seismicity, and potential earthquake sources. 3. Probabalistic and deterministic analyses to assess design earthquake ground motions. 4. Evaluation of seismic hazards including landslides, liquefaction, regional subsidence/collapse, fault surface rupture, and tsunami/seiche inundation. 5. Preparation of five copies of this report describing the results of this investigation. I • URS I aPor61projects125695391 TTSD Alberta RideATTSD_seisrric_hazard.doc131-JUL-03 1-1 I SECTIONTWO Geologic Setting 1 2.1 SITE DESCRIPTION • The site is located near the crest of Bull Mountain as shown on the Vicinity Map, Figure 1. The Itopography across most of the site is relatively gentle, with elevations ranging from a high of approximately 574 feet above Mean Sea Level (MSL) along the northwestern boundary to the ' site to 515 feet above MSL in the far southeast corner of the site. The maximum slopes present Ionsite approach 25% at the northwest edge of the site. Elsewhere, maximum slopes are approximately 15%, located in the northwest and southeast portions of the site I 2.2 REGIONAL GEOLOGIC STRUCTURE I The site is located in the northern Willamette Valley physiographic province, an elongate, roughly north-south trending alluvial valley that lies between the Coastal Range and Cascade Mountains to the west and east, respectively. Marine sedimentary rocks and basalt are found I below the alluvial sediments (Orr, et. al., 1992). The Northern Willamette Valley has undergone substantial structural deformation since the Eocene, resulting in the Portland fold belt as defined by Unruh et al. (1994). The tectonic underpinnings of the Portland Fold Belt are not well I understood and complicated by the fact that this area lies in a transition zone between the rotating forearc block and the continental interior(Wells et al, 1998). Specifically, the project site is located in the Tualatin Basin, a northwest trending synclinal Isubbasin to the Willamette Valley basin (Unruh et al., 1994). The Tualatin Basin is fault bound by structurally controlled, northwest-trending highlands, specifically along its northeastern I margin by the Portland Hills and on the southwestern edge by the Chehalem Mountians (Madin, 1990). The two highlands are parallel to mapped regional faults including the East Bank fault, the Portland Hills fault, the Oatfield fault, the Mollala-Canby fault, the Gales Creek fault, the I Newberg fault, and the Mt. Angel fault. Internal structure to the basin includes the faulting that has resulted in the formation of the Bull Mountain and Cooper Mountain anticlines. The site is located immediately south of the anticline 111 axis as mapped by Madin. I . 2.3 SITE GEOLOGY Subsurface investigation of the site was performed in June 2003. The investigation was comprised of 15 test pits and 3 soil/rock core borings. The locations of these explorations is Ishown in Figure 2. The site is underlain by approximately 5 to 9 feet of medium stiff brown clay. This clay is I weathered late Quaternary windblown silt. Underlying the weathered silts is 2 to 6 feet of stiff reddish brown lean clay. This clay is basalt bedrock residuum that grades to extremely to highly weathered basalt at depths ranging from 8 to 16 feet below ground surface. The basalt bedrock is • . I Miocene-aged Columbia River Basalts. The highly.weathered basalt is very weak (indicating it can be pealed with a pocketknife) and highly fractured. The degree of weathering gradually decreases with depth. The rock grades to moderately weathered, moderately strong (requiring a Ihammer blow to break a sample)basalt at depths between 21 and 26 feet bgs. URSAPor6lprojaas\25695391 TESD Albeit RideATTSD_seismic_hazard.doc131-N1-03 2-1 l 1 SECT10NTWO Geologic Setting Il 2.4 SITE HYDROGEOLOGY Groundwater was not encountered during the subsurface investigation. URS conducted a review I of water well logs publicly available from the Oregon Water Resources Department. Static groundwater levels reported on well logs are in excess of 150 feet bgs in the vicinity of the site. Perched groundwater may be present within the fine-grained soils during the winter months. However, discharge from these perched systems is anticipated to be minimal. I I I I I I I 1 I I I I 1 I JSWorftroiects\256953911TSD Nberta wder%T SD_ c_ha d.dO 31 $JL-03 2-2 I I SECTIONTHREE Seismic Conditions 3.1 EARTHQUAKE EFFECTS - GENERAL Several factors control the level and character of earthquake ground shaking at a site. Generally, these factors are: (1) rupture dimensions, geometry, and orientation of the causative fault; (2) distance from the causative fault; (3) magnitude of the earthquake; (4) the rate of attenuation of the seismic waves along the propagation path from the source to site; and (5) site factors including the effects of near-surface geology particularly from soils and unconsolidated sediments. Other factors, which vary in their significance depending on specific conditions, include slip distribution along the fault, rupture process, footwall/hanging-wall effects, and the effects of crustal structures such as basins. 3.2 HISTORICAL SEISMICITY Historically, the Portland region has been characterized by a moderate level of seismicity with the largest earthquakes not exceeding magnitude (M) 6 (Bott and Wong, 1993). A historical earthquake catalog of all known events in northwestern Oregon and southwestern Washington for the period 1841 to 2000 was compiled. Earthquake data were acquired from: a catalog compiled by Woodward-Clyde Consultants (t.JRS) for DOE Hanford;Ludwin (1991); University of Washington; National Earthquake Information Center; Stover, Reagor and Algermissen; the Decade of North American Geology; and the Council of the National Seismic System earthquake catalog. This catalog contains over 18,000 events, a large percentage of which are associated with the St. Helens seismic zone. Only 5 earthquakes are M 6.0 or larger and these all occurred at distances greater than 80 km from the proposed school site. Approximately 38 earthquakes in the Mcatalog have magnitudes between M 5.0 to 5.9, the largest of which is the 1993 moment magnitude (Mw) 5.6 Scotts Mills earthquake. In characterizing earthquake occurrence, historical earthquakes can generally be divided into pre- instrumental and instrumental periods. Prior to adequate seismographic coverage,the detection of earthquakes was generally based on direct observation and felt reports. Thus results are strongly dependent on population density and distribution. This part of the Pacific Northwest is typical of much of the western United States, and was sparsely populated in the 1800's. Therefore the detection of pre-instrumental earthquakes shows varying degrees of completeness. The pre- instrumental historical record is estimated to be complete for earthquakes of Richter local magnitude (ML)5 and larger since about 1850 for the Portland region. Seismograph stations were established in 1906 in Seattle and 1944 in Corvallis, but adequate seismographic coverage of small events (M < 3.0) did not begin in northwest Oregon until about 1980 when the University of Washington expanded its regional network. The historical record is complete for ML 2.5 and greater only since 1980 (Bott and Wong, 1993). 3.2.1 Significant Earthquakes Significant earthquakes and earthquakes greater than M 6.0 in the region are discussed below. Earthquakes are described with the modified Mercalli intensity (MMI) that rates intensity from I (lowest—generally not felt)to XII(highest—total damage) (Kramer, 1996). • • RSawo s\xssss39i rrso Alberta Riaenrrso sesnio_haza, .do 1.JtL.O3 34 1 SECTIONTHREE Seismic Conditions 1872 North Cascades Earthquake On 15 December 1872, a large earthquake occurred in the wilderness of central Washington with an approximate ML 7.4 (Malone and Bor, 1979). The exact source of the earthquake is unknown. The event generated an approximate intensity of MM IV-V in the region of the proposed school (Woodward-Clyde Consultants, 1992). 1873 Crescent City Earthquake , On 23 November 1973 an earthquake of estimated Mw 7.3 (Bakun, 2000) occurred near the Oregon-California border east-southeast of Brookings, though there are large uncertainties as to its exact location.This earthquake may be a rare example of an intraslab event in western Oregon (Ludwin et al, 1991; Wong, 1997). The event had a maximum intensity of MM VIII, and an intensity of MM DI-IV in the region of the proposed school (Toppozada et al., 1981). 1877 Portland Earthquake I The earliest known historical earthquake in the Portland region occurred on 12 October 1877. Two events were actually reported on this day, one which probably occurred near Cascades, Washington and had a maximum intensity of MM III. The other event occurred near Portland and had a maximum intensity of MM VII.The larger of the two events, it has an estimated magnitude of ML 51/4 (Bott and Wong, 1993). At the Alberta Rider Elementary site, the intensity was I estimated to be MM IV (Bott and Wong, 1993). 1939 Southern Puget Sound Earthquake On 13 November 1939, an earthquake of surface wave magnitude (Ms) 53/4 occurred in southern Puget Sound. It hada maximum intensity of MM VII and an intensity of MM 1V in the region of the school site(Stover and Coffman, 1993). 111 1949 Puget Lowland Earthquake 1 On 13 April 1949, the largest historic event in the Puget Sound region occurred northeast of Olympia, Washington, with a body wave magnitude (mb) of 7.1. The event occurred at a depth of 54 km within the Juan de Fuca plate. Eight people were killed, many injured and property damage was sustained at a loss of$25 million. The intensity in the region of the school site was MM VI-VII(Thorsen, 1986). 1 1962 Portland Earthquake On 6 November 1962, an earthquake occurred 15 km northeast of downtown Portland with a magnitude of ML 5.2 to 5.5, a depth of 16 km, and a maximum intensity of MM VII. This earthquake was felt throughout northwest Oregon and southwest Washington. The intensity in the region of the school was MM V-VI (Wong and Bott, 1995). This is the second largest earthquake known to have originated in the Portland region (Bott and Wong, 1993). VIM Mena Rid. So s h .docA3,.xu-«3 3-2 I I SECTIONTHREE Seismic Conditions 1965 Puget Lowland Earthquake On 29 April 1965, the second largest known event to date in the southern Puget Sound occurred north of Tacoma with a mb 6.5. The event, an intraslab earthquake, occurred at a focal depth of 60 km and was widely felt. Six people were killed and damage reached an estimated $12.5 million. The earthquake had a maximum intensity of MM VIII and a probable intensity of MM V in the vicinity of the proposed school (Thorsen, 1986). 1981 Elk Lake Earthquake On 14 February 1981,the largest known earthquake associated with the St. Helens seismic zone occurred with a mb 5.1. The aftershock zone delineates a fault zone 5 to 12 km in depth. The maximum intensity of MM VI was reported for the epicentral region and an intensity of MM V • for the school vicinity(Bott and Wong, 1993). 1993 Scoffs Mills Earthquake On 25 March 1993, an earthquake occurred near Scotts Mills in western Oregon with a magnitude of MW 5.6, a depth of 16 km, maximum intensity of MM VII, and an intensity MM V- VII in the school vicinity. It caused over $28 million in property damage. This earthquake is thought to have occurred on the Mount Angel fault. Through 1994, over 300 aftershocks had been recorded (Thomas et al., 1996). 2001 Nisqually Earthquake On 28 February 2001 at 18:54 GMT, an earthquake occurred approximately 17 km northeast of Olympia, Washington. The earthquake had a magnitude of MW, 6.8 at a depth of 52.4 km. Damage from the earthquake was widely reported throughout the Seattle and Olympia areas. The earthquake had a maximum intensity of MM III-IV in the vicinity of the new school (University of Washington). 3.2.2 Summary The strongest ground shaking that the area of the proposed school has historically experienced appears to be MM VI-VII in the 1949 earthquake and MM V-VII in the 1993 Scotts Mills event. A MM VII intensity is roughly equivalent to a peak horizontal acceleration of 0.18 to 0.34g (Wald et al., 1999). 3.3 EARTHQUAKE SOURCES The Pacific Northwest has four types of seismic sources due to the presence of the Cascadia subduction zone. These sources include (1) the subduction zone megathrust, which represents the boundary (interface) between the downgoing Juan de Fuca plate and the overriding North American plate; (2) faults located within the Juan de Fuca plate (referred to as the intraplate or intraslab region); (3) crustal faults principally in the North American plate; and (4) volcanic sources beneath the Cascade Range (Wong and Silva, 1998). RS1 rrso Alberta RidenTTSO_seisrrie_hazard.doc131.JUL-O3 3-3 SECTIONTHREE Seismic Conditions In the past two decades, significant geologic, seismologic, and geophysical studies have been undertaken to investigate seismic sources in the Pacific Northwest. Such studies, particularly 1 along the coast of the Pacific Northwest, have been the key to our understanding of the earthquake processes within the Cascadia subduction zone. Few paleoseismic studies to investigate crustal faults, however, have been performed west of the Cascades because of dense vegetation, relatively rapid erosion rates, and past glaciation, which makes it difficult to find evidence of young faulting (e.g., Pezzopane, 1993). Alternative approaches such as subsurface imaging are now being carried out in the Portland area (e.g., Blakely et al., 1995) and the Puget Sound region (e.g., Johnson et al., 1999). In the following section, we identify and characterize the seismic sources that are significant to seismic hazards near the school. As specified in OSSC 1804.2.1.1, the probable source faults must all be individually examined for contribution to site hazards. For this analysis, the earthquakes need to be defined for each seismic source considered in the seismic hazard I assessments by their the Maximum Credible Earthquake (MCE). The MCE is commonly defined as "the largest earthquake that is capable of being produced from a source, structure, or region, under the currently known tectonic framework. It is a rational and believable event that can be supported by all known geologic and seismologic data. An MCE is determined by judgment considering the geologic evidence of past movement and the recorded seismic history of the area."We adopt this definition in these assessments. 3.4 FAULT DESCRIPTIONS Because of their proximity, crustal faults are possibly the most significant seismic sources to inland sites. Studies by Pezzopane (1993) and Geomatrix Consultants (1995) show that at least 70 crustal faults that may have earthquake potential exist in Oregon. Many of these faults were unknown or not recognized as being seismogenic a decade ago. Although the largest known crustal earthquake in western Oregon is only about Mw 6 (Wong and Bott, 1995),potential exists111 for events of Mw 61/2 or greater along several lzed and thelts including the Gales Creek-Mt. ngel fd ault zone lls and the recently discovered East Bank faults in Portland (Wong et al., 1999). As discussed earlier, the Mt. Angel fault is the possible source of the 1993 Scotts Mills Mw 5.6 earthquake. Several crustal faults occur in the vicinity of the proposed school site that are either active or potentiallyactive. There has not been a historic surface rupture earthquake on any fault within northwest Oregon and, to date, paleoseismic investigations of the regional faults has been limited. However,historical seismicity in the region appears,in a few cases,to be associated with mapped faults. In addition, some regional seismotectonic studies have been conducted that provide preliminary data regarding the potential activity of these faults. The major fault features that have an effect on seismic hazards within the Tualatin basin as identified in the Unruh et al (1994) report are the Portland Hills Fault tte FaZonult, (which the Bolton includes Fault. East Bank and Oatfield Faults), the Newberg Fault, the Gr These features are shown on Figure 3. Several fault features that should be considered in a seismic hazard assessment, but are not labeled on the Unruh et al (1994) map include the Clackamas River Fault Zorie and the Helvetia Fault. URSVoreprojectd25695391 TTSD Marta Rider1TiSD__seisrric_hwrd.doc131-JUL-03 34 I . SECTIONTHREE Seismic Conditions Seismic source characterization is concerned with three fundamental elements: (1) the identification of significant sources of earthquakes; (2) the maximum size of these earthquakes; and (3) the rate at which they occur. The faults described below all could potentially effect the new school site. All faults are dominantly lateral-slip faults and are assumed to extend to the full extent of the seismogenic crust (approximately 15 to 25 km; Wong, 1997). Maximum earthquake magnitudes were estimated based on the empirical relationship of Wells and Coppersmith (1994) between moment magnitude (MW) and surface rupture lengths for all types of faults. Length estimates were taken from mapped fault lengths. 3.4.1 Helvetia Fault Zone The north-northwest-striking Helvetia fault is located about 21.6 km from the proposed school. The fault is about 10 km as measured in the subsurface, and is identified from seismic reflection images and water well logs. The fault possibly displaces overlying Miocene-Pliocene to Pleistocene sediments down-to-the-west by as much as 20 m (Yeats et al., 1991). The Helvetia fault is not exposed at the surface, however, based on a lack of evidence disputing the activity of the fault. Geomatrix Consultants (1995)considered the fault to be potentially active. 3.4.2 Newberg Fault The Newberg fault trends northwest and has a subsurface length of about 8 km. The fault is located approximately 17 km to the southwest of the proposed school. The fault displaces the top of Columbia River Basalt by about 250 meters down-to-the-southwest. Anomalous aeromagnetic and gravity gradients also indicate the presence of the fault (Geomatrix Consultants, 1995; Yeats et al., 1991). Silvio Pezzopane (U.S. Geological Survey) documented lineaments in fluvial terraces and bedrock notches along the projection of the Newberg fault (Geomatrix Consultants, 1995). No seismicity is recorded along the trend of the Newberg fault, and although there is no direct evidence for activity of the Newberg fault, the along-strike proximity of the fault to the seismically-active Mt. Angel fault suggests that it may be potentially active. Although the maximum measured subsurface length of the fault is 8 km, we consider the fault to have a longer potential surface rupture of 17 km. This length is based on a minimum magnitude of Mw 6.5 that appears to be necessary to produce surface rupture in western Oregon. 3.4.3 Portland Hills Fault The Portland Hills fault zone includes a series of northwest-trending subsurface faults that extend for a distance of about 40 km along the eastern margin of the Portland Hills (Geomatrix Consultants, 1995; Madin, 1990). Extension of the fault toward the southeast, beyond the Portland Hills, based on aeromagnetic gravity (Blakely et al., 1995) and high-resolution seismic s reflection imaging (Pratt et al., 2001), provides a total estimated fault length of about 62 km. The closest approach of the Portland Hills fault to the proposed school site is approximately 13.2 km. Several interpretations have been proposed to describe the style of faulting and the kinematic setting of the Portland Hills fault. Based on the interpretation of surface geology, geomorphology, gravity data, and seismicity, Beeson et al. (1985; 1989) have described the Portland Hills fault as a structurally complex dextral strike slip zone with minor normal faulting. URS \\Por6\projacb125895391 TTSD Alberta RideATTSD_selsnic_hazard.doc 31-JUL-03 3-5 SECTIONTHREE Seismic Conditions Yelin and Patton (1991) consider the Portland Hills fault to be an active right-lateral strike-slip fault within an en echelon, releasing step of a large dextral slip zone. In contrast, the Portland I Hills are thought by some researchers (Beeson et al., 1989; Unruh et al., 1994) to be the surface expression of an anticline associated with the hanging wall of a southwest-dipping thrust fault. The age of the most recent event along the Portland Hills fault is not clearly understood. Recent investigation of the southern Portland Hills fault using high-resolution seismic reflection methods, provides evidence for faulting of Missoula flood deposits. The flood sediments are I faulted at least several meters down-to-the-east along the fault. Although no direct estimates for the age of the sediments are available, the most recent catastrophic floods in the area occurred about 15.5 to 13 ka (Madin, 1990). This suggests that the Portland Hills fault has been active in about the past 13 ka. A swarm of M <_ 3.5 earthquakes occurred at the northern end of the Portland Hills fault in 1991 (Blakely et al., 1995). Focal mechanisms from the largest event suggest a mixed right-lateral and reverse mechanism for the fault (Blakely et al., 1995). Based 1 on a maximum estimated length of 62 km (Wong et al., 2000), which includes projection of the fault to the south of the Portland Hills, an estimated MCE of Mw 7.2 is calculated for the Portland Hills fault. 3.4.4 Bolton Fault The Bolton fault appears at the surface as a 9-km-long northwest-striking structure located between the northern Willamette Valley and the Portland Basin. At its closest approach the fault is about 9.6 km from the proposed school site. Beeson et al. (1989) map the fault as a high- angle, down-to-the-northeast structure that displaces late Pleistocene (11 to 14 ka)flood deposits. Unruh et al. (1994) were unable to confirm displacement in stream exposures of Miocene Columbia River Basalts or Plio-Pleistocene conglomerates. Instead, they suggest that scarps along the fault may be the result of erosion. Unruh et al. (1994) and Geomatrix Consultants (1995)both considered the Bolton fault to be potentially active. Although the maximum mapped surface length of the Bolton fault is 9 km, the estimated minimum magnitude earthquake that we consider sufficiently large to produce surface rupture is Mw 6.5. This MCE corresponds with an associated surface rupture length of 17 km. I 3.4.5 Mt. Angel Fault The Mount Angel fault is a 24- to 32-km-long northwest-trending fault located approximately 25.3 km to the southwest of the proposed school site. The fault strikes northwest and dips steeply to the northeast. The fault is mapped at the subsurface based on seismic reflection lines, water well logs, and seismicity(Geomatrix Consultants, 1995; Yeats et al., 1991). The top of the Columbia River Basalt group and Mio-Pliocene fluvio-lacustrine deposits are displaced by the fault. In 1993, the Mw 5.6 Scotts Mills earthquake occurred about 8 km south of the mapped extent of the Mt. Angel fault(Geomatrix Consultants, 1995). It is still unclear whether the earthquake occurred along the Mt. Angel fault. The focal mechanism for the earthquake suggests that the earthquake involved a northwest-striking fault and suggests subequal right- and reverse slip (Geomatrix Consultants, 1995). Recent investigations along the Mt. Angel fault suggest that faulting has occurred in Missoula flood deposits (Liberty et al., 1996). Recent high-resolution seismic reflection and refraction imaging URSw.......569539l TTSD awns NcleAT r +c. •ra.ao631-,wL-0s 3-6 I SECTIONTHREE Seismic Conditions I suggests that possible Holocene deposits may also be displaced (Ian Madin, DOGAMI, personal communication, 2000). Based on potential historic seismicity, displaced Missoula flood deposits, and a surface scarp in Holocene deposits, we consider the Mt. Angel fault to be active. I The maximum surface rupture length ascribed to the fault is 32 km (Wong et al., 2000) which corresponds with a MCE of Mw 6.8. I 3.4.6 East Bank Fault The East Bank fault has been defined based on the presence of an aeromagnetic signature I (Blakely et al., 1995) and based on high-resolution seismic imaging (Pratt et al., in press). The fault is shown as a magnetic lineament to the northeast and parallel to the Portland Hills fault (Blakely et al., 1995). The fault is believed to be a major structural feature because the Ipronounced aeromagnetic anomaly is consistent with vertical displacements of at least 1 km of the basement volcanic rocks (Blakely et al., 1995). The East Bank fault is entirely concealed I beneath Quaternary deposits (Madin, 1990). The fault was previously mapped based on an apparent < 200 m vertical offset of the volcanic basement (Blakely et al., 1995). The East Bank fault may serve as a significant component of the eastern margin of the Portland Basin. Pratt et I al. (2001)reports that high-resolution seismic imaging indicates that the East Bank fault has had late Pleistocene and possibly Holocene activity. The data suggest that paleochannels of the Willamette River have been faulted, and that the river channel might be fault controlled. 1 Because of the geophysical evidence available for the East Bank fault,we consider the fault to be active. At its closest projection,the East Bank fault is located about 17.3 km from the school site. The mapped trace of the fault is not well-constrained, however, estimates for the fault length Irange from 40 to 55 km (Wong et al., 2000), which corresponds with an MCE of Mw 7.1. 3.4.7 Oatfield Fault The Oatfield fault is recognized on the basis of aeromagnetic anomalies and possible association with historic seismicity (Blakely et al., 1995). The fault is located along the western flank of the I Portland Hills and may be structurally associated with the Portland Basin. The school is located 12.4 km west of the Oatfield fault (Figure 5.9). The fault is mapped by Madin (1990) based on water well data. No definitive surface trace of the fault has been mapped. Blakely et al. (1995) I suggest that the northern projection of the Oatfield fault may intersect the 1991 swarm of M_<3.5 earthquakes that were also considered to be associated with the Portland Hills fault. As with the Portland Hills fault, the style of deformation of the Oatfield fault is not understood. The I associated historical seismicity indicates oblique faulting dominated by right-lateral slip with lesser reverse motion (Blakely et al., 1995). Because of its potential structural and kinematic association with the Portland Hills fault and Portland Basin, and the nearby presence of historical Iseismicity, we consider the Oatfield fault to be potentially active. The length of the Oatfield fault is not well-known,but best estimates suggest that it may be up to 40 km long (Wong et al., 2000) Iwhich corresponds to an MCE of Mw 6.9. 3.4.8 Clackamas River FaultZone IThe Clackamas River fault zone includes a series of northwest-trending oblique-slip faults mapped south of Estacada, Oregon along the Clackamas River (Geomatrix Consultants, 1995). IURS \1Pw81projects\25695391 TTSD Alberta Hider\TTSO_seiarric_hazartl.doe\31-JUL-03 3-7 1 SECT1ONTHREE Seismic Conditions111 The maximum length of faults in the zone is 22 km. Faults within the zone have documented right-lateral and normal displacement (Hammond et al., 1980). The faults displace middle I Miocene (ca. 15 Ma) Grande Rhonde and Wanapum Basalts. Late Pliocene to early Pleistocene lavas do not appear to be deformed (Priest crosses the fault and does not appear 90 be displaced 88). A gravel terrace estimated to be approximately (Geomatrix Consultants, 1995). Also, no evidence for Quaternary activity was documented during photogeologic analyses for the U.S. Bureau of Reclamation (Geomatrix Consultants, 1995). However, the Clackamas River fault has a similar orientation to the Oak Grove - Lake Harriet fault zone to the south and Geomatrix Consultants suggest that there may be a structural association between the two fault zones. Geomatrix Consultants report that some faults within the Oak Grove - Lake Harriet fault zone may have had Quaternary activity. Because of this possible association between the two fault zones, we consider the Clackamas River fault zone to be potentially active. Geomatrix Consultants estimate a maximum surface rupture length of 22 km for the fault zone which corresponds with an MCE of Mw 6.6. 3.4.9 Grant Butte, Damascus, Tickle Creek Fault Zone I Madin (1990) mapped an east-northeast-trending fault within the Portland Basin. A series of randomly oriented faults were mapped in an excavation within Troutdale Formation Consultants, n I Grant Butte and comprise the informally-named Grant Butte fault (Geomatrix 1995). The Damascus-Tickle Creek fault zone displaces Pliocene and possible Pleistocene sediments near Boring, Oregon (Madin, 1990). The northwest-striking fault zone is defined by II relatively short (less than 7 km) faults that comprise a zone approximately 17 km long. The combined fault zone is located approximatelyof 17 km ret.4 orted by Madin (1990)from the canlbeline used�o calculaterridor. e maximum estimated rupture length P an MCE of Mw 6.5. 3.4.10 Other Fault Zones I Several faults that are near the school site are discussed below. Based on either a lack of data indicating that these faults are active, or a preponderance of information suggesting that they are not active,we do not include them in the hazard analysis. 3.4.10.1 Sherwood Fault I The proposed site lies approximately 3.8 km south of the school site. Geomatrix Consultants (1995) assessed the Sherwood fault for its seismogenic potential and concluded that there was no evidence for Quaternary activity. URS (2001) also performed a photogeologic study in this area, finding no evidence for recent movement. Based on the conclusions of Geomatrix Consultants (1995) and our photogeologic analysis, we do not consider the Sherwood fault to be potentially active. 3.4.10.2 Dairy Creek Fault 1 The Dairy Creek fault is a relatively short structure that has been mapped on the basis of subsurface geophysical anomalies (Ian Madin,DOGAMI,personal communication, 2000). There I RSaPorNtrolects‘25695391 TTSD Alberta F d.,TTSD_ +e hazard.aoc31-JUL-a+ 3-8 SECTIONTHREE Seismic Conditions is no evidence for surface expression of the fault, and it does not appear to be structurally or kinematically associated with any nearby faults, and it has not been associated with historic seismicity. Based on a lack of information suggesting that the fault is potentially active, we do not consider it in the hazard analysis. 3.4.10.3 Beaverton Fault The west-southwest-striking Beaverton fault is located to the north of the proposed school. The fault has been located on the basis of geophysical anomalies. No additional information regarding the activity or seismic potential of the fault is currently available, thus we did not consider it in the hazard analysis. 3.4.11 Cascadia Subduction Zone The megathrust and intraslab region in the subducting Juan de Fuca plate represent two very different seismic sources within the Cascadia subduction zone. Due to the duration and distance effects on ground motion, the megathrust rupture will be considered in this hazard analysis. ' 3.4.11.1 Megathrust Paleoseismic evidence (e.g., Atwater et al., 1995) and historic tsunami studies (Satake et al., 1996) indicate that the most recent megathrust earthquake in 1700 probably ruptured the full length of the Cascadia subduction zone and was about M 9 in size. Thus, seismic hazard evaluations need to consider future earthquakes of this magnitude, although data cannot preclude the possibility that smaller events have occurred in the past along the megathrust. A significant factor that will control the ground-shaking hazards posed by the Cascadia subduction zone revolves around the location of the megathrust zone. The eastern edge of the megathrust is allowed to vary from about 25 miles offshore to beneath the Coast Ranges with a preferred location beneath the coastline. This results in a source-to-site distance of approximately 120-km to the site. We adopt a range of maximum magnitudes from M 8 to 9 I with the latter given the highest weight. I I I TJR.5 \\Poreproj ects\25695391 TTSD Alberta RideATTSD_sasrric_hazard.doc\31-JUL-03 3-9 I SECTIONFOUR Design Ground Motion ' 4.1 GROUND MOTION ANALYSES Several factors control the level and character of earthquake ground shaking. These factors are in general: (1) rupture dimensions, geometry, and orientation of the causative fault; (2) distance from the causative fault; (3) magnitude of the earthquake; (4) the rate of attenuation of the seismic waves along the propagation path from the source to site; and (5) site factors including the effects of near-surface geology particularly from soils and unconsolidated sediments. Other factors, which vary in their significance depending on specific conditions, include slip distribution along the fault, rupture process, footwall/hanging-wall effects, and the effects of crustal structure such as basin effects. In this section, probabilistic analyses have been reviewed to evaluate the ground shaking hazard at the site. This data is being reviewed because insufficient knowledge exists regarding seismic sources in the site region to reliably estimate ground motions associated with the MCE using deterministic methods. 4.1.1 Geomatrix 1995 Probabilistic Study The probabilistic seismic hazard analysis conducted for the 1995 Geomatrix Report produced maps for given design return periods for the State of Oregon. The peak horizontal acceleration experienced at the site for a"500-year"return period on bedrock is 0.19 g. 4.1.2 URS 2001 Probabilistic Study The probabilistic seismic hazard analysis conducted by URS in the Tualatin Valley (URS, 2001) produced peak ground accelerations anticipated for given design return periods for the State of Oregon. The peak horizontal acceleration experienced at the new school site for a "500-year" return period was selected to be similar to peak ground acceleration value calculated for a site with similar subsurface conditions in the 2001 study. This peak ground acceleration is anticipated to be 0.22 g. 4.1.3 URS/DOGAMI 2000 Portland Metropolitan Study The probabilistic seismic hazard analysis conducted by URS for the Oregon Department of Geology and Mineral Industries produced maps for given design return periods for the Portland Metropolitan Area (Wong et al, 2000). The peak horizontal acceleration experienced at the site for a"500-year"return period for bedrock is modeled to be 0.20 to 0.25 g. 4.1.4 1998 OSSC Zonation The site lies within Seismic Zone 3 as defined by the 1998 version of the Oregon Structural • • Specialty Code (OSSC). Based on the soils encountered during the exploration program, OSSC Soil Type Sc (very dense soil and soft rock) represents the closest approximation to the site conditions and is recommended for use in design. The seismic response coefficients that URS \P«swrojects'256953911TSD Alberta waeATTSD.«anic_hazard.aoc 31-JUL-03 4-1 1 SECTIONFOUR Design Ground Motion Corresponds with Z=0.3 and Sc are Ca= 0.33 and C„= 0.45 and were obtained from tables 16-Q and 16-R of the UBC,respectively. 4.1.5 Results Comparison The probabilistic seismic hazard analyses reviewed above are compared in Table 1 below. TABLE 1: COMPARISON OF PEAK GROUND ACCELERATIONS ilfkk oOl• DD'« ��: 8Q1 � � -� °4 ossci99s s e 1995eomatcix �x � 'event dear event(C� " 500 Reference c� , ear ven dear even Wong et al, for Site S� Peak Ground Acceleration 0.19g 0.22g 0.20-0.25g 0.33g (gravity) 1 4.2 RECOMMENDED DESIGN GROUND MOTIONS As indicated above in Table 1,the OSSC 1998 peak ground acceleration and associated spectrum 1 generally encompass the spectral response of the school site for the"500-year" return period. It is URS opinion that application of the 1998 OSSC is conservative at this site, and would be appropriate. Should the project team express an interest in exploring the site-specific response spectrum for the site, URS should be contacted to conduct the analyses required to generate the spectrum in accordance with Section 1631.2.2 of the 1998 OSSC. Should this approach be taken, it may be possible to reduce the design base shear for structural members by up tor 20% in accordance with Section 1631.5.4 of the 1998 OSSC. • 1 I 1 I URS I , \25695391 rrso Alberta RiaanrrsD haze 1-1UL 03 4-2 1 SECTIONFIVE Closure 1 5.1 ANTICIPATED FOUNDATION DESIGN Based on the soil conditions present at the site, it is anticipated that conventional continuous or isolated shallow foundations will be used to support the proposed structure. Footings will likely be founded on shallow silts or on bedrock. Detailed discussion of foundation design, allowable bearing capacity, expected settlements, and construction considerations are included in the ' companion URS geotechnical report entitled "Foundation Investigation, Alberta Rider Elementary School,Tigard-Tualatin School District,Tigard, Oregon." This report was submitted to the Tigard-Tualatin School District in July 2003. 5.2 SEISMIC HAZARDS Seismic hazards for the purposes of this report include liquefaction, tsunami/seiche inundation, seismically-induced landslides, surface rupture and ground amplification. These are evaluated and discussed separately in the following sections. 5.2.1 Liquefaction Hazard Liquefaction is the drastic loss of soil strength that can accompany ground shaking during a moderate to strong seismic event. During ground shaking, cyclic earthquake loading on the soil increases pore water pressure to a point where the effective stress on the soil is zero or even negative, resulting in suspension of soil particles in the water. Loose, granular soils located below the water table are generally susceptible to liquefaction. It should be noted that soil liquefaction, in and of itself, does not pose a risk to buildings and infrastructure. It is the phenomena accompanying liquefaction that can severely damage structures situated in or on the soil. These phenomena include settlement, lateral spreading, flow failures, and bearing capacity failure, which are discussed in the following sections. Based on the clay soils and shallow bedrock present at the site, it is URS opinion that there is not a liquefaction hazard at this site. The site is not at risk for the liquefaction-related phenomena of seismically induced settlement, lateral spreading, or bearing capacity failure. 5.2.2 Tsunami/Seiche Hazard URS understands that this site is not located near any body of water that is susceptible to tsunami or seiche. Therefore,it is URS opinion that tsunami or seiche hazard at this site does not exist. 5.2.3 Seismic Slope Stability Hazard Because of the gentle slopes, the soil conditions and shallow rock found at the site, it is URS opinion that seismic slope instability is not a hazard at this site. •I URS ,W or6'iprojectS\25695391 TTSD Alberta Riaei TTSO_seiamic_hazard.doc131-JUL-03 5-1 i SECTIONFIVE Closure 5.2.4 Surface Rupture Hazard Review of available geologic mapping indicates that no known fault trace passes beneath the proposed facility. Therefore, it is URS opinion that hazards from ground rupture at this site does not exist. 5.2.5 Ground Shaking Amplification Hazard Because of the soil conditions and the shallow rock found at the site, it is URS opinion that there is low risk for ground shaking amplification at this site. 1 I I 1 I i 1 • I URS 1 1 I 1 Vor6projecu\25e9539l TTSD Alberta RidenTTSD_ _n. e.aoCl-JUL-O3 5-2 I . II SECTIONSIX Closure IIThe analyses, conclusions and recommendations presented in this report are based on site Iconditions as they existed at the time of our field exploration and the state of practice at the time of this report. This report was prepared for the exclusive use of the Tigard-Tualatin School IDistrict and its agents and consultants. I I 1 I I I I I I 1 I I IURS 1\Por6\projects\25695391 TTSD Alberta AideATTSD_seisrric_hazard.doc\31-JUL-03 6-1 I ' SECTIONS EVEN References Atwater, B.F., Nelson, A.R., Clague, J.J., Carver, G.A., Yamaguchi, D.K., Bobrowsky, P.T., Bourgeois, J., Darienzo, M.E., Grant, W.C., Hemphill-Haley, E., Kelsey, H.M. Jacoby, G.C., Nishenko, S.P., Palmer, S.P., Peterson, C.D., and Reinhart, M.A., 1995, Summary of coastal geologic evidence for past great earthquakes at the Cascadia subduction zone: Earthquake Spectra, v. 11, p. 1-18. ' Beeson, M.H., Fecht, K.R., Reidel, S.P., and Tolan, T.L. (1985). Regional Correlations Within the Frenchman Springs Member of the Columbia River Basalt Group: New Insights Into the Middle Miocene Tectonics of Northwestern Oregon: Oregon Geology, v. 47,p. 87-96. Beeson, M.H., Tolan, T.L., and Anderson, J.L., (1989) The Columbia River Basalt Group in Western Oregon; Geologic Structures and Other Factors that Controlled Flow Emplacement Patterns, Geological Society of America Special Paper 239, p. 223-246. Blakely, R.J., Wells., R.E., Yelin, T.S., Madin, I.P., and Beeson, M.H. (1995). "Tectonic setting of the Portland-Vancouver area, Oregon And Washington: Constraints From Low-altitude lAeromagnetic Data," Geological Society of America Bulletin v. 107, p. 1051.1062 Bott, J.D.J. and Wong, I.G. (1993). "Historical Earthquakes in and Around Portland, Oregon," Oregon Geology, v. 55,p. 116-122. Geomatrix Consultants, Inc., 1995, "Seismic Design Mapping State of Oregon: Final Report", prepared for the Oregon Department of Transportation,Contract 11688: iHammond, P.E., Anderson, J.L., and Manning, K.J. (1980). "Guide to the Geology of the Upper Clackamas and North Santiam Rivers Area, Northern Oregon Cascade Range," in Oles, K.F., Johnson, J.G., Niem, A.R., and Niem, W.A. (eds.), Geologic Field Trips in Western Oregon and Southwestern Washington: Oregon Department of Geology and Mineral Industries Bulletin 101,p. 133-167. ' Johnson, S. Y., Dadisman, S. V., Childs, J. R., and Stanley, W. D. (1999) "Active Tectonics of the Seattle Fault and Central Puget Sound, Washington—Implications for Earthquake Hazards," Geological Society of America Bulletin, v. 111, p. 1042-1053. Kramer, S.L. (1996). Geotechnical Earthquake Engineering. Prentice Hall, Upper Saddle River, New Jersey. Liberty, L.M., Trehu, A.M., Dougherty, M.D., and Blakely, R.J. (1996). "High-Resolution Seismic-Reflection Imaging of the Mt. Angel/Gales Creek Fault System Beneath the Willamette Valley: EOS, Transactions of the American Geophysical Union, v. 77, p. 655. Ludwin, R.S., Weaver, C.S., and Crosson, R.S., 1991, Seismicity of Washington and Oregon, in Neotectonics of North America, D.B. Slemmons, E.R. Engdahl, M.D. Zoback, and D.D. Blackwell (eds.): Geological Society of America Decade Map, v. 1,p. 77-98. Madin, I.P. (1990). Earthquake Hazard Geology Maps of the Portland Metropolitan Area, Oregon. Oregon Department of Geology and Mineral Industries (DOGAMI), Open-File Report 0-90-2. Malone, S.D. and Bor, S.S. (1979). "Attenuation Patterns in the Pacific Northwest Based on ' Intensity Data and the Location of the 1872 North Cascads Earthquake," Bulletin of the Seismological Society of America, v. 69,p. 531-546. URSWor0projeass25695391 TTSD aberta awenTTSD_seisnic_hszaw.do631-JUL-o3 7-1 SECTIONSEVEN • References Ordonez-Comparini, Gustavo A., 2000, SHAKE2000, A Computer Program for the 1-D Analysis of Geotechnical Earthquake Engineering Problems, Ameritech Engineering. On, E.L., On, W.N. and Baldwin, E.M., 1992, Geology of Oregon, Fourth Edition, Kendall/Hunt Publishing Company,Dubuque, Iowa. I Pezzopane, S.K., 1993,Active Faults and Earthquake Ground Motions in Oregon, Ph.D. Thesis, University of Oregon, 208 p. Pratt, T.L, Odum, J., Stephenson, W., Williams, R., Dadisman, S., Holmes, M., and Haug, B. (2001). High-resolution seismic images of the late Pleistocene unconformity, ancestral Columbia River and Holocene faulting beneath the Portland-Vancouver urban area, Oregon ' and Washington: Bulletin of the Seismological Society of America v. 91. Priest, G.R.,Woller, N.M.,Black, G.L., and Evans, S.H. (1983). Overview of the Geology of the Central Oregon Cascade Range, Chapter 2, in Priest, G.R., and Vogt, B.F. (eds.), Geology and Geothermal Resources of the Central Oregon Cascade Range: Oregon Department of Geology and Mineral Industries Special Paper 15,p. 3-28. 1 Satake, K., Shimazaki, K., Tsuji, Y., and Ueda, K., 1996, Time and size of a giant earthquake in Cascadia inferred from Japanese tsunami records of January 1700: Nature, v. 379, p. 246- 249. Sherrod, D.R. and Conrey, R.M. (1988). "Geologic Setting of the Breitenbush-Austin Hot Springs Area, Cascade Range, North-Central Oregon," in Sherrod, D.R. (ed.), Geology and Geothermal Resources of the Breitenbush-Austin Hot Springs Area, Clackamas and Marion Counties, Oregon: Oregon Department of Geology and Mineral Industries Open-File Report 0-88-5, p. 1-14. 1 Stover, C.W., and Coffman, J.L. (1993). Seismicity of the United States, 1568-1989 (Revised), U.S. Geological Survey Profressional Paper 1527,415 p. Thomas, G C., Crosson, R.S., Carver, D.L., and Yelin, T.S. (1996). "The 25 March 1993 Scotts Mills, Oregon Earthquake and Aftershock Sequence: Spatial Distribution, Focal Mechanisms, and the Mount Angel Fault," Bulletin of the Seismological Society of America, v. 86, p.925-935. • Thorsen, G.W. ed. (1986). The Puget Lowland Eqrthquakes of 1949 and 165, Washington Division of Geology and Earth Resources,Information Circular 81, 113p. Toppozada, T.R., Real, C.R., and Parke, D.L. (1981). Preparation of Isoseismal Maps and Summaries of Reported Effects for Ppre-1900 California Earthquakes, California Division of Mines and Geology Open File Report 81-11, 181 p. Unruh, J.R., Wong, I.G., Bott, J.D.J., Silva, W.J., and Lettis, W.R., 1994. Seismotectonic Evaluation: Scoggins Dam, Tualatin Project, Northwestern Oregon; William Lettis & Associates and Woodward-Clyde Federal Services, unpublished final report prepared for the U.S. Bureau of Reclamation,Denver,CO. I URS (2001). Geological and Seismic Hazard Evaluation South Mist Feeder Extension Project Phases IV and V,prepared for Northwest Natural. URS \\Por6\projseta\25695391 rrSD Alberta RideATTSD_aeiarric hazara.da631-Jul.-03 7-2 • SECTIONSEVEN References ' Wald, D.J., Quitoriano, V., Heaton, T.H., and Kanomori, H. (1999). "Relationships Between Peak Ground Acceleration, Peak Ground Velocity, and Modified Mercalli Intensity in California,"Earthquake Spectra, v. 15,p. 557-564. 111 Wells, D. and Coppersmith, K.J., 1994, New earthquake magnitude and fault rupture parameters, Correlations among earthquake magnitude,rupture length, and fault displacement: Bulletin of ' the Seismological Society of America, v. 84,p. 974-1002. Wells, R.E., Weaver, C.S., and Blakely, R.J., 1998, Forearc migration in Cascadia and its neotectonic significance: Geology, v. 26,p. 759-762. ' Wong, I.G., 1997,The historical earthquake record in the Pacific Northwest: Applications and implications to seismic hazard assessment, in Earthquakes--Converging at Cascadia, Symposium Proceedings, M. Wang and K. Neuendorf (eds.), Association of Engineering Geologists Special Publication 10 and Oregon Department of Geology and Mineral Industries Special Paper 28,p. 19-36. Wong, I.G. and Bott, J.D.J., 1995, A look back at Oregon's earthquake history, 1981-1994: Oregon Geology, v.57,p. 125-139. ' Wong, I.G. and Silva, W.J., 1998, Earthquake ground shaking hazards in the Portland and Seattle metropolitan areas, in Geotechnical Earthquake Engineering and Soil Dynamics III, P. Dakoulas, M. Yegian, and R.D. Holtz (eds.): American Society of Civil Engineers ' Geotechnical Special Publication No. 75, v. 1,p. 66-78. Wong, I.G.,Pezzopane, S.K., and Blakely,R. (1999). "A Characterization of Seismic Sources in Western Washington and Northwestern Oregon," (abs) Seismological Research Letters, v. 70,p. 221. Wong, I., Silva, W., Bott, J., Wright, D., Thomas, P., Gregor, N., Li, S., Mabey, M., Sojourner, A., and Wang, Y. (2000). Earthquake Scenario and Probabilistic Ground Shaking Maps for the Portland, Oregon, Metropolitan Area, Oregon Department of Geology and Mineral Industries Interpretative Map Series IMS-16, scale 1:62,500, 11 sheets with 16 p. text. Yeats, R.S., Graven, K., Werner, C., Goldfinger, C., and Popowsky, T. (1991). Tectonics of the Willamette Valley, Oregon; U.S. Geological Survey Open-File Report, 91-441-P,47 p. Yelin, T.S. and Patton, H.J., (1991). "Seismotectonics of the Portland, Oregon, Region," Bulletin of the Seismological Society of America, v. 81,p. 109-130. 1 1 URS ' \\PcrSprojecta125695391 TTSD Alberta Rides TS seisrrac haza,d.doe\31-JtL.0a 7-3 1 l w •I \'�."`�`��'it', j4▪ " f •i JP / I/J :�° of I1� �t_ 1▪ 50Nc -s/ .7�,//'' �Ovt �' �/RSO .�-1/:-----1\\11,�,��IIiJ.I� '�'�' {�--1 1�ir� �/�.`•� `�y...'. ...11':_x`.•`ia•'I• -'7! 'µ,'•/r—! '. it i'� ..,n li �.;.•`, \`: _ .I{, i .I .. iI _ i1 ,(Il1�—��� 4` r ./�\ jll fi JI „ • r /I • �? -11L ' .. ,,, ,/,:t:l •I . ,Ire ,: 9� : --� R...:,•:-.‘,.\.."; �%�. ''• it:.✓Fp \`�J,1,I.+.�,. {� .;rte-�� 4 ••�' Y ....,i..--.-•-....;:.:, � :....,,,../.:,:,,-/.•. V - i si ,, �— 0J Pr IIS, /St.l thilt .' ,• l ,/,'. _ ! I I'`+ � � ' -�-�. ,�"—\i Ir ' 4 11� (II !%,(1.:-,\1,,k-M. .!,-..,-..-..k•-•..., L -:4 :.1� b nl . tr�A ,I• /� ..} n ■ cr/ •In ." y .i• ,,,---.--",;.4:.' '-i 7 • Ilk �• , _ % ..,-,-,:iII+ •• • /:,1, '1 i i,l a • ; �/ r I , I' ' ���. ' 2 I A 101 _., � ':- ,. 17L ` • O / r \'' ill 1^�,..J//A I ; __ ,-;"-,,,i, /t ; _i% i 00�_. '' :". {� - .. �, 'Jr N D I + I -; ,i • 1;I o y.. I. N,_ . --. ' _- I .4 1' x'' .•t'; !// I IS''. I f _ 'Y• i��\ —I-, 2 / ) 1�).--;:--E-:?----'. :/ :r! I : 4' , '4 zDe ter-l' ;^' ?-.1 ., I t ll' ?• gg II.71 Iti • • LJ ../� r II tt , • I i •` 150 , �L� /�� : Ii 4 SOl1ReSM.DEC1 WEST.ORON USGS TOPOQRPFNC OlUDRNOLE I VICINITY MAP TTSD Alberta Rider Elementary School I July 2003 Seismic Site Hazard Investigation 25695391 Tigard,Oregon 1 UR/i FIGURE 1 111 1 \ ._3ENG :.1.,.a..,..r.:<a.-, :.7r:: - -... •. • e: _.,,. .._. - \\, 'c . • •Vancouver- FS,i1/mere 7C:_..Ma.cl: ._.._�..._.- • _ •. _ r. rcea:ec'ca:c]. _-rt•:h r_.w: .�. - ..a Ce _ ee:,e e; •-.,., _PO�R/T • •.. —: • - -aey^gwa. '. .BASIN - i ` _ • ' . _-rrre ratar•c oce^et to ShGwm:M•cense Ot ara r.. • . __ •� • . ]astai sue„cerce e,ers rOarer:arc Feierscr, \ v,9i.,'-.Atwater 1992! _ \ ��f - rravesz f•-- iT MATIN '--,-,•:.-.----,1,..---.. �-,,,,, y,h_. .,. _ • . . BA31 N' ?`°~,, �-- . ...:,-...if-f-�a•` �.:: • v----.g` ?� yr= w:y i :" ... .,.. ... -. 8 Jy rr • T 4 -y . :-.1...,..-7 ' -...;77 �a �; a'. r.,�: - �1----' -'= ��ti-;-..;:1:-.' 1,. �'f,;•.:.4"...•.-:'-, .�,/f I .^ r L▪ l/.,•� ./ .� 1 1 ▪ p. -x3^, c t t ,ei \\- . r ,r- a- ▪ !'.BL`._ v -' .� , '"":•• ✓,r ,ki ‹,,;...,/,.:4-:, • N.f-r .'/�. ,/,�Jl (•. r .. rC .+r► ,,,,,,,o,„,,,...,.:.„:, /F/7� y SITE �. ,„-i,..... .:........,_72,-.,,,,,./. - y ✓� t 3� •-�. ./ / .cam.. • :\ a -i:.,;-,-,x /jr- t. i `. i : ry er ,+_t i t y .711/1 �.I • ..'-vD4<7/��:'; .i 'r f'''....,-:•' ''a_7/ ! c j i d'• y' 1 .- 14; ;r _ tial r' - Yrt : '- y > . 0 _ : ;� \ f Y - REFERENCE UNRUH ET. AL, 1994 111 1 TECTONIC STRUCTURES OF THE TUALATIN BASIN 1 TTSD Alberta Rider Elementary School i July 2003 Seismic Site Hazard Investigation i URS 25695391 Tigard,Oregon IFIGURE 3